Sie sind auf Seite 1von 706

MDRS 155/...

-64/128 MLQAM E
SDH Long-Haul
Microwave Radio Systems
Operating Manual (OM)

AN00096474 (RF/160 OM)


Edition 01.2003

Marconi Communications GmbH


D-71520 Backnang
Telefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212
http://www.marconi.com
Copyright 2003 by Marconi Communications GmbH
(hierin bezeichnet als Marconi)
nderungen vorbehalten Gedruckt in Deutschland
Marconi, Marconi Communications, das Marconi Logo,
Skyband, MDRS, MDMS und ServiceOn Access sind
eingetragene Markenzeichen
von Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows ist ein eingetragenes Markenzeichen der
Microsoft Corporation, Redmond.
Marconi Communications GmbH
D-71520 Backnang
Telephone +49 (7191) 13-0 Telefax +49 (7191) 13-3212
http://www.marconi.com
Copyright 2003 by Marconi Communications GmbH
(herein referred to as Marconi)
Specifications subject to change Printed in Germany
Marconi, Marconi Communications, the Marconi logo,
Skyband, MDRS, MDMS and ServiceOn Access are
trademarks of
Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation,
Redmond.

Operating Manual

Register Contents

Contents

Register

Description 65.1220.000.02

Mounting Instructions RF/160 MI

Commissioning Instructions RF/160 CI

Operating Instructions RF/160 OI

RF/160 OM

Register Contents

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 OM

Operating Manual

MDRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E


SDH Long-Haul
Microwave Radio Systems

Description

(65.1220.000.02)
Edition 01.2003

Marconi Communications GmbH


D-71520 Backnang
Telefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212
http://www.marconi.com
Copyright 2003 by Marconi Communications GmbH
(hierin bezeichnet als Marconi)
nderungen vorbehalten Gedruckt in Deutschland
Marconi, Marconi Communications, das Marconi Logo,
Skyband, MDRS, MDMS und ServiceOn Access sind
eingetragene Markenzeichen
von Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows ist ein eingetragenes Markenzeichen der
Microsoft Corporation, Redmond.
Marconi Communications GmbH
D-71520 Backnang
Telephone +49 (7191) 13-0 Telefax +49 (7191) 13-3212
http://www.marconi.com
Copyright 2003 by Marconi Communications GmbH
(herein referred to as Marconi)
Specifications subject to change Printed in Germany
Marconi, Marconi Communications, the Marconi logo,
Skyband, MDRS, MDMS and ServiceOn Access are
trademarks of
Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation,
Redmond.

System Description

Contents

Contents
1

New Generation of Digital Microwave Radio Systems ................................. 1-1


1.1

SDH Digital Microwave Radio Systems from Marconi Communications GmbH ........... 1-1

1.2

MDRS 155/...64/128 MLQAM E Digital Microwave Radio System .................................... 1-2

1.3

Advantages of DRS 155/...64/128 MLQAM E ...................................................................... 1-3

1.4

Transmission capacity......................................................................................................... 1-4

1.5

Frequency bands.................................................................................................................. 1-4

1.6
Configurations ...................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.6.1
Utilization of the frequency pattern .................................................................................. 1-5
1.6.2
Terminal and regenerator station .................................................................................... 1-6
1.6.3
Space diversity ................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.6.4
Protection switching ........................................................................................................ 1-7
1.6.5
Automatic transmit power control (ATPC)..................................................................... 1-12

Functioning ...................................................................................................... 2-1


2.1

Transmitter............................................................................................................................ 2-2

2.2

Receiver................................................................................................................................. 2-4

2.3
Space diversity ..................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.3.1
IF combiner ..................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.4
Modem Unit ........................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.1
Modem Unit subrack ....................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.2
Synchronous Physical Interface STM-1 (SPI STM-1) ................................................... 2-11
2.4.3
Data Processing Unit and Radio Protection Switch (DPU/RPS STM-1) ....................... 2-12
2.4.4
Radio Protection Switching Interface (RPSI STM-1)..................................................... 2-14
2.4.5
Modulator (MD 155/140-64(128) MLQAM).................................................................... 2-14
2.4.6
Demodulator (DM 155/140-64(128) MLQAM)............................................................... 2-14
2.4.7
Modem Unit Power Supply (MUPS) .............................................................................. 2-15
2.4.8
Controller module .......................................................................................................... 2-15
2.5
Overhead Access Unit (OHA Unit) .................................................................................... 2-16
2.5.1
OHAU subrack .............................................................................................................. 2-16
2.5.2
RFCOH Access Module (RFCOH module) ................................................................... 2-20
2.5.3
EOW Module................................................................................................................. 2-20
2.5.4
SOH Access Module (SOHA Module)........................................................................... 2-21
2.5.5
SOH Extension Module ................................................................................................. 2-22
2.5.6
SISA-0N ........................................................................................................................ 2-22
2.5.7
QD2 Interface Module (QD2 IM) ................................................................................... 2-22
2.5.8
ECC Gateway Module ................................................................................................... 2-22
2.5.9
Overhead Access Unit Power Supply (OHAU PS)........................................................ 2-23
2.6

RPS-C .................................................................................................................................. 2-24

2.7

RPS-H .................................................................................................................................. 2-25

2.8

Channel Branching Network ............................................................................................. 2-26

65.1220.000.02

Contents

System Description

Monitoring and Configuration......................................................................... 3-1

Integration into a TMN ..................................................................................... 4-1


4.1

Introduction...........................................................................................................................4-1

4.2

Introduction to the SISA network........................................................................................4-1

4.3

Network element addressing...............................................................................................4-2

4.4

Basic information on protocols ..........................................................................................4-3

4.5
SISA protocols ......................................................................................................................4-4
4.5.1
User protocol (AWP01) ...................................................................................................4-4
4.5.2
Switching protocol (VMP01) ............................................................................................4-4
4.6

Connection of MDRS 155 E to the ServiceOn Access System ........................................4-6

4.7
Protocol stacks of interfaces ..............................................................................................4-6
4.7.1
QD2 interface ..................................................................................................................4-6
4.7.2
OSI protocol stack ...........................................................................................................4-7
4.7.3
TCP/IP protocol stack......................................................................................................4-8
4.7.4
Multi-protocol stack .........................................................................................................4-8
4.8
Connection using a SISA-DCN ............................................................................................4-9
4.8.1
QD2 Slave mode .............................................................................................................4-9
4.8.2
QD2-SISA-V mode ........................................................................................................4-10
4.8.3
QD2-via-SISA-V mode ..................................................................................................4-10
4.9

Connection set up using an OSI-DCN (Q3p-SISA-V).......................................................4-11

4.10 Connection set up using a IP-DCN ...................................................................................4-12


4.10.1 IP-SISA-V mode ............................................................................................................4-12
4.10.2 IP-via-SISA-V mode ......................................................................................................4-13
4.10.3 Q3I-SISA-V mode..........................................................................................................4-13

Operator Terminal PC (MSP)........................................................................... 5-1


5.1

Direct connection to the MSP interface..............................................................................5-1

5.2
LAN/WAN connection via TCP/IP ........................................................................................5-2
5.2.1
IP address information for MDRS 155 E .........................................................................5-3
5.2.2
IP address information for the Operator Terminal PC.....................................................5-3
5.2.3
Protocol stack of the TCP/IP connection.........................................................................5-3
5.3

Modem connection...............................................................................................................5-4

Addresses for Connection Setup to ServiceOn Access ............................... 6-1


6.1

Addresses for a direct QD2 connection .............................................................................6-1

6.2
Addresses for OSI transport................................................................................................6-1
6.2.1
TSAP addresses .............................................................................................................6-1
6.2.2
NSAP addresses .............................................................................................................6-1
6.2.3
SISA-V Gateway address................................................................................................6-4
6.2.4
Internet addresses...........................................................................................................6-4
6.3
II

Addresses for IP transport ..................................................................................................6-4


65.1220.000.02

System Description

Contents

6.4

Addresses for IP routing...................................................................................................... 6-5

6.5

Ethernet address .................................................................................................................. 6-5

6.6

Summary of address settings ............................................................................................. 6-6

Applications ..................................................................................................... 7-1


7.1
Connection of MDRS to ServiceOn Access via a SISA-DCN........................................... 7-1
7.1.1
Direct QD2 connection .................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2
Direct and indirect connection via QD2 using the ECC................................................... 7-1
7.1.3
Setup of an OSI-DCN within a SISA-DCN ...................................................................... 7-2
7.1.4
Managing further SISA-DCNs ......................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.5
Interconnection of several sub-networks via the LAN ..................................................... 7-3
7.2
Connection of MDRS 155 E to ServiceOn Access via the OSI-DCN................................ 7-3
7.2.1
Direct OSI connection ..................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2
Direct and indirect connection via OSI using the ECC .................................................... 7-4
7.2.3
OSI-DCN ......................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.4
Managing further SISA-DCNs ......................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.5
Interconnection of several sub-networks via the LAN ..................................................... 7-5
7.3
Connection of MDRS 155 E to ServiceOn Access via the IP-DCN................................... 7-6
7.3.1
Direct TCP/IP connection ................................................................................................ 7-6
7.3.2
Direct and indirect connection via TCP/IP using the ECC............................................... 7-6
7.3.3
Setup of an OSI sub-network within a TCP/IP-DCN ....................................................... 7-7
7.3.4
Managing further SISA-DCNs ......................................................................................... 7-7
7.3.5
Interconnection of several sub-networks via the LAN ..................................................... 7-8
7.3.6
Further direct TCP/IP connection (only local).................................................................. 7-8
7.4

Heterogeneous SISA-, OSI- and IP-DCN............................................................................. 7-9

Antenna System ............................................................................................... 8-1


8.1

Waveguides........................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.2

Antennas ............................................................................................................................... 8-2

Rack Design ..................................................................................................... 9-1

10

Highlights .................................................................................................... 10-1

11

Technical Characteristics .......................................................................... 11-1

11.1

Interfaces............................................................................................................................. 11-3

11.2

Mechanical Design ............................................................................................................. 11-4

11.3

Standards ............................................................................................................................ 11-5

12

Service Instructions.................................................................................... 12-1

65.1220.000.02

III

Contents

System Description

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

IV

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Figures

Figures
Fig. 1-1:
Fig. 1-2:
Fig. 1-3:
Fig. 1-4:
Fig. 1-5:
Fig. 1-6:
Fig. 1-7:
Fig. 1-8:
Fig. 1-9:
Fig. 1-10:
Fig. 1-11:
Fig. 1-12:
Fig. 2-1:
Fig. 2-2:
Fig. 2-3:
Fig. 2-4:
Fig. 2-5:
Fig. 2-6:
Fig. 2-7:
Fig. 2-8:
Fig. 2-9:
Fig. 2-10:
Fig. 2-11:
Fig. 2-12:
Fig. 2-13:
Fig. 2-14:
Fig. 2-15:
Fig. 2-16:
Fig. 2-17:
Fig. 2-18:
Fig. 2-19:
Fig. 2-20:
Fig. 2-21:
Fig. 2-22:
Fig. 4-1:
Fig. 4-2:
Fig. 4-3:
Fig. 4-4:
Fig. 4-5:
Fig. 4-6:
Fig. 4-7:
Fig. 4-8:
Fig. 4-9:
Fig. 4-10:
Fig. 4-11:
Fig. 4-12:
Fig. 4-13:
Fig. 4-14:
Fig. 4-15:
Fig. 4-16:
Fig. 4-17:
Fig. 5-1:
Fig. 5-2:
Fig. 5-3:
Fig. 5-4:
Fig. 6-1:

SDH microwave radio product matrix............................................................................. 1-1


Rack for 4+0, 3+1 or 2+2 system configurations ........................................................... 1-2
Frequency bands .............................................................................................................. 1-4
ACDP and CCDP mode..................................................................................................... 1-5
Microwave radio terminal, 1+0 configuration with space diversity ............................. 1-6
Terminal, 1+1 HSB configuration .................................................................................... 1-7
1+1 HSB diversity operation with BB switch ................................................................. 1-8
1+1 HSB diversity configuration with IF combiner........................................................ 1-8
Terminal, 1+1 configuration without occasional traffic ................................................ 1-9
Terminal, 3+1 or 4+0 configuration ........................................................................... 1-10
Repeater, 3+1 or 4+0 configuration ........................................................................... 1-11
ATPC control characteristic ....................................................................................... 1-12
Receiver and transmitter.................................................................................................. 2-1
Mechanical design of the transmitter with oscillator stage ......................................... 2-2
Transmitter block diagram............................................................................................... 2-3
Mechanical design of the receiver with oscillator stage .............................................. 2-4
Block diagram of receiver with diversity unit ................................................................ 2-5
Mechanical design of the diversity unit.......................................................................... 2-6
Equalization....................................................................................................................... 2-7
IF combiner........................................................................................................................ 2-8
Distortion analysis............................................................................................................ 2-8
Modem Unit - fully equipped ........................................................................................ 2-9
Modem Unit configuration.......................................................................................... 2-10
Block diagram of Modem Unit, 1+1/2+0 configuration ............................................ 2-12
Block diagram of Modem Unit, n+1/n+2 configuration............................................ 2-13
Overhead Access Unit ................................................................................................ 2-16
OHAU subrack (illustrated with QD2 interface module).......................................... 2-17
OHAU subrack (illustrated with ECC Gateway module).......................................... 2-18
Modules of the Overhead Access Unit...................................................................... 2-19
Utilization of the STM-1 signal SOH .......................................................................... 2-21
RPSC block diagram ................................................................................................... 2-24
RF filter and RF diplexer............................................................................................. 2-26
Channel branching network for 1+0D ....................................................................... 2-27
Channel branching network for 7+0DX, 6+1DX or 5+2DX ....................................... 2-27
Structure of a QD2-SISA network.................................................................................... 4-2
OSI 7-Layer model ............................................................................................................ 4-3
Data packaging in the individual protocol layers .......................................................... 4-3
Switching protocol (VMP01) ............................................................................................ 4-5
Switching structure .......................................................................................................... 4-5
Connecting options to ServiceOn Access ..................................................................... 4-6
Structure of the QD2 protocol stack ............................................................................... 4-6
OSI protocol stack ............................................................................................................ 4-7
Structure of the TCP/IP protocol stack........................................................................... 4-8
Structure of the QD2/OSI/TCP/IP multi-protocol stack.............................................. 4-8
QD2 Slave mode ............................................................................................................ 4-9
QD2-SISA-V mode ....................................................................................................... 4-10
QD2-via-SISA-V mode (MDRS 155 E with ECC Gateway)........................................ 4-11
Setup of a TMN connection via the LAN interface and ECC................................... 4-11
IP-SISA-V mode and connection to an IP-LAN ......................................................... 4-12
IP-via-SISA-V mode (MDRS 155 E with ECC Gateway)............................................ 4-13
Q3I-SISA-V mode......................................................................................................... 4-13
Protocol stack for connect. Operator Terminal PC via serial PC interface................. 5-1
TCP/IP connection between the MDRS 155 E and MSP................................................ 5-2
Protocol stack for connecting the Operator Terminal PC via TCP/IP.......................... 5-4
Connection of the Operator Terminal PC via a modem connection............................ 5-4
Structure of a Routing Domain........................................................................................ 6-2

65.1220.000.02

Figures
Fig. 6-2:
Fig. 6-3:
Fig. 7-1:
Fig. 7-2:
Fig. 7-3:
Fig. 7-4:
Fig. 7-5:
Fig. 7-6:
Fig. 7-7:
Fig. 7-8:
Fig. 7-9:
Fig. 7-10:
Fig. 7-11:
Fig. 7-12:
Fig. 7-13:
Fig. 7-14:
Fig. 7-15:
Fig. 7-16:
Fig. 7-17:
Fig. 8-1:
Fig. 8-2:
Fig. 8-3:
Fig. 8-4:
Fig. 9-1:
Fig. 9-2:
Fig. 9-3:
Fig. 9-4:
Fig. 9-5:

System Description
Structure of the NSAP address........................................................................................6-2
Structure of the system ID for remote logon..................................................................6-4
Direct connection to a SISA-DCN ....................................................................................7-1
Connection to an existing SISA infrastructure without additional cabling.................7-1
OSI-DCN within a SISA-DCN ............................................................................................7-2
Connecting further SISA-DCNs .......................................................................................7-2
Interconnection of two SISA-DCNs via the LAN ............................................................7-3
Direct connection to an OSI-DCN....................................................................................7-3
Connection to an existing OSI infrastructure without additional cabling...................7-4
OSI-DCN .............................................................................................................................7-4
Connecting further SISA-DCNs .......................................................................................7-5
Interconnection of two OSI-DCNs via the LAN...........................................................7-5
Direct connection to a TCP/IP-DCN .............................................................................7-6
Connection to the TCP/IP-DCN (without additional cabling) ....................................7-6
OSI sub-network within a TCP/IP-DCN........................................................................7-7
Connection of further SISA-DCNs ...............................................................................7-7
Interconnection of two OSI sub-network via the LAN ...............................................7-8
Direct connection to a TCP/IP-DCN .............................................................................7-8
Heterogeneous SISA-, OSI- and TCP/IP-DCN .............................................................7-9
Waveguides .......................................................................................................................8-1
Integrated HP, UHP antennas ..........................................................................................8-2
SHP shell antennas...........................................................................................................8-2
S, HP , UHP parabolic reflectors......................................................................................8-2
4+0, 3+1 or 2+2 system configuration with OHAU, MUX, DPU STM-4 .........................9-2
1+1 HSBD hot standby system configuration................................................................9-3
4+0D, 3+1D or 2+2D system configuration with SDH-MUX...........................................9-4
4+0DX, 3+1DX or 2+2DX system configuration with SDH-MUX....................................9-5
4+0DX, 3+1DX or 2+2DX system configuration in one rack, not expandable .............9-6

Note:
Some of the systems depicted in this document include options which do not belong to the normal delivery
scope and have to be explicitly ordered.
Modifications of technical contents and characteristics reserved.

VI

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Abbreviations

Abbreviations
A

H
I

ACDP
ADR
AIS
ATDE
ATN
ATPC
AU-AIS
BB
BAT
BER
CALL
CAN
CBN
CCDP
CL
CP
CR
DCC
DCCR
DCCM
DFM
DIV
DIPL
DM
DPU
DRS
DSC
DTN
DTMF
EA PS
EA RX
EA RU
EA TX
ECC
EXATN
EXT SET
EOW
EMC
EMI
ESD
FD
FEC
FP
HF
HSB
IF
IM
INT-A
INT-B
LON
LA/EA RX
LA RX
LA TX
LA-TX-BIT
LMT
LOF
LOP

65.1220.000.02

Adjacent Channel Dual-Polarized


Address
Alarm Indication Signal
Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer
Analog Terminal Network
Automatic Transmit Power Control
Administrative Unit AIS
Baseband
Battery DC input
Bit Error Ratio
Call
Controller Area Network
Channel Branching Network
Co-Channel Dual-Polarized
Clock
Connecting Panel
Clock Reference
Data Communication Channel
DCC of RSOH
DCC of MSOH
Dispersive Fading Margin
Diversity
Diplexer
Demodulator
Data Processing Unit
Digital Microwave Radio System
Digital Service Channel
Digital Terminal Network
Dual Tone Multiple Frequency dialling procedure
Equipment Alarm - Power Supply
Equipment Alarm - Receiver
Equipment Alarm - Microwave Radio Unit
Equipment Alarm - Transmitter
Embedded Control Channels
Extension Analog Terminal Network
Extended Handset
Engineer Orderwire
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Electromagnetic Interference
Electrostatic Discharge
Frequency Diversity
Forward Error Correction
Fuse Panel
High Frequency
Hot Standby
Intermediate Frequency
Interface Module
Internal Alarm - urgent
Internal Alarm - non-urgent
Local Operator Network
Line&Equipment Alarm RX
Line Alarm RX
Line Alarm TX
Line Alarm TX Bit
Local Maintenance Terminal
Loss Of Frame
Loss Of Pointer
VII

Abbreviations

Q
R

VIII

LOS
LSS
MAINS
MAP
MLQAM
MD
MS-AIS
MSOH
MSP
MST
MU
NFD
NO
NC
OH
OHA
O&M
OOF
OP
OSC
OT
PCB
PDH
PI
PR
PS
PSTN
PSU
POWER
QAM
RBER
RC
REI
RDI
RF
RFCOH
ROW
RPS
RPSC
RPSI
RRTF
RTF
RTTF
RTFE
RSL
RSOH
RST
RU
RX
RXD
SAW
SCU
SD
SDH
SOH
SOHA
SNCP
SNMP
SPB

System Description
Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Sequence Synchronization
Mains Power (AC)
Mapping Function
Multilevel Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Modulator
Multiplex Section AIS
Multiplex Section Overhead
Multiplex Section Protection
Multiplex Section Termination
Modem Unit
Net Filter Discrimination
Normally Open
Normally Closed
Overhead
Overhead Access
Operation and Maintenance
Out Of Frame
Operation Channel
Oscillator
Occasional Traffic
Printed Circuit Board
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
Physical Interface
Protection Channel
Power Supply
Public Subscriber Terminal Network
Protection Switching Unit
Power
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Residual Bit Error Ratio
Remote Control
Remote Error Indication
Remote Defect Indication
Radio Frequency
Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
Regenerator Order Wire
Radio Protection Switching
Radio Protection Switching Central Unit
Radio Protection Switching Interface
Radio Regenerator Transport Function
Regenerator Transport Function
Radio Terminal Transport Function
Regenerator Transport Function Electrical
Receiver Signal Level
Regenerator Section Overhead
Regenerator Section Termination
Radio Unit
Receiver
Diversity Receiver
Surface Acoustic Wave
Service Channel Unit
Space Diversity
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Section Overhead
Section Overhead Access
Subnetwork Connection Protection
Simple Network Management Protocol
Synchronous Port Block
65.1220.000.02

System Description

U
W
X

SPI
SPI EL
SPI OPT
STM
T3
TMN
TTF
TX
TSE
USER
WAY
XIF
XPE
XPI
XPIC
XPD

65.1220.000.02

Abbreviations
Synchronous Port Interface
Synchronous Port Interface Electrical
Synchronous Port Interface Optical
Synchronous Transport Module
Clock Input 2048 k (Synchronous clock input)
Telecommunication Management Network
Terminal Transport Function
Transmitter
Test Sequence Error
User Port
Wayside Traffic
Cross-Polarization Improvement Factor
Cross-Polarization Equalizer
Cross-Polarization Interference
Cross-Polarization Interference Canceller
Cross-Polarization Decoupling

IX

Abbreviations

System Description

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Description

1 New Generation of Digital Microwave Radio Systems


1.1

SDH Digital Microwave Radio Systems from Marconi Communications


GmbH

Marconi Communications GmbH develops and manufactures telecommunications systems worldwide.


Based on many years of experience in microwave radio technology, Marconi Communications GmbH
offers a complete, modular product portfolio of SDH microwave radio systems. These include:

Long-haul transmission systems


Short-haul transmission systems
Multiplex systems (separate from microwave radio systems)
Radio access systems
Lens antennas, parabolic antennas (S, HP, UHP) and shell antennas
Waveguides

155 Mbit/s (STM-1) to 622 Mbit/s (STM-4).

for data rates of

SDH systems for the frequency bands of

4 GHz to 38 GHz

Frequency GHz]

5 6L 6U

Channel spacing
[MHz]

40
29

40 29.65 40

28

10 11 13 15 18 23

29.65 30
28

40

28
56

27.5
55

26 28 38
28
56

56

Frequency [GHz]

Channel spacing
[MHz]

622 (STM-4) *

128-MLQAM

2155 (CCDP)**

64-MLQAM

155 (STM-1)

16-MLQAM

Bit rate [Mbit/s]

Long haul

Short haul

Modulation

* For transmission of one fully equipped STM-4 signal, four STM-1 data streams are necessary.
** Co-channel dual polarized operation.

Fig. 1-1: SDH microwave radio product matrix

65.1220.000.02

1-1

Description

1.2

System Description

MDRS 155/...64/128 MLQAM E Digital Microwave Radio System

Fig. 1-2: Rack for 4+0, 3+1 or 2+2 system configurations

1-2

65.1220.000.02

System Description

1.3

Description

Advantages of DRS 155/...64/128 MLQAM E

High rentability

Attractive alternative to cable-bound data transmission systems due to fast deployment

Modular ETSI design

Transmission capacity expandable step by step

Extremely high system availability ( >99.99%)

Full SDH compatibility

Transparent regenerator operation for STM-1 and STM-4

Applicable in SDH ring networks, fixed networks for GSM operators, TV distribution networks

Integrated 1+0 to 14+2 or 1+1 HSB protection switching configuration for high transmission
performance

Integrated XPIC functionality for all RF bands

SDH network element with Q- or LAN interface for TMN connection.

65.1220.000.02

1-3

Description

1.4

System Description

Transmission capacity

The DRS 155/.....-64 /128 MLQAM E digital microwave radio system is designed for the transmission of
an STM-1 signal (acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.708) at a bit rate of 155 Mbit/s per RF carrier. The baseband
interface can be either an electrical (CMI) or an optical (ITU-T G.957, S-1.1) interface.
In conjunction with the DPU STM-4 Data Processing Unit serving as a real STM-4 regenerator,
transparent transmission of a fully or partly occupied STM-4 signal is also possible.
The bytes freely available in the Section Overhead (SOH) are used for system-internal control and
signalling services as well as for up to 4x64 kbit/s and 1x2 Mbit/s service channels.
In addition to the STM-1 frame, the system generates a microwave-specific multiframe (RFCOH, Radio
Frame Complementary Overhead), which can be used to transmit up to 8x64 kbit/s and 1x2 Mbit/s
additional service channels (wayside traffic).
The standard operating mode of this digital microwave radio system is the RST (Regenerator Section
Termination) mode (ITU-T Rec. G.782) which permits multiplexing modes such as SNCP or MSP in SDH
ring networks.
Thus, digital microwave radio systems can be integrated in complex SDH network topologies just like a
"wireless cable".
The MST mode (155 Mbit/s) or PDH mode (140 Mbit/s) is implemented by the external SDH multiplexer,
e.g. MS1/4.

1.5

Frequency bands

The digital microwave radio systems described can be operated in the frequency bands from 4 GHz to
13 GHz (Fig. 1-3). Other frequency patterns can be implemented on demand.

Frequency bands
3.0
ITU-R F.382
ITU-R F.382

6 Ch. 29 MHz 3824.5 - 4182.5 MHz f 0=4003.5 MHz


6 Ch. 29 MHz 3413.0 - 3771.0 MHz f 0=3592.0 MHz

ITU-R F.497
ITU-R F.635
ITU-R F.635*
ITU-R F.635

8 Ch. 28 MHz
7 Ch. 40 MHz
7 Ch. 40 MHz
4 Ch. 80 MHz

ITU-R F.1099

7 Ch. 40 MHz 4430 - 4970 MHz f0=4700 MHz

ITU-R F.1099

4 Ch. 80 MHz 4450 - 4990 MHz f0=4700 MHz

ITU-R F.383
ITU-R F.497

8 Ch. 29.65 MHz 5945.20 - 6404.79 MHz f0=6175 MHz


8 Ch. 28 MHz 5689 - 6151 MHz f0=5920MHz

ITU-R F.384

8 Ch. 40 MHz 6460 - 7080 MHz f0=6770 MHz

ITU-R F.385
ITU-R F.385*
ITU-R F.385
ITU-R F.385
ITU-R F.385

5 Ch. 28 MHz
5 Ch. 28 MHz
5 Ch. 28 MHz
5 Ch. 28 MHz
8 Ch. 28 MHz

ITU-R F.386
ITU-R F.386

8 Ch. 29.65 MHz 7747.70 - 8266.57 MHz f0=8000 MHz


3 Ch. 28 MHz 8293 - 8468 MHz f0=8387.5 MHz

ITU-R F.387

8 Ch. 28 MHz 12765 - 13227 MHz f0=12996 MHz

4.0

5.0

6.0

7.0

8.0

9.0

10 .0

11.0

12.0

13.0 G Hz

3422.5 - 3884.5 MHz f 0=3653.5 MHz


3620 - 4180 MHz f0=3900 MHz
3610 - 4170 MHz f0=3890 MHz
3630 - 4190 MHz

7442 - 7708 MHz


7428 - 7722 MHz
7121 - 7429 MHz
7457 - 7737 MHz
7442 - 7883 MHz

f0=7575 MHz
f0=7275 MHz
f0=7597 MHz
f0=7662.5 MHz

Fig. 1-3: Frequency bands

1-4

65.1220.000.02

System Description

1.6

Description

Configurations

1.6.1 Utilization of the frequency pattern


Depending on the frequency pattern, up to eight RF channels (e.g. 6.8 GHz) can be transmitted. A crosspolarization interference canceller (XPIC) permits the use of the RF channels on two polarizations. This
doubles the transmission capacity, i.e. depending on the frequency pattern, it is possible to transmit up to
16 x STM-1 via one radio hop and one antenna.
In 40 MHz frequency patterns, the system is operated using the 64 MLQAM modulation scheme. This
permits connection to the same antenna and same polarization with single channel spacing (40 MHz).
Thus, the use of an XPIC allows CCDP (Co-Channel Dual-Polarized) operation (Fig. 1-4).
In frequency patterns with a channel spacing of 28 to 30 MHz, the system using 128 MLQAM modulation
can be connected to the same antenna and same polarization with single channel spacing (28...30 MHz).
By using the 128 MLQAM modulation scheme in conjunction with an XPIC, the transmission capacity in
the CCDP mode can be doubled in these patterns.
If the system uses 64 MLQAM modulation in frequency patterns with a channel spacing of 28 to 30 MHz, it
can be connected to the same antenna and same polarization with double channel spacing.
In the ACDP (Adjacent-Channel Dual-Polarized) mode (Fig. 1-4), the crossed polarization is occupied with
single channel spacing.
The XPIC is integrated in the demodulator and can be software-activated.
28...40 MHz

RF channel filter

ACDP system
1x155 Mbit/s in one
30 or 40 MHz channel

H
V

28...40 MHz

H
V

RF channel filter

CCDP system
2x155 Mbit/s in one
30 or 40 MHz channel
using both polarizations
(XPIC)
Fig. 1-4: ACDP and CCDP mode

65.1220.000.02

1-5

Description

System Description

1.6.2 Terminal and regenerator station


A microwave radio terminal is a digital microwave radio system which provides an optical or electrical line
interface and an RF interface. The line interface operates in the RST mode.
A radio terminal can have an unprotected configuration (N+0) or a protected configuration (N+2, N+1 or
1+1 hot standby) (Fig. 1-10).
A regenerator station (repeater) always provides two RF interfaces (Fig. 1-11). It can be operated with or
without protection switching option. A regenerator station is composed of two radio terminals requiring
only one OHAU (Overhead Access Unit).

1.6.3 Space diversity


Space diversity configurations are used to guarantee the required transmission quality even in case of
radio hops with lengths of 30 to 80 km or under difficult propagation conditions. For this option, a second
receive path with Rx preamplifier, mixer, IF preamplifier and control amplifier as well as a distortioncontrolled IF combiner (minimum distortion) are provided. The Rx oscillator (DRVCO) supplies both
mixers.
The diversity receiver is fed via a separate antenna (Fig. 15). The required compensation of different
propagation times between the main receiver and diversity receiver is ensured by a coaxial cable
connected to the combiner.

Main antenna
f1
STM-1
electr. or
optical

Modem
Unit
RPS

Service / operating
channels
max. 12x64k , 2x2M

TX
CBN

H
OP1
Diversity
antenna

RX
Overhead
Access
Unit

f2

RXD

CBN

Fig. 1-5: Microwave radio terminal, 1+0 configuration with space diversity

1-6

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Description

1.6.4 Protection switching


1.6.4.1 1+1 hot standby configuration
In a 1+1 hot standby configuration (HSB, equipment protection) (Fig. 1-6) only one data stream
(155 Mbit/s) is transmitted at a time. On the transmit side, the baseband signal is applied to two modulators and two transmitters. An RF switch in the channel filter switches over to the protection channel in
case of Tx-side equipment failures.
On the receive side, the Rx signal is routed via an RF coupler to two receivers and two demodulators. A
hitless protection switching circuit selects the correctly functioning units on the receive side.
The RPS-H module controls the RF switch. The hitless, i.e. bit error-free protection switching circuit is
integrated in the DPU/RPS module and software-activated and -configured.
Space diversity with HSB configuration can be implemented in two different ways (Fig. 1-7):

In space diversity configurations with baseband switch, the bit error-free protection switching circuit is
used on the Rx side as a switching combiner (Fig. 1-8).

In space diversity operation with IF combiner, the signals received by the two antennas are branched
via an RF coupler each to the operating channel and protection channel. Such configurations require
four receivers. The signals of the main antenna and diversity antenna are combined by an IF
combiner separately for the operating and protection channel and are passed on to the Modem Unit.

PRS-H
Main antenna
f1
STM-1
electr. or
optical

OP1

Modem
Unit
RPS

H
OP1

TX

RX

Service / operating
channels
max. 12x64 kbit/s,
2x2 Mbit/s

f2

TX

RX
Overhead
Access
Unit

Fig. 1-6: Terminal, 1+1 HSB configuration

65.1220.000.02

1-7

Description

System Description

PRS-H

Main antenna
f2

f1
STM-1
electr. or
optical

OP1

TX

Modem
Unit
RPS

H
OP1

TX
V

RX

RX

Service / operating
channels
max. 12x64 kbit/s,
2x2 Mbit/s

Diversity antenna

Overhead
Access
Unit

Fig. 1-7: 1+1 HSB diversity operation with BB switch

PRS-H
Main antenna
f1
STM-1
electr. or
optical

OP1

Modem
Unit
RPS

TX
H
OP1

TX
V

RX

Service / operating
channels
max. 12x64 kbit/s,
2x2 Mbit/s

RXD
Overhead
Access
Unit

f2

Diversity antenna

RX

RXD

Fig. 1-8: 1+1 HSB diversity configuration with IF combiner

1-8

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Description

1.6.4.2 1+1 line protection without occasional traffic


In a 1+1 line protection configuration with a DPU/RPS STM-1 (Fig. 1-9), two data streams (155 Mbit/s) are
transmitted at a time. On the transmit side, the baseband signal is applied to two modulators and two
transmitters and is transmitted using two separate RF carriers.
The Rx-side signals are applied via two receivers to the two demodulators. A bit error-free protection
switching circuit selects the channel with the better transmission quality.
Hitless switchover is implemented by the DPU/RPS module. It is software-activated and -configured.
Occasional traffic (OT) is not possible. This system configuration cannot be expanded.

Main antenna
STM-1
electrical
or
optical

f1
OP1

Modem
Unit
RPS

TX
H
OP1 PR1

TX
CBN
RX

Service/operating
channnels
max. 12x64k , 2x2M

f2

RX
Overhead
Access
Unit

Fig. 1-9: Terminal, 1+1 configuration without occasional traffic

65.1220.000.02

1-9

Description

System Description

1.6.4.3 n+1, n+2 line protection


With n+1 or n+2 line protection configurations (Fig. 1-10 and Fig. 1-11), n+1 or n+2 data streams
(155 Mbit/s) are transmitted. The number of operating channels (n=1 to 14) depends on the frequency
pattern used. On the Tx side, the data signals are branched parallelly to the operating channel to one or
two protection channels.
On the Rx side, the quality of the operating channels is evaluated and the signals are switched over to a
protection channel, if necessary. The switch is integrated in the DPU/RPS module and is softwareactivated and -configured.
The maximum degree of expansion is 14+2. Hitless expansion from 1+1 to 14+2 is possible (options).
The allocation of protection channels to the respective operating channel is performed by the RPS-C.
Here the signals are switched to the corresponding operating channels on both the transmit and receive
side. An RPS-C module is provided for configurations up to 7+1. For the maximum expansion, i.e. 14+2,
four RPS-C modules are required.
A byte in the SOH (media-specific byte) is used for transmitting the control data for switchover on the
transmit and receive side. Optionally, it is possible to use the protection channel for occasional traffic
(OT).

RPS-C

STM-1
electr. or
optical
OP1

f1
Modem
Unit
RPS

OP2

Main antenna

OP1 OP2 OP3 PR1


CBN

PR1 / OP4

Service/ operating
channels
max. 12x64 kbit/s,
2x2 Mbit/s

f4

TX

OP3

f3

TX

RX

STM-1
electr. or
optical

f2

RX

Modem
Unit
RPS

TX

RX

TX
Overhead
Access
Unit

RX

Fig. 1-10: Terminal, 3+1 or 4+0 configuration

1-10

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Description

RPS-C

Main antenna

TX

RPS-C

STM-1
electr. or
optical
OP1

Modem
Unit
RPS

Modem
Unit
RPS

OP2

RX

Main antenna

TX

RX

CBN

CBN
TX

TX

STM-1
electr. or
optical

RX

TX

OP3

Modem
Unit
RPS

PR1 / OP4

RX

RX

Modem
Unit
RPS

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

Service / operating
channels
max. 12x64 kbit/s,
2x2 Mbit/s

Overhead
Access
Unit

RX

Overhead
Access
Unit

Fig. 1-11: Repeater, 3+1 or 4+0 configuration

65.1220.000.02

1-11

Description

System Description

1.6.5 Automatic transmit power control (ATPC)


In order to permit the same frequencies to be reused in network nodes, the RF levels of the transmitted
signals must be reduced to avoid overshoots and interferences. The ATPC controls the level of the RF
amplifier depending on the receive signal.
The transmit level is controlled by the far-end receiver to achieve a constant receive level. In times without
fading, the transmit level is reduced to a value about 20 dB below its maximum. The transmitter is
controlled by a microwave-internal control channel (media-specific byte in the SOH). Depending on the
control reference point adjusted in the receiver, ATPC can be used to control either both up-fading and
down-fading or only up-fading effects (Fig. 1-12). In special cases, the ATPC circuit can also be disabled.
All configurations are software-controlled.
In addition to Tx level reduction, the ATPC function permits the transmit level to be continuously increased
in times with very high radio hop attenuation values to a value approximately 1.5 dB above the nominal
value (overdrive mode). With the overdrive mode activated, this increase starts below a PRXCrit receive
level and above a bit error ratio of 1E-6.
PRX

Control criterion:
PRX
PRXCrit

Control criterion:
BER

Radio hop attenuation


PTX
Control criterion:
PRX

Control criterion:
BER

PTX max2
PTX max1

PTX min

Overdrive mode

<1E-6

>1E-6

Radio hop attenuation

Fig. 1-12: ATPC control characteristic

1-12

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

2 Functioning
A complete terminal required for transmitting an STM-1 data stream is composed of the following
modules:

Transmitter
Receiver
Modem unit
Channel branching network

Optional:

Diversity receiver
Overhead access unit
RPS-C
RPS-H

Fig. 2-1: Receiver and transmitter

65.1220.000.02

2-1

Functioning

2.1

System Description

Transmitter

The transmitter is designed so that it can transmit IF signals modulated with 64 MLQAM or 128 MLQAM.
The 140 MHz IF signal of the modulator is predistorted in the IF predistorter in such a way that non-linear
distortions of the RF amplifier (Tx power amplifier) are compensated. Since the output power of the RF
amplifier can be controlled by the ATPC in a range of 20 dB, the predistorter is controlled in the same way
as the RF amplifier.
After predistortion, the IF signal is amplified and applied to the single-sideband mixer (Tx up-converter).
This mixer is powered by the oscillator module of the transmitter. Afterwards the RF signal is routed to the
multi-stage RF amplifier where it is raised to the required transmit level. An isolator decouples the
amplifier output from the channel branching network.

IF predistorter
65.7205.220.00
IF predistorter
IF amplifier
LO suppression

Tx controller
65.7205.210.00

Tx power
amplifier
65.720x.220

Tx upconverter
65.720x.215.00

Tx power supply
65.7205.230.00

Oscillator module
65.720x.260.00

Oscillator module
65.720x.260.00

Fig. 2-2: Mechanical design of the transmitter with oscillator stage

2-2

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

The transmitter includes the Tx power supply for the input DC voltages of 24/48/60 V, the bias controller of
the RF amplifier as well as the Tx controller.
The Tx controller represents the interface of the transmitter to the monitoring and control bus (LON bus).
The Tx controller contains configuration and alignment data of the transmitter as well as parts of the
ATPC control.
The exchangable oscillator module is tuned to a certain frequency. Thus, it determines the RF channel of
the transmitter. It is composed of a tunable oscillator operating at the output frequency and stabilized by
means of a dielectric resonator (DRVCO, Dielectric Resonator Voltage Controlled Oscillator).
A quartz oscillator synchronizes the DRVCO via a phase-locked loop (PLL).
When changing a channel, the ocillator module must be replaced. The oscillator module can be used for
both the transmitter and receiver.

IF predistorter

Upconverter

TX power amplifier
RF to
CBN

IF from
MD

Bias controller
TX controller
LON bus

Synchr. X-Pol
Oscillator
module

from
modem
unit

19...75 V

TX power
supply

Transmitter
Fig. 2-3: Transmitter block diagram

65.1220.000.02

2-3

Functioning

2.2

System Description

Receiver

The receiver is appropriate for handling both 64 MLQAM and 128 MLQAM modulated IF signals.

Oscillator module
65.720x.260.00

RF module

Coaxial
Isolator
65.720x.205

RF module
65.7205.43x

O.P.divider
65.7205.440

Recording

IF amplifier
65.7205.470.00
1a

1a

RX controller
65.7205.420.00

MU
Contr.

IF
Power supply

Bat. input
19V-72V

Fig. 2-4: Mechanical design of the receiver with oscillator stage


The receiver converts the Rx signal supplied by the channel branching network into an IF signal.
Level fluctuations and attenuation distortions caused by fading are compensated and interferences due to
interferers and adjacent channels are suppressed.
The Rx signal is routed via the input isolator to the RF module composed of the low-noise, regulated RF
preamplifier and Rx mixer. The mixer is designed as single-sideband mixer and is supplied by the
oscillator module of the receiver. Oscillator modules of transmitter and receiver are exchangable units.
The IF signal generated in the mixer is amplified and passed on to the IF amplifier.
The regulated IF amplifier compensates level fluctuations caused by flat fading. In case of a receiver
arrangement without space diversity, the IF signal is applied to the demodulator.
The receiver includes the power supply providing the input DC voltages of 24/48/60 V and the Rx
controller.
The Rx controller represents the interface of the receiver to the monitoring and control bus (LON bus).
The Rx controller includes configuration and alignment data of the receiver as well as parts of the ATPC
control circuit. The Rx controller controls the regulated RF preamplifier and IF amplifier.

2-4

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

RF module

RFfrom
CBN

Main receiver

IF amplifier

Operation without diversity


a
IF 140 MHz
to DM

RX controller
Oscillator
module

LON bus
from
modem
unit
TX level
Control MD

Diversity receiver

Recorder

Tx power
supply

RFfrom
CBN
Div
a
RF module

19...75 V

IF
combiner

IF amplifier

Fig. 2-5: Block diagram of receiver with diversity unit

65.1220.000.02

2-5

Functioning

2.3

System Description

Space diversity

If difficult propagation conditions require space diversity operation, the receiver is provided with a space
diversity unit. In the diversity receiver, the signal from the diversity antenna passes the same modules as
in the main receiver. A common oscillator (DRVCO) supplies the mixers of both the main and diversity
receiver.
The regulated IF amplifier is followed by the IF combiner which adds the IF signals of the diversity path to
those of the main path. The combined signal can be controlled to achieve a minimum distortion and a
maximum signal-to-noise ratio, depending on the level and distortion of the received signals. Then the
combined IF signal is applied to the demodulator.
The diversity receiver is powered by the power supply module of the main receiver.
A coaxial cable is used to compensate the different delay times of the main receiver and diversity receiver
signals. The length of this coaxial cable, which is connected to the combiner, depends on the difference in
the delay times.

Coaxial
isolator
65.720x.205

RF module
65.7205.43x

IF amplifier
65.7205.470.00

1a

1a

Combiner
input 1

IF combiner
65.7205.490.00

IF
Combiner
input 2

Combinator
output

Fig. 2-6: Mechanical design of the diversity unit

2-6

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

2.3.1 IF combiner
In the IF combiner, the Rx signals are combined (Fig. 2-8). Depending on their level, the signals are
weighted (2 dB per dB), phase-shifted and added.
The following criteria can be selected for evaluation:

Maximum ratio: The level and phase are evaluated in such a way that the signal-to-noise ratio of the
combined signal is maximized.
Combination criterion taking account of both the signal-to-noise ratio and degree of distortion of the
combined signal.

The control criteria are supplied by an analogue distortion detector and a signal-to-noise detector at IF
level (Fig. 2-9).
Using this distortion- and microprocessor-controlled combiner, severely distorted signals (Fig. 2-7) can be
equalized even if the distortions on the Rx paths (main, diversity) with small delay times (< 2ns ) are
different (MP, NMP).
A [dB]

Combined signal

-10

-15
Diversity signal
-20

Main signal

-25

-30

-35

-40

-45
-20

-15

-10

-5

+5

+10

+15

+20

F/F [MHz]

Fig. 2-7: Equalization

65.1220.000.02

2-7

Functioning

IF from
receiver

System Description

AGC

Coaxial cable
Delay compensation

IF to
DM

AGC

Distortion detector

PD

f1

f3

AGC

IF from
receiver

f2

Power of combined signal


Controller
Distortion of combined signal

Attenuation + phase compensation

S/N of IF

Fig. 2-8: IF combiner


A [dB]

P1

-10
P2
-15

-20
P3
-25

-30

-35

-40

-45
-20

-15

-10

-5

+5

+10

+15

+20

F/F [MHz]

Fig. 2-9: Distortion analysis


2-8

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

2.4 Modem Unit


2.4.1 Modem Unit subrack
The subrack of the modem unit can be equipped with the modules necessary for the transmission of a
maximum of two data streams. The equipment with modules depends on the configuration (number of
data streams and type of protection switching). The following modules can be mounted (Fig. 2-11):
2x

SPI STM-1 EL (electrical BB interface) or SPI STM-1 OPT (optical BB interface)

2x

RPSI STM-1 (electrical STM-1 interface to N+M protection switching)

2x

Modem unit power supply

2x

MD 155/140-64 MLQAM (modulator 64 MLQAM) or MD 155/140-128 MLQAM

2x

DM 155/140-64 MLQAM (demodulator 64 MLQAM) or DM 155/140-128 MLQAM

2x

DPU/RPS STM-1 (SDH processing and protection switching)

1x

Controller module (signalling and monitoring interface)

The connecting panel is arranged in the upper part of the subrack. It provides the interfaces to external
units with the exception of the optical STM-1 interface which is located on the front side of the module.

Fig. 2-10: Modem Unit - fully equipped

65.1220.000.02

2-9

2-10

STM-1

SPI

RPSI

X92
X90

IF1

PR1/2

BAT

PS

X91
X89

IF1
PR1/1

X74

X73

MD

DPU
RPS

SYN
TX

TX

RX

DCCR

DM

X57

TX2

RX1

TX1

X59

X61

X88

TX

DPU
RPS

MAN

SYN
TX

RX

MAN

RX2

SOH 2A

SWITCH
LOCK

X86

X87

X85

SWITCH
LOCK

DM

CAN E

CAN W

RC

OP
PR1
PR2

X70

X84

X83

X78

OP
PR1
PR2

CTRL

SOH 1A

ROH 1B

ROH A

+
X71 BAT1 19...75V DC X51

X55

X63

SOH 1B

BFI-ESG

LON W

LON E

X53

X79

X81

X82

MST-ADR

MD
BAT

PS

+
X72 BAT2 19...75V DC

SOH 2B

ROH 2B

X77
X76

X75

PR2/1

PR2/2

X96
X100

IF2

IF2

STM-1

SPI

RPSI

X95
X99

6U

2U

Functioning
System Description

Fig. 2-11: Modem Unit configuration

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

2.4.2 Synchronous Physical Interface STM-1 (SPI STM-1)


Each transmission channel is terminated on the line side with a standardized baseband interface. In case
of a protected link, the SPI STM-1 is required only for operating channels. If the protection channels are
intended to be used for occasional traffic (OT), one SPI STM-1 is necessary for each of them.
Each data stream can be equipped with either an electrical or an optical interface. A mixed equipment is
also possible.
The SPI STM-1 includes both the transmit and receive side of the line interface. In this module, the OPT
or CMI signals are converted into NRZ signals and vice versa. The NRZ signals are applied to the
DPU/RPS for further processing or are received from the DPU/RPS.

2.4.2.1 Synchronous Physical Interface STM-1 electrical (SPI STM-1 EL)


Electrical 155 Mbit/s CMI baseband interface in compliance with ITU-T G.703 and G.707, connected via a
coaxial cable and 1.6/5.6 connector (75 Ohms) to the subrack connecting panel.

2.4.2.2 Synchronous Physical Interface STM-1 optical (SPI STM-1 OPT)


Optical 155 Mbit/s baseband interface in compliance with ITU-T G.957, type S-1.1, connected via a FC/PC
or DIN 47256 connector to the front side of the module.

65.1220.000.02

2-11

Functioning

System Description

Operating channel

DPU/RPS STM-1

Electr.

STM-1

Opt.
SPI
unit

MD 155/140
Encoder FEC

RST

RPS

RST

RFCOH
Insert
Extract
Decoder FEC

19...75 V

MD unit
power
supply

Dig.
filter

ATDE

D
A

D
A

64/128 MLQAM
Modulator

64/128 MLQAM
Demodulator

XPIC

Slope
equal.

IF
to TX
(H)

IF
from RX
(H)
SAW

DM 155/140

LON
Controller module
Alarms

STM-1

Opt.
SPI
unit

Decoder FEC
RST

RPS

RST

MD unit
power
supply

ATDE

D
A

RFCOH
Insert
Extract
Encoder FEC

19...75 V

DM 155/140

XPIC

Electr.

Dig.
filter

D
A

64/128 MLQAM
Demodulator

Slope
equal.

IF
from RX
(V)
SAW
IF
to TX
(V)

64/128 MLQAM
Modulator

MD 155/140

DPU/RPS STM-1
Protection channel

Fig. 2-12: Block diagram of Modem Unit, 1+1/2+0 configuration

2.4.3 Data Processing Unit and Radio Protection Switch (DPU/RPS STM-1)
The DPU/RPS is the kernel of the Modem Unit. It is responsible for SDH processing and protection
switching. The transmit and receive direction are handled by a common DPU/RPS. In regenerator
stations, service channels can be applied to the OHAU or passed through to the next radio hop without
any changes.
On the transmit side, the signal is supplied by the SPI unit. In the input-side RST block (Regeneration
Section Termination), the incoming SOH is read out and made available to the Overhead Access Unit.
The B1 byte of the SOH monitors the quality of the received signal. The subsequent RPS block branches
the signal for protection switching purposes. In case of a 1+1 protection switching configuration, the signal
is applied to the RPS block of the protection channel. In n+2 configurations, it is made available to the
RPSI unit. The signal of the operating channel is routed to another RST block where the SOH is
overwritten by the signals of the Overhead Access Unit (Service). Here the microwave-internal bytes of
the SOH are set. The microwave-specific multiframe is assembled in the downstream RFCOH block
(Radio Frame Complementary Overhead). This multiframe can include additional service channels which
can be processed by the Overhead Access Unit. Afterwards the signal is passed on to the modulator.
On the receive side, the signal is supplied by the demodulator. In the input-side RFCOH block, the
microwave-specific multiframe is disassembled and passed on to the Overhead Access Unit for further
processing. In the following RST block, the incoming SOH is read out and made available to the Overhead
Access Unit. The microwave-specific bytes are also extracted and processed. The B1 byte of the SOH is
used to monitor the quality of the received signal. The downstream RPS block switches over between the
operating channel and protection channel without bit errors. In case of a 1+1 configuration, the protection
signal is supplied by the DPU/RPS of the protection channel. In a n+2 configuration, it is made available
2-12

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

by the RPSI module. Before switchover, the protection signal is synchronized to the operating signal in the
STM-1 synchronization circuit. The protected signal is applied to another RST block where the SOH is
overwritten by the signals of the Overhead Access Unit. Here the transmission quality after switchover is
determined by means of the B2 byte of the SOH. Then the signal is passed on to the SPI unit.
The protection switching function is software-activated and -configured. A DPU/RPS STM-1 module is
selected as master and controls all protection switching components (DPU/RPS STM-1, RPS-C and RPSH) via an internal bus. In case of a n+1/n+2 protection switching configuration, a media-specific byte of the
SOH is used to transmit the control data to the far end. For calculating the transmission quality after
switchover, the B2 byte is read out in front of the branching circuit and transmitted in the forward direction,
so that it can be compared to the B2 byte available after switchover.
Operating channel

DPU/RPS STM-1

Electr.

STM-1

Opt.
SPI
Unit

MD 155/140
Encoder FEC

RST

RPS

RST

RFCOH
Insert
Extract
Decoder FEC

19...75 V

MD unit
power
supply

OP1

Dig.
filter

ATDE

D
A

D
A

64/128 MLQAM
Modulator

64/128 MLQAM
Demodulator

XPIC

Slope
equal.

IF
to TX
(H)

IF
from RX
(H)
SAW

DM 155/140

RPSI

RPSC
OP7

LON
Controller module

OP1

RPSI

Alarms

OP7

STM-1

Opt.
SPI
Unit

Decoder FEC
RST

RPS

RST

MD unit
power
supply

ATDE

D
A

RFCOH
Insert
Extract
Encoder FEC

19...75 V

DM 155/140

XPIC

Electr.

Dig.
filter

D
A

64/128 MLQAM
Demodulator

Slope
equal.

IF
from RX
(V)
SAW

64/128 MLQAM
Modulator

IF
to TX
(V)

MD 155/140

DPU/RPS STM-1
Protection channel

Fig. 2-13: Block diagram of Modem Unit, n+1/n+2 configuration

65.1220.000.02

2-13

Functioning

System Description

2.4.4 Radio Protection Switching Interface (RPSI STM-1)


The RPSI STM-1 module represents the interface between the DPU/RPS and the central unit of the radio
protection switching circuit (RPS-C). It provides an interface which permits an inter-rack connection of
protection signals. In a n+m protection switching configuration, the RPSI STM-1 module is required for
each operating and protection channel (not in 1+1 configurations without OT).
In case of an n+2 configuration, the RPSI STM-1 branches the signal on the transmit side so that it can be
applied to both protection channels. On the receive side, switchover takes place between PR1 and PR2.
The RPSI STM-1 module is controlled by the DPU/RPS STM-1 module. The RPSI STM-1 is identical with
the SPI STM-1 EL module.

2.4.5 Modulator (MD 155/140-64(128) MLQAM)


The modulator modulates the signal supplied by the DPU/RPS STM-1 module. Then the serial data
stream is converted into parallel streams. The FEC circuit (Forward Error Correction) inserts parity bits, so
that an error correction is possible in the demodulator of the receive side. The FEC circuit operates
according to the principle of underlaid coding, i.e. redundant data recovered from the information signals
on the transmit side are transmitted. Since the law of formation is known, errors can be detected on the
receive side by evaluating these so-called check symbols and can be corrected by means of "Soft
Decision Bits". The FEC supplies a reliable control criterion for protection switching.
The subsequent digital filter performs a spectrum-shaping filtering function. After D/A conversion, the
signal is either 64 MLQAM- or 128 MLQAM-modulated depending on the modulator used. The IF is
140 MHz. When using an XPIC, the carrier frequencies of the cross-polarly connected modulators /
channels are synchronized.

2.4.6 Demodulator (DM 155/140-64(128) MLQAM)


The IF signal from the receiver passes the IF group delay equalizer, which compensates the group delays
of the RF channel filters caused by the RF channel branching network. The IF signal is passed on to a
SAW filter which forms the spectrum together with the digital filter in the modulator. Afterwards the signal
is applied to the adaptive attenuation slope equalizer. The latter supports the function of the adaptive
baseband equalizer and improves the acquisition behaviour of the PLL circuits contained in the
demodulator. Then the signal is demodulated coherently and converted into a digital signal.
The downstream adaptive baseband equalizer (ATDE) compensates linear distortions of the QAM
channel, which are mainly caused by multipath propagation in the radio hop. The equalizer is based on
transversal filters with 13 controlled coefficients and one feedback coefficient.
The downstream FEC circuit corrects part of the bit errors that occurred in the modulation section and
improves the residual error ratio of the system. The FEC supplies a reliable control criterion for protection
switching.
The decoder decodes the parallel baseband signals and applies a serial data stream to the DPU/RPS
STM-1 module.
In order to permit co-channel operation (CCDP) on crossed polarizations, the demodulator includes an
XPIC which suppresses the interference signals of the cross-polar channel. The cross-polarization
isolation is improved by the XPIC by about 20 dB. Thus, CCDP operation is possible even under
extremely bad radio hop conditions.
XPIC operation can be activated or deactivated by software configuration.

2-14

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

2.4.7 Modem Unit Power Supply (MUPS)


The MUPS can be operated with an input voltage of 19 V to 75 V DC. One MUPS can power the
components required for transmitting one data stream. The node elements DPU/RPS STM-1 and SPI Unit
are powered in a protected configuration by both MUPS of a Modem Unit.

2.4.8 Controller module


The controller module represents the interface of the Modem Unit to the monitoring and control bus (LON
bus). Here the equipment alarms are concentrated and can be made available as relay contacts or V.11
interfaces.

65.1220.000.02

2-15

Functioning

2.5

System Description

Overhead Access Unit (OHA Unit)

The Overhead Access Unit processes all service and auxiliary channels of a modem unit (operating and
protection channel) in a 1+1 protection configuration both in terminals and regenerator stations.

2.5.1 OHAU subrack


The OHAU subrack can be equipped with the following modules (Fig. 2-15):
2x RFCOH access module
1x SOH access module
1x SOH extension module
1x SISA-0N
1x QD2 interface module*)
1x ECC Gateway module **)

(service channels in the microwave-specific multiframe) for one direction


each
(service channels in the SOH) for two directions
Extension of the SOH access module
TMN interface QD2
QD2 transmission via a 64 kbit/s service channel
Transmission of network management information
via the ECC and LAN interface to the TNM

2x EOW module

EOW, express EOW, telephone and transmission via 64 kbit/s lines

1x OHAU power supply

Power supply module for the OHA unit


*)
**)

alternatively to ECC Gateway module


alternatively to QD2 interface module

The minimum equipment includes the OHAU power supply, SOH access module and SISA-0N module.
All other modules can be used optionally.

Fig. 2-14: Overhead Access Unit

2-16

65.1220.000.02

65.1220.000.02

EOW2 N X36

EOW2 A

ROH1 W
EXT
DSC

INT

ID

RESET

SISA
K

Q
CALL

EOW2

RFCOH
E

SOH
ACC

SISA
0/N

SOH
EXT

X75

X74

ROH/WSC E

DSC 1...8 W

ROH/WSC W X73

X39

LON E

X82

RW2 IN X68

X112

ROH2 W

QW

QE

X66

X64

X76

LON W X38

X81

X102
X111

X63

X56

RESET

SERV

X59

X62

X117 RC SISA X31 EOW2 EXT X30 EOW1 EXT

X40 EOW1 INT S X51 SOH/E1 E X53 SOH/F1 E

RE1 OUT X60

X105
X101

SE1 IN X43

SOH1 E

SOH/E2 E

SE2 OUT

ROH1 E X107

X108

ROH2 E

SW1 OUT

SOH2 W X113

SOH/WSC W X52 SOH/E W X115


X114

DSC 9...12 W X54 SOH/F1 W

SOH1 W SW2 IN

DSC 1...8 E X107

X103
SOH2 E X104

SOH/E2 W X35 EOW2 EXT S

DSC 9...12 E X41 EOW2 INT S

SOH/WSC E X45

X61

X65

X46

CALL

EOW1

X47 QSC EXT X33 EOW1 A X32 EOW1 EXT S

RFCOH
W

X55

BAT

PS

Q LOC

Q CON X71
BAT1 19...75V DC

EOW1 X37

X110
X106 X42

X34

RW1 OUT X67

X109

6U

System Description
Functioning

Fig. 2-15: OHAU subrack (illustrated with QD2 interface module)

2-17

2-18

EOW2 N X36

EOW2 A

ROH1 W

ECC
CALL

EOW2

RFCOH
E

SOH
ACC

SISA
0/N

SOH
EXT

X75

X74

ROH/WSC E

DSC 1...8 W

ROH/WSC W X73

X39

LON E

X82

RW2 IN X68

X112

ROH2 W

QW

QE

X66

X64

X76

LON W X38

X81

X102
X111

X63

X59

X56

RESET

SERV

X62

X117 RC SISA X31 EOW2 EXT X30 EOW1 EXT

X40 EOW1 INT S X51 SOH/E1 E X53 SOH/F1 E

RE1 OUT X60

X105
X101

SE1 IN X43

SOH1 E

SOH/E2 E

SE2 OUT

ROH1 E X107

X108

X107

ROH2 E

SW1 OUT

SOH2 W X113

SOH/WSC W X52 SOH/E W X115


X114

DSC 9...12 W X54 SOH/F1 W

SOH1 W SW2 IN

DSC 1...8 E

X103
SOH2 E X104

SOH/E2 W X35 EOW2 EXT S

DSC 9...12 E X41 EOW2 INT S

SOH/WSC E X45

X61

X65

X46

CALL

EOW1

X47 QSC EXT X33 EOW1 A X32 EOW1 EXT S

RFCOH
W

X55

BAT

PS

Q LOC

Q CON X71
BAT1 19...75V DC

EOW1 X37

X110
X42
X106

X34

RW1 OUT X67

X109

6U

Functioning
System Description

Fig. 2-16: OHAU subrack (illustrated with ECC Gateway module)

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

E2 64 kbit/s V.11 2+0

West

E2 64 kbit/s V.11 2+0

2 Mbit/s 1+0 / 2+0

2 Mbit/s 1+0 / 2+0

4x64 kbit/s 1+1

East

4x64 kbit/s 1+1

E1, F1 64 kbit/s 1+1

E1, F1 64 kbit/s 1+1


SOH Extension
Module
SOH
to/from
Modem

SOH
to/from
Modem
SOH Access Module

19...75 V

OHAU
PS

F RS 232
LON
Q RS 485

SISA 0N

19...75 V

RS 232
Q RS485
64 kbit/s 2+0 / V.11

QD2 Interface
Module
SISA K
EOW Module #2

RFCOH

PSTN EOW
Branch

RFCOH
Module West

RFCOH

RFCOH
Module East

EOW Module #1

Alternatively to the QD2 interface


module, the ECC Gateway
module can be used.

Remote
Handset
2W / 6W
2 Mbit/s 1+1 / 2+0

Analog
0.3-3.4 kHz

2 Mbit/s 1+1 / 2+0

4x64 kbit/s 1+1

4x64 kbit/s 1+1

4x64 kbit/s 1+1

4x64 kbit/s 1+1


ext. 4x64 kbit/s 1+1
4x64 kbit/s1+1

North

ECC Gateway
Module
SISA-V(K)

RS 232
Q RS485
LAN (10Base-T)

Fig. 2-17: Modules of the Overhead Access Unit

65.1220.000.02

2-19

Functioning

System Description

2.5.2 RFCOH Access Module (RFCOH module)


The RFCOH Access Module inserts the service channels into the RFCOH of the DPU/RPS STM-1
modules connected. Two RFCOH signals can be processed (East + West) and used to extract or insert
service channels with 1+1 protection. One RFCOH Access Module is appropriate for processing one
microwave radio side, i.e. it is required once in terminal stations and twice in regenerator stations.
The RFCOH module is available in two different versions which provide the following channels:
RFCOH 1:
4 x 64 kbit/s service channels in compliance with ITU-T G.703, codirectional 120 , 1+1
1 x 2 Mbit/s service channel in compliance with ITU-T G.703, 75 or 120 , 1+0 or 1+1
RFCOH 2:
8 x 64 kbit/s service channels in compliance with ITU-T G.703, codirectional 120 , 1+1
1 x 2 Mbit/s service channel in compliance with ITU-T G.703, 75 or 120 , 1+0 or 1+1
The first 64 kbit/s service channel can be routed internally via the subrack to EOW module 1 or 2 or to the
Q-interface module by software configuration.

2.5.3 EOW Module


The EOW module permits a digital 64 kbit/s service channel to be used for voice transmission. With a
telephone set connected to a Western socket, the following functions can be implemented:

Selective call
Group call
Collective call
Transmission of a test tone

The EOW module processes two 64 kbit/s directions which can be 1+1 protected. An analogue interface
of the EOW module permits the signals to be branched into further directions and analogue and digital
EOW networks to be interconnected. In addition, an analogue 2-wire interface is available for connecting a
parallel telephone extension.
Using the optional PSTN2w or PSTN6w modules, it is possible to set up a connection to a switching
network. With PSTN2w, the EOW module can be connected via a 2-wire interface (HKZ interface), with
PSTN6W via a 6-wire interface (4-wire plus E&M) to a PABX. With the PSTN6W option, only a point-topoint connection can be set up in the EOW network.
The EOW Branching option permits the digital signal to be branched into a third direction. For this
purpose, a 64 kbit/s interface in compliance with ITU-T G.703 (codirectional, 120 , 1+1) is implemented
as an external interface.
The digital signals can be internally routed to the SOH access module or the RFCOH access module by
software configuration.
One OHA unit can be equipped with a maximum of two EOW modules, e.g. for one omnibus and one
express channel.

2-20

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

2.5.4 SOH Access Module (SOHA Module)


The SOH Access module inserts service channels into the SOH of the DPU/RPS STM-1 module
connected. The occupancy of the SOH is depicted in Fig. 2-18.

RSOH

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

J0

B1

RF1

RF2

E1

F1

D1

RF3

RF4

D2

D3

Pointer

B2

MSOH

B2

B2

K1

A2

A2

K2

D4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

S1

M1

E2

Standardized bytes
A1, A2
B1, B2
J0
D1 - D3
D4 - D12
E1
E2
F1
K1, K2
S1
M1

Synchronization (A1: 11110110; A2: 00101000)


Performance
Regenerator Section Trace (Path ID)
Data Communication Channel (DCCR)
Data Communication Channel (DCCM)
Regenerator EOW (64 kbit/s)
Multiplex EOW (64 kbit/s or V.11)
Data Channel (64 kbit/s)
Bytes for Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)
Timing Marker
Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MS-REI)

Media-specific bytes
RF1
RF2
RF3
RF4

4-bit line ID, LA TX bit, ATPC bit,


1-bit HSB control or TX level,
1-bit polarization ID
1 parity bit, 7-bit line error pulses
8-bit protection control RPS
8-bit B2 value transmission

Optional service channels


( freely configurable bytes with B2 correction in the MSOH )
2112 kbit/s wayside
(2048 kbit/s, acc. ITU-T G.703)
288 kbit/s service channel
(4x64 kbit/s, codirectional acc. ITU-T G.703)

Fig. 2-18: Utilization of the STM-1 signal SOH

65.1220.000.02

2-21

Functioning

System Description

Two SOH signals for two directions (East + West) each can be processed and used to extract or insert
service channels with 1+1 protection. An SOH access module always processes one microwave radio
side and one line side, i.e. this module is required one time for each microwave radio terminal and
regenerator station.
The SOH module provides the following channels separately for East and West:

E1 byte, 64 kbit/s in compliance with ITU-T G.703, codirectional, 120 , 1+1


F1 byte, 64 kbit/s in compliance with ITU-T G.703, codirectional, 120 , 1+1
4x64 kbit/s in compliance with ITU-T G.703, codirectional, 120 , 1+1
1x 2 Mbit/s service channel in compliance with ITU-T G.703, 75 or 120 , 1+0 or 1+1

The 2 Mbit/s service channel occupies free bytes of the RSOH and MSOH. The B2 byte of the MSOH is
corrected so that the incoming performance data will not be falsified.
The 64 kbit/s service channels (E1, F1 bytes and one 64 kbit/s service channel) can be routed internally
via the subrack to EOW module 1 or 2 or to the Q-interface module by software configuration. Optionally,
the 2 Mbit/s service channel can be through-connected internally.

2.5.5 SOH Extension Module


The SOH extension module is used only in conjunction with the SOH access module. An SOH extension
module always processes one microwave radio side and one line side, i.e. this module is required one
time for each microwave radio terminal and regenerator station.
The SOH extension module supplies the E2 byte (V.11 interface) separately for East and West.
The B2 byte of the MSOH is corrected so that the performance data will not be falsified.
In conjunction with the ECC Gateway Module, the SOH Extension Module permits access to the DCCR or
DCCM channels in the SOH which are used to transmit network management information.

2.5.6 SISA-0N
The SISA-0N module converts the internal system bus (LON bus) to a Q-interface (QD2) and provides an
F-interface for connecting a Service PC (LMT). The SISA-0N module handles one direction with a
maximum configuration of 14+2. One SISA-0N module is required for each microwave radio terminal and
regenerator station (without protection = Radio-to-Radio).

2.5.7 QD2 Interface Module (QD2 IM)


The QD2 interface module converts the QD2 bus interface into a 64 kbit/s interface in compliance with
ITU-T G.703. The signals are transmitted with 1+1 protection in two directions. They can be internally
routed to the SOH access module or RFCOH access module by software configuration. A 1+1 protected
interface is also connected to the connecting panel and permits an external data line to be used.

2.5.8 ECC Gateway Module


The OHU can also be equipped with an ECC Gateway module instead of the QD2 interface module. The
application of the ECC Gateway module is possible only in conjunction with the SOH access module and
the SOH extension module. The ECC Gateway module permits access to the DCCR and DCCM channel
embedded in the SOH. In the headend, its LAN interface permits the direct connection of the TNM to
Q3p (i.e. using the OSI protocol stack) without requiring an external QD2 gateway. Two DCC signals
(East+West) can be transmitted bidirectionally with 1+1 protection. In the ECC Gateway module, the
concentrating function for the QD2 bus is implemented by software.

2-22

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

2.5.9 Overhead Access Unit Power Supply (OHAU PS)


The OHAU PS can be operated with an input voltage of 19 V to 75 V DC. One OHAU PS can power all
components of the Overhead Access Unit.

65.1220.000.02

2-23

Functioning

2.6

System Description

RPS-C

The RPS-C 7+1 central unit (Fig. 2-19) is composed of the transmit side, receive side and monitoring unit.
If required, it is integrated in the connecting panel of the Modem Unit. The RPS-C is redundantly supplied
by a modem unit.
By cascading two central units, it is possible to expand a protection switching configuration step by step.
The following table gives an overview of how the system can be expanded:
Pos.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Degree of expansion
Examples of a terminal
1+1 equipment protection
1+1 line protection
1+1 line protection
2+1 to 7+1
8+1 to 14+1
2+2 to 7+2
8+2 to 14+2

Number of
RPS-C 7+1 per
terminal
1
1
2
2
4

(1+1 HSB operation)


without OT of PR1
with OT of PR1
with or without OT of PR1
with or without OT of PR1
with or without OT of PR1 and PR2
with or without OT of PR1 and PR2

X11

OPn

Tx side

RPSC

X12
X13
from
X14
MU
X96, 100
(X90,92)
X15

X10

PR1/2

to
MU
X89, 91
(X95, 99)

X16
X17
X19

X18

X21

Rx side

RPSC #2

OPn

X22
X23
X20

PR1/2

X24

from
MU
X90, 92
(X96,100)

to
MU
X95, 99
(X89, 91)

X25
X26
X27
X28

Controller

X29

CAN termination
bus controlling
CAN W
LON W

X3
X1

X4

Neuron

X2

Electronic label
controlling

CAN E
LON E

Fig. 2-19: RPSC block diagram

2-24

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

The RPS-C 7+1 module is equipped with seven inputs and one output on the transmit side. The input is
switched for cascading two RPS-C 7+1s. Without cascade, it is terminated with an impedance of
75 Ohms. The RPS-C is controlled by the DPU/RPS-STM-1 modules superimposing a direct current (DC)
which activates the path via the coaxial inner conductor of the associated CMI data stream. From there
the switching diodes (low-capacity PIN diodes) are activated by means of a positive current and
deactivated by means of a negative current.
On the receive side, the RPS-C 7+1 module is equipped with an input for PR1 or PR2. The downstream
CMI branching amplifier supplies one output switched in cascade configurations or used for the outputside PR1 or PR2. The other amplifier output can be applied to any of the seven outputs which are
connected to the DPU/RPS-STM-1 modules of the operating channels. These modules are controlling
switching diodes.
All modem units and RPS-C 7+1 modules belonging to a n+2 configuration are interconnected in a closed
ring structure.

2.7

RPS-H

The RPS-H hot standby module controls the Tx-side RF switch and the Rx-side regulated RF coupler. In
addition, it applies the active ATPC signal to the active channel on both the Tx and Rx side.
If required, the RPS-H module is integrated in the cover of the modem unit connecting panel. It is supplied
redundantly by the modem unit.

65.1220.000.02

2-25

Functioning

2.8

System Description

Channel Branching Network

The channel branching network consists of a separate connecting unit with connecting circulator, i.e.
separate transmit and receive branches. An exception is made by the Tx/Rx-side connecting units in 1+1
HSB configurations.
The RF connecting unit is composed of the harmonic filter, bracket and diplexer circulator. A harmonic
filter limits undesired emission of harmonics. For patterns with small center gaps, a center gap filter (band
stop) is integrated in the Tx and Rx path.
The circulator paths of the Tx and Rx side are terminated on one side by means of an absorber. The
antenna waveguide is connected via a flexible coaxial cable with waveguide transition (PDR flange) and
air inlet to the RF connecting unit.
A single or double filter (diplexer) can be connected to each circulator. This type of multiple filters permit
the setup of low-loss branching networks, since only a reduced number of circulator runs is required. In
addition, the filter arrangement with diplexers permits very small RF channel spacings due to the
favourable group delay behaviour.
Fig. 2-21 shows a channel branching network with single filters for space diversity operation.
A channel branching network with space diversity and XPIC, where the two polarizations used are housed
in two racks, is depicted in Fig 2-22.

Fig. 2-20: RF filter and RF diplexer

2-26

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Functioning

PDR

PDR

RXD

RX

Fig. 2-21: Channel branching network for 1+0D

PDR

PDR

PDR

TX

PDR

RXD

RXD

RXD

RXD

RXD

RXD

RXD

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

Fig. 2-22: Channel branching network for 7+0DX, 6+1DX or 5+2DX

65.1220.000.02

2-27

Functioning

System Description

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

2-28

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Monitoring and Configuration

3 Monitoring and Configuration


In order to ensure that the status of the transmission link can be determined at any time, numerous
monitoring circuits are integrated in the modules.
Alarms and performance data are concentrated via an LON bus and can be passed via a Q-interface to a
Network Management System.
This interface makes available a local User Access Interface (F-interface), which permits the values of all
equipment-internal test points and settings to be requested in service. This interface can also be used for
configuring and controlling the digital microwave radio system.
Each module is equipped with a red LED which signals general alarms.
Modules with integrated power supply are also fitted with a green LED for monitoring the supply voltages
(24/48/60 V).
Optionally, main alarms can be made available via relay contacts.
In addition, it is possible to apply the AGC voltage of the receiver and the Tx level of the far end to a
recording device connected to the receiver (in 1+1 HSB configurations, the Tx level of the far end is not
available at this point).

65.1220.000.02

3-1

Monitoring and Configuration

System Description

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

3-2

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Integration into a TMN

4 Integration into a TMN


4.1

Introduction

The present chapter describes the integration of the MDRS 155 E Microwave Radio Unit in a control and
monitoring system. This task is solved by means of a Network Management System for
telecommunication networks (TMN; Telecommunication Management Network).
The MDRS 155 E can be connected to a TMN in several ways. One of them is the connection to a
hierarchical SISA infrastructure. The technology required for this purpose has already been used for
several years. Further connection options are using existing OSI or IP transport networks. The
implementation options are based on the SISA addressing scheme and are thus complementing the
classical type of connection.
In the following, the SISA bases are briefly explained (section 4.2). Then the protocol stacks used for
setting up the corresponding connections are indicated (section 4.6.) and the paths between the
monitoring system and network element are shown both logically and physically. Finally, an overview is
given of the performance features of the different modes.
The Operator Terminal (Chapter 5) is primarily used for commissioning and maintenance purposes.
However, it can also be used in places where a monitoring system is not available. Thus, it rounds off the
various control options of the ServiceOn Access in the downward direction.
The settings locally necessary for setting up a first communication link between the ServiceOn Access or
Operator Terminal and the MDRS 155 E during the commissioning process are described in Chapter 6.
After the address assignment, the applications (Chapter 7) can be configured either separately (SISA-,
OSI-, or IP-DCN) or arbitrarily mixed (section 7.4).

4.2

Introduction to the SISA network

The SISA network (Supervisory and Information System for local and remote Areas) is used for
information exchange (alarms, commands, measuring values etc.) between transmission equipment and
a monitoring system such as the ServiceOn Access Network Management System from Marconi.
Messages from local or remote transmission equipment, i.e. from the so-called Network Elements (NE),
are transmitted to the ServiceOn Access workstations. In addition, information (e.g. control commands,
requests etc.) is transmitted from the ServiceOn Access System to the network elements. Thus, both
control and monitoring of the individual network elements are ensured.
A SISA network (Data Communication Network (DCN)) always has a hierarchical tree structure based on
the Master/Slave concept. This hierarchical structure is set up by means of concentrators. Concentrators
fulfill a Master function and permit the connection of further network elements (Slaves). Regarding the
overall structure, Slaves are located on the hierarchy level directly below the associated Master. Provided
that a Slave operates itself as concentrator, it can represent again a Master function for the next lower
level. This principle leads to a tree structure which can be composed of up to nine hierarchy levels. Thus,
concentrators can operate both as Master and Slave, i.e. within the hierachical structure, they act as
Slaves towards the higher level and as Masters towards the lower level.
Concentrators can be implemented on a hardware basis (SISA-K) or on a software basis. The latter are
referred to as virtual concentrators (SISA-V).
The individual Slaves are physically connected to the QD2int bus which is in compliance with RS 485 and
has a transmission rate of 64 kbit/s. Up to 30 network elements can be connected to this bus.
In order to create redundancies to avoid operational interruptions in case of a failure, it is possible to set
up ring structures within the SISA network.
The connection between the SISA network and the ServiceOn Access LAN/WAN is set up via a QD2
Gateway. The ServiceOn Access System can be connected to several QD2 Gateways.
The figure depicted below shows these relations and gives a first overview of network element addressing
described in the next chapter.

65.1220.000.02

4-1

Integration into a TMN

System Description

LAN/WAN
Network no. 1

Network no. 2

QD-2
Gateway

QD-2
Gateway

1:1

2:1

SISA-K
1:1.1

SISA-K
1:1.1.1

NE

1:1.2

SISA-K
2:1.1

NE

NE

1:1.1.2

1:1.1.3

NE

NE

2:1.2

NE

Fig. 4-1: Structure of a QD2-SISA network

4.3

Network element addressing

To identify individual network elements, they are assigned their own node numbers. These node numbers
lie in the following ranges:

1 - 30: The higher-order concentrator is a SISA-K.


1 - 254: The higher-order concentrator is a SISA-V.

All network elements of the same hierarchical level must have their own, unique addresses.
To be able to address a network element within the entire SISA network, all addresses of the higher-order
connecting elements (switching nodes) must be known.
Each SISA network connected via a QD2 Gateway to the ServiceOn Access System is assigned a
network number by the latter.
The overall address of a network element is a sequence of all addresses of the individual connecting
elements from the top of the tree down to the respective network element complying with the following
conventions:
<Network no.> : <Level 1> . <Level 2> . < ... > . <Level n> . <Node no.>

Thus, a possible address could be 2:1.2. For further examples, please refer to the figure depicted above.
The node numbers assigned to the concentrators lead to another level set up via this number.
When assigning addresses, please note that the first concentrator below the QD2 Gateway must always
be assigned node no. 1.

4-2

65.1220.000.02

System Description

4.4

Integration into a TMN

Basic information on protocols

The present section gives only a brief overview of the OSI 7-Layer model (Open Systems Interconnection)
with its protocol stacks, their basic meaning and fundamental relations.
The 7-Layer model is used as guideline for data transmission and is composed as follows:

Application

Application

Presentation

Presentation

Control

4
3

Transport

Transport

Switching

Switching

Protection

Protection

Physical layer

Physical layer

2
1

Control

Transport-oriented

Application-oriented

Layers

Fig. 4-2: OSI 7-Layer model


This model permits an even rougher classification, i.e. the three top layers are application-oriented and
describe how the traffic data are processed and displayed. In addition, they determine the way
communication with the partner takes place. The four bottom layers are used for a secure transport of this
information to the correct destination.
The tasks of the individual layers are fulfilled by so-called protocols. Since the individual protocols are
located on top of each other just like in a stack, this arrangement is also referred to as protocol stack.
Regarding the communication between the transmitter and receiver, there is a protocol stack on each side
of the link and each level sees the information exchange in such a way as if it would directly communicate
with the far end at the same level.
Communication between the transmitter and receiver takes place according to the following concept:
On the transmit side, the traffic data are assembled in Layer 7 and passed on to the next lower level. The
latter accepts the informtion made available and executes its specific tasks. Then it complements this
information by adding its own control information (header), so that the equivalent Layer on the far end can
correctly interpret the information received. This procedure is now continued up to Layer 2. The
information to be transmitted now has the following structure:

Header
Layer 1

Header
Layer 2

Header
Layer 3

Header
Layer 4

Header
Layer 5

Header
Layer 6

Data

Fig. 4-3: Data packaging in the individual protocol layers


This overall packet is now physically passed on to the transmission medium. When this information is
received on the Rx side, each layer evaluates the header determined for it.

65.1220.000.02

4-3

Integration into a TMN

System Description

Afterwards the complete information (reduced by the actual header) is passed on to the next higher layer,
i.e. the traffic data of Layer 7 are unpacked step by step. These data are finally transported to the higherorder application. Please note that not all layers of the OSI model have to be implemented. Depending on
the tasks to be fulfilled and conditions, it is possible that some layers do not have to be explicitly
implemented.

4.5

SISA protocols

SISA information is exchanged using two protocols. The actual information is created/read by means the
User protocol and sent to the correct receiver by means of the Switching protocol. These two protocol
types are briefly described in the following two sections.

4.5.1 User protocol (AWP01)


The User protocol (Layer 7 and 6) includes information exchanged between the network element and
monitoring system. Thus, data indicating the operational status of a network element can be sent to the
ServiceOn Access Network Management System. On the other hand, network element settings can also
be made via ServiceOn Access. Five different options are available for information exchange:
Command (Com.)

Commands are used to send setting parameters or other commands to the


network element. The latter acknowledges the reception.

Request (Requ.)

Requests are used to request current information from the network element.
Requests can be addressed to one or more functional units. If a request is to
be sent to several functional units, this is done by means of collective
addressing.

Acknowledgement

Acknowledgments are, for example, answers to commands. They inform the


operator that
- the command sent has been received and
- whether the command can be executed in this form.
In addition, acknowledgement messages are sent back to the requesting party,
if the request cannot be answered.

Response (Resp.)

Responses are reactions to a request and supply the requested information.


If a request cannot be answered with the required information, a negative
acknowledgement will be transmitted. In case of collective addressing, only
functional units capable of supplying the requested information will send a
response message. Negative acknowledgements will not be sent in this case.

Spontaneous message
(Spo) - Event

Spontaneous messages, i.e. events, are transmitted by a network element in


the direction of the ServiceOn Access Network Management System evenever
modifications to be signalled have occurred in the network element. In the
"Maintenance" mode, certain spontaneous messages are suppressed.

4.5.2 Switching protocol (VMP01)


Within a network element, data are transmitted to their destination using the Switching protocol (VMP01)
(see Figure below). This switching process takes place via up to four ports.

4-4

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Integration into a TMN

Local Maintenance Terminal PC (LMT)

Information flow to the ServiceON Access System

VM
P0

Port f

Port e

Own SISA data (AWP01)

Port d

Port a

To further network elements connected to the


QD2int bus as Slaves

Fig. 4-4: Switching protocol (VMP01)


Meaning of the individual ports:
Port d:
Port f:
Port e:
Port a:

Ascending in the ServiceOn Access direction


LMT interface of the network element
Own data of the network element
Descending in the direction of lower-order Slaves
This port is available only on concentrators.

If SISA information is transmitted, for example, to the ServiceOn Access Network Management System,
this information enters the switching node at Port e using the Application protocol and is transmitted via
port d and the lower-order protocols in the ServiceOn Access direction.
From the switching view, a SISA network is regarded as a network composed of switching nodes.
Switching sections
Starting node
Information
source

Switching
node

Destination node
Switching
node

Switching
node

Information
sink

Local Exchange

Fig. 4-5: Switching structure


A complete set of addresses of a node includes the respective node number of the switching node and
port. In order to set up the path from the information source to the sink, the addresses of all intermediate
switching nodes are necessary.

65.1220.000.02

4-5

Integration into a TMN

4.6

System Description

Connection of MDRS 155 E to the ServiceOn Access System

As depicted below, the MDRS 155 E can be connected to the ServiceOn Access Network Management
System in two different ways.

Connection to
ServiceON Access

via SISA-DCN
indirectly

directly
RS-485
(QD2-Slave or QD2-SISA-V)

via IP-DCN

via OSI-DCN

via DCCR or DCCM


(QD2-via-SISA-V)

directly
LAN (OSI)
(Q3p-SISA-V)

directly

indirectly
via DCCR or DCCM
(Q3p-SISA-V)

LAN (IP)
(IP-SISA-V or Q3I-SISA-V)

indirectly
via DCCR or DCCM
(IP-via-SISA-V)

Fig. 4-6: Connecting options to ServiceOn Access


A direct connection can be set up via the respective physical interfaces (RS-485 with SISA-DCN, LAN
(10BaseT) for OSI-DCN or IP-DCN). An indirect connection is set up by embedding the SISA
Management information in the STM-1 signal. In this case, SISA data are transported in the internal
communication channel, i.e. in the so-called ECC (Embedded Control Channel) reserved for management
purposes.
The ECC can be implemented on the DCCM or DCCR. The DCCM is composed of bytes D4 to D12 of the
STM-1 signal SOH, while the DCCR is composed of D1 to D3. Since - according to the SDH standard - the
MDRS can be considered as a regenerator, the DCCR must be used. The DCCM may be used by
multiplexers only. Nevertheless, DCCs cannot be configured in the MDRS, since most of the multiplexers
cannot support both DCCs.
In this case, the DCCM is configured as ECC and the DCCR is switched through transparently. In this case,
the B2 bytes are modified in order to avoid malinterpretations by the adjacent multiplexers.
From the view of the ServiceOn Access Network Management System, it is of no importance as to which
transport layers are used to transmit the SISA protocol. TCP/IP and OSI-TP4 (OSI transport) are used as
transport systems. The QD2 Gateway exclusively uses the TCP/IP, whereas in case of a connection set
up via the LAN interface, both OSI-TP4 and TCP/IP are supported. Transmission via the ECC always
takes place via OSI-TP4.

4.7

Protocol stacks of interfaces

4.7.1 QD2 interface


The QD2 interface is used to connect the MDRS 155 E Microwave Radio System to a SISA-DCN. In
addition, it is also possible to connect a QD2 network, provided that the system operates as Master. The
protocol stack of this interface is described in the following overview.
OSI layer
User protocol (AWP01)

Layers 4 to 8 are not used.

Switching protocol (VMP01)

HDLC (Multidrop)

RS-485

QD2 interface

Fig. 4-7: Structure of the QD2 protocol stack


4-6

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Integration into a TMN

The data transmission protocol ensures a secure and bit-error-free transmission of the SISA data (AWP01
and VMP01) using the HDLC procedure. From the physical view, these data are finally transported via a
serial RS-485 4-wire interface.

4.7.2 OSI protocol stack


The OSI protocol stack is composed as depicted below. The SISA-specific data of the User and Switching
protocols are transported using the OSI-TP4 protocol and the lower-order layers either via the LAN
interface or the ECC to their destination.
OSI Layer
User protocol (AWP01)
Switching protocol (VMP01)

Layers 5 and 6 are not used.

OSI transport layer class 4 (TP4)

Network layer

X.214, X.224
(ISO 8072, ISO 8072/AD2, ISO 8073, ISO 8073/AD2)

CLNS - ISO 8473 (ISO 8348/DAD1)


ES-IS - ISO 9542 / IS-IS - ISO 10589

LAPD, Q.921
DCCR

DCCM

ECC transmission

LLC - ISO 8802-2 (Type 1)


MAC: CSMA/CD - ISO 8802-3

LAN

LAN interface

Fig. 4-8: OSI protocol stack


Routing functionality
Layer-3 routing protocols always use the shortest path for information exchange between the transmitter
and receiver. For this purpose, each network element informs all other network elements within an SDH
network (routing area) on the adjacent network elements connected to it. Based on this information, each
network element creates a routing table which includes the shortest path (lowest number of LEs) to each
destination within the routing area. These routing tables are updated after each topology modification or at
regular intervals.

65.1220.000.02

4-7

Integration into a TMN

System Description

4.7.3 TCP/IP protocol stack


The TCP/IP interface is used to connect the MDRS 155 E to a TCP/IP-DCN. The protocol stack of this
interface is depicted in the following figure.

OSI layer
User protocol (AWP01)
Switching protocol (VMP01)

Layers 5 to 6 are not used.

TCP

IP

LLC - ISO 8802-2 (Type 1)


MAC: CSMA/CD - ISO 8802-3

10BaseT

LAN interface
Fig. 4-9: Structure of the TCP/IP protocol stack
Thanks to the support of the standardized TCP/IP protocols, the local network element can be connected
to the TMN using TCP/IP networks. Error-free SISA data transmission (AWP01 and VMP01) is ensured
by the LLC and MAC protocols. Physically, data transport takes place via a 10BaseT interface.

4.7.4 Multi-protocol stack


The following figure shows the interaction of the multi-protocol stack implemented.

OSI layer
User protocol (AWP01)

Switching protocol (VMP01)


Layers 5 and 6
are not
used.

Layers 5 and 6 are not used.

Layer 4
not used

Layer 4
not used

Switching protocol
(VMP01)
HDLC (Multidrop)

TC57

RS-485

RS-232

QD2 interface

MSP

OSI Transport Layer - Class 4 (TP4)


X.214, X.224
(ISO 8072, ISO 8072/AD2, ISO 8073, ISO 8073/AD2)

TCP

IP

Network Layer

Layer 3
not used

CLNS - ISO 8473 (ISO 8348/DAD1)


ES-IS - ISO 9542 / IS-IS - ISO 10589

LAPD, Q.921
DCCR

DCCM

ECC transmission

LLC - ISO 8802-2 (Type 1)


MAC: CSMA/CD - ISO 8802-3

10BaseT

2
1

LAN interface

Fig. 4-10: Structure of the QD2/OSI/TCP/IP multi-protocol stack

4-8

65.1220.000.02

System Description

4.8

Integration into a TMN

Connection using a SISA-DCN

The network elements are connected via the QD2 interface to a SISA-DCN. The SISA management
information is transported to the remote network elements via the ECC or OSI-LAN.
The network element connected via the QD2 interface to the SISA-DCN can be regarded as OSI-IP
Gateway (GNE) - or SISA-Gateway - provided that it is operated in the QD2-SISA-V mode. When
operated in the same mode, further network elements can be connected to this Gateway network
element.
OSI-TP4 connections managed by the Gateway are set up via the ECC of the STM-1 signal or via the
LAN interface.
If the network element is operated in the QD2-Slave mode, there is no Gateway function.

4.8.1 QD2 Slave mode


In this mode, the MDRS 155 E acts as a pure Slave within a QD2-DCN. The corresponding connection is
shown in the following figure.

Physical connection to
ServiceOn Access

Logic connection to
ServiceOn Access
(MDRS 155 E w/o ECC-Gateway, but with SISA-0/N)

SOA
OS of SOA
LAN (IP)

SISA-I

QD-2
Gateway

SISA-KR
Network 1

SISA-K

SISA-K

QD2 station but (RS-485)

1:1
1:1.4

MDRS 155 E

SISA-V

QD2-Slave

1:1.4.1

Agent

1:1.4.29

XQI

Fig. 4-11: QD2 Slave mode

65.1220.000.02

4-9

Integration into a TMN

System Description

4.8.2 QD2-SISA-V mode


In this operating mode, a SISA-V is activated. This SISA-V is connected via the QD2 interface to the
QD2int bus. Below this virtual concentrator, another SISA-V is displayed which can be used to connect up
to two elements: The agent of MDRS 155 E (fixed node no. 1) and a XQI (fixed node no. 29) which
controls and monitors the input and output interfaces. The higher-order SISA-V can manage up to
30 network elements, i.e. up to 29 remote network elements can be connected via the ECC using the
QD2-via-SISA-V operating mode.
Logic connection
to ServiceOn Access
(MDRS 155 E with ECC-Gateway)

Physical connection
to ServiceOn Access
SOA

OS of SOA
SISA-I

LAN (IP)

Network x

QD2
Gateway

SISA-KR

SISA-K

SISA-K
x:1

QD2 station bus (RS-485)

MDRS 155 E

ECC Gateway

x:1.7

ECC

SISA-V

QD2-SISA-V

Up to 29 further network elements


can be connected via theECC.

x:1.7.1
Master

LAN (OSI)
(for connecting further MDRS NEs)

SISA-V
RS-485
x:1.7.1.1

SISA-V
x:1.7.1.1.1

Agent

MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

x:1.7.1.1.29

XQI

Fig. 4-12: QD2-SISA-V mode

4.8.3 QD2-via-SISA-V mode


This operating mode represents the counter-part of the mode described above and has been provided for
cases where there are no SISA transport paths to a remote element. The individual network elements are
connected via the ECC or OSI-LAN to the higher-order SISA-V operated in the QD2-SISA-V mode.
The local SISA-V can control up to three elements:
the local agent (fixed node no. 1);
the XQI (fixed node no. 29);
the QD2 station bus (with MDRS 155 E for QD2 connection).

4-10

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Integration into a TMN

Physical connection
to ServiceOn Access

Logic connection
to ServiceOn Access
(MDRS 155 E with ECC Gateway)

SOA

OS of SOA
SISA-I
IP connection

LAN (IP)
Network x

QD2
Gateway

SISA-KR

SISA-K

SISA-K

OSI-TP4 connection

x:1
QD2 station bus (RS-485)
ECC Gateway

x:1.z

QD2-SISA V

ECC

QD2-via-SISA V

MDRS 155 E

Up to 29 further
network elements
can be connected via
the ECC.

x:1.z.a
Master

ECC

MDRS 155 E

ECC Gateway

ECC Gateway

SISA-V

MDRS 155 E
ECC

SISA-V

QD2-via-SISA V

x:1.z.b
Master

RS-485

QD2 station bus (RS-485)

x:1.z.a.1

SISA-V
x:1.z.a.1.1

x:1.z.c
Master

SISA-V

SISA-V

RS-485
MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

x:y.z.a.1.29

Agent

XQI

x:1.z.b.1

SISA-V
x:1.z.b.1.1

Agent

RS-485
MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

x:1.z.b.1.29

XQI

MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

x:1.z.c.1

SISA-V
x:1.z.c.1.1

x:1.z.c.2

x:1.z.c.3

NE

NE

x:1.z.c.1.29

Agent

XQI

Fig. 4-13: QD2-via-SISA-V mode (MDRS 155 E with ECC Gateway)

4.9

Connection set up using an OSI-DCN (Q3p-SISA-V)

The present chapter describes the Q3p-SISA-V mode which requires an OSI-DCN for setting up the
connection to the ServiceOn Access System. In this case, the SISA management information is
transported either via the LAN interface or the ECC. The MDRS 155 E connected via the LAN interface to
ServiceOn Access is referred to as Gateway Network Element (GNE) - or OSI Gateway. The SISA
information of the remote network elements is transmitted via the ECC of the STM-1 signal and
exchanged between SISA-O and SISA-V via an OSI-TP4 link.
The SISA-V of the NEs controls up to three elements:
the local agent (fixed node no. 1)
the XQI (fixed node no. 29)
the QD2 station bus (with MDRS 155 E for QD2 connection).
To enable communication with ServiceOn Access, the SISA-O (SISA-OSI) process must be started up on
the ServiceOn Access side. This process can be used to manage up to 50 network elements. In all
configuration variants, each MDRS requires only one connection to ServiceOn Access to connect up to
50 network elements per SISA-O. Up to four SISA-Os can be activated per monitoring system.
On startup of SISA-O, the ServiceOn Access System assigns an NE access number. In the course of the
commissioning process of MDRS 155 E, this access number must be indicated in the TSAP address
settings (see section 6.2.3) to enable communication with the corresponding SISA-O.
Physical connection to
ServiceOn Access

Logic connection to ServiceOn Access (MDRS 155 E with ECC Gateway)

OS of TMN

OSI-TP4 connection

SISA-0

SOA

1:1
ECC Gateway

ECC Gateway

LAN/MAN (OSI)

1:1.1
Master

1:1.2
Master

SISA-V

SISA-V

MDRS 155 E

RS-485

Q3p-SISA V

1:1.1.1

ECC

MDRS 155 E
Q3p-SISA V

ECC

MDRS 155 E
Q3p-SISA V

QD2 station bus (RS-485)

ECC

SISA-V
1:1.1.1.1

Agent

ECC Gateway

1:1.254
Master

SISA-V

RS-485
MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

1:1.1.1.29

XQI

1:1.2.1

SISA-V
1:1.2.1.1

Agent

RS-485
MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

1:1.2.1.29

XQI

MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

1:1.254.1

SISA-V
1:1.254.1.1

1:1.254.2

NE

1:1.254.1.29

Agent

XQI

Fig. 4-14: Setup of a TMN connection via the LAN interface and ECC

65.1220.000.02

4-11

1:1.254.30

NE

Integration into a TMN

System Description

4.10 Connection set up using a IP-DCN


The present chapter describes the IP-SISA-V and IP-via-SISA-V operating modes used to set up the
connection to the ServiceOn Access System via a IP-DCN. In this case, an IP-DCN is required. SISA
management information is transported via the LAN interface. Remote network elements can be
connected via the ECC.
The IP connection type is derived from the QD2 connection described (QD2-SISA-V or QD2-via-SISA-V)
and covers the same functionalities.
The network element connected to the IP-DCN via the LAN interface can be regarded as Gateway (GNE)
- or IP Gateway. It is operated in the IP-SISA-V mode. Further network elements operated in the IP-viaSISA-V mode can be connected to this Gateway network element. OSI-TP4 connections managed by the
Gateway are then set up via the ECC of the STM-1 signal.
To enable communication with ServiceOn Access, the SISA-I (SISA-IP) process must be started up on
the ServiceOn Access side. This process can be used to manage up to 50 IP connections. Up to twelve
SISA-Is can be activated per monitoring system. Thus, a monitoring system can manage up to 600 IP
connections. Each MDRS 155 E system operated as Gateway (IP-SISA-V mode) requires only one
connection to ServiceOn Access.
On startup of SISA-I, the ServiceOn Access System assigns a NE access number. In the course of the
commissioning process of MDRS 155 E, this access number must be indicated in the TSAP/IP address
settings (see section 6.3) to enable communication with the corresponding SISA-I.
Another operating mode called Q3I-SISA-V rounds off the IP modes. In this mode, the network element
can be connected without an additional SISA-V. Remote network elements cannot be connected via the
ECC.

4.10.1 IP-SISA-V mode


In this mode, a SISA-V connected via the LAN interface to an IP-DCN is activated. Below this virtual
concentrator, another SISA-V is displayed which can be used to connect up to two elements: The agent of
MDRS 155 E (fixed node no. 1) and a XQI (fixed node no. 29) which controls and monitors the input and
output interfaces. The higher-order SISA-V can manage up to 30 network elements, i.e. up to 29 remote
network elements can be connected via the ECC using the IP-via-SISA-V operating mode.
Physical connection to
ServiceOn Access

Logic connection to
ServiceOn Access
(MDRS 155 E with ECC Gateway)

SOA
OS of SOA
LAN/MAN (IP)

SISA-I
x:1
IP connection

IP

IP

MDRS

IP-SISA-V

ECC

ECC Gateway

x:1.1

SISA-V

Up to 29 further network
elements can be connected
via the ECC.

x:1.1.1
Master

SISA-V
RS-485
x:1.1.1.1

SISA-V
x:1.1.1.1.1

Agent

MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

x:1.1.1.1.29

XQI

Fig. 4-15: IP-SISA-V mode and connection to an IP-LAN

4-12

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Integration into a TMN

4.10.2 IP-via-SISA-V mode


This operating mode represents the counter-part of the mode described above and has been provided for
cases where there are no SISA transport paths to a remote element. The individual network elements are
connected via the ECC to the higher-order SISA-V operated in the IP-SISA-V mode.
The local SISA-V can control up to three elements:
the local agent (fixed node no. 1);
the XQI (fixed node no. 29);
the QD2 station bus (with MDRS 155 E for QD2 connection).
Physical connection
to ServiceOn Access

Logic connection
to ServiceOn Access
(MDRS 155 E with ECC Gateway)

SOA

OS of SOA
x:1

SISA-I
IP connection

LAN/MAN (IP)

IP

IP

OSI-TP4 connection

ECC Gateway

x.1.1

ECC Gateway

ECC Gateway

SISA-V
MDRS 155 E

x:1.1.1
Master

IP-SISA-V

SISA-V

ECC

MDRS 155 E
IP-via-SISA-V

ECC

MDRS 155 E

ECC

x:1.1.2
Master

SISA-V

QD2 station bus (RS-485)

x:1.1.1.1.1

SISA-V

RS-485
MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

x:1.1.1.1.29

Agent

x:1.1.3
Master

SISA-V

RS-485
x:1.1.1.1

IP-via-SISA-V

Up to 29 further
network elements
can beconnected
via theECC.

x:1.1.2.1

SISA-V
x:1.1.2.1.1

XQI

Agent

RS-485
MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

x:1.1.3.1

SISA-V
x:1.1.3.1.1

x:1.1.2.1.29

XQI

Agent

MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

x:1.1.3.2

x:1.1.3.3

NE

NE

x:1.1.3.1.29

XQI

Fig. 4-16: IP-via-SISA-V mode (MDRS 155 E with ECC Gateway)

4.10.3 Q3I-SISA-V mode


In this operating mode, the network element is connected to an IP-DCN via the LAN interface.
Communication between the SOA and network element takes place via an IP link between the SISA-I and
SISA-V. The local SISA-V can control up to three elements:
the local agent (fixed node no. 1);
the XQI (fixed node no. 29);
the QD2 station bus (with MDRS 155 E for QD2 connection)
Physical connection
to ServiceOn Access
SOA

Logic connection
to ServiceOn Access
(MDRS 155 E with ECC Gateway)
OS of TMN
SISA-I
1:1

IP connection

LAN/MAN (IP)

MDRS
Q3I-SISA V
QD2 station bus (RS-485)

ECC Gateway

1:1.1
Master

SISA-V
RS-485
1:1.1.1

SISA-V
1:1.1.1.1

MDRS 155 E
(w/o QD2 term. set)

1:1.1.2

NE

1:1.1.30

NE

1:1.1.1.29

Agent

XQI

Fig. 4-17: Q3I-SISA-V mode

65.1220.000.02

4-13

Integration into a TMN

System Description

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

4-14

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Operator Terminal PC

5 Operator Terminal PC (MSP)


The Operator Terminal PC with the corresponding MSP program is especially used for MDRS 155 E
commissioning and maintenance. The MSP program can address not only MDRS 155 E but also other
network element types.
The address setting required for the initial commissioning of the network element can be performed only
by means of the MSP. Only after adjusting the correct address, the network element can be controlled and
monitored by ServiceOn Access. The MSP also permits control and monitoring tasks to be executed in
service on the MDRS 155 E.
The connection of the Operator Terminal PC (MSP) to MDRS 155 E can be set up as follows:
Direct connection to the MSP interface (RS-232, X601) on the ECC Gateway
module;
Modem connection
Logon to a remote MDRS 155 E is also possible depending on the ServiceOn Access System.

5.1

Direct connection to the MSP interface

The front panel of the ECC Gateway module is equipped with a MSP interface (RS-232, X601)
appropriate for connecting an Operator Terminal PC for controlling the MDRS 155 E.
The protocol stack depicted below is used for communication between the Operator Terminal PC and the
MDRS 155 E. The Operator Terminal PC can either communicate with MDRS 155 E locally via the
RS-232 interface, TC57 and the TP4 user interface or remotely (via the ECC or the LAN using the OSI
protocol stack).

OSI Layer
User protocol (AWP01)

Switching protocal (VMP01)


Local connection

Layers 5 and 6 are not used.

OSI transport layer, class 4 (TP4)


X.214, X.224
(ISO 8072, ISO 8072/AD2, ISO 8073, ISO 8073/AD2)

Remote
connection

Network layer

CLNS - ISO 8473 (ISO 8348/DAD1)


ES-IS - ISO 9542 / IS-IS - ISO 10589

LAPD, Q.921
DCCR

DCCM

ECC transmission

LLC - ISO 8802-2 (Type 1)


MAC: CSMA/CD - ISO 8802-3

TC57

LAN

RS 232

Q3p interface

PC interface

Fig. 5-1: Protocol stack for connect. Operator Terminal PC via serial PC interface

65.1220.000.02

5-1

Operator Terminal PC

5.2

System Description

LAN/WAN connection via TCP/IP

A TCP/IP connection between the MDRS 155 E and MSP can also be set up via the serial RS-232 PC
interface.
This method offers the advantage that remote MDRS 155 E systems can be easily addressed.
A possible example of a TCP/IP connection is depicted in the following figure.
MSP

DHCP Server
LAN/WAN
Internet or Intranet

BOOTP Server
LAN/WAN

LAN
LAN
RS232

RS232

ECC Gateway
Module

MDRS 155 E

ECC Gateway
Module
ECC

MDRS 155 E

ECC Gateway
Module
ECC

MDRS 155 E

QD2 Master RS-485


QD2 station bus

NE

NE

Fig. 5-2: TCP/IP connection between the MDRS 155 E and MSP
In this case, the MDRS 155 E is connected via an interface converter to a LAN/WAN. The Operator
Terminal PC is also connected to a LAN/WAN. Both LAN/WANs are interconnected either via the Internet
or an Intranet. The transition between the LAN and the RS-232 interface of the Operator Terminal PC is
implemented by a NPort Server (e.g. from MOXA).
For setting up the connection, both the MDRS 155 E and the Operator Terminal PC still require some IP
address information (IP address, sub-net mask, IP address of the default Gateway). These addresses
must be adjusted by the MSP via the PC interface.
The Operator Terminal PC can get its IP address information in the following ways:

Via the own system configuration


Via a DHCP Server. This method is normally used in PC networks. The DHCP Server
administers the IP address information of the PC network. This information is transmitted
as soon as the Operator Terminal PC is booted.

The MSP can also set up remote connections to further network elements. For this purpose, a TCP/IP
connection is first set up to the MDRS 155 E. Then a remote logon is performed via the ECC to the
desired element.
Only one MSP connection can be set up to the MDRS 155 E at a time. If a TCP/IP connection already
exists, additional connection commands (via TCP/IP or the serial PC interface) will be rejected. If a
connection via the serial PC interface already exists, an additional TCP/IP connection to the MDRS 155 E
cannot be set up.
Protection against unauthorized access:
The Network Administrator must ensure that unauthorized access to the MRS 155 E is not possible via
the TCP/IP connection. Such an unauthorized access could be prevented, for example, by installing a
firewall in the LAN of the MDRS 155 E.

5-2

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Operator Terminal PC

5.2.1 IP address information for MDRS 155 E


The IP address information covers settings which must always be defined for IP networks (networks used
for TCP/IP data exchange). Normally, the MDRS 155 E is integrated in an already existing LAN. For this
IP network, the IP address information has already been planned and implemented. For this reason, the
address settings for the MDRS 155 E must be adapted to the already existing structure. The following IP
address information must therefore be made available by the IP Network Administrator:
IP address:
The IP address, e.g. 144.130.012.004, is used for an unambiguous identification of the unit within the
Internet/Intranet.
Sub-net mask:
Using the sub-net mask, e.g. 255.255.0.0, and the IP address, it is possible to determine whether the
MDRS 155 E and Operator Terminal PC are located in the same or in different IP networks. If the
MDRS 155 E and Operator Terminal PC are located in different IP networks, the interconnection between
these two networks is set up via an Intranet or the Internet.
IP address of the default Gateway:
If the MDRS 155 E and Operator Terminal PC are located in different IP networks, an Intranet or the
Internet must be used for data exchange between these two networks. The connection to such a
transmission network is performed using a Router or Gateway, whose IP address must be known to the
MDRS 155 E.
This IP address information is memorized in the MDRS 155 E in an EEPROM. Any modification of these
configuration data via the LMT results in a reset of the MDRS 155 E.

5.2.2 IP address information for the Operator Terminal PC


The IP address information necessary for the MDRS 155 E is also required for the Operator Terminal PC.
It is entered either manually at the Operator Terminal PC or supplied by a DHCP server.
For setting up a connection to MDRS 155 E, it is also possible to use alphanumeric names such as helios
instead of the IP addresses, provided that a name resolution between the IP address and alphanumeric
name is performed in the IP network of the Operator Terminal PC. This name resolution could, for
example, be performed by a DNS server.

5.2.3 Protocol stack of the TCP/IP connection


The protocol stack shown below is used for the TCP/IP connection between the Operator Terminal PC
and MDRS 155 E. In this case, the Operator Terminal PC communicates via the TCP/IP connection and
TP4 user interface with the MDRS 155 E. Remote connections to other network elements are set up via
the ECC.

65.1220.000.02

5-3

Operator Terminal PC

System Description

For the connection between the MSP and MDRS 155 E, the port address of the TCP protocol has been
adjusted to 41300.

OSI Layer
User protocol (AWP01)

Switching protocol (VMP01)


Local connection to the NE
addressed via TCP/IP

Layers 5 and 6 are not used!

OSI transport layer, class 4 (TP4)


X.214, X.224
(ISO 8072, ISO 8072/AD2, ISO 8073, ISO 8073/AD2)

Network layer

Remote
conn.

CLNS - ISO 8473 (ISO 8348/DAD1)


ES-IS - ISO 9542 / IS-IS - ISO 10589

Network layer

TCP: RFC 793, 896


ICMP: RFC 792
IP: RFC 791

LAPD, Q.921
DCCR

Transport layer

DCCM
ECC transmission

LLC - ISO 8802-2 (Type 1)


MAC: CSMA/CD - ISO 8802-3

10 BaseT

LAN interface

Fig. 5-3: Protocol stack for connecting the Operator Terminal PC via TCP/IP

5.3

Modem connection

The connection of the MSP to MDRS 155 E can also be set up via a modem link.
MSP
Modem

Modem
MDRS 155 E

Modem connection

MSP interface

Fig. 5-4: Connection of the Operator Terminal PC via a modem connection


In this case, one of the two modems is connected to the PC interface of the MDRS 155 E, while the
second modem is connected to the RS-232 interface of the Operator Terminal PC.
Before this link can be used, both modems must be configured using a PC and an appropriate Terminal
program, e.g. HyperTerminal of Win95.
The protocol stack depicted for the "LAN/WAN connection via TCP/IP is also used for this type of
connection.

5-4

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Applications

6 Addresses for Connection Setup to ServiceOn Access


In order to ensure that a connection can be set up between the ServiceOn Access System and the
MDRS 155 E, some addresses must be adjusted by means of the Operator Terminal PC in the scope of
the initial commissioning process.

6.1

Addresses for a direct QD2 connection

In this case (QD2 Slave mode), only the corresponding node no. must be assigned.

6.2

Addresses for OSI transport

For transporting SISA data using the OSI protocol stack, an OSI transport address is required. This
address is composed of the following two parts:

Transport layer address (Transport Service Access Point TSAP, layer 4) and
Network layer address (Network Service Access Point, NSAP, layer 3).

6.2.1 TSAP addresses


In addition to NSAP addresses, TSAP addresses (Transport Service Access Point) are required for setting
up transport links. They are also used to assign

Node numbers and


NE access numbers
(for the ServiceOn Access and redundant ServiceOn Access System).

TSAP addresses are composed of two bytes separated by a dot. The node numbers and NE access
numbers are contained in the last byte. The first byte is 0 in this case.
Example of a TSAP address:

000.001

Depending on the operating mode adjusted, the Agent and/or SISA-V appear in the MDRS 155 E. Node
numbers and NE access numbers must be adjusted for both of them.
If a redundant ServiceOn Access System is available, the NE access number of this latter must also be
adjusted.

6.2.2 NSAP addresses


Using NSAP addresses (Network Service Access Point), a network element can set up a TP4 connection
to ServiceOn Access or any other network element. The NSAP addresses of both the transmitter and
receiver are required for communication.
The NSAP address of a Routing Domain (i.e. a closed entity) has a fixed format. A Routing Domain
represents a higher-order combination of all Intermediate Systems (IS) and all End Systems (ES) using a
common routing protocol. An End System such as ServiceOn Access can only transmit or receive
messages. Intermediate Systems can also route messages. A Routing Domain can be divided up into
several Areas (see figure below).

65.1220.000.02

6-1

Applications

System Description

Domain
ES
ES

ES
IS
L1
L1

IS
L1

ES

ES

Area

IS
L2

Routing Domain

Area

IS
L2

ES

ES
IS
L1

IS
L1

L1

ES

ES

ES

ES
ES

ES: End System; IS: Intermediate System; L1: Level 1; L2: Level 2

Fig. 6-1: Structure of a Routing Domain


A level-1 router only routes messages inside its own area. If a level-1 router receives a message
determined for another area, it passes on this message to the next level-2 router. If there is no level-2
router in the own area, the message is discarded.
In addition to the IS and ES of its own area, a level-2 router also knows the level-2 routers of the other
areas. If a message is determined for a certain area, it is passed on by the level-2 router of the source
area to a level-2 router of the destination area (if necessary via several level-2 routers).
An area can also include several level-2 routers. Routing between level-2 routers is possible only if the
corresponding level-2 routers are directly interconnected (i.e. not via level-1 routers).
The MDRS 155 E can be used as level-1 router or level-2 router.

Initial Domain Part IDP


AFI

IDI

Domain-Specific Part DSP


Section assigned by operator

Area address (required for level-2 routing and identical


for all network elements within the same area)

System ID

(required for level-1 routing)

SEL

Fig. 6-2: Structure of the NSAP address


AFI
IDI
System ID
SEL

Authority and Format Identifier


Initial Domain Identifier; ISO Data Country Code
Unambiguous identification of the individual systems within an area.
NSAP selector; identifies the Network Service User

Meaning of the individual sections:

6-2

With the MDRS 155 E, the selector is always "01.


Each OSI system is assigned one system ID; it must be unique in the entire Domain (with level-2
routers) or Area (with level-1 routers).
One IS (both level-1 and level-2 routers) always has only one system ID (irrespective of the number of
Area addresses).
With level-2 routing, the Area address is used to distinguish between the different areas. Network
elements located within the same area have the same Area address.

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Applications

An IS (both level-1 and level-2 routers) can simultaneously belong to several areas, i.e. it can have several
Area addresses.
NSAP addresses can be configured

automatically or
manually.

6.2.2.1 Automatic generation of the NSAP address


For this purpose, the MDRS 155 E uses an own Area address. The unique manufacturing no. of the ECC
Gateway module (complemented with two heading zero bytes) is used as system ID.
The system ID for the NSAP address of ServiceOn Access is occupied as follows:
The ServiceOn Access workstation is equipped with an OSI-LAN module. This module has been
assigned an IP address. This IP address is used as system ID and must be known to the
MDRS 155 E.
The NSAP selector SEL is 01 for all systems.

6.2.2.2 Manual adjustment of the NSAP address


It is also possible to adjust NSAP addresses manually. Thus, a large SDH network can be divided up into
several Routing Areas to reduce the volume of management information exchange. NSAP addresses are
then assigned to the network element, ServiceOn Access and redundant ServiceOn Access System.
Moreover, a network element can be assigned a second Area address by allocating an additional NSAP
address. In this case, however, both Routing Areas are treated as one logic unit. This functionality is
primarily used in the following cases of application:

The Area addresses of several network elements of a Routing Area are changed. By assigning an
additional NSAP address it is ensured that during the modification process all network elements
involved are always combined to form one logic unit.
Combination of two areas to one unit.
Classification of manufacturer-specific network elements by assigning different Area addresses.

When assigning the NSAP addresses, it is also necessary to enter the length of the entire address (max.
20 bytes) as well as the length of the system ID. Addresses are entered in the HEX format.
Restrictions regarding a remote logon using the MSP
If the NSAP address is manually adjusted, a remote logon to/from this element using the MSP is normally
no longer possible.
Provided that the network elements are located in the same area, this restriction can be eliminated by
selecting an appropriate NSAP address. However, the prerequisite to be fulfilled here is that the system ID
adjusted by the user has a length of 6 bytes and the following structure:

65.1220.000.02

6-3

Applications

Byte
Contents
Contents
Contents
Contents

System Description

6
00
00
00
00

5
00
01
02
03

4
XX
XX
XX
XX

3
XX
XX
XX
XX

2
XX
XX
XX
XX

1
XX
XX
XX
XX

Proposal: only for MDRS and MS1/4 systems


Freely usable system margin
Freely usable system margin
Proposal: only for MDRS 155 C, MS1-C systems and
MDRS 155 E systems with ECC Gateway module

Fig. 6-3: Structure of the system ID for remote logon


Remark:

Bytes 1 to 4 must include a network-wide unique identifer, e.g. the


manufacturing number of the ECC Gateway module (MDRS 155 E) or that of
the subrack (MS1-C).

In addition, value "01" must be entered in the SEL box and the NSAP address must have a length of
20 bytes. The 13-byte Area address can be freely selected.

6.2.3 SISA-V Gateway address


In the QD2-via-SISA-V mode, the so-called SIVA-V Gateway address is used in addition to the node no. of
the network element.
This address informs the MDRS 155 E on the network element to which the OSI-TP4 connection is to be
set up. The SISA-V Gateway address corresponds to the manufacturing no. of the ECC Gateway module
of the destination network element.

6.2.4 Internet addresses


In the Q3p mode, the ServiceOn Access System responsible for controlling and monitoring the
MDRS 155 E must be indicated. The corresponding assignment takes place via the IP address (Internet
address, e.g. 144.130.012.004) of the OSI-LAN module in the corresponding Workstation. In case of an
automatic NSAP address assignment, this IP address becomes part of the system ID (for ServiceOn
Access). In this case, the connection to ServiceOn Access is not set up via TCP/IP.

6.3

Addresses for IP transport

The IP address information covers settings always required in IP networks (networks using TCP/IP for
data exchange). Normally, the MDRS is integrated into an already existing LAN. For this IP network, the IP
address information has already been planned and assigned. Thus, address settings for MDRS 155 E
must be adapted to an already existing structure. The following IP address infomation must be provided by
the IP network administrator:
IP address
The IP address, e.g. 144.130.012.004, is used for an unambiguous identification of the unit within the
Internet/Intranet.
Sub-net mask:
Using the sub-net mask, e.g. 255.255.0.0, and the IP address, it is possible to determine whether the
MDRS 155 E, SOA and Operator Terminal PC are located in the same or in different IP networks. If the
MDRS 155 E, SOA and Operator Terminal PC are located in different IP networks, the interconnection
between these two networks is set up via an Intranet or the Internet.

6-4

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Applications

IP address of the default Gateway:


If the MDRS 155 E, SOA and Operator Terminal PC are located in different IP networks, an Intranet or the
Internet must be used for data exchange between these two networks. The connection to such a
transmission network is performed using a Router or Gateway, whose IP address must be known to the
MDRS 155 E.
This IP address information is memorized in the MDRS 155 E in a non-volatile memory. Any modification
of these configuration data via the LMT results in a soft reset of the MDRS.

6.4

Addresses for IP routing

An IP router is required to interconnect several IP sub-networks. The transmission of an IP packet based


on the IP destination address is referred to as IP routing. A router fulfills the task to pass on an incoming
IP packet in an optimum way within a compound of several networks. For this purpose, it has a table
which includes all information required for the transmission of IP packets received. This table is referred to
as routing table.
In case of dynamic routing, the routing information is determined during network operation and used for
updating routing decisions depending on the current network status recorded in the routing tables.
In case of static routing, a fixed route is defined. Here a distinction is made between routes entered
automatically in the routing table (automatic routing) and additional routes which must be actively
entered in the routing table by the operator (manual routing).
In addition to the standard route (destination = 0.0.0.0, network mask = 0.0.0.0) and loopback addresses
(destination = 127.0.0.*), automatic routes also include a point-to-point connection between two MDRS
155 E systems interconnected via the ECC.
Each routing information contained in the routing table is composed of the following parameters:
Destination
IP address of the destination of the corresponding route. The network destination may be a sub-network
or a host. If the network destination is a sub-network, the corresponding column includes the sub-network
ID of the destination sub-network. If the network destination is a computer (host), the corresponding
column includes the IP address of the destination computer.
Gateway
IP address of the Gateway on the way to the route destination.
Network mask
Mask for part of the IP address of the route destination. The sub-network is used to define the subnetwork in which the host is located.

6.5

Ethernet address

This address required in the LAN for communication purposes is mentioned here only for the sake of
completeness. This world-wide unique address is stored in a non-volatile memory and cannot be modified.
This address has the following meaning:
If any unit connected to the LAN sends data into the network, these data are assembled in frames.
These frames also include the Ethernet address of the destination unit. Each unit connected to the
LAN reads the Ethernet address out of the frame. The unit, whose own Ethernet address is identical
with the one contained in the frame, reads the data. All other units ignore them.

65.1220.000.02

6-5

Applications

6.6

System Description

Summary of address settings

The following table gives an overview of the addresses to be adjusted for the individual operating modes.
Adressen
Node no. of the local
SISA-V
NE access no. of
ServiceOn Access for
SISA-V
NE access no. of the
red. ServiceOn Access
for SISA-V
Internet address of
ServiceON Access

QD2Slave
X

QD2SISA-V
X

QD2-viaSISA-V
X

Internet address of
red. ServiceON Access

Q3p-SISA-V
automatic
X

Q3p-SISA-V
manual
X

Q3ISISA-V
X

Instead of the
Internet address,
the manually
adjusted NSAP
address is required.
Instead of the
Internet address,
the manually
adjusted NSAP
address is required.

SISA-V Gateway
address
IP address of the
Gateway network
element
IP address of the
X
Operator Terminal
Gateway network
element (only when the
Operator Terminal is
connected via the LAN)
NSAP address in cas of
manual NSAP address
setting

IPSISA-V
X

IP-viaSISA-V
X

X
X

Table: Address settings for the individual operating modes

In all operating modes, the NSAP addresses can be manually adjusted.

6-6

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Applications

7 Applications
The application examples given in this chapter show how the MDRS 155 E can be integrated in a TMN.
To cover a comprehensive spectrum, the different variants described for the operating modes are
repeated here. The examples are ordered according to the connection types SISA-DCN, OSI-DCN or
IP-DCN. The last application example shows the simultaneous use of all three modes.

7.1

Connection of MDRS to ServiceOn Access via a SISA-DCN

7.1.1 Direct QD2 connection


SOA

LAN (IP)
QD2
Gateway
SISA
connection
DCN
Operator Terminal
PC

QD2 station bus (RS-485)

MDRS

QD2 Slave

Fig. 7-1: Direct connection to a SISA-DCN


In this mode, the MDRS 155 E is operated in the SISA-DCN as Slave.
Note:
In this case, the ECC Gateway is not required.

7.1.2 Direct and indirect connection via QD2 using the ECC
SOA

LAN (IP)
QD2
Gateway
SISA
connection
Operator Terminal PC

DCN

ECC in STM-1

QD2 station bus (RS-485)

LMT

MDRS

MDRS

QD2-SISA-V

QD2-via-SISA-V

Fig. 7-2: Connection to an existing SISA infrastructure without additional cabling


In the above example, the left MDRS 155 E is operated in the QD2-SISA-V mode, i.e. SISA-V is active.
With respect to previous DCN hierarchies, the SISA-V is used as Slave.

65.1220.000.02

7-1

Applications

System Description

The second MDRS 155 E works as Slave and is functionally connected via the ECC to the higher-order
SISA-V of the left network element. This connection type offers the advantage that the second network
element can be integrated in an existing SISA-DCN without any additional cabling being required.

7.1.3 Setup of an OSI-DCN within a SISA-DCN


SOA

LAN (IP)
ECC in STM-1

QD2
Gateway

Terminal Multiplexer
MDRS

MUX

SISA
connection

Add-Drop Multiplexer

QD2-via-SISA-V

MDRS
QD2-via-SISA-V

Operator Terminal PC

DCN

ECC in STM-1

ECC in STM-1
Regenerator

QD2 station bus


(RS-485)

MUX

MDRS

MDRS

MDRS

MDRS

QD2-SISA-V

QD2-via-SISA-V

QD2-via-SISA-V

QD2-via-SISA-V

Fig. 7-3: OSI-DCN within a SISA-DCN


In this case, all MDRS 155 E systems are combined to form an OSI sub-network. This network can be
composed of up to 30 systems (one MDRS 155 E is operated in the QD2-SISA-V mode, whereas the
other 29 are operated in the QD2-via-SISA-V mode).

7.1.4 Managing further SISA-DCNs


SOA

LAN (IP)
ECC in STM-1

QD2
Gateway

Terminal Multiplexer
MDRS

MUX

SISA
connection

Add-Drop Multiplexer

QD2-via-SISA-V

MDRS
QD2-via-SISA-V

Operator Terminal PC

DCN
QD2 station bus
(RS-485)

ECC in STM-1

ECC in STM-1
Regenerator

MUX

MDRS

MDRS

MDRS

MDRS

QD2-SISA-V

QD2-via-SISA-V
QD2

QD2-via-SISA-V

QD2-via-SISA-V

SISA
connection

DCN
MDRS 155 E

RS-485

MDRS 155 N
MS1/4
QD2

MSV5
Any QD2 NE

Fig. 7-4: Connecting further SISA-DCNs

7-2

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Applications

Existing QD2 infrastructures can be connected via the QD2 interface of the local MDRS 155 E. Network
management information is transmitted via the existing OSI-TP4 connection to the far-end MDRS 155 E.
The latter is used as Gateway to the SISA-DCN. In this case, the QD2 interface is operated as QD2
Master. An internal QD2 bus is thus made available. This connection type permits decending in the SISA
hierarchy and the connection of QD2-controlled network elements such as MDRS 155 E, MDRS 155 N,
MS1/4 and MSV5.

7.1.5 Interconnection of several sub-networks via the LAN


SOA

LAN (IP)

QD2
Gateway
SISA
connection
DCN
QD2 station bus
(RS-485)

MDRS

QD2-SISA-V
ECC-managed
MDRS
SDH sub-network,
QD2-via-SISA-V
e.g. MDRS 155 C,
MDRS 155 S, MDRS 155 E,
MS1/4, MS1-C, MSV5,
SISA-DCN
SISA-DCN ...)
(e.g.
MDRS 155 E,
MDRS 155 N)

Interconnection of sub-networks
via the LAN (OSI)

MDRS

ECC-managed
SDH sub-network
(e.g. MDRS 155 C,
MDRS 155 S, MDRS 155 E,
MS1/4, MS1-C, MSV5,
SISA-DCN ...)

QD2-via-SISA-V

MDRS

QD2-via-SISA-V

SISA-DCN
(e.g.
MDRS 155 E,
MDRS 155 N)

Fig. 7-5: Interconnection of two SISA-DCNs via the LAN


In this example, the right OSI sub-network not directly connected to the QD2-IP Gateway is connected via
an OSI-LAN to a MDRS 155 E belonging to the left SDH network. By using the DCC, a connection is set
up to the MDRS 155 E used as QD2-IP Gateway and thus to ServiceOn Access.

7.2

Connection of MDRS 155 E to ServiceOn Access via the OSI-DCN

7.2.1 Direct OSI connection


SOA

LAN (OSI)
Operator Terminal PC

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

Fig. 7-6: Direct connection to an OSI-DCN


In this mode, the MDRS 155 E system is operated in an OSI-DCN.

65.1220.000.02

7-3

Applications

System Description

7.2.2 Direct and indirect connection via OSI using the ECC
SOA

LAN (OSI)
ECC in STM-1

Operator Terminal PC

LMT

MDRS

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

Q3p-SISA-V

Fig. 7-7: Connection to an existing OSI infrastructure without additional cabling


In the above example, both MDRS 155 E systems are operated in the Q3p-SISA-V mode. Both network
elements are directly connected to the SOA via separate OSI-TP4 links.

7.2.3 OSI-DCN
red
SOA

SOA

ECC in STM-1

LAN (OSI)

LAN (OSI)

Terminal Multiplexer
Add-Drop Multiplexer

MDRS

MUX

Q3p-SISA-V

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

ECC in STM-1

ECC in STM-1
Regenerator

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

MUX
MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

Fig. 7-8: OSI-DCN


In this case, all MDRS 155 E systems are operated in the same OSI-DCN. The network elements are
operated in the Q3p-SISA-V mode. In order to increase the monitoring capacity and reliability, a redundant
ServiceOn Access system can be connected.

7-4

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Applications

7.2.4 Managing further SISA-DCNs

SOA

LAN (OSI)

ECC in STM-1
Terminal Multiplexer
MUX

Add-Drop Multiplexer

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

Operator Terminal PC

ECC in STM-1

ECC in STM-1
Regenerator
MDRS

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

Q3p-SISA-V
QD2

MDRS

MUX
MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

Q3p-SISA-V

SISA
connection

DCN
MDRS 155 E

RS-485

MDRS 155 N
MS1/4
QD2

MSV5
Any QD2 NE

Fig. 7-9: Connecting further SISA-DCNs


Existing QD2 infrastructures can be connected via the QD2 interface of the local MDRS 155 E. The
network management information is transmitted via the existing OSI-TP4 connection to the SOA.
In this case, the QD2 interface is operated as QD2 Master. An internal QD2 bus is thus made available.
This connection type permits decending in the SISA hierarchy and the connection of QD2-controlled
network elements such as MDRS 155 E, MDRS 155 N, MS1/4 and MSV5.

7.2.5 Interconnection of several sub-networks via the LAN


SOA

LAN (OSI)

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V
ECC-managed
SDH sub-network
(e.g. MDRS 155 C,
MDRS 155 S, MDRS 155 E,
MS1/4, MS1-C, MSV5,
SISA-DCN ...)

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

Interconnection of sub-networks
via the LAN (OSI)

MDRS

ECC-managed
SDH sub-network
(e.g. MDRS 155 C,
MDRS 155 S, MDRS 155 E,
MS1/4, MS1-C, MSV5,
SISA-DCN ...)

Q3p-SISA-V

MDRS

SISA-DCN
(e.g.
MDRS 155 E,
MDRS 155 N)

Q3p-SISA-V

SISA-DCN
(e.g.
MDRS 155 E,
MDRS 155 N)

Fig. 7-10: Interconnection of two OSI-DCNs via the LAN


In this case, the right OSI sub-network without a direct connection to the OSI-LAN of the ServiceOn
Access System is connected via an OSI-LAN to a MDRS 155 E unit of the left SDH network.

65.1220.000.02

7-5

Applications

System Description

Due to the use of the DCC, this MDRS 155 E unit is connected to the MDRS 155 E operated as OSIGateway and thus to the ServiceOn Access System.

7.3

Connection of MDRS 155 E to ServiceOn Access via the IP-DCN

7.3.1 Direct TCP/IP connection


SOA

LAN (IP)
Operator Terminal PC

MDRS

IP-SISA-V

Fig. 7-11: Direct connection to a TCP/IP-DCN


In this mode, the MDRS 155 E is operated in a TCP/IP-DCN.

7.3.2 Direct and indirect connection via TCP/IP using the ECC
SOA

LAN (IP)
ECC in STM-1

Operator Terminal PC

LMT

MDRS

MDRS

IP-SISA-V

IP-via-SISA-V

Fig. 7-12: Connection to the TCP/IP-DCN (without additional cabling)


In the above example, the left MDRS 155 E is operated in the IP-SISA-V mode. Its SISA-V is active. With
respect to previous DCN hierarchies, the SISA-V is used as Slave. The second MDRS 155 E operates as
Slave and is functionally connected via the ECC to the higher-order SISA-V of the left network element by
means of OSI protocols. This connection type offers the advantage that the right network element can be
integrated into an existing DCN without any additional cabling being required.

7-6

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Applications

7.3.3 Setup of an OSI sub-network within a TCP/IP-DCN


SOA

LAN (IP)

ECC in STM-1
Terminal Multiplexer
MDRS

MUX

Add-Drop Multiplexer

IP-via-SISA V

MDRS
IP-via-SISA V

ECC in STM-1

Operator Terminal PC

ECC in STM-1
Regenerator

MUX

MDRS

MDRS

MDRS

MDRS

IP-SISA V

IP-via-SISA V

IP-via-SISA V

IP-via-SISA V

Fig. 7-13: OSI sub-network within a TCP/IP-DCN


In this case, all MDRS 155 E systems are combined to form an OSI sub-network. This network can be
composed of up to 30 systems (one MDRS 155 E operated in the IP-SISA-V mode, the other 29 in the
IP-via-SISA-V mode).

7.3.4 Managing further SISA-DCNs

SOA

LAN (IP)

ECC in STM-1
Terminal Multiplexer
MDRS

MUX

Add-Drop Multiplexer

IP-via-SISA-V

MDRS
IP-via-SISA-V

Operator Terminal PC

ECC in STM-1

ECC in STM-1
Regenerator

MUX

MDRS

MDRS

MDRS

MDRS

IP-SISA-V

IP-via-SISA-V
QD2

IP-via-SISA-V

IP-via-SISA-V

SISA
connection

DCN
MDRS 155 E

RS-485

MDRS 155 N
MS1/4
QD2

MSV5
Any QD2 NE

Fig. 7-14: Connection of further SISA-DCNs


Existing QD2 infrastructures can be connected via the QD2 interface of the local MDRS 155 E. Network
management information is transmitted via the existing OSI-TP4 connection to the far-end MDRS 155 E
which is used as Gateway to the IP-DCN.
In this case, the QD2 interface is operated as QD2 Master. An internal QD2 bus is thus made available.
This connection type permits decending in the SISA hierarchy and the connection of QD2-controlled
network elements such as MDRS 155 E, MDRS 155 N, MS1/4 and MSV5.

65.1220.000.02

7-7

Applications

System Description

7.3.5 Interconnection of several sub-networks via the LAN


SOA

LAN (IP)

MDRS

IP-SISA-V
ECC-managed
SDH sub-network
(e.g. MDRS 155 C,
MDRS 155 S, MDRS 155 E,
MS1/4, MS1-C, MSV5,
SISA-DCN ...)

Interconnection of sub-networks
via the LAN (OSI)

MDRS

IP-via-SISA-V

MDRS

ECC-managed
SDH sub-network
(e.g. MDRS 155 C,
MDRS 155 S, MDRS 155 E,
MS1/4, MS1-C, MSV5,
SISA-DCN ...)

IP-via-SISA-V

MDRS

IP-via-SISA-V

SISA-DCN
(e.g.
MDRS 155 E,
MDRS 155 N)

SISA-DCN
(e.g.
MDRS 155 E,
MDRS 155 N)

Fig. 7-15: Interconnection of two OSI sub-network via the LAN


Here the right OSI sub-network not directly connected to the IP-Gateway is connected via an OSI-LAN to
a MDRS 155 E unit of the left SDH network. Due to the use of the DCC there is a connection to the
MDRS 155 E operating as IP-Gateway and thus to ServiceOn Access.

7.3.6 Further direct TCP/IP connection (only local)


SOA

LAN (IP)
Operator Terminal PC

MDRS

Q3I-SISA-V

QD2 station bus

Fig. 7-16: Direct connection to a TCP/IP-DCN


In this mode, the MDRS 155 E is operated in a TCP/IP-DCN using the Q3I-SISA-V mode. The QD2
station bus can be used to connect QD2-controlled network elements (MS1/4, MSV5, MS1-C, MDRS 155
N, MDRS 155 E etc.).

7-8

65.1220.000.02

System Description

7.4

Applications

Heterogeneous SISA-, OSI- and IP-DCN


SOA

SOA

LAN (IP)

LAN (IP)

SOA

LAN (OSI)

QD2Gateway
SISA
connection

MUX
DCN

IP-SISA-V

DCN infrastructure uses DCCR/DCCM


of all STM-1/STM-4 signals available
MDRS

QD2 station bus (RS-485)

MDRS 155 C

QD2-SISA-V

MDRS

QD2-via-SISA-V

MDRS

Q3p-SISA-V

MDRS
Q3p-SISA-V

MUX
MDRS 155 C
IP-via-SISA-V

Operator Terminal PC

Fig. 7-17: Heterogeneous SISA-, OSI- and TCP/IP-DCN


In this example, a SDH infrastructure composed of three DCN sub-networks is set up.
Using a SISA infrastructure, the first sub-network is connected via the RS-485 interface to ServiceOn
Access. It includes a MDRS 155 E operated in the QD2-SISA-V mode with the associated partners
operated in the QD2-via-SISA-V mode.
The second sub-network is connected via the LAN interface to a second ServiceOn Access System using
OSI protocols. Compared to the QD2 connection which permits a transmission rate of only 64 kbit/s, here
the higher data throughput in the ServiceOn Access direction offers a special advantage.
A third sub-network can be set up by connecting the LAN interface using TCP/IP protocols.
The QD2-via-SISA-V and Q3p-SISA-V modes can be arbitrarily assigned to the individual network
elements. Communication between all network elements takes place in the same way via OSI-TP4 links.

65.1220.000.02

7-9

Applications

System Description

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

7-10

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Antenna System

8 Antenna System
The antenna system is connected to the digital microwave radio system by means of waveguides. Two
different types of waveguides are available: FLEXWELL and ALFORM waveguides.

8.1

Waveguides

FLEXWELL waveguide
The FLEXWELL waveguide consists of a corrugated tube with elliptical cross-section. It is available for the
frequency range from 3 to 23 GHz. FLEXWELL waveguides can be easily bent in the E-plane. Since they
are produced in great lengths (up to 200 m), the number of flanges required is very low and installation is
very simple.
ALFORM waveguide
The ALFORM waveguide is smooth-walled and has an oval cross-section. It is available for the frequency
range from 3 to 30 GHz. ALFORM waveguides can be bent over both cross-sectional axes (H+E-plane)
and twisted over short lengths due to their high transverse rigidity.
Thus, the use of bents and twists is not necessary.
This waveguide type is produced in lengths of 100 m (4 GHz) to 200 m (15 GHz).

ALFORM

FLEXWELL

Fig. 8-1: Waveguides

65.1220.000.02

8-1

Antenna System

8.2

System Description

Antennas

For the concentrated radiation of transmit power and for receiving RF signals, Marconi Communications
GmbH developed parabolic reflectors (0.3 m to 3.7 m) and shell antennas (2 m to 4 m). The antenna to be
used depends on the required fading margin and the necessary angular decoupling.

For reasons of completeness, this figure


shows an antenna integrated in the
Outdoor Unit as it is used in short-haul
digital microwave radio systems.

Fig. 8-2: Integrated HP, UHP antennas


Fig. 8-3:

SHP shell antennas

Fig. 8-4: S, HP , UHP parabolic reflectors

8-2

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Rack Design

9 Rack Design
All system components are mounted in ETSI racks (HxWxD: 2200 x 600 x 300 mm in compliance with
ETS 300 019-2). Alternatively, installation is also possible in 19" racks.
One ETSI rack can accommodate up to four RF channels with power supply modules, modems and
protection switching units. For larger systems or separate polarizations (except arrangement depicted in
Fig. 9-5), several racks are required.
In each station, one further rack must be provided for housing the necessary infrastructure such as power
distributors, fuses, waveguide dehydrators and service channels. The rack for 1+1 HSB operation offers
enough space and can be additionally equipped with a multiplexer.
To ensure easy access for operation and expansion, ETSI racks are open on their front side. Doors can
be supplied as an option.
Digital microwave radio systems can normally be expanded in service. The maximum configuration of
14+2 (16 x STM-1) requires four fully equipped racks.
Fig. 9-1 shows a 2+2, 3+1 or 4+0 configuration. The infrastructure rack is equipped with the OHAU, power
supply and a STM-1/4-MUX with DPU STM-4. It offers additional space for a waveguide dehydrator.
Fig. 9-2 shows the example of a rack equipped for 1+1 HSB operation.
Fig. 5-3 and Fig. 5-4 show the rack configuration for n+1/2 line protection (frequency diversity).
The two polarizations are accommodated in separate racks.
Fig. 5-5 shows the rack configuration for 4+0DX, 3+1DX or 2+2DX, both polarizations being
accommodated in one cabinet. This configuration is not expandable.

65.1220.000.02

9-1

Rack Design

System Description

Fig. 9-1: 4+0, 3+1 or 2+2 system configuration with OHAU, MUX, DPU STM-4

9-2

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Rack Design

Power Box

Fig. 9-2: 1+1 HSBD hot standby system configuration

65.1220.000.02

9-3

Rack Design

System Description

Div

Main
V
Power Box

Dehydrator

BOSCH
A
B
El

Power
EFAIL

Flex Plex MS1/4

Fig. 9-3: 4+0D, 3+1D or 2+2D system configuration with SDH-MUX

9-4

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Rack Design

Div

Main

V
Power Box

Dehydrat or

BOSCH
A
B
El

Power
EFAIL

Flex Plex MS1/4

Fig. 9-4: 4+0DX, 3+1DX or 2+2DX system configuration with SDH-MUX

65.1220.000.02

9-5

Rack Design

System Description

Div

Main
Power Box

Fig. 9-5: 4+0DX, 3+1DX or 2+2DX system configuration in one rack, not expandable

9-6

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Hightlights

10 Highlights
G

Transparent transmission of STM-1 signals in the RST mode

Frequency bands from 4 to 13 GHz

64 MLQAM and 128 MLQAM modulation

CCDP operation with XPIC in patterns with channel spacings of 28/29/30/40 MHz

Decision feedback equalizer with 13+1 coefficients in case of 64 MLQAM


and 22+1 coefficients in case of 128 MLQAM

Distortion-controlled IF combiner

Adjacent channel connection to the same antenna and same polarization for all frequency
bands (28/29/30 and 40 MHz channel spacing) without 3-dB coupler

1+0 to 14+2 and 1+1 HSB protection switching configurations

Hitless switchover
Protection switching time < 20 ms for n+1/2

Electrical CMI or optical BB interface

Transmission of additional service channels in the microwave-specific multiframe


(RFCOH)

Q-, F- and LAN interface (10Base-T) for TMN / PC

Performance data evaluation in compliance with ITU-T G.826

ATPC control criteria: RSL and BER controlled by microprocessor

System configurations via F-interface

Software download via Q-, F- or LAN interface (10Base-T)

Electronically controlled baseband loop

RF setting by exchanging the DRVCO; settings via F-interface

Installation in ETSI or 19'' rack, 4xSTM-1 in one rack


(WxDxH 600x300x2200 mm in compliance with ETS 300 019-2)

65.1220.000.02

10-1

Highlights
G

Service channel options in the SOH

D1 to D3
D4 to D12
E1
E2
F1

DCCR (192 kbit/s)


DCCR (576 kbit/s)
(64 kbit/s codirectional, 120 , G.703)
(64 kbit/s codirectional, 120 , G.703)
(64 kbit/s codirectional, 120 , G.703)

4x64
2 Mbit/s

(64 kbit/s codirectional, 1+0 or 1+1, 120 , G.703)


(1+0 or 1+1, 75 or 120 , G.703)

Service channel options in the RFCOH

8x64
2 Mbit/s

(64 kbit/s codirectional, 1+0 or 1+1, 120 , G.703)


(1+0 or 1+1, 75 or 120 , G.703)

Transmission of media-specific data

10-2

System Description

RF channel identifier
Polarization identifier for XPIC
ATPC signals
Line errors
Protection switching control
BB alarm, Tx side (LA TX)

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Technical Characteristics

11 Technical Characteristics
(Typical values including options)
RF band

4, 5, L6, U6, 7, 8, 13 GHz

Transmission capacity

STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s RST mode

Modulation

64 MLQAM

Redundancy FEC
ATPC range (continuously adjustable)

128 MLQAM

3.85 %
3...8 GHz

4.89 %

20 dB

19.5 dB
16 dB

13 GHz
ATPC velocity

50 dB/s

Operating mode
Transmit power at A'

CCDP mode with XPIC and adjacent channel


connection for 28/29/29.65/40 MHz
4 to 8 GHz

30.5 dBm +1.5 dB

30 dBm +1.5 dB

(+1.5 dB with ATPC overdrive)

13 GHz
Tx power reduction
RSL at A, 3 to 8 GHz

RSL at A, 13 GHz

BER 1E-3
BER 2E-5
BER 1E-6
BER 1E-3
BER 2E-5
BER 1E-6

28.0 dBm + 1.5 dB


3, 6, 9 dB
-75.5 dBm
-74 dBm
-73 dBm

RBER

<1E-12

Circulator attenuation per gate


Harmonic filter, Tx side

0.10 dB
0.15 dB
0.20 dB
0.65 dB
0.90 dB

Flex. WG-Coax-Cable 1.2 m


RF filter attenuation

Additional attenuation per


adjacent channel at 28 MHz

65.1220.000.02

3.4 -8.5 GHz


13 GHz
3.4 - 8.5 GHz
13 GHz
3.6 GHz
3.9 GHz
4.7 GHz
6.2 GHz
6.8 GHz
7.5 GHz
8.0 GHz
8.2 GHz
13 GHz

1.0 dB
1.0 dB
1.0 dB
1.0 dB
1.0 dB
1.0 dB
1.0 dB

-73.5 dBm
-72 dBm
-71 dBm
-72.5 dBm
-71 dBm
-70 dBm

1.3 dB
1.3 dB
1.3 dB
1.3 dB
1.3 dB
1.3 dB
1.7 dB
0.2 dB
(0.3 dB at 13 GHz)

11-1

Technical Characteristics

System Description

Intermediate frequency

140 MHz

Service channels

E1, F1, E2 (64kbit/s, codirectional 120 , G.703)

per STM-1 data stream

max. 12x 64 kbit/s, (codirectional 120 , G.703)


max. 2x 2 Mbit/s, 75 or 120 , G.703

External alarms in SISA 0


Alarm contacts

Inputs
Outputs

Protection switching

8x NO or NC
Relays - General alarms of modules
Bit-error-free switchover

Configuration
Protection switching
time

1+0 to 14+2 and 1+1 HSB


< 20 ms for n+1/2
< 500 ms for 1+1 HSB
< 10 s for Diversity

Power supply
Power consumption

48 V start-up current factor

11-2

24 V, 48 V, 60 V DC, floating
3.6, 3.9, 4.7 GHz

160 W per STM-1 channel

6.2, 6.8, 7.5, 8 GHz

175 W

13 GHz

185 W

UN = 48 V

II/IN = 36

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Technical Characteristics

11.1 Interfaces
RF
4 GHz
5 GHz
L6 GHz
connection PDR 40
PDR 48
PDR 70
unit C'/C
Type
IEC 154
RF interface TX/RX A'/A
IF interface
F interface (PC)
Q interface
LAN interface
DC
Analog service channel
EOW
Baseband
STM-1

Service channels

Recorder
External alarms in SISA-0/N

65.1220.000.02

U6 GHz
PDR 70

7 GHz
PDR 70
PDR 84

8 GHz
PDR 84

11 GHz
PDR 120

13 GHz
PDR 120

E1, F1

64 kbit/s

50 , SMA male
1.6/5.6 female
Sub-D 9-pin, female
Sub-D 15-pin, male
RJ-45, 8p
Sub-D high-current 3-pin, male
600 Sub-D 9pin, male
75 , G.703 1.6/5.6
G.957 S-1.1 mono:
SCPC
DIN 47256
Euro2000
120 , G.703, Sub-D 9pin, male

E2

64 kbit/s

120 , V.11, Sub-D 25pin, male

D1-D3

192 kbit/s

internal

D4-D12

576 kbit/s

internal

Wayside

2048 kbit/s

75 , G.703 1.6/5.6, male or


120 , G.703 Sub-D 15pin, male

DSC9...12

64 kbit/s

120 , G.703 Sub-D 25pin, male

DSC1...8

64 kbit/s

120 , G.703 Sub-D 37pin, male

AGC...

analog
8x NC/NO

Sub-D 15pin, male


Sub-D 9pin, male

140 MHz
RS 232 / V.24
RS 485
10Base-T
19...75 V
0.3....3.4 kHz
electrical
optical 1310 nm

11-3

Technical Characteristics

System Description

11.2 Mechanical Design


Design
Weight

TX
RX
RXD
RF filter
RF diplexer
RF connecting unit
Flex. coaxial cable
TX cabinet
RX cabinet
Branching cabinet

8.0 kg
8.0 kg
3.3 kg

MU subrack
SPI electrical
DPU/RPS STM-1
Modulator
Demodulator
Controller module
MU power supply

5.9 kg
0.4 kg
0.6 kg
0.7 kg
1.4 kg
0.3 kg
1.6 kg

OHAU subrack
SOH access module
EOW module
SISA-0/N
QD2 module
ECC Gateway Module
SISA-K/2R
OHAU power supply

6.6 kg
0.5 kg
0.7 kg
0.2 kg
0.2 kg
0.45 kg
0.2 kg
1.0 kg

Rack
Colour

11-4

ETS 300 119-2


HxWxD 2200 x 600 x 300 mm
12.1 kg
4.1 kg
6.0 kg
0.6 kg
0.8 kg
2.0 kg
1.0 kg

41 kg
RAL 5007 brilliant blue

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Technical Characteristics

11.3 Standards
Interfaces
C/C PDR
STM-1 electrical
STM-1 optical
64 k service channels
2048 k service channels
LAN

IEC 154
ITU-T G.703, G.707, G.783, G.784
ITU-T G.957
ITU-T G.703 cod.
ITU-T G.703 cod.
Ethernet (10Base-T)

Storage
Transport
Operation

ETS 300 019-1-1 Cl. 1.2 -25...+70 C


ETS 300 019-1-2 Cl. 2.2 -25...+70 C
ETS 300 019-1-3 Cl. 3.2 -5...+45 C,
rel. humidity < 95%
(expanded temperature range possible)

EMI, EMC, ESD

ETS 300 385


EN55022
EN50081/82

Environment

EN 60950
IEC IP20

Safety

Performance standards

ISO 9001
BZT
EU type

CE label (example)

Approved, comprehensive
quality assurance system

65.1220.000.02

Grade B
Class B
Class B

R&TTE, 1999/05/EC

Registration number:
Q811250M

acc. to Annex 5,
R&TTE 1999/05/EC

11-5

Technical Characteristics

System Description

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

11-6

65.1220.000.02

System Description

Service Instructions

12 Service Instructions
Digital Microwave Radio Systems from Marconi Communications GmbH are maintenance-free.
If not otherwise agreed upon by contract, equipment repairs are limited to the replacement of complete
modules.
As far as there are no other contractual regulations, please send defective modules to the following
address:

Marconi Communications GmbH


Central Europe Repair Management
Robert-Bosch-Str.10
01454 Radeberg
Germany
Repair Management
(during normal service hours)

Tel.:

+ 49 3528 / 456 - 267 or - 583


Fax:

+49 3528 / 456 534

Front Line Support (FLS)


Call numbers:
(24h/7D)

Tel.: 08000 / 6272664


Fax:

65.1220.000.02

0800 / 1812275

12-1

Service Instructions

System Description

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

12-2

65.1220.000.02

MDRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E


SDH Long-Haul
Microwave Radio Systems
Mounting Instructions

(RF/160 MI)
Edition 01.2003

Marconi Communications GmbH


D-71520 Backnang
Telefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212
http://www.marconi.com
Copyright 2003 by Marconi Communications GmbH
(hierin bezeichnet als Marconi)
nderungen vorbehalten Gedruckt in Deutschland
Marconi, Marconi Communications, das Marconi Logo,
Skyband, MDRS, MDMS und ServiceOn Access sind
eingetragene Markenzeichen
von Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows ist ein eingetragenes Markenzeichen der
Microsoft Corporation, Redmond.
Marconi Communications GmbH
D-71520 Backnang
Telephone +49 (7191) 13-0 Telefax +49 (7191) 13-3212
http://www.marconi.com
Copyright 2003 by Marconi Communications GmbH
(herein referred to as Marconi)
Specifications subject to change Printed in Germany
Marconi, Marconi Communications, the Marconi logo,
Skyband, MDRS, MDMS and ServiceOn Access are
trademarks of
Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation,
Redmond.

Contents
Sheet

Designation

Qty

15.8565.004.00e Contents

THIS
DRAWING
IS THE
EXCLUSIVE
PROPERTY
OF
MARCONI
COMMUNICATIONS
GMBH.
WITHOUT
THEIR
CONSENT
IT MAY NOT
BE REPRODUCED OR
GIVEN TO
THIRD
PARTIES.

Alle
Rechte bei
Marconi
Communications
GmbH, auch
fr den Fall
von Schutzrechtsanmeldungen.
Jede
Verfgungsbefugnis, wie
Kopier- und
Weitergaberecht, bei
uns.

Schutzvermerk
DIN 34-1.

Date

06.12.02

01e List of Tools

20.12.99

02e System View

15.06.99

03e Rack Design, Ceiling Mounting

20.12.99

04e Rack Design, Wall Mounting

20.12.99

06e Rack Configuration

20.12.99

07e Subrack MU Modem Unit

17.05.01

08e Subrack OHAU Overhead Access Unit

17.05.01

09e Transmitter and Receiver Modules

17.05.01

10e RPSC and RPSH Modules

16.10.99

12e Grounding Concept

07.09.01

15e Branching Network Design

20.12.99

16e Delay Compensation in Space Diversity Operation

17.05.01

19e Power Box II - Redundant Power Supply

07.09.01

20e Power Box B16

06.12.02

21e Power Supply Cable

19.12.99

23e Pin Assignment of Connectors X32, X35, X40, X41 Remote and Local Handset

15.06.99

24e Pin Assignment of Connectors X33, X36 Analog Service Channel

20.12.99

25e Pin Assignment of Connectors X30, X31, X34, X37 Branch F1

17.05.01

27e QD2 Module Overview - SISA and QD2 Cabling

15.06.00

28e ECC Gateway Overview SISA, QD2 and LAN Cabling

09.08.01

29e QD2 Module Connection, Station Bus, Pseudo Bus

15.06.99

30e QD2 Module Connection, Station Bus, Pseudo Bus

15.06.99

31e ECC Gateway Connection, Station Bus, Pseudo Bus

09.08.01

32e ECC Gateway Connection, Station Bus, Pseudo Bus

09.08.01

34e Pin Assignment of Connectors X42, X43 - X38, X39 QD2 Cabling

16.10.00

35e Pin Assignment of Connectors X38, X39 QD2 Cabling

20.12.99

36e Pin Assignment of Connector X47 QD2 Cabling

07.09.01

38e Pin Assignment of Connectors SCU X51-54 64kbit/s Channels E1, F1

15.06.00

39e Pin Assignment of Connectors SCU X55, X56 4 x 64kbit/s Channels

15.06.99

40e Pin Assignment of Connectors SCU X59, X60 8 x 64kbit/s Channels

20.12.99

41e Pin Assignment of Connectors X73 X76 2048kbit/s Channel, 120

15.06.99

42e Pin Assignment of Connectors X101 X116 2048kBit/s Channel, 75

22.08.01

48e Pin Assignment of Connectors X117 Digital Inputs

16.10.00

50e Pin Assignment of Connectors Baseband STM1 el. and opt.

15.08.01

55e ECC Gateway Pin Assignment of Connector X600 LAN Cabling

09.08.01

Verzeichnis:15_8565\004_00ek1.doc
a

AN10 609477
98

Bearb.
Drawn
Gepr.
Checked

CS-OP/IPL2

06.12.02

Ms

Norm/STD

MN-CF/OIP2

07.09.01

Go

Abt./Dept.

MN-CF/OIP2

22.08.01

Go

MS-NI/IPL2

17.05.01

Wo

S
V
Zustand
Status

Edit

nderung
Revision

Datum
Date

Name

Datum /Date

Name

15.06.99

Kocher

ON/VTF2

Revi.

MDRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E


Contents
Mounting instruction

15.8565.004.00e
Info-Nr.:

004_00ek1.doc

Blatt/Shee

1
1

Bl.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

Standard toollist
Ident. No.
801425
801961
802015
806448
801185
801859
010157
806542
801463
801273
801422
804364
804359
804360
804899
804357
806964
801857
074014
801206
801445
801154
010176
801945
801461
801376
801394
801372
801261
055306
804449
801357
805455
805456
805457
805458
805459
805460
804642
801360
801408
806161
803798
803799
803800
803801

THIS
DRAWING
IS THE
EXCLUSIVE
PROPERTY
OF
MARCONI
COMMUNICATIONS
GMBH.
WITHOUT
THEIR
CONSENT
IT MAY NOT
BE REPRODUCED OR
GIVEN TO
THIRD
PARTIES.

Alle
Rechte bei
Marconi
Communications
GmbH, auch
fr den Fall
von Schutzrechtsanmeldungen.
Jede
Verfgungsbefugnis, wie
Kopier- und
Weitergaberecht, bei
uns.

Designation
Desolder
Filebrush
Gloves
Gloves
Flat file
Metre rule
Hammer
Cabel knife
Centre punch
Pincers to remove lac
Soldering iron
Solder-iron tip
Solder-iron tip
Solder-iron tip
Solder-iron tip
Soldering station
Soldering rag
Rule
Multimeter Digital
Needle file
Brush
Pincers
Pincers
Cleaning rag
Marking tool
Box end wrench
Box end wrench
Box end wrench
Saw blade
Scissers
Set of nuts
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver

Part-No.
Introvac-SHahn & Kolb - Nr.56720500 115x40
Leather
Leether
DIN7261 A200 - 3
Gampper 250
2m
DIN1041
200g
Hommel Nr.62090101
VDE
DIN7250 4x120mm
Hoffmann Nr.72920
0,6mm
Zeva P7 230 V
75W
ET -A 1,6mm
ET -B 2,4mm
ET -K 1,2mm
ET -L 2,0mm
Cooper Nr.52501499
WECP - 20
Knig 700 x 2700
Blankenhorn Nr.105R
300mm
Voltcraft VC227
BN 120057
Set H00 180
Flat
12 mm
Broad
4 mm
Pointed
450 x 450
Gelb
Hahn & Kolb
Nr.51312010
DIN3113
5,5mm
DIN3113
24,0mm
Set Nr.05332
6- 22mm
Puck Nr.310 L=146mm
Lenght
100mm
Gedore 20RMU-3 1/4 4,0 - 13,0mm
Slt Nr.8030
0,6- 4,5 x 25
Slit Nr.8060
0,4- 2,5 x 75
VDE
Slit Nr.8060
0,5- 3,5 x 100
VDE
Slit Nr.8060
0,6- 4,0 x 100
VDE
Slit Nr.8060
0,8- 5,5 x 125
VDE
Slit Nr.8060
1,0- 6,5 x 150
VDE
Slit Nr.8060 VDE 1,2- 8,0 x 175
Cross recess Nr.8078 Ph 01 x 25
Angular-Slit DIN5200 1,0 - 5,5 x 100
Set of bristo wrench
1,5- -10mm
Ball-shaped Wiha 367
2,5 6-kt.
Ball-shaped Wiha 367
3,0 6-kt.
Ball-shaped Wiha 367
4,0 6-kt.
Ball-shaped Wiha 367
5,0 6-kt.
Ball-shaped Wiha 367
6,0 6-kt.

Quant.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Schutzvermerk
DIN 34-1.

Verzeichnis:15_8565\004_01eb1.doc
a

MDRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E


98

Bearb.
Drawn
Gepr.
Checked

Datum /Date

Name

15.06.99

Kocher

Toollist

Norm/STD
Abt./Dept.

ON/VTF2

20.12.99

Ko

ON/VTF2

15.06.99

Ko

S
V
Zustand
Status

nderung
Revision

Datum
Date

Name

ON/VTF2

15.8565.004.01e
Info-Nr.:

004_01eb1.doc

Blatt/Shee

1
2

Bl.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

Ident. No.
803802
808525
808521
808522
808523
808524
801343
801361
801362
805529
806316
809908
801176
801173
801370
807702
801282
807179
802065
807527
806543
801140
473803
801171
801137
801152
807047
806173

THIS
DRAWING
IS THE
EXCLUSIVE
PROPERTY
OF
MARCONI
COMMUNICATIONS
GMBH.
WITHOUT
THEIR
CONSENT
IT MAY NOT
BE REPRODUCED OR
GIVEN TO
THIRD
PARTIES.

Alle
Rechte bei
Marconi
Communications
GmbH, auch
fr den Fall
von Schutzrechtsanmeldungen.
Jede
Verfgungsbefugnis, wie
Kopier- und
Weitergaberecht, bei
uns.

809898
058758

Designation
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Screw driver
Vice holder
Goggles
Side cutting pliers
Side cutting pliers
Side cutting pliers
Socket wrench
Pocket pharmacy
Pocket saw
Cabel
Tool bug
Tool bug
pliers
pliers
pliers
pliers
pliers
pliers
Drilling hammer
Drill
Torque wrench
Crimb-pliers
Hand-crimb-pliers

Part-No.
Ball shaped Wiha 367
8,0 6-kt.
angular-Slit Pz 1/Pz 2 x 100
Cross recess Wiha 324
0 x 60
VDE
Cross recess Wiha 324
1 x 80
VDE
Cross recess Wiha 324
2 x 100
VDE
Cross recess Wiha 324
3 x 150
VDE
Wiha 390 0,8- 5,5 x 180
Cross recess Nr.8078 Ph 1 x 80
Cross recess Nr.8078 Ph 2 x 100
Hoffmann Nr.87690
45mm
Uvex - Nr.91800015
Sandvik Nr.4130 Ergo 0,3- 1,5mm
Erem
Nr. 522
Belzer - Nr.2667B
130mm
Hommel - Nr.50760112 SW - 17mm
Sander - Nr.1380
Schaufler Puk 150mm
Gifas 3-x coup. L=5m 3x1,5qmm
VDE
Hoffmann Nr.91240 20
Klein - Nr.3255/1
3417NF
160mm
VDE
Flat
DIN5248
140mm
AdJust Nr.EC288
135mm
Long and pointed Nr.71330 200mm
VDE
Round DIN5249
140mm
VDE
Combination DIN5244
160mm
VDE
Bosch
SDS 10mm
SW 8, tightening torque 50-70Ncm
Lemosa for Kx-Push-Pull connector
D-Sub connector

Quant.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Schutzvermerk
DIN 34-1.

Verzeichnis:15_8565\004_01eb1.doc
a

MDRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E


98

Bearb.
Drawn
Gepr.
Checked

Datum /Date

Name

15.06.99

Kocher

Toollist

Norm/STD
Abt./Dept.

ON/VTF2

20.12.99

Ko

ON/VTF2

15.06.99

Ko

S
V
Zustand
Status

nderung
Revision

Datum
Date

Name

ON/VTF2

15.8565.004.01e
Info-Nr.:

004_01eb1.doc

Blatt/Shee

2
2

Bl.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 0 1 e a 1 .d s f

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M D R S 1 5 5 /...-6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

U C -O N /V T F 2

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

D a tu m
D a te

N a m e

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

9 9

D a tu m /D a te

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

N a m e

K o c h e r

S y s te m

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .0 2 e

E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

V ie w

A b t./D e p t.

N o r m /S T D

B la tt /S h e e t

B l.

O v e rh e a d A c c e s s
U n it O H A U

D e h y d ra to r

P o w e r d is tr ib u te r 2

P o w e r d is tr ib u te r 1

2 2 0 0

3 4 -1

R a c k 0 0 0

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

D e h y d ra to r

P o w e r B o x

P o w e r B o x

B O S C H

B O S C H

0 0 1

1 . P o la r iz a tio n

R P S C

B O S C H

B O S C H

0 0 2

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

R P S C

B O S C H

0 0 3

2 . P o la r iz a tio n

R P S C

B O S C H

B O S C H

0 0 4

6 0 0

R P S C

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

U n it

U n it

M o d e m
M U

M o d e m
M U

B B - S w itc h
R P S C /R P S H

T r a n s m itt e r

C h a n n e l
b r a n c h in g
n e tw o rk

R e c e iv e r

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

D e ta il A

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

D o w e l S 1 0
A N 0 0 7 2 7 6 5
T o o th w a s h e
A N 0 0 1 8 1 3 3
W a s h e r A 8 .4
A N 0 0 6 5 0 2 5
S p r in g d is k B
A N 0 0 1 3 0 5 7
W o o d s c re w
A N 0 0 2 6 0 3 2
6

S c re w M 8 x 1 8
A N 0 0 2 6 0 6 5 1
S p r in g d is k B 8
A N 0 0 1 3 0 5 7 0
W a s h e r A 8 .4
A N 0 0 6 5 0 2 5 5

r A 8 .2
6
5
8
0
3

P la te
A N 0 0 2 5 9 1 8 6
S lid e n u t M 8
A N 0 0 2 5 9 6 4 3

8 x 6 0

A
M o
A N
3 -c
A N

u n
0 0
h a
0 0

tin g
2 6 6
m b e
2 5 9

M o
A N
3 -c
A N

b ra c k e t
7 9 5
r p r o file
8 3 2

1 .P o la r iz a tio n

D iv . W G

tin
2
m
2

g
6 6
b e
5 9

b ra c k e t
7 9 5
r p r o file
8 3 2

2 .P o la r iz a tio n

D iv . W G

*
m a x . 4 5 5

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

u n
0 0
h a
0 0

B e tr. W G

O p . W G

2 2 0 0
m in . 2 2 2 5 - m a x . 2 7 4 0

R a c k 0 0 0

3 4 -1
U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

D e ta il B

0 0 1

0 0 2

T h e r a c k s a r e m o u n t e d s id e b y s id
F o r s u p p o r t in g t h e r a c k a lig n m e n t
b r a n c h in g filte r s a n d lo w e r M U . T h
If o n ly r a c k s 0 0 0 , 0 0 1 a n d 0 0 3 a r e
( s p a c e r e s e r v a t io n f o r la te r in s t a lla
In th e to p s e c tio n , th e r a c k s a r e s e
lo w e r s e c tio n , th e y a r e s e c u r e d to

e a n d m u s t
p ro c e s s , th e
e s e b o re h o
in s ta lle d , th
tio n ) .
c u re d to th e
th e s u p p o rt

6 0 0
0 0 4

0 0 3

b e h o
s id e
le s m
e s p a

r iz
p a
u s
c e

o n
n e
t b
fo

ta lly a lig n
ls h a v e b
e a lig n e d
r ra c k s 0 0

A u x ilia r y b o r e
h o le s fo r r a c k
a lig n m e n t

e d b y
o re h o
to b e
2 a n d

m e
le s
c o n
0 0

a n s o f th e le v e llin g fe e t.
( 8 .5 m m ) a t th e h e ig h t o f th e
g ru e n t.
4 m u s t b e k e p t fre e

c e ilin g / w a ll b y m e a n s o f m o u n t in g r a ils . I n t h e
b y m e a n s o f fo u r w o o d s c r e w s ( 8 x 5 0 ) a n d S 1 0 d o w e ls .

I n c a s e o f m o u n t in g h e ig h ts < 2 6 0 0 m m , th e m o u n t in g r a ils h a v e to b e s h o r t e n e d in r a c k s 0 0 0 t o 0 0 4 .
A ll m o u n t in g r a ils m a y n o t b e s lid in t o t h e r a c k a n y m o r e t h a n 4 5 5 m m .
T h e c u t s u r fa c e s m u s t b e p r o te c te d a g a in s t c o r r o s io n . .

M D R S 1 5 5 /...-6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 0 3 e b 1 .d s f
a

B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

N a m e

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

b
S

a
V

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

U C -O N /V T F 2
U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

2 0 .1 2 .9 9 K o
1 5 .0 6 .9 9 K o
D a tu m
D a te

N a m e

U C -O N /V T F 2

R a c k In s ta lla tio n
C e ilin g F ix tu r e
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .0 3 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

T o o th w a s h e
A N 0 0 1 8 1 3 3
W a s h e r A 8 .4
A N 0 0 6 5 0 2 5
S p r in g d is k B
A N 0 0 1 3 0 5 7
W o o d s c re w
A N 0 0 2 6 0 3 2

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

D e ta il A

4 3
-9 3

M o u n tin g b r a c k e t
A N 0 0 2 6 6 7 9 5

5
8
0
3

8 x 6 0

S c re w M 8 x 1 8
A N 0 0 2 6 0 6 5 1
S lid e n u t M 8
A N 0 0 2 5 9 6 4 3

3 - c h a m b e r p r o file
A N 0 0 2 5 9 8 3 2
1 .P o la r iz a tio n

D iv . W G

r A 8 .2
6

2 .P o la r iz a tio n s

D iv . W G
O p . W G

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

m a x . 4 5 5

O p . W G

2 2 0 0
m in . 2 2 2 5 - m a x . 2 7 4 0

A u x ilia r y b o r e
h o le s fo r
r a c k a lig n m e n t

6 0 0

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

3 4 -1

R a c k 0 0 0

0 0 1

0 0 2

T h e r a c k s a r e m o u n t e d s id e b y s id
F o r s u p p o r t in g t h e r a c k a lig n m e n t
b r a n c h in g filte r s a n d lo w e r M U . T h
If o n ly r a c k s 0 0 0 , 0 0 1 a n d 0 0 3 a r e
( s p a c e r e s e r v a t io n f o r la te r in s t a lla
In th e to p s e c tio n , th e r a c k s a r e s e
lo w e r s e c tio n , th e y a r e s e c u r e d to

e a n d m u s t
p ro c e s s , th e
e s e b o re h o
in s ta lle d , th
tio n ) .
c u re d to th e
th e s u p p o rt

0 0 3
b e h o
s id e
le s m
e s p a

r iz
p a
u s
c e

o n
n e
t b
fo

ta lly a lig n
ls h a v e b
e a lig n e d
r ra c k s 0 0

0 0 4
e d b y
o re h o
to b e
2 a n d

m e
le s
c o n
0 0

a n s o f th e le v e llin g fe e t.
( 8 .5 m m ) a t th e h e ig h t o f th e
g ru e n t.
4 m u s t b e k e p t fre e

c e ilin g / w a ll b y m e a n s o f m o u n t in g r a ils . I n t h e
b y m e a n s o f fo u r w o o d s c r e w s ( 8 x 5 0 ) a n d S 1 0 d o w e ls .

I n c a s e o f m o u n t in g h e ig h ts < 2 6 0 0 m m , th e m o u n t in g r a ils h a v e to b e s h o r t e n e d in r a c k s 0 0 0 t o 0 0 4 .
A ll m o u n t in g r a ils m a y n o t b e s lid in t o t h e r a c k a n y m o r e t h a n 4 5 5 m m .
T h e c u t s u r fa c e s m u s t b e p r o te c te d a g a in s t c o r r o s io n . .
1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 0 4 e b 1 .d s f
a

B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

b
S

a
V

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

U C -O N /V T F 2
U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

2 0 .1 2 .9 9
1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
K o
N a m e

M D R S 1 5 5 /...-6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M
R a c k In s ta lla tio n
W a ll F ix tu r e

U C -O N /V T F 2
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .0 4 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

T h e ra c k s a re
D u r in g s y s te m
In th e fa c to ry ,
o c c u p ie d b y a
re tu rn e d to th e

d iv id e d u p
p la n n in g ,
th e s e lis ts
c e r ta in m o
p r o je c t e n

in to r a c k
c o n fig u r a
a re c o m p
d u le . T h e
g in e e r in g

c o m p a rtm e n
tio n lis ts a r e
le te d b y e n te
s e lis ts a r e d
d e p a rtm e n t

ts a n
d ra w
r in g
e liv e
in c a

d c
n u
th e
re d
s e

a rd
p , in
s e r
to g
o f m

s lo ts .
w h ic h
ia l n o s .
e th e r w
o d ific a

th e c
o f th
ith th
tio n s
.

a r d s lo ts a r e a s s ig n e d to m o d u le s .
e m o d u le s , s o th a t e a c h c a r d s lo t is
e ra c k a n d m u s t b e c o rre c te d a n d

A tte n tio n !
S h o u ld it b e n e c e s s a r y to e x tr a c t/in s e r t m o d u le s o n s ite , th is m u s t b e d o n e a s d e fin e d in th e c o n fig u r a t io n lis ts .
R a c k

0 0 0

0 0 1 - 0 0 4

F 1 -1 6

0 0 0

0 0 5 - 0 0 8

1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 1
2 0 0
2 2 0

1 0 2
1 1 2

2 2 2
2

2
1

2 1 2
2 0 7
2 0 2
0

1 0 3
1 1 3

2 1 3
2 0 8
2 0 3

2 1 4
2 0 9
2 0 4

1 0 4
1 1 4

2 1 5
2 1 0
2 0 5

2 1 6
2 1 1
2 0 6

3 0 0

C
A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

3 0 1
3 1 1

3 0 2
3 1 2

3 0 3
3 1 3

3 0 4
3 1 4

3 0 5
4 0 0

0 1 0
0

0
1
1

0
1
2

0
1
3

0
1

0
1

0
1

1
8

4 1 4
4

0
9

0
1

1
2

4
0

4
0

4
1
2

5 0 0

1
1

4
1
3

5 1 4
5

5
0

0
5
0
2

5
0

1
5
1
3

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

3 4 -1

T h e in te r n a l c a b lin g m u s t b e m a d e a g a in in a c c o r d a n c e w ith th e a tta c h e d c a b lin g p la n s .


E a c h c o n n e c to r is fitte d w ith a n id e n tific a tio n in d ic a tin g th e r a c k , c a r d s lo t, e q u ip m e n t u n it a n d s o c k e t.
Id e n tif ic a tio n e x a m p le :

1 . 1 .1 4 - X 2 1
R a c k

C a r d s lo t
E q u ip m e n t s o c k e t

S u b ra c k

M D R S 1 5 5 /...-6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 0 6 e b 1 .d s f
a

B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9 D a tu m /D a te
1 5 .0 6 .9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

N a m e

K o c h e r

R a c k E q u ip m e n t

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

b
S

a
V

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

U C -O N /V T F 2
U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

2 0 .1 2 .9 9
1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

U C -O N /V T F 2

K o
K o
N a m e

B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .0 6 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

M D R S 1 5 5 /... 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

M o d e m

U n it

X 7 3

X 7 5
IF 1

X 8 2

L O N

IF 1

X 8 1

L O N

X 6 3
E

R O H

X 7 8

R C

X 8 5

T X 1

X 8 8

R X 2

X 8 7

R X 1

X 6 1

R O H 2 B

X 8 6

T X 2

X 5 9

S O H 2 B

X 7 7

M S T -A D R

X 7 6

X 7 4

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

P R 1 /1

2 U

IF 2

X 9 2
X 9 0

X 9 1
X 8 9

X 7 9

R P S I

B F I-E S G

X 5 5

R O H

1 B

X 8 3

C A N

X 5 3

S O H 1 B

X 8 4

C A N

+
-

P R 1 /2

X 5 1

M D

B A T

X 7 0

S O H 1 A

D P U
R P S

D C C

D M

C T R L

X 5 7

S O H 2 A

D P U
R P S

D M

R X

T X

T X

X 7 2 B A T 2 1 9 ...7 5 V D C

M D

X 9 5
X 9 9
P R 2 /2

P S

R P S I

B A T

R X
O P
P R 1
P R 2

O P
P R 1
P R 2
S W IT C H
L O C K

S Y N
T X

P R 2 /1

X 9 6
X 1 0 0

X 7 1 B A T 1 1 9 ...7 5 V D C

P S

IF 2

S Y N
T X

S W IT C H
L O C K
M A N

M A N

6 U
S P I

S P I

S T M -1
1
2

4 8 ,3 x 2 6 ,6 + 9

C o n n e c tio n P a n e l

X 7 3

X 7 5
R X 2

IF 1

X 8 2 L O N E

X 6 3

R O H A

X 7 8

R C

X 8 5

T X 1

X 8 8

IF 1

X 8 1 L O N W

X 5 5

R O H 1 B

X 8 3

C A N W

X 8 7

R X 1

X 6 1

R O H 2 B

X 7 9 B F I-E S G

X 5 3

S O H 1 B

X 8 4

C A N E

X 8 6

T X 2

X 5 9

S O H 2 B

X 7 7 M S T -A D R

IF 2

X 7 4

X 9 2
X 9 0

P R
1 /1
P R
1 /2

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

3 4 -1

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

S T M -1

X 7 6

X 9 1
X 8 9

X 7 1 B A T 1

S O H 1 A

X 5 1

X 7 0

D C C R

9 9 D a tu m /D a te
1 5 .0 6 .9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

b
S

a
V

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M S -N I/IP L 2
U C -O N /V T F 2

1 7 .0 5 .0 1
1 5 .0 6 .9 9

W o
K o

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

D a tu m
D a te

N a m e

S O H 2 A

X 7 2

X 9 6
X 1 0 0

B A T 2

M D R S 1 5 5 /...-6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 0 7 e b 1 .d s f
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

X 5 7

IF 2

N a m e

K o c h e r

P R
2 /1

X 9 5
X 9 9

P R
2 /2

B G T M U
M o d e m U n it

U C -O N /V T F 2
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .0 7 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

M D R S 1 5 5 /...6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M
R F C O H

P S
W

X 6 7

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

R W 1 O U T

X 3 4

X 3 7

E O W 2 N

X 3 6

X 4 2

X 4 7

Q S C

E X T

X 7 4

R F C O H
E

S O H
A C C

S O H
E X T

C A L L
X 6 5

S IS A
K

X 3 3

E O W 1 A

R O H /W S C

X 6 1

X 7 5

X 3 2 E O W 1 E X T S

X 7 3

R O H /W S C

D S C

R O H 1 E

S O H 1 E

S E 2 O U T

R E S E T
+

L O C

X 6 0

R E 1 O U T

E O W 2

O H A U

X 7 1
B A T 1 1 9 ...7 5 V D C

C O N

X 4 3

ID
IN T
E X T
D S C

E O W 2 A
-

S E 1 IN

C A L L

R O H 1 W

E O W 1

E O W 1

B A T

S O H /W S C

X 4 5
E

S O H /E 2 E

X 5 5

D S C 9 ...1 2 E

X 4 1 E O W 2 IN T S

X 4 6

S O H /E 2 W

X 3 5 E O W 2 E X T S

X 6 2

S IS A
0 /N

1 ...8 W

6 U

S O H 2 E

X 5 9

D S C

1 ...8 E

S E R V
X 4 0 E O W 1 IN T S

X 5 1 S O H /E 1 E

X 5 3

S O H /F 1 E

X 6 3

S O H 1 W

S W 2 IN

R E S E T
X 1 1 7

X 3 1 E O W 2 E X T X 3 0 E O W 1 E X T

X 5 6

X 8 1

L O N

X 7 6

X 8 2

L O N

R C

R W 2 IN

S IS A

X 3 8

X 3 9

X 6 8

D S C

S O H /W S C

9 ...1 2 W

X 5 2

X 5 4 S O H /F 1 W

S O H /E W

X 6 4
W

S O H 2 W

X 6 6

R O H 2 W

R O H 2 E

S W 1 O U T

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

4 8 ,3 x 2 6 ,6 c m

C o n n e c tio n P a n e l

le ft

X 6 7

R W 1 O U T

R O H 1 W

X 6 5

S E 1 IN X 4 3

C O N X 7 1
Q
Q

S O H 1 E

B A T 1

X 7 5 S O H /W S C E
X 5 5 D S C
X 4 6

X 4 7 Q S C E X T X 3 3 E O W 1 A X 3 2 EO W 1 EXT S
X 7 4 R O H /W S C W X 7 3 R O H /W S C E
D S C

SE 2 O U T

+
-

L O C

R E 1 O U T X 6 0

R O H 1 E

X 6 1

X 3 4 E O W 1 X 3 7 E O W 2 N X 3 6 E O W 2 A
X 4 2

r ig h t

X 4 5

S O H /E 2 E

9 ...1 2 E

S O H /E 2 W

X 3 5 EO W 2 EXT S

X 6 2

1 ...8 W

X 5 9

X 4 0 E O W 1 IN T S X 5 1 S O H /E 1 E X 5 3 S O H /F 1 E

S O H 2 E
D S C

1 ...8 E

S O H 1 W S W 2 IN

3 4 -1

X 6 3

X 4 1 E O W 2 IN T S

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

X 1 1 7 R C S IS A X 3 1 E O W 2 E X T X 3 0 E O W 1 E X T
X 8 1 L O N W

X 3 8

X 8 2 L O N E X 3 9
R W 2 IN X 6 8

Q
Q

X 5 6 D S C

R O H 2 W

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

a
V

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

X 6 4

S O H 2 W

X 6 6

R O H 2 E

SW 1 O UT

M D R S 1 5 5 /...-6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

M S -N I/IP L 2
U C -O N /V T F 2

X 5 4 S O H /F 1 W

X 7 6 S O H /W S C W X 5 2 S O H /E W
E

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 0 8 e b 1 .d s f

9 ...1 2 W

1 7 .0 5 .0 1
1 5 .0 6 .9 9

W o
K o

D a tu m
D a te

N a m e

B G T O H A U
O v e r h e a d A c c e s s U n it

U C -O N /V T F 2
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .0 8 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

T r a n s m itte r
C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

R F

X 1

R e c e iv e r
IF C O M B

B A T

X 2 5

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

M U
C O N T R
X 4

IF

IF C O M B
X 2 4
X 2 2
IF C O M B
X 2 3

X 3
M U
C O N T R
IF

X 4

X 2

O P T
X 5
B A T

R E C
X 5

R F
X 1

R F
X 2 1

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

3 4 -1

B A T

X 1

S Y N

X 2

B A T
X 3
IF

X 2

S Y N
X 1

X 2

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 0 9 e b 1 .d s f
a

9 9

B e a rb .
D ra w n
G e p r.
C h e c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

b
S

a
V

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M S -N I/IP L 2
U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 7 .0 5 .0 1
1 5 .0 6 .9 9

W o
K o

D a tu m
D a te

N a m e

N a m e

K o c h e r

M D R S 1 5 5 /...-6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M
T r a n s m itte r a n d R e c e iv e r
M o d u le s

U C -O N /V T F 2
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .0 9 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M S -N I/IP L
U C -O N /V T F 2

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 6 .1 0 .0 0
1 5 .0 6 .9 9

D a tu m
D a te

K o

N a m e

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

9 9

A b t./D e p t.

N o r m /S T D

X 1 2
X 1 1

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 1 0 e b 1 .D R W

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

M D R S 1 5 5 /...-6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

K o

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .1 0 e

E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :
E
U N IT

L O N

X 1 0

U N IT (R X 2 )

U N IT (T X 1 )

M O D E M

X 1 8

O P 8

C A N

P R 1 /2
X 1 9

M O D E M

X 8 8 1

X 8 7 1
U N IT (R X 1 )

M O D E M

X 8 5 1

M O D E M

X 8 4

X 8 6 1

X 1 7

O P 7 /1 4

T X S ID E

O P 1

U N IT (T X 2 )

X 1 6

O P 6 /1 3

M O D E M

X 1 5

O P 5 /1 2

X 1 4

O P 4 /1 1

X 1 3

O P 2 /9

3 4 -1

O P 3 /1 0

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

X 1

X 8 8 2

X 8 7 2

X 8 5 2

X 8 6 2

S 1

L O N

E
X 2

R X 2 (M U

T X 2 (M U

C O N T R )

C O N T R )

C A N

E N D

C A N

C A N

T R A N S IT

C A N

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

X 6

X 5

X 4

X 3

X 2 9

P R 1 /2

X 2 0

O P 8
X 2 8

R X D IV
S W IT C H
X 1 1

S W IT C H

T X

X 2 5

R X
S W IT C H

X 2 6

X 1 2

X 1 3

X 2 7

X 2 4

O P 4 /1 1

X 2 3

O P 3 /1 0

O P 6 /1 3 O P 5 /1 2

X 2 2

O P 2 /9

R X S ID E

X 2 1

O P 7 /1 4

O P 1

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

A -A

A -A

R P S C
R P S H

R P S C a n d R P S H
M o d u le s

O N /V T F 2

B la tt /S h e e t

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

G r o u n d in g k it
Id . n o . 5 7 3 0 7 3
o r
c a b le H 0 7 V - R 1 G 2 5

w a v e g u id e g r o u n d in g
a ll 2 0 m

w a v e g u id e g r o u n d in g
a ll 2 0 m

G ro u
d e p e
w a v e
G ro u
c a b le
b la c k

A L F O R M /F L E X W E L L
w a v e g u id e
G ro u
d e p e
w a v e
G ro u
c a b le
b la c k

n d
n d
g u
n d
>
U

in
in
id
in
1

n d
n d
g u
n d
>
U

in
in
id
in
1

g k it
g o n
e ty p e

G r o u n d in g c o n c e p t f o r E T S I r a c k :

g
6 m m
V - r e s is ta n t

g k it
g o n
e ty p e

g
6 m m
V - r e s is ta n t

W a ll fe e d - th r o u g h

G ro u
d e p e
w a v e
G ro u
c a b le
b la c k

w a v e g u id e g r o u n d in g
a ll 2 0 m

M a in g r o u n d in g p o in t

n d
n d
g u
n d
>
U

in
in
id
in
1

g k it
g o n
e ty p e

u n la c q u e r e d b r a c k e ts
a y t h a t th e r e is a n
a s h e rs o r o th e r
o u n tin g b r a c k e ts a n d
r a c k e ts , s p e c ia l
9 ).

g
6 m m
V - r e s is ta n t

M 6

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

G r o u n d in g
c a b le > 1 6 m m
g r e e n /y e llo w
1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5

U rh e b e rs c h u tz v e rm e rk D IN 3 4 -1

R a c k l

0 0 0

0 0 1

0 0 2

0 0 3

9 9

B e a rb .
D ra w n
G e p r ft
C h e c k e d
N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
0 0 3 /0 2 .9 8

b
a
S

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

te e th lo c k w a s h e r D IN 6 7 9 7
A N 0 0 6 9 9 7 8 7
+
c r im p - ty p e s o c k e t 6 - 2 5
A N 0 0 8 1 0 6 4 1
+
w a s h e r D IN 1 2 5
A N 0 0 6 5 0 2 5 4
+
s p r in g w a s h e r D IN 1 2 8
A N 0 0 1 3 5 2 3 5
+
w a s h e r 1 2 5
A N 0 0 6 5 0 2 5 4
+
n u t M 6 D IN 9 3 4
A N 0 0 6 6 2 7 4 8

0 0 4

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 1 2 e b 1 .D S F

U C -O N /V T T 3 2

T h e s u b ra c k s a re m o u n te d b y m e a n s o f
to u n la c q u e r e d r a c k u p r ig h ts in s u c h a w
e le c t r ic a lly c o n d u c t iv e c o n n e c t io n .
P le a s e e n s u r e t h a t th e r e a r e n o p la s t ic w
n o n - c o n d u c t iv e m a t e r ia ls b e t w e e n t h e m
r a c k u p r ig h ts .
In c a s e o f la c q u e r e d s u b r a c k m o u n tin g b
c a p tiv e n u ts m u s t b e u s e d ( Id . n o . 7 0 1 9 7

M S -N I/IP L
U C -O N /V T F 2

1 5 .0 9 .0 0
1 5 .0 6 .9 9

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

D a tu m
D a te

K o
K o

D a tu m /D a te

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

N am e

K o c h e r

G r o u n d in g C o n c e p t

U C -O N /V T F 2
B la t t / S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .1 2 e
1

N a m e
E r s . f. / R e p l. f. :

E r s . d . / R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

A ir h o s e to a ir d is tr ib u to r
Id . n o . A N 0 0 8 4 4 0 0 2
W a v e g u id e

a r n in g :

A ir in le t a n g e l
Id . n o . A N 0 0 4 6 2 9 4 7

D o n o t o p e n
s w itc h in g o ff
is h a r m fu l to
a n d c a n a ls o

w a
th e
th e
c a

v e g
tra
b o
u s e

u id e
n s m
d y (p
R F

jo in ts
itte r . S
a r tic u
in te r fe

w ith
tra y
la r y
re n c

o u t
R F p o w e r
to th e e y e s )
e .

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

E 3 8 -E 1 3 0 ,A 4 0 -A 1 1 0
A ir in le t a n g e l
Id . n o . A N 0 0 4 6 2 9 4 7

A ir h o s e to a ir d is tr ib u to r
Id . n o . A N 0 0 8 4 4 0 0 2
W a v e g u id e

P r e f itte d w a v e g u id e c o m b in a tio n w ith f la n g e c o n n e c tio n s


o n th e w a v e g u id e a n d c h a n n e l b r a n c h in g n e tw o r k s id e .
L e n g th : 1 2 0 0 m m o r 2 0 0 0 m m

E 3 8 -E 1 3 0 ,A 4 0 -A 1 1 0

A tte n tio n : N o te b e n d in g r a d ii: r = 4 0 m m


M a x . to r s io n : + /- 9 0 a t l= 1 2 0 0 m m , + /-1 8 0 a t 2 0 0 0 m m
T h
le n
O n
n o

e to r s io n o n ly m a y b e c a r r ie d o u t v ia th e c o m p le te
g th . N o t in s ta ll c a b le s te n s e ly o r s tr e tc h e d ly .
ly in b u lk c a b le s m a y fo r in s te p ta p e s b e d e fin e d ,
t tig h te n !

R X

D iv . R X

R X

D iv . R X

R X

R X

D iv . R X

R X

D iv . R X

R X

D iv . R X

R X

D iv . R X

R X

D iv . R X

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

B O S C H

D iv . R X

R a c k 0 0 2 o r 0 0 4

R a c k 0 0 1 o r 0 0 3

M H Z

B O S C H
M H Z

B O S C H

T X

T X

T X

T X

T X

b e n
g to
n e c
6 0

T X

T X

ig id lin e s
a c c o r d in
h te n c o n
to rq u e :

t a n d m a r k e d in th e fa c to r y ;
m a r k in g .
to r s u s in g a to r q u e w r e n c h
+ /- 5 N c m

U rh e b e rs c h u tz v e rm e rk D IN 3 4 -1

F le x ib le s e m i- r
to b e m o u n te d
A tte n tio n : T ig
M a x .

T X

M H Z

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 1 5 E B 1 .D S F
a

9 9

B e a rb .
D ra w n
G e p r ft
C h e c k e d
N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

U C -O N /V T T 3 2

0 0 3 /0 2 .9 8

b
a
S

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

U C -O N /V T F 2
U C -O N /V T F 2

2 0 .1 2 .9 9
1 5 .0 6 .9 9

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

D a tu m
D a te

K o
K o

D a tu m /D a te

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

N am e

K o c h e r

C h a n n e l B r a n c h in g N e tw o r k ,
W a v e g u id e C o n n e c tio n

O N /V T F 2
B la t t / S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .1 5 e
1

N a m e
E r s . f. / R e p l. f. :

E r s . d . / R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

D e la y tim e c o m p e n s a tio n in s p a c e d iv e r s ity c o n fig u r a tio n s

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

In o r d e r to c o m p e n s a te th e d e la y tim e d iffe r e n c e c a u s e d b y d iffe r e n t w a v e g u id e le n g h ts


b e tw e e n th e d iv e r s ity a n te n n a a n d m a in a n te n n a , a n a d d itio n a l IF c a b le is p r o v ie d e d in
th e s h o rte r p a th .

R e c e iv e r

w a y R X (m a in a n te n n a ) < R X D (d iv e r s ity a n te n n a ):
c a b e l is c o n n e c te d b e tw e e n X 2 a n d X 2 4

IF C O M B

9
X 2

R F
X 1

R X

X 2 1

R e c e iv e r

IF

R X D

X 2 5

X 2 4

IF

R F

X 2 5

C o m b in e r

IF to
D M

X 2 2

IF

X 2 3

w a y R X D (d iv e r s ity a n te n n a ) < R X (m a in a n te n n a ):
c a b e l is c o n n e c te d b e tw e e n X 2 2 u n d X 2 3

X 2 2
IF C O M B
X 2 3

M U
C O N T R
IF
X 2

X 4

R e c e iv e r
IF C O M B

X 2

R F
X 1

R X

IF

R F
X 2 1

X 2 3

R e c e iv e r

IF

R X D

X 2 5

C o m b in e r

IF to
D M

X 2 2

B A T

X 2 5

IF

X 2 4

IF C O M B
X 2 4
X 2 2
IF C O M B
X 2 3

X 3
M U
C O N T R
IF
X 2

X 4

M a x . w a v e g u id e le n g th d iffe r e n c e b y a m a x . Z F -c a b e l le n g th fr o m

U rh e b e rs c h u tz v e rm e rk D IN 3 4 -1

w a v
T
A
E
A
E
A
E
A
E
A
E

e g u id e
y p
4 0
3 8
6 5
6 0
7 5
7 0
8 2
7 8
1 1 0
1 3 0
3

3
5

5
7

6
7

7
1

fre q .
ra n g e
/G H z
,4 - 4
,1 - 4
,9 - 7
,6 - 6
,1 - 7
,4 2 5
,7 - 8
,1 - 8
0 ,5 0 ,7 -

f d o w n
/G H z
3 ,4
3 ,1
5 ,9
5 ,6
7 ,1
6 ,4 2 5
7 ,7
7 ,1
1 0 ,5
1 0 ,7

,2
,2
,1 5
,4 2 5
,8
- 7 ,7 5
,5
,5
1 3 ,2 5
1 3 ,2 5

f m id
/G H
3 ,8
3 ,6 5
6 ,5 2
6 ,0 1
7 ,4 5
7 ,0 8
8 ,1
7 ,8
1 1 ,8
1 1 ,9

d le
z

8
7 5
7 5

f to p
/G H
4 ,2
4 ,2
7 ,1 5
6 ,4 2
7 ,8
7 ,7 5
8 ,5
8 ,5
1 3 ,2
1 3 ,2

5
5

m a
le n
fo r
f d

3 0 m

x . w -g
g th /m
7 5 n s
o w n
3 1 ,8
2 8 ,4
3 2 ,4
3 4 ,4
3 5 ,4
3 3 ,2
3 4 ,6
3 3 ,8
3 0 ,8
3 2 ,4

m a
le n
fo r
f m

C o n n e c to rs X 2 ,X 2 2 ,X 2 3 ,X 2 4
P u s h - p u ll, m a le , a n g . ( Id . n o . 0 3 0 4 5 6 )

x .
g h
7 5
id
3 4
3 3
3 5
3 6
3 6
3 5
3 5
3 5
3 4
3 5

w -g
t/m
n s
d le
,8
,8
,0
,0
,4
,6
,8
,8
,4
,2

m a x . w -g
le n g th /m
fo r 7 5 n s
f to p
3 6 ,8
3 7 ,0
3 6 ,8
3 7 ,2
3 7 ,2
3 7 ,2
3 6 ,6
3 7 ,0
3 6 ,8
3 7 ,2
9

0 2 Y (S t)C Y 0 ,4 5 /2 ,0
(Id .. n o . 0 2 4 7 9 5 )

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 4 9 . 3 7 M A L

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 1 6 e c 1 .d s f
a

0 0

B e a rb .
D ra w n
G e p r ft
C h e c k e d
N o r m /S T D

M S -N I/IP L 2
M S -N I/IP L
M S -N I/IP L

c
b

0 0 3 /0 2 .9 8
U C -O N /V T T 3 2

IF C O M B
X 2 4

X 3

K o a x K a b e lb r c k e

K o a x K a b e lb r c k e

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

B A T

a
S

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 7 .0 5 .0 1 W o
1 6 .1 0 .0 0 K o
1 5 .0 6 .0 0 K o
D a tu m
D a te

A b t./D e p t.

D a tu m /D a te

1 5 .0 6 .0 0

N am e

K o c h e r

D e la y T im e C o m p e n s a tio n
in S p a c e D iv e r s ity C o n fig u r a tio n s

M S _ N I/IP L
B la t t / S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .1 6 e
1

N a m e
E r s . f. / R e p l. f. :

E r s . d . / R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

T h e a u to m a tic c ir c u it b r e a k e r s m u s t b e lo c a te d in th e fe e d e r lin e o f th e u n g r o u n d e d p o le .
W ith th e s ta n d a r d fu s e s o c k e ts o f P o w e r B o x II, th e s y s te m m a y b e o p e r a te d o n ly u s in g
b a tte r ie s w ith th e p o s itiv e p o le g r o u n d e d .
C T h is d r a w in g is t h e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r t y o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a t io n s G m b H . W h it h o u t t h e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n t o t h ir d p a r t ie s .

B y tu
A m a
P o w e
F u s e
C ir c u
C ir c u
C ir c u

r n in g th e
x im u m o
r B o x II
s o c k e t
it b r e a k e
it b r e a k e
it b r e a k e

c h a n g e fla
f 2 fu s e s o c
A N
A N
r 3 A
A N
r 6 A
A N
r 1 0 A
A N

n g e s
k e ts
0 0 2
0 0 1
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0

, th e
w it h
3 3 4 6
0 9 8 2
6 9 3 6
6 9 3 6
6 8 0 9

p o
4 x
6
6
2
3
1

w e r d is tr ib u to r c a n b e m o u n te d b o th in 1 9 " c a b in e ts o r E T S I c a b in e t s .
1 0 A c a n b e p r o v id e d in fu s e p a n e l 1 , w h e r e a s 1 x 3 A a n d 1 x 6 A c a n b e p r o v id e d in fu s e p a n e l 2 .

N o te :
O n ly th e 6 a u to m a tic c ir c u it b r e a k e r s m e n tio n e d a b o v e
m a y b e m o u n te d .
M a x . p o w e r : 8 5 0 W
(a p p ro x . 1 8 A a t 4 8 V ).

fo r 1 O H A U
fo r 1 d e h y d ra to r
fo r 1 R F c h a n n e l

T h e c a b le c o n n e c tio n s d e p ic te d a r e p r e - a s s e m b le d .

A 1 ,2 +

E 2 +

E 1 -

E 1 +

F u s e p a n e l 2

F u s e p a n e l 1

U p s
3 2 A
u p to 2 5 m lin e le n g th N Y M - O 2 x 6 q m
u p to 4 0 m lin e le n g th N Y Y - O 2 x 1 0 q

b lu e ( - )

re d (+ )

C A lle R e c h t e b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a t io n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e f u g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e it e r g a b e r e c h t , b e i u n s .

A 1 ,2 - E 2 -

tre a m
p e r f
m
Id
m m Id

fu s e
e e d e r
. n o . A N
. n o . A N

R e ta in e r
s tra p

lin e
0 0 6 4 2 3 8 4
0 0 1 8 0 6 4 2
- b lu e

P o w e r s u p p ly c a b le p e r R F c h a n n e l o r
O H A U o r lin e d e h y d r a to r
Y V (S T )Y 2 x 1 .0 /1 .8 6 5 .7 2 0 3 .9 0 1 .0 0 -A 0 0 1 ...0 0 9

+ b la c k
- b lu e
+ b la c k

B a tte r y 2

B a tte r y 1

C h a n g e f la n g e

C h a n g e f la n g e

R e m o v e c o v e r fo r
c o n n e c t in g f e e d e r lin e s

Im p o rta n t !!

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

3 4 -1

P ro
s u p
th e
E 2 +
e q u

v id e th e
p lie d in
p o w e r s
( b la c k )
ip m e n t

c
th
u
a
te

a b
e
p p
n d
rm

P r o c e d u r e :
D e p e n d in g o
(6 m m 2 o r 1 0 m
tu b e to th e c
a n d p u s h it o
in s u la tio n is
tu b e . T h e n b

P T F E

le
p a
ly
E
in

e n d
p e r
lin e
1 -(b
a ls .

s w
b a g
s to
lu e )

ith
b e
p o
, E

n th
m 2
o r r e
v e r
c o m
e n d

e c a
), c u
c t le
th e
p le
th e

b le c
t th e
n g th
c a b le
te ly c
c a b le

th
fo
rts
1 +

e P T
re y o
E 2 ( b la c

r o
a p
(a
e
o v
.

s s -s
p r o
p p r
n d s
e r e

F E
u
(b
k )

tu
c o n
lu e
o f

b e s
n e c t
),
th e

a p p ro x . 9 0 m m

S e c u r e d w ith r e ta in e r s tr a p s .
E n d s p r o p e r ly c u t o ff

e c tio
p r ia te
o x . 9 0
s o th
d b y t

P T F
m m
a t th
h e P

e
T F E

B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

0 1

R e ta in e r s t r a p s

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

0 9 .0 8 .0 1

G o tts c h a lk

N o rm /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

P o rt

E 2 -

E 2 +

E 1 -

E 1 +

( 4 x ) s u p p lie d in p a p e r b a g .

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M
a

P o w e r s u p p ly c a b le
w it h in s u la t io n

S im p lie d d r a w in g o f :
lin e s w it h P T F E t u b e

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 1 9 e b 1 .D S F

tu b e

M N -C F /O IP 2
M N -C F /O IP 2

0 7 .0 9 .0 1
0 9 .0 8 .0 1

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

D a tu m
D a te

G o
G o
N a m e

M N -C F /O IP 2

P o w e r B o x II
R e d u n d a n t P o w e r in g
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .1 9 e
E r s . f . : R e p l. f . :

1
E r s . d . : R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

e c h a n g
o f 4 fu s e
1 6
A
A
e r 3 A A
e r 1 0 A A
e r 1 6 A A

e fla n g
s o c k e
N 0 0 0
N 0 0 1
N 0 0 0
N 0 0 0
N 0 0 0

e s
ts
9 9
0 9
6 9
6 8
9 0

, th e
w ith
1 3 5
8 2 6
3 6 2
0 9 1
4 0 6

p o w e r d is tr ib u t o r c a n b e m o u n te d b o th in 1 9 " c a b in e t s o r E T S I c a b in e ts .
4 c ir c u it b r e a k e r s e a c h c a n b e p r o v id e d .

fo r 1 O H A U
fo r 1 R F c h a n n e l/4 8 - 6 0 V D C
fo r 1 R F c h a n n e l/ 2 4 V D C

1 9 " = 4 6 5 m m
E T S I = 5 1 5 m m
a k e r
e x p a n s io n s

4 4 ,4 5 m m

a w a y th a t
r e f ix e d in
s p o n d in g h o le s .

C ir c u it b r e a k e r

2 9 m m

7 6 ,2 m m

1 9 " = 7 6 ,.2 m m
E T S I = 7 5 m m

C o v e r fo r c ir c u it b r e
to b e b ro k e n o u t fo r
C a u t io n !
M o u n t c o v e r in s u c h
a ll c ir c u it b r e a k e r s a
p o s it io n b y t h e c o r r e
Fh o u l s e e s . p a n e l c o v e r

F u s e s o c k e t

b lu e ( - )

re d (+ )

R e ta in e r s tr a p

P o
tra
T x
o r

w e r
n s m
, R x
p e r
Y V (S T
6 5 .7 2 0

F ix in g s c r e w
M 4 x 3 5

s u p p ly c a
is s io n c h a
,M -U
O H A U
)Y 2 x 1 .0 /1
3 .9 0 1 .0 0 -

C r
2 x
1 x
2 x
1 x

3 4 -1
U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

r n in g th
x im u m
r B o x B
s o c k e t
it b r e a k
it b r e a k
it b r e a k

1 0 0 m m

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .
C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

B y tu
A m a
P o w e
F u s e
C ir c u
C ir c u
C ir c u

T h e a u to m a tic c ir c u it b r e a k e r s m u s t b e lo c a te d in th e fe e d e r lin e o f th e u n g r o u n d e d p o le .
W ith th e s ta n d a r d fu s e s o c k e ts o f P o w e r B o x II, th e s y s te m m a y b e o p e r a te d o n ly u s in g
b a tte r ie s w ith th e p o s itiv e p o le g r o u n d e d .

D e p
u s in
If e a
If tw

b le p e r
n n e l fo r
.8
A 0 0 1 ...0 0 9

e n d
g a
c h
o fu

in g
p o
fu s
s e

o n
w e r
e s o
s o c

th
s u
c k
k e

e o
p p
e t
ts

n - s ite
ly c a b
is c o n
a re c o

C a b le c o m b r a il fo r
c a b le fix in g

c o n d itio n s , th e fu s e s o c k e ts c a n b e c o n n e c te d e ith e r in d iv id u a lly o r in p a ir s


le .
n e c te d in d iv id u a lly , a n u p s tr e a m fu s e o f a t le a s t 3 2 A is r e q u ir e d .
n n e c te d in c o m m o n , a n u p s tr e a m fu s e o f m a x . 5 0 A ( c a b le : 2 x 1 0 m m ) is r e q u ir e d .

o s s - s e c tio n
6 -1 0 m m
6 -2 5 m m o r
6 m m w ith e n d s le e v e
6 - 1 6 q m m w it h e n d s le e v e

b la c k ( + )

C a b le

M a in - fu s e

m a x . le n g th

N Y M -O 2 x 6 q m m
(A N 0 0 6 4 2 3 8 4 )

3 2 A /s lo w

2 0 m
(4 8 V ,8 4 6 W )

N Y Y -O 2 x 1 0 q m m
(A N 0 0 1 8 0 6 4 2 )

5 0 A /s lo w

3 0 m
(4 8 V ,8 4 6 W )

N Y Y -O 2 x 1 6 q m m
(A N 0 0 7 0 8 1 6 7 )

5 0 A /s lo w

1 5 m
(2 4 V , 7 4 0 W )

b lu e ( - )

J u m
- J u
- M
- J u

p e
m p
a x .
m p

rs
e r
c o
e r

fo r
s m
n d u
s m

in te
u s t
c to
u s t

rc o
c o m
r c r
c o n

n n e c tin g u p
p ly w ith fe
o s s - s e c t io n
s is t o f m a s

to
e d
=
s iv

2
e r
1 0
e

fu s e s o c k e ts
lin e c r o s s - s e c tio n .
m m
w ir e .

b la c k ( + )

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 2 0 e f1 .D S F
a

f
e
d
c
b
a

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

C S -O
M N -C
M S -N
M S -N
U C -O
U C -O

P /IP
F /O
I/IP
I/IP
N /V
N /V

L 2
IP 2
L
L
T F 2
T F 2

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

0 6 .1
0 7 .0
1 9 .0
1 5 .0
1 4 .0
1 5 .0

2 .0
9 .0
3 .0
6 .0
9 .9
6 .9

D a tu m
D a te

M s
G o
1

2
1

W o
0 K o
9 K o
9 K o
N a m e

B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

P o w e r B o x B 1 6

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

U C -O N /V T F 2
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .2 0 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

6 5 .7 2 0 3 .9 0 2 .0 0 -A x x x

L 1

V
8 /6 0
2 4 /4

C a b le A

X 1

C a b le B

A 1

A 0 0 1
A 0 0 2
A 0 0 3

+ A 3

A
B

-A 2

V
8 /6 0
2 4 /4

B N - c a b le
B N - c a b le
W H - c a b le
W H - c a b le

A 1

A 1

C a b le C

X 3

B N - c a b le C

+ A 3

W H - c a b le C

-A 2

B N - c a b le
B N - c a b le
W H - c a b le
W H - c a b le

e .g . H O R
C h a n n e l 1 2 3 4

P o w e r s u p p ly c a b le
6 5 .7 2 0 3 .9 0 2 .0 0 -A x x x
4

r
r

-A 0
-A 0
-A 0
-A 0

O H A U

3 4 0 0
3 4 0 0
2 5 0 0

2 2 0 0
2 2 0 0
------

1 7 0 0
4 8 0 0
------

C o n n e c to rr X 3 /7 1 /7 2
D -S U B -F 0 3 M 3 /L 6 0 V

+ A 3

C
B
C

0 1

0 2

e .g . H O R
5 6 7 8

-A 0
-A 0
-A 0
-A 0

0 2
0 1

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 . 0 5 M A L

0 1

e .g . V E R
1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 '

0 1

V D E 0 8 1 2 -L IY C Y 2 x 1 ,5 /2 ,6 W S
(Id .-n o . 1 1 1 5 5 5 )

A ,B ,C

-A 2

(Id .-N r. 0 5 5 9 1 8

0 1
0 2
0 2

-A 0
-A 0
-A 0
-A 0

e .g . V E R
5 ' 6 ' 7 ' 8 '

0 1
0 1
0 2
0 2

1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 '

5 ' 6 ' 7 ' 8 '

1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 '

5 ' 6 ' 7 ' 8 '

X 3

X 7 1

X 7 1

O H A U

5 '

2 '

C h a n n1e l 2

-A 0
-A 0
-A 0
-A 0

3 '

7 '

6 '

4 '

0 0 3

0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1

-A 0
-A 0
-A 0
-A 0

0 1

8 '

0 0 4

e .g . H O R
5 6 7 8

-A 0
-A 0
-A 0
-A 0

0 1
0 1
0 1

e .g . V E R
2 3 4
1

0 1

0 0 5

-A 0
-A 0
-A 0
-A 0

0 1
0 1
0 1

e .g . V E R
6 7 8
5

0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1

X 3

T X

-A 0 0 3

X 7 2

R X
1

0 0 1

.
.

1 '

0 0 0

P o w e r s u p p ly c a b le
6 5 .7 2 0 3 .9 0 2 .0 0 -A x x x

X 7 2

C o n fig u r a tio n : 1 4 + 2

3 4 -1

A N 0 0 1 1 1 6 3 6
A N 0 0 1 1 1 6 3 7
A N 0 0 1 1 1 6 3 8

X 7 1

R a c k

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

0 1

T X

-A 0 0 3

-A 0
-A 0
-A 0
-A 0

0 2

M U

w e
tr ib
w e
tr ib

L 3

X 3

M U

P o
d is
P o
d is

0 2

R X
.
.

L 2

X 2

P o w e r s u p p ly c a b lin g

w e
tr ib
w e
tr ib

L 1

A 1

A 1

P o
d is
P o
d is

C a b le le n g th

L 3

A 1

C o n fig u r a tio n : 1 4 + 2 X P IC

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

2 x w ir e e n d s o c k e t
A N 0 0 8 2 8 7 9 7

V
8 /6 0
2 4 /4

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

L 2

X 3

X 7 1
X 7 1

M U

X 7 1

M U
R a c k

X 7 2

0 0 0

7
8

7
8

X 7 2

0 0 1

0 0 3

0 0 4

0 0 5

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 2 1 e b 1 .D S F
a

B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9 D a tu m /D a te
1 5 .0 6 .9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

N a m e

K o c h e r

P o w e r S u p p ly C a b le

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

b
S

a
V

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

U C -O N /V T F 2
U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

2 0 .1 2 .9 9
1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
K o
N a m e

O N /V T F 2
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .2 1 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

R e m o te
w it h o u t a d d it io n a
w it h P S T N 2 m o
a n d P S T N 6 m o d

h a n d s e t
l m o d u le
d u le ( P u b lic S u b s c r ib e r T e r m in a l N e tw o r k 2 W )
u le ( P u b lic S u b s c r ib e r T e r m in a l N e tw o r k 6 W )

L o c a l h a n d s e t

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

O H A U
W e s t

O H A U
E a s t

E O W 1 + 2 E X T S
X 3 2 /3 5

W e s t

E O W 1 IN T S
X 4 0

E a s t

E O W 2 IN T S
X 4 1

E O W

2 E X T S
X 3 5
E O W 1 E X T S
X 3 2
1

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

P S T N 2
E x c h a n g e c a b le
2 - w ir e

R e m o te
h a n d s e t
2 a

2 b
2 c
2 d
1 c
1 d
1 a
1 b
S c re e n
2

7
3
8
4
9

R e m o te h a n d s e t

P S T N 2 a n a
P S T N 2 a n b

P S T N 6
P S T N 6
P u b l. s u b s c . te r m . P u b l. s u b s c . te r m .
4 - w ir e
6 - w ir e
P S T
P S T
P S T
P S T

N 6 a
N 6 a
N 6 a
N 6 a

b a

P S
P S
P S
P S
P S
P S

b b
n a
n b

L a

T N
T N
T N
T N
T N
T N

6 a
6 a
6 a
6 a
6 S
6 S

b a
b b
n a
n b
1 a n
1 a b

L b

E O W

2 IN T S
X 4 1
E O W 1 IN T S
X 4 0

D is tr ib u to r

L o c a l h a n d s e t

1
6
2

1 a

7
8
9

L a

1 b
3

L b

4
S c re e n
5

3 4 -1

D is tr ib u to r

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

C o lo u r c o d e : S - 0 9 Y S ( S t) C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
Q u a d
n o s .
1
C o n n e c to r X 3 2
D -S U B -F 0 9 M 3 /S

C o n d u c t o r c o lo u r s
a - w ir e
w h it e
w h it e

(Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 0 8 )
5

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 . 1 1 M A L

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 2 3 e a 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

O N /V T F 2

M D
C o
X 3
R e

R S 1 5
n n e c to
2 , X 3 5
m o te a

b - w ir e
b lu e
o ra n g e

c - w ir e
tu r q u o is e
tu r q u o is e

d - w ir e
v io le t
v io le t

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
(Id . n o . 0 1 3 1 7 2 )

5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M
r a s s ig n m e n t
, X 4 0 , X 4 1
n d L o c a l H a n d s e t

B la tt /S h e e t

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
N a m e

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .2 3 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

V o ic e t r a n s m is s io n c h a n n e l b r a n c h e d t o fu r th e r n e t w o r k ( a n a lo g u e )
O H A U

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

W e s t

E a s t

E O W 1 + 2 A
X 3 3 /3 5

5
a n a lo g u e
0 .3 ...3 .4 k H z
6 0 0 9

D ir e c tio n C

D ir e c tio n D

M D R S

e .g . d is tr ib u to r

E O W 1 A
X 3 3
E O W 2 A
X 3 6
1

T a

2 a

R a

1 a

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

T b

7
3

1 a
4

2 a

2 b
S c re e n
5

R b

T a

1 b

8
9

e .g . M D R S 1 5 5 /1 8 ,7 -2 3
A T N 1 X 3 3

1 b

2 b

2
8

R b

T b

R a
S c re e n

X 1 ,2
X 2

e .g . D E 2 /F A
F 1

D ir e c tio n C ,D
T a

2 a

T b

2 b
6

2
7

R a

3
8

1 a

1 b
S c re e n

4
9
5

3 4 -1

R b

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

C o lo u r c o d e : S - 0 9 Y S ( S t) C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
Q u a d
n o s .
1
C o n n e c to r X 3 3
D -S U B -F 0 9 M 3 /S

a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

2 0 .1 2 .9 9
1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
K o
N a m e

b - w ir e
b lu e
o ra n g e

c - w ir e
tu r q u o is e
tu r q u o is e

d - w ir e
v io le t
v io le t

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
(Id . n o . 0 1 3 1 7 2 )

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 2 4 e b 1 .d s f

U C -O N /V T F 2
U C -O N /V T F 2

w h it e
w h it e

(Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 0 8 )

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 1 M A L

C o n d u c t o r c o lo u r s
a - w ir e

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r A s s ig n m e n t
X 3 3 , X 3 6
A n a lo g u e S e r v ic e C h a n n e l
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .2 4 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

V o ic e tr a n s m is s io n c h a n n e l b r a n c h e d in t o t w o d ir e c tio n s ( d ig ita l) 1 + 0 o r 1 + 1
w it h E O W b r a n c h in g m o d u le
O H A U

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

W e s t

S T M 1
B B lin e s id e

E O W 1 + 2 B r a n c h in g E O W 1 + 2 E X T
X 3 4 /3 7
X 3 0 /3 1

E a s t

E O W 6 4 k b it/ s c h a n n e l fo r th r o u g h - c o n n e c tio n to o th e r
E O W s y s te m s
S ig n a l is e it h e r t r a n s m it t e d t o E A S T o r v ia X 3 0 , X 3 1
5

6 4 k b it/s
D is tr ib u to r

B K /E K

e .g . M D R S 1 5 5 /1 8 .7 -2 3 G H z
X 3 4

D ir e c tio n C

D K

O P

T a 1
T b 1
T a 2
T b 2
R a 1
R b 1
R a 2
R b 2

O P
P R
P R

M D R S

O P

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

O P
P R
P R

1 c
1 d
2 a
2 b
1 a
1 b
2 c
2 d
S c re e n

1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5

e .g . D E 2
F 1 , F A , F D
X 4 ,X 5
O P

T a 1
T b 1
T a 2
T b 2
R a 1
R b 1
R a 2
R b 2

O P
P R
P R
O P

E O
X 3
E O
X 3
7

E O
X 3
E O
X 3

W 1 B r a n c h in g
W 2 B r a n c h in g

2
7
3
8
4

S c re e n
5

T a 1
T b 1
R a 1
R b 1
T a 2
T b 2
R a 2
R b 2

O P
P R
P R
P R
P R

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

D ir e c tio n C
C o lo u r c o d e : S - 0 9 Y S ( S t) C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6

B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m
D a te

N a m e

A b t./D e p t.

b - w ir e
b lu e
o ra n g e

c - w ir e
tu r q u o is e
tu r q u o is e

d - w ir e
v io le t
v io le t

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
(Id . n o . 0 1 3 1 7 2 )

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M
D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

w h it e
w h it e
5

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

C o n d u c t o r c o lo u r s
a - w ir e

(Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 0 8 )

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 2 5 e c 1 .d s f

E K

O P

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 . 1 1 M A L

O P

1 7 .0 5 .0 1 W o
1 6 .1 0 .0 0 K o
1 5 .0 6 .9 9 K o

4
9

B K

M S -N I/IP L 2
M S -N I/IP L
U C -O N /V T F 2

3
8

O P

Q u a d
n o s .

2
7

e .g . D K 6 4
X 5 ,X 6

C o n n e c to r X 3 4
D -S U B -F 0 9 M 3 /S

1
6

W 2 E X T

1 b
1 c
1 d
2 a
2 b
2 c
2 d

3 4 -1

W 1 E X T

1 a
1

O P
P R
P R

1 c
1 d
2 c
2 d
1 a
1 b
2 a
2 b
S c h ir m

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r A s s ig n m e n t
X 3 0 , X 3 1 , X 3 4 , X 3 7
B r a n c h in g E O W
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .2 5 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

Q d 2 c a b lin g w ith Q T N

(Q

T e r m in a l N e tw o r k )

e .g . S IS A -K O N

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

In te rfa c e
s e rv e r

S IS A -K

M D
D M

S IS A -K
Q D 2

D D K

G .7 0 3 /V .1 1

S IS A -K
S V * o n
fro n t p a n e l

S ta tio n b u s
R S 4 8 5

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

fro m

f u r th e r u n its

T w
S V
s ig
c a
T h

1 0

R S 4 8 5

fr o m Q D 2 d is tr ib u to r
o n ly 1 s y s te m
( M a n d e r c a b lin g )

1 0

P C

in te r fa c e P C - C O N

P C

in te r fa c e P C - L O C

X 4 2
C O N

S IS A -0
S V * o n
fro n t p a n e l
R S 4 8 5

V .1 1

X 4 3

P s e u d o -b u s

R S 4 8 5

G .7 0 3 in te r fa c e
E A S T o r W E S T

G .7 0 3
6 4 k b it/s

Q T N
Q D 2
X 4 7
Q S C E X T

In t e r n a l th r o u g h - c o n n e c t io n
to th e S T M - 1 s ig n a l

M D
D M

W Q E
X 3 8 X 3 9

1 0

R S 4 8 5

t o f u r t h e r u n it s o r
a t e n d o f S I S A b u s t e r m in a t io n

1 2 1 9
5

S V = p o w e r d is tr ib u to r

o 6 4 k
X 4 7 a
n a l. In
b lin g .
e s e c o

b it /s d a t a s t r e a m s c a n b e a p p lie d t o th e Q T N 2 m o d u le , o n ly o n e d a t a s t r e a m b e in g m a d e a v a ila b le a t
s a n e x t e r n a l in te r f a c e ( G . 7 0 3 o r V . 1 1 ) . T h is d a ta s t r e a m c a n a ls o b e in t e r n a lly a p p lie d t o t h e S T M 1
r e g e n e r a to r s ta tio n s , th e s e r v ic e c h a n n e l D S C 1 ( S O H o r R F C O H ) c a n b e th r o u g h - c o n n e c te d w ith o u t a d d itio n a l
n d d a ta s tre a m

is a p p lie d to th e r a d io lin k . T h is is im p le m e n t e d d ir e c t ly v ia D S C 1 ( S O H

o r R F C O H ).

3 4 -1

I f t h e Q D 2 s u b r a c k is o p e r a te d w it h o u t S I S A - K , t h e s t a t io n b u s m u s t b e c o n n e c t e d to p s e u d o - b u s X 4 3 .

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

C o lo u r c o d e : S - 0 9 Y S ( S t) C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
Q u a d
n o s .
1
2

C o n d u c t o r c o lo u r s
a - w ir e
w h it e
w h it e
5
1 0

B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

b
a

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M S -N I/IP L
U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 5 .0 9 .0 0
1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
K o
N a m e

c - w ir e

b lu e
o ra n g e
S -0
(Id .
S -0
(Id .

d - w ir e

tu r q u o is e
tu r q u o is e
9 Y
n o
9 Y
n o

S (S t)C
. 0 1 3 1
S (S t)C
. 0 3 0 7

v io le t
v io le t

Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
7 2 )
Y 2 x 2 x 0 ,6
3 5 )

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 2 7 e b 1 .d s f
a

b - w ir e

O v e r v ie w o f S IS A a n d
Q D 2 C a b lin g

O N /V T F 2
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .2 7 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

Q D 2 C a b lin g w ith L A N

C o n n e c tio n T M N

L A N

In te rfa c e
S e rv e r

E th e rn e t

C o n n e c tin g c a b le
1 :1
s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .5 5

O H A U
E C C G W

In t . th r o u g h - c o n n e c tio n
to S T M - 1 s ig n a l

X 6 0 0 , X 6 0 1 : C o n n e c to rs
o n fro n t p a n e l

X 6 0 0
L A N

R S 4 8 5
R S 4 8 5

fu r t h e r u n it s

R S 4 8 5

P C

1 0

S IS A -0
C o n n e c t.
o n fro n t
p a n e l
Q W Q E
X 3 8 X 3 9

1 0

in te r fa c e P C - L O C

X 4 2
C O N

1 0

R S 4 8 5

t o f u r t h e r u n it s o r
a t e n d o f S I S A b u s te r m in a tio n

1 2 1 9

3 4 -1

fr o m Q D 2 d is tr ib u to r
o n ly 1 s y s te m
( M a n d e r c a b lin g )

X 6 0 1

S IS A -V (K )

M = M a s te r in te r fa c e
S = S la v e in t e r f a c e

fro m

X 4 3
L O C
Q

R S 4 8 5

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

P s e u d o b u s

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

C o lo r c o d e
Q u a d
n o .
1
2

a - w ir e
w h it e
w h it e
5
1 0

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 2 8 e a 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

D a tu m /D a te
rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

0 9 .0 8 .0 1

N a m e

G o tts c h a lk

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

M N -C F /O IP 2

M D
E C
O v
L A

R S 1 5 5
C G a te w
e r v ie w o
N C a b lin

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 4 x 2 x 0 .6
C o lo r o f c o n d u c to r s
b - w ir e

c - w ir e

b lu e
o ra n g e
S -0
(Id .
S -0
(Id .

d - w ir e

tu r q u o is e
tu r q u o is e
9 Y
n o
9 Y
n o

S (S
. 0 1
S (S
. 0 3

t)C
3 1
t)C
0 7

Y
7 2
Y
3 5

v io le t
v io le t
4 x 2 x 0 .6
)
2 x 2 x 0 .6
)

/... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M
a y
f S IS A , Q D 2 a n d
g

B la tt /S h e e t

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M N -C F /O IP 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

0 9 .0 8 .0 1
D a tu m
D a te

G o
N a m e

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .2 8 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

S ta tio n b u s o r p s e u d o -b u s c o n n e c tin g e x a m p le

S ta tio n A
H e a d e n d w ith S IS A -K

R e la y s ta tio n w ith S IS A -K

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

Q T N

Q D 2 b u s
s t a tio n

Q T N
Q D 2

Q D 2
X 4 3

X 4 3
a lte r n a tiv e
c a b lin g

S ta tio n b u s
M a n d e r c a b lin g

S IS A -K
X 4 2

1 0

R S 4 8 5

1 :1
c a b lin g
R S 4 8 5

1 0

X 3 8 X 3 9

1 :1 c a b lin g
o r M a n d e r c a b lin g
w ith o n ly 1 u n it

1 2 1 9

t o f u r t h e r u n it s o r
a t e n d o f S IS A
b u s te r m in a tio n

R S 4 8 5

S IS A -0
1 0

H e a d e n d w ith S IS A -K
1 :1
c a b lin g
1 0

X 3 8 X 3 9

X 4 2

Q T N
Q D 2

M
X 4 3

Q T N
Q D 2

S IS A -K
X 4 2

S ta tio n b u s

1 :1 c a b lin g

R S 4 8 5

1 :1
c a b lin g

S IS A -0
X 3 8 X 3 9

1 0

t o f u r t h e r u n it s
o r a t e n d o f
S IS A b u s
te r m in a tio n

R e la y s ta tio n w ith S IS A -K

X 4 3

P s e u d o -b u s

R S 4 8 5

1 0

1 2 1 9

S IS A -K

R S 4 8 5

S IS A -K
X 4 2

S ta tio n b u s

S IS A -0

R S 4 8 5

Q D 2 b u s
s t a tio n
C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

S ta tio n B

R S 4 8 5

1 0

1 2 1 9

t o f u r t h e r u n it s o r
a t e n d o f S IS A
b u s te r m in a tio n

R S 4 8 5

S IS A -0
1 0

X 3 8 X 3 9

H e a d e n d w ith o u t S IS A -K

R S 4 8 5

1 0

1 2 1 9

t o f u r t h e r u n it s
o r a t e n d o f
S IS A b u s
te r m in a tio n

R e la y s ta tio n w ith o u t S IS A -K
Q T N

Q D 2 b u s

X 4 2

Q D 2

S
X 4 3

P s e u d o -b u s

Q T N
Q D 2

3 4 -1

C ro s s e d
c a b lin g

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

P s e u d o -b u s

M
M
C ro s s e d
c a b lin g

X 4 3

X 4 2

1 0

S IS A -0
X 3 9
R S 4 8 5

1 0

R S 4 8 5

S IS A -0
1 0

X 3 8 X 3 9

X 3 8

R S 4 8 5

1 0

1 2 1 9

t o f u r t h e r u n it s
o r a t e n d o f
S IS A b u s
te r m in a tio n

= M a s te r in te r fa c e

S = S la v e in te r fa c e

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 2 9 e a 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c tin g E x a m p le
S ta tio n B u s , P s e u d o - B u s
Q D 2 C a b lin g
B la tt /S h e e t

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
N a m e

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .2 9 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

B B
S T M 1
O H A U 1

B B
S T M 1

M U

O H A U 2

S ta tio n C

Q D 2
X 7 3 X 7 4
X 4 3 X 4 7
B B
S T M 1

S IS A 0
X 3 9 X 3 8

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

Q D 2
X 7 3 X 7 4
X 4 7
B B
S T M 1

S IS A 0
X 3 9 X 3 8
T

Q D 2 in t .

S ta tio n B

M U

6 4 k b it/s

S ta tio n D

O H A U 1

M U

O H A U 2

S IS A 0
X 3 8 X 3 9

B B
S T M 1
X 7 4 X 7 3

S IS A 0
X 3 8 X 3 9

B B
S T M 1
X 7 4 X 7 3

Q D 2 in t .

Q D 2 in t .

X 3 9 X 3 8

X 4 3
Q D 2

S IS A 0
O H A U 1

X 7 3 X 7 4
B B
S T M 1

X 3 9 X 3 8

X 3 9 X 3 8
3 4 -1

S IS A 0
O H A U 1

Q D 2

O H A U 2

M U

B B
X 4 2 X 4 7 S T M 1
X 7 3 X 7 4
Q D 2
S IS A -K
M U

X 7 3 X 7 4
B B
S T M 1

X 4 3

S IS A 0

M U

6 4 k b it/s

Q D 2 in t .

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

M U

S ta tio n A

X 3 9 X 3 8
S IS A 0
O H A U 2

B B
S T M 1
X 7 3 X 7 4

X 4 7
Q D 2

M U
B B
S T M 1

B B
S T M 1

T = B u s T e r m in a t io n

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 3 0 e a 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c tin g E x a m p le
S ta tio n B u s , P s e u d o - B u s
Q D 2 C a b lin g
B la tt /S h e e t

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
N a m e

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .3 0 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

S ta tio n B u s o r P s e u d o B u s C o n n e c tio n (E x a m p le )

S ta tio n A

R e la y s ta tio n w ith c o n c e n tr a to r

H e a d e n d w ith c o n c e n tr a to r

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

S ta tio n B u s
M a n d e r c a b lin g

X 6 0 0
S ta tio n B u s

X 4 3
Q L O C

S IS A -V (K )
C a b lin g ,
c ro s s e d

S IS A -0
1 0

C a b lin g 1 :1
o r M a n d e r c a b lin g
w ith 1 u n it

1 0

X 3 8 X 3 9

R S 4 8 5
1 2 1 9

to fu rth
o r a t th
th e S IS
te r m in a

e r u n it s
e e n d o f
A b u s
tio n

R S 4 8 5

S IS A -0
1 0

S IS A -V (K )

M
C a b lin g ,
c ro s s e d

1 0

R S 4 8 5
1 2 1 9

to fu rth
o r a t th
th e S IS
te r m in a

e r u n it s
e e n d o f
A b u s
tio n

R S 4 8 5

S IS A -0
1 0

X 3 8 X 3 9

3 4 -1
U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

R S 4 8 5
1 0

X 6 0 0

X 6 0 1
P s e u d o B u s

C o n n e c to r
o n fro n t
p a n e l

S IS A -V (K )
C a b lin g ,
c ro s s e d

E C C G W

R S 4 8 5

S IS A -0
X 3 9

R S 4 8 5

X 3 8

C a b lin g
1 :1

X 4 3
L O C

X 6 0 0

e r u n it s
e e n d o f
A b u s
tio n

E C C G W

T N M

1 0

to fu rth
o r a t th
th e S IS
te r m in a

R e la y s ta tio n w /o c o n c e n tr a to r

L O C
X 4 3

C a b lin g ,
c ro s s e d

R S 4 8 5
1 2 1 9

C O N
X 4 2

1 0

X 6 0 1

X 4 2
Q C O N

H e a d e n d w /o c o n c e n tr a to r

e r u n it s
e e n d o f
A b u s
tio n

X 4 3
L O C

S IS A -V (K )

S IS A -0
X 3 8 X 3 9

P s e u d o B u s

to fu rth
o r a t th
th e S IS
te r m in a

C o n n e c to r
o n fro n t
p a n e l

S ta tio n B u s

E C C G W

S IS A -V (K )

e r u n it s
e e n d o f
A b u s
tio n

X 6 0 0

X 6 0 1

X 6 0 0

Q D 2 B u s

to fu rth
o r a t th
th e S IS
te r m in a

E C C G W

T N M

1 0

R S 4 8 5

R e la y s ta tio n w ith c o n c e n tr a to r

L O C
X 4 3

C a b lin g ,
c ro s s e d

1 0

1 2 1 9

C O N
X 4 2

S ta tio n B u s

R S 4 8 5

X 3 8 X 3 9

C a b lin g
1 0
1 :1

X 6 0 1

X 4 2
Q C O N

H e a d e n d w ith c o n c e n tr a to r

X 4 3
L O C
Q

X 6 0 1

S IS A -V (K )

X 4 2
Q C O N
R S 4 8 5

E C C G W

X 6 0 0

a lte r n a tiv e
c a b lin g

Q D 2 B u s
S ta t io n

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

X 6 0 0 , X 6 0 1 : C o n n e c to rs
o n fro n t p a n e l

E C C G W

Q D 2 -B u s
S ta t io n

S ta tio n B

X 4 2
Q C O N
S IS A -0

1 0

X 3 8 X 3 9

M = M a s te r in te r fa c e
S = S la v e in t e r f a c e

X 6 0 1

1 0

R S 4 8 5
1 2 1 9

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 3 1 e a 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

0 1 D a tu m /D a te
0 9 .0 8 .0 1

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

N a m e

G o tts c h a lk

E C C G a te w a y C o n n e c tio n E x a m p le
Q D 2 C a b lin g
S ta tio n B u s , P s e u d o B u s
B la tt /S h e e t

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M N -C F /O IP 2

0 9 .0 8 .0 1

G o

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

D a tu m
D a te

N a m e

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .3 1 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

O H A U 1

B B
S T M 1

M U

O H A U 2

E C C
X 4 3

S ta tio n C

X 7 3 X 7 4
B B
S T M 1

X 6 0 0

S IS A 0
X 3 9 X 3 8

M U
E C C

S IS A 0
X 3 9 X 3 8

X 7 3 X 7 4
B B
S T M 1

X 6 0 0

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

B B
S T M 1

Q D 2 in t .
A lte r n a tiv e tr a n s v e r s e c o n n e c tio n
to b o th L A N p o rts !

L A N

C o n n e c tin g c a b le ,
c ro s s e d

S ta tio n D

s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .5 5

O H A U 1

M U

S IS A 0
X 3 8 X 3 9

B B
S T M 1
X 7 4 X 7 3

O H A U 2

M U
B B
S T M 1
X 7 4 X 7 3

S IS A 0
X 3 8 X 3 9

T
T
Q D 2 in t .

X 3 9 X 3 8

X 4 3

X 6 0 0

Q D 2 in t .

X 7 3 X 7 4
B B
S T M 1

E C C

S IS A 0
O H A U 1

X 3 9 X 3 8

X 4 3

O H A U 2

C o n n e c tin g c a b le ,
c ro s s e d

X 7 3 X 7 4
B B
S T M 1

E C C

S IS A 0

M U

X 6 0 0

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

S ta tio n B

L A N

M U

s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .5 5

L A N

A lte r n a tiv e tr a n s v e r s e c o n n e c tio n


to b o th L A N p o rts !

L A N

Q D 2 in t .

3 4 -1
U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

E C C

O H A U 1

S ta tio n A

M U

X 3 9 X 3 8
S IS A 0
O H A U 2

B B
S T M 1
X 7 3 X 7 4

X 6 0 0

S IS A 0

X 4 3

X 6 0 0

X 3 9 X 3 8

B B
S T M 1
X 7 3 X 7 4

E C C
M U

B B
S T M 1

B B
S T M 1

T = B u s T e r m in a t io n

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 3 2 e a 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

0 1
rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

D a tu m /D a te

0 9 .0 8 .0 1

N a m e

G o tts c h a lk

E C C G a te w a y C o n n e c tio n E x a m p le
Q D 2 a n d L A N C a b lin g
S ta tio n B u s , P s e u d o B u s
B la tt /S h e e t

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M N -C F /O IP 2

0 9 .0 8 .0 1

G o

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

D a tu m
D a te

N a m e

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .3 2 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

9
2

1 0
3

R b

T b

R a

T b

T a

T b

1 d
1 c
4

1 2

T a

S c re e n
1 b
1 a

Q W
X 3 9
1

R b

T a

R b

R a

1 d
1 c

R a

C r o s s e d c o n n e c tin g c a b le

L O C
X 4 3

M a s te r

S c re e n
1 d
1 c
1

9
2

S la v e

T b

R b

T a

T b

R a

T a

1 1

R b

1 b

1 2

T b

R a

1 a
4

T a

7
8

M a n d e r c a b lin g
1

T b
T a
2

1 0

s c re e n
1 b /1 c
1 a /1 d

R b
4

1 b

1 2

1 a
1 c
1 d
2 b
2 a
2 c
2 d
5

1 3
6

1 4
7
8

R a

T b

2 b /2 c
2 a /2 d

2
3

T b

4
5

R b

1
to fu rth
a t e n d
b u s te r
7

1 5

0
e r u n it s o r
o f S IS A
m in a tio n

Q D 2 V t (V T M 1 )

c o n n e c to r 1
M a s te r
R b
R a

s c re e n
1
9

T b

2
3

1 1

T a

1 a
4

1 d
1 c

1 2
5

1 3
6

1 b

1 4
7

1 5

R a

R a

1 b

1 3

1 4

R a

1 2

1 3

T a
R b

R b

1 0

1 1

1 1

T a

s c re e n
1 d
1 c
2

T b

1 d
1 c
4

1 5

1 0

1 2

T a

1 0

1 1

O H A U - Q C O N X 4 2
M S 1 /4 A 1

1 5

S c re e n
1 b
1 a
1

1 4
7

1 5

1 4

1 3
6

1 3

1 2
5

1 2 1
1 2
8

1 1
4

1 1

1 0
3

1 3

Q C O N
X 4 2

9
2

1
1 2 1
1 0

1 4

Q D 2 V t (V T M 1 )

R a

1 5

1 1

1 0

c o n n e c to r 2 -7

S IS A b u s
t e r m in a t io n

R b

1 4

1 d
1 c

R a

1 4

3 4 -1

T a

Q W
X 3 9

S c re e n
1 b
1 a

R b

1 3

E
X 3 8

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

T b

1 d
1 c

1 2

1 2

1 3

1 5

1 0
3

1 1

1 5
8

1 5

1 4
7

1 0

1 3

1 0
6

1 4
1 5

1 1

1 3

1 0
S c re e n
1 b
1 a
1

1 2

1 0

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

S la v e

E
X 3 8

1 0

1 1

M a s te r

S c re e n
1 b
1 a

t o f u r t h e r u n it s o r
a t e n d o f S IS A
b u s te r m in a tio n

1 :1 c o n n e c tin g c a b le (A N 0 0 0 9 4 6 4 4 )

C O N /Q L O C X 4 2 /X 4 3
M S 1 /4 A 1

1 5

1 0
8

1 4

1 a
7

C o lo u r c o d e : S - 0 9 Y S ( S t) C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
Q u a d
n o s .
1

C o n n e c to r X 4 2 , X 4 3 , X 3 8 , X 3 9 ,V T M 1 X 2 -7 ,M S 1 /4 A !
D -S U B -F 1 5 M 3 /S (Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 0 9 )
S IS A
D -S U
1 2 1 O
M o u n

b u s
B -F
h m
tin g

te r m in a tio n
1 5 M 3 /L (Id . n o . 1 0 0 7 6 6 )
r e s is to r
in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 . 1 1 M A L

a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

c
b
a

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M S -N
M S -N
U C -O
U C -O

I/IP
I/IP
N /V
N /V

L
L
T F 2
T F 2

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

w h it e
w h it e

b - w ir e
b lu e
o ra n g e

c - w ir e
tu r q u o is e
tu r q u o is e

d - w ir e
v io le t
v io le t

1 0

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 2 x 2 x 0 ,6
(Id . n o . 0 3 0 7 3 5 )

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
(Id . n o . 0 1 3 1 7 2 )

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 3 4 e d 1 .d s f

C o n d u c t o r c o lo u r s
a - w ir e

1 6 .1
1 5 .0
2 0 .1
1 5 .0

0 .0
6 .0
2 .9
6 .9

D a tu m
D a te

K o
0

K o
9

K o
9

K o
N a m e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r A s s ig n m e n t
X 4 2 , X 4 3 - X 3 8 , X 3 9
Q D 2 C a b lin g
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .3 4 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

Q D 2 c a b lin g w ith Q T N

(Q

T e r m in a l N e tw o r k )

O H A U
Q T N

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

fro m

7 R c o n n e c t in g
p a n e l

X 1 4 /X 2 7
1

fr o m t h e Q D 2 d is tr ib . ;
o n ly 1 s y s te m
( M a n d e r c a b lin g )

1 a
6

2
3
8

1 d
9

R S 4 8 5

1 0

R S 4 8 5
5

T a

S c re e n
1 b
1 a

R b
R a

R b

2
3
4
5
6

1 0

T b
T a
2

1 0
3

R b
4

1 b

1 2

1 a
5

1 3

R a

T b

1 d
1 c
7

1 5

R a

T a
R b

1 d
1 c

R a

M a n d e r c a b lin g
1

T b
T a
2
3

S c re e n
1 b /1 c
1 a /1 d

R b
4

1 b

1 2

1 a
1 c
1 d
2 b
2 a
2 c
2 d
5

1 3
6

1 4
7
8

5
6

1 5
8

R a

T b

2 b /2 c
2 a /2 d

1 1

1 2 1
1 2

R a

4
5

1 3
6

1 4
7

1 5
8

2
3

1 1

T a
T b

4
5

1 3

T a
R b

1 4

R a
R b

1 5

R a

C o lo u r c o d e : S - 0 9 Y S ( S t) C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
7
Q u a d
n o s .
8

1
2

C o n d u c t o r c o lo u r s
a - w ir e
w h it e
w h it e
5
1 0

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 . 1 1 M A L

b - w ir e

c - w ir e

b lu e
o ra n g e
S (Id
S (Id

d - w ir e

tu r q u o is e
tu r q u o is e
0 9
.-N
0 9
.-N

Y S
r.
Y S
r.

(S
0 1
(S
0 3

t)
3
t)
0

C Y
1 7
C Y
7 3

v io le t
v io le t

4 x 2 x 0 ,6
2 )
2 x 2 x 0 ,6
5 )

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 3 5 e b 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

R b

1
9

1 2

S IS A b u s te r m in a tio n
D -S U B -F 1 5 M 3 /L (Id . n o . 1 0 0 7 6 6 )
1 2 1 O h m s r e s is to r

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

1 2 1
1 0

C o n n e c to r a t X 3 8 , X 3 9 ,V T M 1 X 2 -7
D -S U B -F 1 5 M 3 /S (Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 0 9 )

1
9

T a

1 d
1 c

1 4
7

T b

X 3 8

U C -O N /V T F 2
U C -O N /V T F 2

1 3

C o n n e c to r a t c o n n e c tin g p a n e l X 1 4 , X 2 7
D -S U B -M 0 9 M 3 /S (Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 1 2 )

1 2

1 0

1 1

S c re e n
1 b
1 a
1

1 0

S te c k e r 2 -7

3 4 -1

1 5

Q D 2 V t (V T M 1 )

1 0

X 3 9

1 1

1 4

1 3

R b

S IS A b u s
t e r m in a t io n

1 0

1 1

T b

1 b
1 a

1 4

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

1 2

T a

1 d
1 c

1 0
7

1
1 0

1 1

1 5

X 3 8

S c re e n
1 b
1 a

R a

R b

to fu r th e r u n its o r
a t e n d o f S IS A
b u s te r m in a tio n

1 5

T a

1 4
7

T b

1 d
1 c
4

1 3

1 5

1 2

1 4

1 1

1 3

1 0

S c re e n
1 b
1 a

1 0

1 2

Q D 2 V t (V T M 1 )

1
9

1 1

u n it s , b a c k
2 d is tr ib u to r o r
S IS A b u s
n

W
X 3 9

1
9

1 d
1 c

c o n n e c to r 2 -7

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

E
X 3 8

1 0

R a

to fu rth e r
to th e Q D
a t e n d o f
te r m in a tio

R S 4 8 5

1 2 1 9

T b

T b

1 0

X 3 8 X 3 9

T a

1 b
S c re e n
1 c
7

f u r th e r u n its

2 0 .1 2 .9 9
1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
K o
N a m e

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r A s s ig n m e n t
X 3 8 , X 3 9
Q D 2 C a b lin g
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .3 5 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

Q T N

im

Q D 2

Q S C
C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

P s e u d o -b u s

O H A U
5

X 4 7
E X T

G .7 0 3 /V .1 1

t o f u r t h e r u n it s
e .g . S IS A -K O N , D D K (G .7 0 3 ), D D K (V .1 1 )

X 4 3
Q

L O C
S IS A -K
X 4 2
Q C O N

S ta tio n b u s

C o n n e c t in g e x a m p le : G . 7 0 3 in te r f a c e

Q S C E X T
X 4 7 b
T R
T R
T R
T R

1 b
1 c
1 d
2 a
2 b
2 c
2 d

6
2
7
3
8
4
9

B K

1 a
1

S c re e n
5

e .g . D K 6 4
X 5 ,X 6

R C
R C
R C
R C

_ D
_ D
_ D
_ D
_ D
_ D
_ D
_ D
b

E K

O P
a

O P
P R
P R
O P
a

O P
P R
P R
5

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

D is tr ib u to r

C o n n e c t in g e x a m p le : V .1 1 in te r f a c e

Q S C E X T
X 4 7 a
1

1 b
1 c
1 d
2 a
2 b
2 c
2 d
2

7
3
8
4
5

R C
R C
C
C

_ D
_ D
L _ b
L _ a
_ D
_ D
L _ b
L _ a
a

O P
b

O P
P R
P R

O P
b

O P
P R
P R

S c re e n

D is tr ib u to r
5

3 4 -1

T R
T R
C
C

1 a

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

C o lo u r c o d e : S - 0 9 Y S ( S t) C Y 4 x 2 x 0 .6
Q u a d
n o s .
1
2
C o n n e c to r X 4 7
D -S U B -F 0 9 M 3 /S

(Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 0 8 )

C o n d u c t o r c o lo u r s
a - w ir e
w h it e
w h it e
5

b - w ir e
b lu e
o ra n g e

c - w ir e
tu r q u o is e
tu r q u o is e

d - w ir e
v io le t
v io le t

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
(Id . n o . 0 1 3 1 7 2 )

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 . 1 1 M A L

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 3 6 e b 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

b
a

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M N -C F /O IP 2
U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

0 7 .0 9 .0 1
1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

G o
K o
N a m e

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r A s s ig n m e n t
X 4 7
Q D 2 C a b lin g
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .3 6 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls in S O H A

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

O H A U
6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h . E 1

in /o u t

X 5 2 S O H
5

E 1 W

S O H

in /o u t

E 1 E X 5 1
5

W e s t
6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h . F 1

6 4 k b it/ s s e r v ic e c h .

E a s t

in /o u t

X 5 4
5

S O H

F 1 W

S O H F 1 E

X 5 3

in /o u t
5

6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h .

T h e 6 4 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls E 1 , F 1 c a n b e a r b it r a r ily u s e d f o r v o ic e a n d d a ta t r a n s m is s io n .
F o r r e a s o n s o f u n if o r m it y , t h e s e c h a n n e ls s h o u ld , h o w e v e r , o n ly b e u s e d in t h e
E 1 b y te f o r v o ic e a n d s ig n a l t r a n s m is s io n in th e E O W

m o d u le 1 a n d in t h e

F 1 b y te f o r v o ic e a n d s ig n a l t r a n s m is s io n in th e E O W

m o d u le 2 .

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

S O H E 1 W
X 5 2
S O H F 1 W
X 5 4
1

1 a

T a

1 b
2

7
3

S c re e n

1
6
2
7

1 a

R b
5

-2
, F 1 te rm . n e tw .
o . X 5

2 b

R a

R b

2 a

T b

R a

2 b
4

T a

T b

2 a

8
9

e .g
D E
F A
X 4

S O H E 1 E
X 5 1
S O H F 1 E
X 5 3

3
8

1 b

4
9

S c re e n

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

3 4 -1

D is tr ib u to r

C o lo u r c o d e
Q u a d
n o .
C o n n e c to rs X 5 1 -X 5 4 a n d D E 2 X 4 -X 5
D -S U B -F 0 9 M 3 /S (Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 0 8 )
1
2

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 . 1 1 M A L

a - w ir e
w h it e
w h it e
5

a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M S -N I/IP L
U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

b - w ir e
b lu e
o ra n g e

c - w ir e
tu r q u o is e
tu r q u o is e

d - w ir e
v io le t
v io le t

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
(Id . n o . 0 1 3 1 7 2 )

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 3 8 E B 1 .d s f

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
C o n d u c t o r c o lo u r s

1 5 .0 6 .0 0
1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
K o
N a m e

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r A s s ig n m e n t S C U
X 5 1 - X 5 4
6 4 k b it/s C h a n n e ls E 1 , F 1
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .3 8 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls in th e S O H A

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

O H A U
6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h .
D S C 9 -1 2

in /o u t

D S C
X 5 6
2

9 -1
X 5
D S C 9 -1
X 5

E a s t

D K 6 4 d is tr ib u to r
1
2

1 a

T a

2 a

R a

1 c
1 d
2 c
2 d

T a

1 b

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

1 7

1 8

1 9

2 0

R b

T b

R a
R b

3 a

T a

4 a

R a

3 c
3 d
4 c
4 d
S c re e n

T a

2 1

2 5

T b

2 b

1 6

2 4

9 - 1 2 c a n b e a r b itr a r ily u s e d fo r v o ic e a n d d a t a tr a n s m is s io n .

2 W e s t

1 5

2 3

6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h .
D S C 9 -1 2

in /o u t
2

2 E a s t
5

1 4

2 2

9 -1 2 E
X 5 5

W e s t

T h e 6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls D S C

D S C

D S C

9 -1 2 W

1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3

3 b

T b

4 b

R b

T b

R a
R b

D S
D S
D S
D S

C 9
C 9
C 9
C 9

D S
D S
D S
D S

C 1
C 1
C 1
C 1

D S
D S
D S
D S

C 1
C 1
C 1
C 1

D S
D S
D S
D S

C 1
C 1
C 1
C 1

D S
D S
D S
D S

C 9
C 9
C 9
C 9

D S
D S
D S
D S

C 1
C 1
C 1
C 1

D S
D S
D S
D S

C 1
C 1
C 1
C 1

D S
D S
D S
D S

C 1
C 1
C 1
C 1

T a

1 a

R a

2 a

1 b

T b

2 b

R b

R b

1 c
1 d
2 c
2 d

T a

3 a

R a

4 a

T a
T b

R a

3 b

T b

4 b

R b

3 c
3 d
4 c
R a
4 d
R b
S c re e n
T a
T b

3 4 -1

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

C o lo r c o d e
Q u a d
n o .
1
2

C o n n e c to rs X 5 5 , X 5 6
D -S U B -F 2 5 M 3 /S (Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 1 0 )
3
4

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 8 x 2 x 0 .6
C o n d u c to r c o lo u r s

a - w ir e
w h
w h
w h
w h

ite
ite
ite
ite

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 . 1 1 M A L
2

b - w ir e
b lu
o ra
g re
b ro

n g e
e n
w n

c - w ir e
tu
tu
tu
tu

rq
rq
rq
rq

u o
u o
u o
u o

is
is
is
is
e

d - w ir e

v io
v io
v io
v io

le
le
le
le
t

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 8 x 2 x 0 .6
(Id . n o . 0 1 3 1 7 1 )

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 3 9 E A 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r A s s ig m e n t S C U
X 5 5 , X 5 6
4 x 6 4 k b it/s C h a n n e l
B la tt /S h e e t

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
N a m e

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .3 9 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls in th e R F C O H

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

O H A U
6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h .
D S C 1 -8

in /o u t

D S C
X 6 0
2

1
X 5
D S C 1
X 6

E a s t

1 a

T a

5 a

R a

1 b

2 b
6 a
3 b

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

7 a

3 6
3 7

R b
T a
T b

4 a

2 7

3 5

R a

7 b

2 6

3 4

R b
T a
T b

3 a

2 5

3 3

R a

6 b

2 4

3 2

R b
T a
T b

2 a

9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8

D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S

T b

5 b

2 3

3 1

1 - 8 c a n o n ly b e a c c e s s e d u s in g t h e R F C O H

m o d u le . T h e y c a n b e a r b itr a r ily u s e d

D K 6 4 d is tr ib u to r

2 2

3 0

4 b
8 a

R a

8 b

R b
T a
T b

9 a

9 b
1 3 a
1 3 b
1 0 a
1 0 b
1 4 a
1 4 b
1 1 a
1 1 b
1 5 a
1 5 b
1 2 a
1 2 b
1 6 a
1 6 b

R a
R b
T a
T b
R a
R b
T a
T b
R a
R b
T a
T b
R a
R b

C 1
C 1
C 1
C 1
C 2
C 2
C 2
C 2
C 3
C 3
C 3
C 3
C 4
C 4
C 4
C 4
C 5
C 5
C 5
C 5
C 6
C 6
C 6
C 6
C 7
C 7
C 7
C 7
C 8
C 8
C 8
C 8

D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S
D S

C 1
C 1
C 1
C 1
C 2
C 2
C 2
C 2
C 3
C 3
C 3
C 3
C 4
C 4
C 4
C 4
C 5
C 5
C 5
C 5
C 6
C 6
C 6
C 6
C 7
C 7
C 7
C 7
C 8
C 8
C 8
C 8

T a

1 a

R a

5 a

T b

1 b

R b
T a
T b

5 b
2 a
2 b

R a

6 a

R b
T a
T b

6 b
3 a
3 b

R a

7 a

R b
T a
T b

7 b
4 a
4 b

R a

8 a

R b
T a
T b

8 b
9 a

9 b
1 3 a
1 3 b
1 0 a
1 0 b
1 4 a
1 4 b
1 1 a
1 1 b
1 5 a
1 5 b
1 2 a
1 2 b
1 6 a
1 6 b

R a
R b
T a
T b
R a
R b
T a
T b
R a
R b
T a
T b
R a
R b

3 4

S c re e n

S c re e n

1 9

3 4 -1

C o lo r c o d e

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

Q u a d c o lo r
Q u a d
n o .

S p ir a l
c o lo r

w h
g r
2
3

C o n n e c to r X 5 9 ,X 6 0
D -S U B -F 3 7 M 3 /S (Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 1 1 )
4

w h
g r

W ir e p a ir

3
4

1 0

1 1

1 2

5
1 3

1 4

a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 5

1 6

w h
g r
w h
g r

b l
b l
b l
b l

- y
- y
- y
- y

e e e e -

g n
g n
g n
g n

- b
- b
- b
- b
n

n
n

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 4 x 4 x 2 x 0 .4
(Id . n o . 1 0 1 4 3 5 )

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 4 0 E B 1 .d s f

b - w ir e
C o lo r o f a - w ir e
R in g c o l. R in g c o l.
w ir e
2 0 m m
1 0 m m

3 4

U C -O N /V T F 2
U C -O N /V T F 2

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 4 x 4 x 2 x 0 .4

C o n d u c to r a n d r in g c o lo u r s

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 . 1 1 M A L

6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h .
D S C 1 -8

in /o u t
2

2 1

2 9

1 -8 E
X 5 9

-8 E a s t
9
-8 W e s t
0

2 0

2 8

D S C

W e s t

T h e 6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls D S C
f o r v o ic e a n d d a ta t r a n s m is s io n .

D S C

1 -8 W

2 0 .1 2 .9 9
1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
K o
N a m e

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r A s s ig n m e n t S C U
X 5 9 , X 6 0
8 x 6 4 k b it/s C h a n n e l
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .4 0 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

2 0 4 8 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls in th e S O H A

a n d R F C O H

O H A U

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

R O H
X 7 4

W S C

W S C

S O H
X 7 6

in /o u t

2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .

W e s t
in /o u t

2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .

W h e n u s in g th e c o r r e s p o n d in g m o d u le s ( R F C O H
o r 7 5 9 in te r fa c e s .

R O H

W
X 7
R O H W
X 7

S C
3
4

S C

E
W

S C
5
6

S C

3
4

1 2

1 3
1 4

6
7
8

S O H

E
X 7 3

W S C

2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .

E a s t
E

X 7 5

o r S O H

in /o u t
5

2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .
5

m o d u le ) , th e 2 0 4 8 k b it/ s s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls a r e a v a ila b le a s 1 2 0 9 

W
T a

O P

T b

F o u t

O P

2 a

R a

O P

1 c
1 d

T a

P R

2 c
2 d
S c re e n

R a

2 b

1 1

W S C

T e le c t d is t r ib u to r

1 b

R O H

1 a

1 0

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

W
X 7
S O H W
X 7

1
9

1 5

S O H

R b

3 a

3 c

1 b

1 d

3 b

3 d

2 c

P R

W ra p p
1 .,1 4 m
G u id e
Id . n o .
C o o p e
W in d in
Id . n o .
C o o p e

4 c

4 d

4 b

F o u t

2 a

2 b

1 c

2 c

2 d

3 b

3 a

4 a

4 b

W r
fo r
G u
Id .
C o

3 d

3 c

4 c

4 d

1 b

1 a

1 d

0 2
0 3

0 4
..
..
..
..
..
.
0 8

W r a p d is tr ib u to r
(b o tto m )

F in

O c c u p y c o n tin . fr o m
to p to b o tto m

P R

0 1

in g to o l fo r
m p in s
s le e v e :
A N 0 0 8 0 7 2 3 1
r n o . 5 2 2 2 1 2
g d e v ic e :
A N 0 0 8 0 9 6 1 1
r n o . 5 2 2 2 1 1

P R

R b

4 a

2 d

O c c u p y c o n tin u o u s ly fr o m
le ft to r ig h t.

1 c

2 b

F in

1 a

2 a

O P

T b

3
a

4
s

5
s

a p p
1 m
id e
n o .
o p e
W in d in
Id . n o .
C o o p e
m

in g to o l
p in s
s le e v e :
A N 0 0 8 0
r n o . 5 2 2
g d e v ic e
A N 0 0 8 0
r n o . 9 9 0

7 2
2 1
:
7 5
6 4

3 1
2
4 8
6

L S A P lu s d is tr ib u to r
1

3
b

5
b
a

6
b

7
b

8
b

9
b

1 0

b
In te rfa c e

F in 1
2 a

2 b

F in 2

F o u t 1
1 a

1 b

2 c

2 d

F o u t 2

F in 3

1 c

4 a

1 d

F o u t 3
4 b

3 a

3 b

F in 4
4 c

4 d

F o u t 4

S ig n a l

3 c

E q p t. s id e

3 d

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

3 4 -1

S w itc h . s id e
C o lo u r c o d e
Q u a d
n o s .
1

C o n n e c to r X 7 3 /X 7 4 /X 7 5 /X 7 6
D -S U B -F 1 5 M 3 /S (Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 0 9 )
2
3

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 . 1 1 M A L
4

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 8 x 2 x 0 ,6
C o n d u c t o r c o lo u r s

a - w ir e
w h it e
w h it e
w h it e
w h it e
5

b - w ir e
b lu
o ra
g re
b ro

n g e
e n
w n

c - w ir e
tu
tu
tu
tu

rq
rq
rq
rq

u o
u o
u o
u o

d - w ir e
is
is
is
is
e

v io
v io
v io
v io

le
le
le
le
t

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 4 x 2 x 0 ,6
(Id . n o . 0 1 3 1 7 2 )

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 4 1 E A 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r a s s ig n m e n t
X 7 3 , X 7 4 , X 7 5 , X 7 6
2 0 4 8 k B it K a n a l 1 2 0 9
B la tt /S h e e t

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
N a m e

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .4 1 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

2 0 4 8 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls in th e S O H A
O H A U

W e s t
9

X 1 0 9
9

X 1 1 0

R W 1 IN

R E 1 IN

X 1 0 2
9

X 1 1 1

R W 2 O U T

R E 2 O U T X 1 0 3
9

X 1 1 2

R W 2 IN

R E 2 IN

X 1 0 4
9

X 1 1 3

S O H A m o d u le
S W 1 O U T
S E 1 O U T X 1 0 5
9

X 1 1 4

S W 1 IN

S E 1 IN

X 1 0 6
9

X 1 1 5

S W 2 O U T

S E 2 O U T X 1 0 7
9

X 1 1 6

S W 2 IN

S E 2 IN

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

in
o u t

2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .

in

o u t
2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .

in
o u t

2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .

in

E a s t

R F C O H
R W 1 O U T

o u t

2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .

a n d R F C O H

W h e n u s in g th e c o r r e s p o n d in g m o d u le s ( R F C O H
o r 7 5 9 in te r fa c e s .

m o d u le o r S O H

m o d u le
R E 1 O U T X 1 0 1

X 1 0 8

o u t

in

2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .

o u t
in

2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .

o u t
in

2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .

o u t
in

2 0 4 8 k b it /s s e r v ic e c h .

m o d u le ) , th e 2 0 4 8 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls a r e a v a ila b le a s 1 2 0 9 

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

C o a x ia l p o r ts
2 0 4 8 k b it/s s ig n a l in p u t
R W
X
R W
X
S W
X
S W
X

1
1
1
1

IN
0

IN
2

IN
4
6

IN

1 O
0 9
2 O
1 1
1 O
1 3
2 O
1 5

U T
U T
U T
U T

R E
X
R E
X
S E
X
S E
X

1
1 0
2
1 0
1
1 0
2
1 0

IN
2
IN
4
IN
6
IN
8

R E
X
R E
X
S E
X
S E
X

1 O
1 0 1
2 O
1 0 3
1 O
1 0 5
2 O
1 0 7

C o a x . d is t r ib .

2 0 4 8 k b it/s s ig n a l o u tp u t

U T

U T

C o a x . d is t r ib .

U T
U T

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

3 4 -1

R W
X
R W
X
S W
X
S W
X

1
1 1
2
1 1
1
1 1
2
1 1

C o n n e c to r a t c o a x . d is tr ib u to r :
P u s h - p u ll, fe m a le , s tr a ig h t ( Id . n o . 0 3 8 9 0 1 )
P u s h - p u ll, fe m a le , a n g . ( Id . n o . 0 3 0 4 1 4 )

C o n n e c to rs X 1 0 1 - X 1 1 6
P u s h - p u ll, m a le , s t r a ig h t ( Id . n o . 0 3 0 4 5 8 )
M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 4 9 .3 7 M A L

0 2 Y (S t)C Y 0 ,4 5 /2 ,0
(Id . n o . 0 2 4 7 9 5 )
9

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 4 2 e b 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

b
a

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M N -C F /O IP 2
U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

2 2 .0 8 .0 1
1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

G o
K o
N a m e

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r A s s ig n m e n t
X 1 0 1 -X 1 1 6
2 0 4 8 k b it/s C h a n n e l, 7 5 9
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .4 2 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

D ig itia l s ig n a llin g in p u ts
O H A U

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

R C S IS A
X 1 1 7

S ig n a llin g in p u ts
2

c o n ta c t s w ith o u t
p o te n tia l
M E 1

1 b

M E 2

1 c

M E 3

1 d

M E 4

2 a

M E 5

2 b

M E 6

2 c

M E 7

2 d

M E 8

3 a

R C S IS A
X 1 1 7
1

1 a
2

1 b
2 c
1 c
2 d
1 d
3 a
2 a

2 b

7
3
8
9

1 a

4
5

S IS
S IS
S IS
S IS
S IS
S IS
S IS
G
S IS

A D 1
A D 6
A D 2
A D 7
A D 3
A D 8
A D 4
N D
A D 5

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

3 4 -1

C o lo u r c o d e

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

Q u a d
n o s .
1
2
3
C o n n e c to r X 1 1 7
D -S U B -F 0 9 M 3 /S

4
(Id . n o . 0 5 5 9 0 8 )

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 8 x 2 x 0 ,6
C o n d u c t o r c o lo u r s

a - w ir e
w h it e
w h it e
w h it e
w h it e
2

b - w ir e
b lu
o ra
g re
b ro

n g e
e n
w n

c - w ir e
tu
tu
tu
tu

rq
rq
rq
rq

u o
u o
u o
u o

d - w ir e
is
is
is
is
e

v io
v io
v io
v io

le
le
le
le
t

S -0 9 Y S (S t)C Y 8 x 2 x 0 ,6
(Id . n o . 0 1 3 1 7 1 )

M o u n tin g in s t r u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 1 M A L

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 4 8 E B 1 .d s f
a
B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

b
a

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M S -N I/IP L
U C -O N /V T F 2
n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 6 .1 0 .0 0
1 5 .0 6 .9 9
D a tu m
D a te

K o
K o
N a m e

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r A s s ig n m e n t
X 1 1 7
D ig ita l In p u ts
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .4 8 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

C o a x ia l p o r t
S T M 1 s ig n a l in p u t
D S 1 5 5

X 1

C o a x . d is t r ib .

S T M -1
1
2

X 2

S T M 1 s ig n a l o u t p u t

X 3

S T M 1 te s t o u tp u t

X 1

S T M 1 s ig n a l in p u t

S T M 1 s ig n a l o u t p u t
D S 1 5 5

X 2

C o a x . d is t r ib .

S T M 1 te s t o u tp u t
D S 1 5 5

D S 1 5 5

X 3

M e a s u r in g u n it

D S 1 5 5

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

S P I

C a u tio n !

U s e o f c o n tr o ls o
o r p e rfo rm a n c e o
o th e r th a n th o s e
m a y r e s u lt in h a z
e x p o s u re .

C o n n e c to rs X 1 ,X 2 ,X 3
P u s h - p u ll, m a le , a n g . ( Id . n o . 0 3 0 4 5 6 )
C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h f r
d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 4 9 . 3 7 M A L

D S 1 5 5

D S 1 5 5

F O

F O

r a d ju s tm
f p ro c e d
s p e c ifie d
a rd o u s r

e n ts
u re s
h e r e in
a d ia tio n

C o n n e c to r a t c o a x ia l d is tr ib u to r :
P u s h - p u ll, fe m a le , s tr a ig h t ( Id . n o . 0 3 8 9 0 1 )
P u s h - p u ll, fe m a le , a n g . ( I d . n o . 0 3 0 4 1 4 )
0 2 Y (S t)C Y 0 ,4 5 /2 ,0
(Id .. n o . 0 2 4 7 9 5 )
9

p o rt

U s e o f t r a n s m it d io d e s ( s h o r t h a u l) w it h a T x le v e l o f - 8 t o - 1 5 d B m .
T h e in p u t le v e l o f th e R x d io d e s is - 3 6 d B m .
T h is r e s u lt s in a m a x . p e r m is s ib le lin e a tt e n u a tio n o f a p p r o x . 2 1 d B m .

c a b le

N e w F O
T h e c o n
T h u s , a
in to a c c

ty
lo
tic
a t

p e
s s
a l
e a

s h
a m
lin e
c h

a v e a lin e
o u n ts to <
le n g t h o f
fu rth e r c o

a tte
1 d
a p p
n n e

n u a t io n
B m p e r
ro x . 5 0
c to r a n d

o f 0 .4 d B /k m a t 1 3 0 0 n m .
c o n n e c to r.
k m is p o s s ib le . H o w e v e r , it m u s t b e ta k e n
s p lic e le a d t o a d d it io n a l a t t e n u a t io n v a lu e s .

U r h e b e r s c h u tz v e r m e r k D IN

3 4 -1

S P I

c a b le
n e c to r
th e o re
o u n t th

S T M -1

M a in t e n a n c e a n d r e p a ir w o r k s m u s t b e p e r f o r m e d b y q u a lif ie d s e r v ic e p e r s o n n e l
o n ly .
T h e la s e r s o u r c e e m it s in v is ib le la s e r r a d ia tio n . L a s e r b e a m s c a n le a d t o ir r e p a r a b le
d a m a g e s o f y o u r e y e s . N e v e r lo o k in t o t h e la s e r s o u r c e o r o n to t h e c o n n e c t o r s u r f a c e
o f c o n n e c t e d F O c a b le s , n o e v e n w it h o p tic a l in s t r u m e n t s .

1 5 5 O P T in te r fa c e

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 5 0 e f1 .d s f
a

f
e
d
c
b
a

S V
Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

M N
M S
M S
M S
U C
U C

-C
-N
-N
-N
-O
-O

F /O
I/IP
I/IP
I/IP
N /V
N /V

IP 2
L 2
L
L
T F 2
T F 2

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

1 5
1 7
1 6
1 5
2 0
1 5

.0
.0
.1
.0
.1
.0

8 .0
5 .0
0 .0
6 .0
2 .9
6 .9

D a tu m
D a te

G o
W o
K o
K o
K o
K o
N a m e

B e a
D ra
G e p
C h e

9 9

rb .
w n
r.
c k te d

D a tu m /D a te

N a m e

1 5 .0 6 .9 9

K o c h e r

N o r m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

O N /V T F 2

C o n n e c to r A s s ig n m e n t
B a s e b a n d S T M 1 ,
e le c tr ic a l a n d o p tic a l
B la tt /S h e e t

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .5 0 e
E r s . f.: R e p l. f.:

1
1
E r s . d .: R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n to th ir d p a r tie s .

L A N
X 6 0 0
P in

C a b le e n tr y s id e
d e p ic te d

S ig n a l

T D
3

R D
fre
fre
R D
fre
fre

2
4
5
6
7
8

W ir e
b la c k
g re e n
re d
b lu e
w h ite
o ra n g e
y e llo w
b ro w n

T D

e
e

C o n n e c tin g c a b le
1 :1

3 a
2 a

T D +
T D R D +

2 b

R D

3 b

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h
f r d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r f g u n g s b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .

P in

S ig n a l

T D
3

R D
fre
fre
R D
fre
fre

T D

8
4
5
6
7
8

e
e

R D

3 a

2 a

3 b

4
5
6

2 b

7
8

1 2 .1 7 0 2 .4 7 3 .0 0 Z

A N 0 0 2 1 4 5 1 1

5 .0 m

C o n n e c tin g c a b le

1 2 .1 7 0 2 .4 7 3 .0 0 Z

A N 0 0 2 1 4 5 1 2

1 0 .0 m

3 a
2 a

T D +
T D R D +

2 b

R D

3 b

S ig n a l

W ir e
b la c k
g re e n
re d
b lu e
w h ite
o ra n g e
y e llo w
b ro w n

C a b le e n tr y s id e
d e p ic te d

L A N
X 6 0 0

C o n n e c tin g c a b le ,
c ro s s e d

W ir e

R o u te r

T D +
T D R D +
fre e
fre e
R D fre e
fre e

C o n n e c tin g c a b le

b la c k
g re e n
re d
b lu e
w h ite
o ra n g e
y e llo w
b ro w n

P in
T D +
T D R D +

3 2

L A N
X 6 0 0
C a b le e n tr y s id e
d e p ic te d

L A N

P in

R D +
R D T D +

2 a

3 a

T D

3 b
-

2 b

3 2

4
5
6
7
8

C o n n e c tin g c a b le

1 2 .1 7 0 2 .4 8 7 .0 0 Z

A N 0 0 2 2 0 8 8 0

5 .0 m

C o n n e c tin g c a b le

1 2 .1 7 0 2 .4 8 7 .0 0 Z

A N 0 0 2 2 0 8 8 1

1 0 .0 m

S ig n a l
R D +
R D T D +
fre i
fre i
T D fre i
fre i

W ir e

C a b le e n tr y s id e
d e p ic te d

re d
o ra n g e
b la c k
b lu e
w h ite
g re e n
y e llo w
b ro w n

C o lo r c o d e L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x 0 .1 4
P a ir
n o .
1
2
3

L A N c o n n e c to r
R J 4 5 8 - p in , s h ie ld e d ( Id . n o . 1 1 5 4 0 7 )
M o u n tin g I n s tr u c tio n s
M o u n tin g I n s tr u c tio n s

6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 2 M A L (R J 4 5 )
6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 1 M A L

3 2

0 1

B e a rb .
D ra w n
G e p r ft
C h e c k e d

D a tu m /D a te

0 9 .0 8 .0 1

N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.

0 0 7 /0 5 .0 0

a - w ir e
w h ite
re d
b la c k
y e llo w

b - w ir e
b lu
o ra
g re
b ro

n g e
e n
w n

L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x 0 ,1 4
(S N o . A N 0 0 0 7 8 7 0 7 )

M D R S 1 5 5 /... - 6 4 /1 2 8 M L Q A M

1 5 _ 8 5 6 5 \0 0 4 _ 5 5 e a 1 .d s f

M S -N I/IP L

C o lo r o f c o n d u c to r s

M N -C F /O IP

N a m e

G o tts c h a lk

E C C G a te w a y
P in A s s ig n m e n t o f C o n n e c to r X 6 0 0
L A N C a b lin g
B la tt /S h e e t

a
S

M N -C F /O IP

Z u s ta n d
S ta tu s

n d e ru n g
R e v is io n

0 9 .0 8 .0 1
D a tu m
D a te

G o

1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 0 4 .5 5 e

1
1

N a m e
E r s . f. / R e p l. f. :

E r s . d . / R e p l. b y :

B l.

Mounting Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 MI

MDRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E


SDH Long-Haul
Microwave Radio Systems

Commissioning Instructions

(RF/160 CI)
Edition 01.2003

Marconi Communications GmbH


D-71520 Backnang
Telefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212
http://www.marconi.com
Copyright 2003 by Marconi Communications GmbH
(hierin bezeichnet als Marconi)
nderungen vorbehalten Gedruckt in Deutschland
Marconi, Marconi Communications, das Marconi Logo,
Skyband, MDRS, MDMS und ServiceOn Access sind
eingetragene Markenzeichen
von Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows ist ein eingetragenes Markenzeichen der
Microsoft Corporation, Redmond.
Marconi Communications GmbH
D-71520 Backnang
Telephone +49 (7191) 13-0 Telefax +49 (7191) 13-3212
http://www.marconi.com
Copyright 2003 by Marconi Communications GmbH
(herein referred to as Marconi)
Specifications subject to change Printed in Germany
Marconi, Marconi Communications, the Marconi logo,
Skyband, MDRS, MDMS and ServiceOn Access are
trademarks of
Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation,
Redmond.

Commissioning Instructions

Contents

Contents
1 Safety Instructions ....................................................................... 1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8

Application ............................................................................................................................ 1-1


Protection class.................................................................................................................... 1-1
Operating voltage ................................................................................................................. 1-1
Rack installation ................................................................................................................... 1-2
Grounding the rack .............................................................................................................. 1-2
ESD protection...................................................................................................................... 1-3
Laser safety........................................................................................................................... 1-4
RF interfaces ......................................................................................................................... 1-6

2 Checking the System Setup......................................................... 2-1


2.1
Rack configuration ............................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2
Antenna installation and alignment.................................................................................... 2-5
2.3
Antenna support ................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.4
Waveguide connection ........................................................................................................2-8
2.4.1
Antenna side ................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.2
Equipment side................................................................................................................ 2-9
2.5
Securing the waveguide .................................................................................................... 2-10
2.6
Wall feed-through ............................................................................................................... 2-11
2.7
Grounding the antenna feeder line................................................................................... 2-12
2.8
Waveguide labelling ........................................................................................................... 2-13

3 Waveguide and Antenna Measurements .................................... 3-1


3.1
Reflection measurement at the waveguide........................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1
Design and calibration of the test setup .......................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2
Description of reflection measurement ........................................................................... 3-2
3.2
Polarization discrimination (XPD) measurement .............................................................. 3-3

4 Commissioning............................................................................. 4-1
4.1
Steps to be executed before system start-up.................................................................... 4-1
4.2
Adjusting the SISA address ................................................................................................ 4-1
4.3
Interface configuration on the QTN2 module .................................................................... 4-3
4.4
Configuring 2 Mbit/s interfaces on RFCOH and SOH Access modules ......................... 4-3
4.4.1
Configuring the 2 Mbit/s interface of the RFCOH Access module.................................. 4-3
4.4.2
Configuring the 2 Mbit/s interface of the SOH Access module....................................... 4-5
4.5
System startup and commissioning process.................................................................... 4-6
4.6
Service PC (LMT/MSP) ........................................................................................................ 4-7
4.7
Aligning the antennas ........................................................................................................ 4-11
4.7.1
Disabling the ATPC function ......................................................................................... 4-11
4.7.2
Disabling the modulation............................................................................................... 4-12
4.7.3
Antenna alignment ........................................................................................................ 4-13
4.7.4
Restoring the operational status ................................................................................... 4-14
4.8
Adjusting the radio hop ID................................................................................................. 4-15
4.9
Checking and recording of important configuration parameters.................................. 4-17
4.9.1
Operating mode............................................................................................................. 4-17
4.9.2
Oscillator frequency of transmitter and receiver ........................................................... 4-28
4.9.3
Configuring the reference level of the main receiver .................................................... 4-29
4.10 Diversity operation ............................................................................................................. 4-30
4.10.1 Configuring the diversity receiver.................................................................................. 4-30
4.10.2 Length compensation .................................................................................................... 4-32
4.11 Configuring service channels ........................................................................................... 4-41
4.11.1 Configuring service channels in the SOH Access Module............................................ 4-42
4.11.2 Configuring service channels in the SOH Extension (Ext.) module.............................. 4-47
4.11.3 Configuring service channels in the RFCOH Access module....................................... 4-49
4.11.4 Configuring service channels in the EOW module........................................................ 4-53
4.12 Configuring the QTN2 module .......................................................................................... 4-55
4.13 ECC Gateway configuration .............................................................................................. 4-57
4.14 Measuring values displayed by the Service PC .............................................................. 4-59
4.14.1 Tx measuring values ..................................................................................................... 4-59
4.14.2 Rx measuring values..................................................................................................... 4-60
RF/160 CI

Contents

Commissioning Instructions

4.15 Alignment of systems with protection switching configuration ................................... 4-61


4.15.1 Alignment using the Service PC.................................................................................... 4-61
4.15.2 Overall alignment .......................................................................................................... 4-63
4.15.3 Checking alignment values ........................................................................................... 4-65
4.15.4 Selective alignment ....................................................................................................... 4-66
4.15.5 Alignment with hot standby or 1+1 configurations without occasional traffic................ 4-69
4.15.6 Alignment errors ............................................................................................................ 4-69
4.16 Configuring and testing 1 + 1 HSB protection switching systems ............................... 4-70
4.16.1 Hardware switchover..................................................................................................... 4-70
4.16.2 Software switchover ......................................................................................................4-71
4.17 Terminating the commissioning process ........................................................................ 4-73
4.17.1 Recording configuration parameters ............................................................................. 4-73
4.17.2 Recording system data ................................................................................................. 4-75

5 Required Measuring Units and Accessories .............................. 5-1


5.1
5.2

Systems without optical interfaces .................................................................................... 5-1


Systems with optical interfaces .......................................................................................... 5-3

6 After-Sales Service ....................................................................... 6-1

II

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Figures

Figures
Fig. 1-1:
Fig. 1-2:
Fig. 1-3:
Fig. 1-4:
Fig. 1-5:
Fig. 1-6:
Fig. 1-7:
Fig. 2-1:
Fig. 2-2:
Fig. 2-3:
Fig. 2-4:
Fig. 2-5:
Fig. 2-6:
Fig. 2-7:
Fig. 2-8:
Fig. 2-9:
Fig. 2-10:
Fig. 2-11:
Fig. 2-12:
Fig. 2-13:
Fig. 2-14:
Fig. 2-15:
Fig. 2-16:
Fig. 3-1:
Fig. 3-2:
Fig. 3-3:
Fig. 4-1:
Fig. 4-2:
Fig. 4-3:
Fig. 4-4:
Fig. 4-5:
Fig. 4-6:
Fig. 4-7:
Fig. 4-8:
Fig. 4-9:
Fig. 4-10:
Fig. 4-11:
Fig. 4-12:

DC port Sub-D , 3-pin, male ............................................................................................. 1-1


Rack installation ............................................................................................................... 1-2
Protective grounding point.............................................................................................. 1-2
Bracelet contacts.............................................................................................................. 1-3
Laser class ........................................................................................................................ 1-4
Optical SPI interface module ........................................................................................... 1-5
RF interfaces ..................................................................................................................... 1-6
Card slots in the system racks........................................................................................ 2-1
14+2 configuration - Equipment with modules.............................................................. 2-2
Channel assignment plan in a 14 + 2 c onfiguration ..................................................... 2-2
Address connector (Sub-D, 15-pin, female)................................................................... 2-3
RPS-C protection switching unit (front and rear side) ................................................. 2-4
Antenna installation and alignment ................................................................................ 2-5
Antenna support PS2m, PS3m ........................................................................................ 2-6
Antenna support PS1.8m ................................................................................................. 2-6
Antenna support PE2x2 ................................................................................................... 2-7
Antenna support PS1.2................................................................................................. 2-7
Connecting the waveguide to the antenna................................................................. 2-8
Connecting the waveguide to the equipment ............................................................ 2-9
Waveguide installation ............................................................................................... 2-10
Wall feed-through for waveguides and cables......................................................... 2-11
Grounding the antenna feeder line (waveguide) ..................................................... 2-12
Marking the antenna feeder line (waveguide) .......................................................... 2-13
Test setup for reflection measurement (calibration) ................................................... 3-1
Reflection measurement at the waveguide................................................................... 3-2
Polarization discrimination measurement .................................................................... 3-3
SISA0-N module layout ................................................................................................... 4-2
RFCOH Access module layout ....................................................................................... 4-4
SOH Access module layout ............................................................................................ 4-6
AGC voltage versus receive level ................................................................................ 4-13
Length compensation in diversity operation.............................................................. 4-33
Notch displayed at the spectrum analyzer.................................................................. 4-34
Compensation with one notch using the spectrum analyzer ................................... 4-35
Compensation with two notches using the spectrum analyzer................................ 4-35
Notch shown by the spectrum analyzer before execution of the single steps ....... 4-37
Notch shown by the spectrum analyzer after execution of 20 single steps ......... 4-37
Length compens. example with two notches using the spectrum analyzer......... 4-38
Sweep charact. at the spectr. analyzer with an exact length compensation........ 4-39

Note:
Some of the systems depicted in this document include options which do not belong to the normal
delivery scope and have to be explicitly ordered.
Modifications of technical contents and characteristics reserved.

RF/160 CI

III

Figures

Commissioning Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

IV

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Key Words

Key Words
Key word 1-1 Operating voltage........................................................................................................ 1-1
Key word 1-2 Rack installation ........................................................................................................ 1-2
Key word 1-3 Grounding the rack ................................................................................................... 1-2
Key word 1-4 ESD protection........................................................................................................... 1-3
Key word 1-5 Laser ........................................................................................................................... 1-4
Key word 1-6 RF interfaces .............................................................................................................. 1-6
Key word 2-1 Rack configuration .................................................................................................... 2-1
Key word 2-2 Coding pins of the address connector.................................................................... 2-3
Key word 2-3 RPS-C addressing ..................................................................................................... 2-4
Key word 2-4 Antenna installation .................................................................................................. 2-5
Key word 2-5 Antenna support ........................................................................................................ 2-6
Key word 2-6 Waveguide connection ............................................................................................. 2-8
Key word 2-7 Securing the waveguide ......................................................................................... 2-10
Key word 2-8 Wall feed-through .................................................................................................... 2-11
Key word 2-9 Grounding the antenna feeder line........................................................................ 2-12
Key word 2-10 Waveguide labelling ............................................................................................ 2-13
Key word 3-1 Reflection measurement........................................................................................... 3-1
Key word 3-2 Polarization discrimination....................................................................................... 3-3
Key word 4-1 Adjusting the SISA address ..................................................................................... 4-1
Key word 4-2 Interface configuration on the QTN2 module ......................................................... 4-3
Key word 4-3 Configuring the 2 Mbit/s interface of the RFCOH Access module ....................... 4-3
Key word 4-4 Configuring the 2 Mbit/s interface of the SOH Access module ............................ 4-5
Key word 4-5 Service PC .................................................................................................................. 4-7
Key word 4-6 SISA network manager ............................................................................................. 4-7
Key word 4-7 Disabling the ATPC function .................................................................................. 4-11
Key word 4-8 Sending an unmodulated IF carrier ....................................................................... 4-12
Key word 4-9 Antenna alignment .................................................................................................. 4-13
Key word 4-10 Radio hop and polarization ID ............................................................................ 4-15
Key word 4-11 Operating mode ................................................................................................... 4-17
Key word 4-12 Overhead Access Unit......................................................................................... 4-17
Key word 4-13 Configuring SISA0-N ........................................................................................... 4-18
Key word 4-14 Configuring the transmitter ................................................................................ 4-19
Key word 4-15 Configuring the main receiver............................................................................ 4-20
Key word 4-16 Master / Slave setting .......................................................................................... 4-20
Key word 4-17 Configuring the modulator.................................................................................. 4-21
Key word 4-18 Configuring the demodulator ............................................................................. 4-21
Key word 4-19 Configuring the DPU / RPS STM-1 ..................................................................... 4-22
Key word 4-20 Loopback .............................................................................................................. 4-23
Key word 4-21 Line protection ..................................................................................................... 4-24
Key word 4-22 Equipment protection.......................................................................................... 4-25
Key word 4-23 SDH processing ................................................................................................... 4-26
Key word 4-24 Additional channels............................................................................................. 4-27
Key word 4-25 Tx / Rx oscillator frequency................................................................................ 4-28
Key word 4-26 Reference level..................................................................................................... 4-29
Key word 4-27 Configuring the diversity receiver ..................................................................... 4-30
Key word 4-28 Adjusting the modulation of RXD ...................................................................... 4-31
RF/160 CI

Key Words

Commissioning Instructions

Key word 4-29 Length compensation = Delay compensation with space diversity............... 4-32
Key word 4-30 Service channels (OHAU).................................................................................... 4-41
Key word 4-31 Activating continuous data monitoring............................................................. 4-42
Key word 4-32 Activating the SOH with 4x64 kbit/s................................................................... 4-43
Key word 4-33 Defining the use of DSC1 in the SOH for a QTN2 or an external signal......... 4-43
Key word 4-34 Activating the 2048 kbit/s WSC in the SOH....................................................... 4-44
Key word 4-35 Defining the protection of the 2048 kbit/s WSC in the SOH ............................ 4-44
Key word 4-36 Transmitting a 64 kbit/s service channel in the E1 byte of the SOH .............. 4-45
Key word 4-37 Defining the use of SOH byte E1 for transmit. an EOW#1 or ext. signal ....... 4-45
Key word 4-38 Transmitting a 64 kbit/s service channel in the F1 byte of the SOH .............. 4-46
Key word 4-39 Defining the use of SOH byte F1 byte for transm. an EOW#2 or ext. signal . 4-46
Key word 4-40 Activating the DCCR//DCCM in the SOH ........................................................... 4-47
Key word 4-41 Defining protection switching of ECC channels in the SOH ........................... 4-47
Key word 4-42 Activating E2 1x64kbit/s in the SOH .................................................................. 4-48
Key word 4-43 Displaying 4/8x64 kbit/s service channels transmitted in the RFCOH........... 4-49
Key word 4-44 Displaying the WSC 2048kbit/s interface of RFCOH ........................................ 4-49
Key word 4-45 Activating RFCOH with 4x64 kbit/s .................................................................... 4-50
Key word 4-46 Defin. the use of DSC1 in RFCOH for transm. an EOW, QTN or ext. signal .. 4-50
Key word 4-47 Activating the RFCOH with 8x64 kbit/s.............................................................. 4-51
Key word 4-48 Defining protection switching of RFCOH 8x64kbit/s ....................................... 4-51
Key word 4-49 Activating 2048 kbit/s WSC in the RFCOH ........................................................ 4-52
Key word 4-50 Defining protection switching of 2048kbit/s WSC in RFCOH.......................... 4-52
Key word 4-51 Activating 2/6-wire PSTN connections to the EOW.......................................... 4-53
Key word 4-52 Configuring QD2/SISA-K ..................................................................................... 4-55
Key word 4-53 Configuring the ECC Gateway module.............................................................. 4-57
Key word 4-54 MSP measuring values of the transmitter ......................................................... 4-59
Key word 4-55 MSP measuring values of the receiver .............................................................. 4-60
Key word 4-56 Alignment ............................................................................................................. 4-61
Key word 4-57 Overall alignment................................................................................................. 4-63
Key word 4-58 Checking alignment values................................................................................. 4-65
Key word 4-59 Selective alignment ............................................................................................. 4-66
Key word 4-60 Alignment with hot standby or 1+1 configurations.......................................... 4-69
Key word 4-61 Alignment errors .................................................................................................. 4-69
Key word 4-62 Protection switching............................................................................................ 4-70
Key word 4-63 Tx-side switchover............................................................................................... 4-71
Key word 4-64 Rx-side switchover .............................................................................................. 4-72
Key word 4-65 Recording configuration parameters................................................................. 4-73
Key word 4-66 Saving the configuration parameters to disk.................................................... 4-74
Key word 4-67 Recording system data ....................................................................................... 4-75
Key word 5-1 Measuring units without optical ports .................................................................... 5-1
Key word 5-2 Measuring units with optical ports .......................................................................... 5-3
Key word 6-1 Service ........................................................................................................................ 6-1

VI

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Abbreviations

Abbreviations
A

B
C

F
G
H
I

ACDP
ADR
AGC
AIS
ATDE
ATN
ATPC
AU-AIS
BAT
BB
BER
CALL
CAN
CBN
CCDP
CL
CMI
CP
CR
DCC
DCCR
DCCM
DFM
DIV
DIPL
DM
DPU
DRS
DSC
DTN
DTMF
EA PS
EA RX
EA RU
EA TX
ECC
EMC
EMI
EOW
ESD
ETSI
EXATN
EXT SET
FD
FEC
FP
GND
HF
HSB
IF
IM
INT-A
INT-B
LA/EA RX
LA RX
LA TX

RF/160 CI

Adjacent-Channel-Dual-Polarized
Address (data and module address)
Automatic Gain Control
Alarm Indication Signal
Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer
Analog Terminal Network
Automatic Transmit Power Control
Administrative Unit AIS
Battery Input (DC input)
Baseband
Bit Error Ratio
Call
Controller Area Network (internal bus system)
Channel Branching Network
Co-Channel-Dual-Polarized
Clock
Coded Mark Inversion
Connection Panel
Clock Reference
Data Communication Channel
DCC of RSOH
DCC of MSOH
Dispersive Fading Margin
Diversity
Diplexer
Demodulator
Data Processing Unit
Digital Microwave Radio System
Digital Service Channel
Digital Terminal Network (interface modem)
Dual Tone Multiple Frequency dialling procedure
Equipment Alarm PS
Equipment Alarm RX
Equipment Alarm RU
Equipment Alarm TX
Embedded Control Channels
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Electromagnetic Interference
Engineer Orderwire
Electrostatic Discharge
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
Extension Analog Termination Network
Extended Handset
Frequency Diversity
Forward Error Correction
Fuse Panel
Ground
High Frequency
Hot Standby
Intermediate Frequency
Interface Module
Internal Module Alarm - urgent
Internal Module Alarm - non-urgent
Line&Equipment Alarm RX
Line Alarm RX
Line Alarm TX
VII

Abbreviations

N
O

Q
R

VIII

LA-TX-BIT
LMT
LOF
LON
LOP
LOS
LSS
MAINS
MAP
MLQAM
MD
MS-AIS
MSOH
MSP
MST
MU
NFD
NO
NC
OH
OHA
OHAU
O&M
OOF
OP
OSC
OT
PCB
PDH
PI
PR
PS
PSTN
PSU
POWER
QAM
RBER
RC
RDI
REI
RF
RFCOH
RFU
ROW
RPS
RPSC
RPSI
RRTF
RSL
RSOH
RST
RTF
RTFE
RTTF
RU
RX
RXD
SAW
SCU

Commissioning Instructions

Line Alarm TX Bit


Local Maintenance Terminal (Service PC)
Loss Of Frame
Local Operator Network (internal bus system)
Loss Of Pointer
Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Sequence Synchronization
Mains power (AC mains input)
Mapping function
Multilevel Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Modulator
Multiplex Section AIS
Multiplex Section Overhead
Multiplex Section Protection
Multiplex Section Termination
Modem Unit
Net Filter Discrimination
Normally Open relay contact
Normally Closed relay contact
Overhead
Overhead Access
Overhead Access Unit
Operation and Maintenance
Out Of Frame
Operation Channel
Oscillator
Occasional Traffic
Printed Circuit Board
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
Physical Interface
Protection Channel
Power Supply
Public Subscriber Terminal Network
Protection Switching Unit
Power
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Residual Bit Error Ratio
Remote Control
Remote Defect Indication
Remote Error Indication
Radio Frequency
Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
Radio Frequency Unit
Regenerator Order Wire
Radio Protection Switching
Radio Protection Switching Central Unit
Radio Protection Switching Interface
Radio Regenerator Transport Function
Receive Signal Level
Regenerator Section Overhead
Regenerator Section Termination
Regenerator Transport Function
Regenerator Transport Function - Electrical
Radio Terminal Transport Function
Radio Unit
Receiver
Diversity Receiver
Surface Acoustic Wave
Service Channel Unit
RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

U
W
X

SD
SDH
SNCP
SNMP
SOH
SOHA
SPB
SPI
SPI EL
SPI OPT
STM
T3
TMN
TSE
TTF
TX
USER
WAY
XIF
XPD
XPE
XPI
XPIC
IF

RF/160 CI

Abbreviation

Space Diversity
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Sub-Network Connection Protection
Simple Network Management Protocol
Section Overhead
Section Overhead Access
Synchronous Port Block
Synchronous Port Interface
Synchronous Port Interface - Electrical
Synchronous Port Interface - Optical
Synchronous Transport Module
Clock Input 2048 k - synchronous
Telecommunication Management Network
Test Sequence Error
Terminal Transport Function
Transmitter
User Port
Wayside Traffic
Cross-Polarization Improvement Factor
Cross-Polarization Discrimination
Cross-Polarization Equalizer
Cross-Polarization Interference
Cross-Polarization Interference Canceller
Intermediate Frequency

IX

Abbreviations

Commissioning Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Safety Instructions

1 Safety Instructions
1.1

Application

These microwave radio systems are designed to meet environment class 3.2 as defined in ETS 300 019.
This class specifies system applications in partly temperature-controlled rooms (-5 C to +45 C, max.
95% relative humidity). The systems may be used only under the conditions and for the purpose for which
they have been developed. For more detailed information, please refer to the Technical characteristics
indicated in the Operator Manual.
Installation and Service works may be executed only by technically trained and experienced staff knowing
the hazards that can occur and the measures to be taken for minimizing any danger for themselves and
third parties.
Please note all warnings and instructions contained in this Manual.
Only service staff should be granted access to the active system.
Do not use any installation materials (screws, nuts etc.) different from those supplied with the
equipment or recommended by the manufacturer.
Use appropriate safety devices while you are working on top of or near the mast.
The system may be installed and operated only in locations with restricted access.

1.2

Protection class

The DRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E system meets protection class IEC IP 20.

1.3

Operating voltage
Key word 1-1 Operating voltage

The Tx, Rx, MU PS and OHAU PS modules of the microwave radio system can be operated in the
voltage range from 19 V to 75 V DC. The voltage input is floating, i.e. either the positive pole (standard)
or the negative pole can be grounded. The standard cables used for setting up the connection to the
power box (distributor) are dimensioned for the voltage ranges of 48 V and 60 V. Thicker cable crosssections are required for 24 V.
Before switching on the power supply, please check that the operating voltage and supply voltage
are identical and that the polarity is correct ( Fig. 1-1).

BAT 19...75V DC

Fig. 1-1:

DC port Sub-D , 3-pin, male

Ensure that the power supply has been switched off before you plug in or pull out any
module connecting cables. This applies to both control and operating voltage cables of the
Modem Unit, OHAU as well as Tx and Rx modules. The following modules may be inserted in or
extracted from the subrack only with the power supply switched off:
Modulator
=
Mod/MD
(in Modem Unit)
Demodulator
=
Demod/DM (in Modem Unit)
SOH Access
(in OHAU)
Power Supply =
PS
(in OHAU & Modem Unit)
For safety reasons, we always recommend to switch off the corresponding power supply unit
at the fuse panel before you extract or insert a module !!
The automatic circuit breakers must be located in the feeder line of the ungrounded pole.
With the standard fuse sockets of Power Box II, the system may be operated only using
batteries with the positive pole grounded.

RF/160 CI

1-1

Safety Instructions

1.4

Commissioning Instructions

Rack installation
Key word 1-2

Rack installation

System racks (ETSI or 19) must be protected from tipping over by screwing the clips (Fig. 1-2) to the wall
or ceiling using appropriate securing material. For more detailed information, please refer to the
Installation Manual.

Fig. 1-2:

1.5

Rack installation

Grounding the rack


Key word 1-3

Grounding the rack

The racks must be grounded via the protective grounding point located in the top section of the rear rack
upright (Fig. 1-3) using a protective conductor (16 mm). The individual modules are grounded via the
metal rails of the subracks and rack. For further instructions, please refer to the Installation Manual.

M8

Fig. 1-3:

1-2

Protective grounding point

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

1.6

Safety Instructions

ESD protection
Key word 1-4

ESD protection

The system rack is equipped with two grounding points (Fig. 1-4) with a 10 mm snap fastener for
connecting a grounding bracelet to avoid electrostatic discharging (ESD).

Earth
Bon di ng
Poi nt

Earth
Bon di ng
Poi nt

BOSCH

RPSC

10 mm

E arth
B onding
P oint

Fig. 1-4:

RF/160 CI

Bracelet contacts

1-3

Safety Instructions

1.7

Commissioning Instructions

Laser safety
Key word 1-5

Laser

The Modem Unit can be optionally equipped with two optical modules (SPI) (Fig. 1-6).
The laser used meets LASER CLASS 1 (Fig. 1-5) as defined in EN 60825-1.

Fig. 1-5:

Laser class

The laser complies with ITU-T G.957 and features the following characteristics:
Wavelength
Output power
Pulse duration
Beam divergence

S-1.1
1310 nm
-8...-15 dBm
6.43 ns
~ 23

The module is automatically deactivated by an ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) circuit as soon as the
optical input signal fails (e.g. in case of a cable break). In case of a loss of signal (LOS) at the SPI input,
the laser is alternately activated for 2 seconds and deactivated for 70 seconds. Besides this automatic
testing routine, it is also possible to switch on the laser manually for 2 seconds or 90 seconds. After
expiry of the corresponding period, the system returns to the previous testing cycle.

Maintenance and repair works may be executed only by qualified service personnel.

The laser source emits invisible laser radiation. Laser beams can lead to irreparable eye injuries.
Never look into the laser source or onto the connector surface of fibre-optic cables connected, not
even with optical instruments.

Caution!

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

1-4

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Safety Instructions

Earth
Bon di ng
Poi nt

Earth
Bon di ng
Poi nt

BOSCH

RPSC

SPI

STM-1

Fig. 1-6:

RF/160 CI

Optical SPI interface module

1-5

Safety Instructions

1.8

Commissioning Instructions

RF interfaces
Key word 1-6

RF interfaces

When opening the RF interfaces (waveguides or semi-rigid cables) while the transmitters are active,
health-hazardous microwave radiation is emitted.
In addition, this can lead to RF interferences in neighbouring units.
Do not look into open waveguide connections and do not stand in front of transmit antennas.
To avoid exposure to microwave radiation, you should always switch off the transmitter before
you start to dismount the equipment.

E arth
B on di ng
P oi nt

E arth
B on di ng
P oi nt

BOSCH

RPSC

Warnung :

Nicht die Hohlleiterverbindungen ffnen bevor die Sender


ausgeschaltet sind. Mikrowellenstrahlung kann
gesundheitsschdlich sein, besonders fr die Augen.
Ebenso knnen Gertestrungen verursacht werden.

Warning :

Do not open waveguide joints without


switching off the transmitter. Stray RF power
is harmful to the body (particulary to the eyes)
and can also cause RF interference.

Fig. 1-7:

RF interfaces

The SMA connectors of the coaxial cables between the Tx modules, Rx modules and channel
branching networks may be tightened only with a torque of approx. 60 Ncm. A higher torque would
slacken the SMA connectors at the RF filters when opening the joint. This would lead to a change
of the filter characteristic.

1-6

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Checking the System Setup

2 Checking the System Setup


The figures contained and described in this chapter can be used to check the correct system setup and
installation in compliance with the commissioning records.

2.1

Rack configuration
Key word 2-1

Rack configuration

All system components are mounted in ETSI cabinets (H x W x D: 2200 x 600 x 300 mm). Alternatively,
installation in 19" cabinets is also possible.
A fully equipped ETSI cabinet can provide up to 4 RF channels including service channels, power supply
and protection switching. In case of expansions, several cabinets can be installed side by side or back to
back (up to 4 system racks or cabinets for a 14 + 2 configuration).
An expansion of the microwave radio system (max. 14 operating channels and 2 protection channels) is
normally possible without traffic interruption.
The card slots for the individual modules are numbered in system racks 0, 1 . . . 4.
The modules to be mounted in these card slots are preconfigured in the factory according to the
customer-specific requirements.
On site, the modules must be installed in the corresponding card slots in accordance with the
configuration lists included in the delivery scope to ensure that all features adjusted will be made
available.
Rack 0
Rack 1
000

001 - 004
005 - 008
100
101
111

102
112

103
113

104
114

200
220 222 212 213 214 215
2 2 207 208 209 210
2 0
1 1 202 203 204 205

216
211
206

300
301
311

302
312

303
313

304
314

305
010

400
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1
2
0

414
4
0
1
4
0
2

500

4
1
2
4
1
3

514
5
0
1
5
0
2

Fig. 2-1:

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

5
1
2
5
1
3

Card slots in the system racks

Please refer to Chapter 2 "Rack Configuration" of the Operator Manual for detailed configuration lists. The
various setup and configuration variants are also described in the Operator Manual.

RF/160 CI

2-1

Checking the System Setup

Commissioning Instructions

Example of a rack equipped for a 14 + 2 c o nfiguration with XPIC. Illustration of modules (configuration
plan) and channel assignment (cable plan):
a) Equipment with modules (configuration plan):
Rack 0

Rack 1

R
X
1
H

R
X
2
H

Rack 2

R
X
3
H

R
X
4
H

R
X
5
H

RF Filter

R
X
6
H

Rack 3

R
X
7
H

R
X
8
H

RF Filter

R
X
2
V

R
X
3
V

R
X
4
V

R
X
5
V

RF Filter

R
X
6
V

R
X
7
V

R
X
8
V

RF Filter

T
X
1

T
X
2

T
X
3

T
X
4

T
X
5

T
X
6

T
X
7

T
X
8

T
X
1

T
X
2

T
X
3

T
X
4

T
X
5

T
X
6

T
X
7

T
X
8

RPS-C MU o

OHAU

R
X
1
V

Rack 4

Modem Unit
top
(MU o)

RPS-C MU o
Modem Unit
top
(MU o)

RPS-C MU u
Modem Unit
bottom
(MU u)
Fig. 2-2:

Modem Unit
top
(MU o)

Modem Unit
top
(MU o)

RPS-C MU u
Modem Unit
bottom
(MU u)

Modem Unit
bottom
(MU u)

Modem Unit
bottom
(MU u)

14+2 configuration - Equipment with modules

Equipping direction: from left to right! Rack height: 2200 mm (= standard height) or 1800 mm.
b) Channel assignment (cable plan):

O
P
1
H

O
P
2
H

O
P
3
H

O
P
5
H

O
P
7
H

RF Filter

O O O
P P P
9 11 13
H H H

P
R
2
V

O
P
4
V

O
P
6
V

O O O O
P P P P
8 10 12 14
V V V V

RF Filter

RF Filter

RF Filter

O
P
1

O
P
2

O
P
3

O
P
5

O
P
7

O O O
P P P
9 11 13

P
R
1

P
R
2

O
P
4

O
P
6

O O O O
P P P P
8 10 12 14

RPS-C MU o

OHAU

P
R
1
V

MU o
OP 1

PR 1

OP 3
Fig. 2-3:

OP 4

RPS-C MU o
MU o
OP 7

OP 8

RPS-C MU u
MU u

MU o
OP 2

PR 2

MU o
OP 9

OP 10

RPS-C MU u
MU u
OP 11 OP 12

MU u
OP 5

OP 6

MU u
OP 13 OP 14

Channel assignment plan in a 14 + 2 c o nfiguration

The channel assignment of the individual modules in the Modem Units is carried out by means of a coding
connector also referred to as address connector. The allocation of Tx and Rx units is ensured by cabling!
2-2

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Checking the System Setup

By means of coding pins (ground connection closed or open), the X77 address connector (MST-ADR)
located on the connecting panel of the Modem Unit determines the channel function (OP = Operating
channel or PR = Protection channel), channel no. (OP1, OP2, . . . / PR1 or PR2) and channel direction
(East/West) of the modules available in the Modem Unit.
Key word 2-2

Coding pins of the address connector

Pin assignment of address connector (15-pin, Sub-D, female), uncoded:


Pin
Address bit

1
A0

2
A2

3
A4

4
B0

5
B2

6
7
8
9
B4 free free A1

10
A3

11
A5

12
B1

13
B3

14
15
B5 Ground

Straps :
Address bits A0 to A5 Components of left Modem Unit
Address bits B0 to B5 Components of right Modem Unit
Address bits A5 and B5 Determines the direction of the microwave radio channel: East or West
1........ 8

9 . . . . . . 15
Address connector (Sub-D, 15-pin, female)

Fig. 2-4:
Coding of address connector:
Channel
designation

Hex
value

A0 / B0

OP 1
OP 2
OP 3
OP 4
OP 5
OP 6
OP 7
OP 8
OP 9
OP 10
OP 11
OP 12
OP 13
OP 14
OP 15
OP 16
PR 1
PR 2

0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0a
0x0b
0x0c
0x0d
0x0e
0x0f
0x10
0x11
0x12

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

Address bits
A1 / B1
A2 / B2
A3 / B3
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1

0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

A4 / B4

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1

Logic 0 Ground connection (to pin 15) closed


Logic 1 Ground connection (to pin 15) open
Address bit A5 / B5 = logic 0 ground connection (to pin 15) closed = West direction
Address bit A5 / B5 = logic 1 ground connection (to pin 15) open = East direction
Example: Coded address connector for a 1+1 configuration (equipment protection/hot standby):
Pin
Address bit

1
A0

2
A2

3
A4

4
B0

5
B2

6
7
8
9
B4 free free A1

10
A3

11
A5

12
B1

13
B3

14
15
B5 Ground

Straps :
Results in the following channel allocation of the modules in the Modem Unit:
Address bits A0 and A4 isolated from ground protection channel (PR 1) left side of Modem Unit
Address bit B0 isolated from ground operating channel 1 (OP 1) right side of Modem Unit
Address bits A5 and B5 not isolated from ground channel direction: West (OP 1 and PR 1).
RF/160 CI

2-3

Checking the System Setup

Commissioning Instructions
Key word 2-3

RPS-C addressing

Addressing of RPS-C protection switching units:


Using a rotary switch on the rear side of the RPS-C module (integrated in connecting panel shield of the
Modem Unit), the RPS-C can be addressed as follows:
To set the RPS-C address, the RPS-C module must be removed from the rack in order to be able to
read the current setting of the rotary switch and change it, if required.

Front side of RPS-C:

Alarm LED
Rotary switch showing the address adjusted

Rear side of RPS-C:


OP3/10

OP2/9

X13

PR1/2

OP1
X12

X11

X19

OP1
CAN W

X10

X3

X20

OP3/10

OP2/9
X21

X22

X23

TRANSIT
OP4/11

OP7/14

OP6/13

X15

X4

CAN W

X5

X16

X17

OP4/11
PR1/2

TX SIDE

X14
OP5/12

CAN E

OP8
X18

END

LON E

LON W
X1

X2

CAN E

RX SIDE
OP8
X29

OP7/14
X28

X27

OP6/13
X26

X24
OP5/12
X25

X6

Fig. 2-5:
RPS-C protection switching unit (front and rear side)
Settings of the RPS-C rotary switch:
Channel
designation
PR 1
PR 2
PR 1
PR 2
PR 1
PR 2
PR 1
PR 2

RPS-C
designation
RPS-C 1
RPS-C 1
RPS-C 2
RPS-C 2
RPS-C 1
RPS-C 1
RPS-C 2
RPS-C 2

Direction
West
West
West
West
East
East
East
East

Address
(Hex value)
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

AD 0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Address bit
AD 1
AD 2
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1

Overview of RPS-C modules required for the possible protection switching variants:
Variant
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

System expansion with one protection channel


Number of RPS-C
(PR 1) and with two protection channels (PR 1 and PR 2) 7+1 required per station
none (=> RPS-H)
1+1 equipment protection (1+1 hot standby, HSB)
none (=> RPS-H)
1+1 line protection w/o occasional traffic of protection ch. PR1
none or 1
1+1 line protection with occas. traffic of protection ch. PR1
1
2+1 to 7+1 with or w/o occasional traffic of protection ch.
2
8+1 to 14+1 with or w/o occasional traffic of protection ch.
2
2+2 to 7+2 with or w/o occasional traffic of protection ch.
4
8+2 to 14+2 with or w/o occasional traffic of protection ch.

In the scope of system planning, configuration lists are worked out in which the assignment of modules to
the individual card slots is defined. In the factory, these lists are completed with the part nos. of the
respective modules. These lists are supplied with the rack and must be revised and returned to the
project engineering department in case of modifications.
The internal cabling must be carried out on site in accordance with the attached cabling plans. Each
connector is marked with the rack no., card slot no., equipment unit and port (e.g. 001 / 414 / MU / X85).
In the complete system configuration, all racks and equipment units must be clearly
Important: identified
by appropriate markings! In order to ensure a secure adoption of the new
addresses, a Reset must be made for all modules connected as soon as any
addresses have been modified. This reset can be executed using the MSP or by
switching off and restarting the power supply.
2-4

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

2.2

Checking the System Setup

Antenna installation and alignment


Key word 2-4

Antenna installation

Optical antenna alignment with electrical cross-check.


The antennas have been optimally aligned if the electrical maximum is achieved during the (horizontal
and vertical) fine alignment, the polarization discrimination is optimized and the radio hop values
calculated are measured.
Free-space angles of antennas:
Always ensure a free-space angle of 15 on all sides including top and bottom !

Fig. 2-6:

RF/160 CI

Antenna installation and alignment

2-5

Checking the System Setup

2.3

Commissioning Instructions

Antenna support
Key word 2-5

Antenna support

Tighten nuts alternately and evenly !

Vertical
alignment

Basic position
Horizontal spindle
Support
Horizontal
alignment
Fig. 2-7:

Antenna support PS2m, PS3m

PS1.8m
Horizontal
alignment

Tighten all screw connections


after alignment

1) Secure M16 brass connections


with counter-nuts
Fig. 2-8:

2-6

Vertical
alignment

Antenna support PS1.8m

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Checking the System Setup

Vertical
alignment SW38

U-bolt
M16 (SW24)
Torque of U-bolt nuts
(A2-70 / A4-70):
M16
M20

Stand-alone
support

max. 115 Nm
max. 260 Nm

All other screw connections


must be tightened depending
on the material.

U-bolt
M20 (SW30)

Attention:
The threads of all screw
connections must be
greased !
U-bolt
M16 (SW24)

Horizontal
alignment

*) 0 vertical

Brackets
Ground

corresponds
to L=180mm
measured with
1m water level

Clamping positions for mounting brackets


Fig. 2-9:

Antenna support PE2x2

Torques of U-bolt nuts:


M12
M6

max. 64 Nm
max. 90 Nm

U-bolt
M12 or M16
Vertical
alignment
Antenna
support
Fig. 2-10:

RF/160 CI

Antenna support PS1.2

2-7

Checking the System Setup

2.4

Commissioning Instructions

Waveguide connection

2.4.1 Antenna side


Key word 2-6

Waveguide connection

Flange connecting kit


Shim, if
required
Flexible
waveguide
Flange connecting kit
Fitting for antenna
feeder line
Waveguide
fixture
Support depending
on design
Support e.g.
60.8552.361.00-A001
AN00196017
for tube

Waveguide
mounting bracket
Antenna feeder
line, e.g. ALFORM
waveguide

Fig. 2-11:

Connecting the waveguide to the antenna

Minimum bending radii of various waveguides:

Waveguide type
Flex. waveguide R70
E-plane
H-plane
ALFORM
E-plane
H-plane
FLEXWELL WG E70
E-plane
H-plane

Installation value
rmin. [mm]

Single bend
rmin. [mm]

Multiple bend
rmin. [mm]

200
410

100
205

200
400

200
400

200
400

300
600

300
600

E-plane
H-plane
2-8

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Checking the System Setup

2.4.2 Equipment side

Waveguide
e.g. ALFORM

Connecting
flange

Semi-rigid cable (type: 250/AL/TP)


secured with hexagonal nut (max. 7Nm)
after alignment of flange.
Cable entry protected with heat-shrinkable tube.

RF connecting cable
(semi-rigid)

RF channel-branching network

Fig. 2-12:

Connecting the waveguide to the equipment

The RF feeder line can be bent to be adjusted to local conditions. Multiple bending is also possible.
Minimum bending radii of RF feeder lines:

RF/160 CI

RF feeder line

Installation value

Single bend

Rmin [mm]

20

10

2-9

Checking the System Setup

2.5

Commissioning Instructions

Securing the waveguide


Key word 2-7

Waveguide mounting bracket


with clamp composed of :
- clip
- waveguide washer
- mounting clamp

Securing the waveguide

Angular
profile

C-rail

Waveguide mounting
bracket for C-rail
composed of :
- clip
- waveguide washer
- slide nut for C-rail

Antenna
feeder line

Stave
Mounting bracket

e.g. C-rail

Tube
Fig. 2-13:

Waveguide installation

Maximum spacings between waveguide mounting brackets:

Waveguide type
Alform A75
Flexwell E70, int.
Flexwell E70, ext.

2-10

Horizontal waveguide run


max. V

Vertical waveguide run


max. V

1.1m

1.5m

1.1m

1.5m

1.1m

1.5m

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

2.6

Checking the System Setup

Wall feed-through
Key word 2-8

Wall feed-through

Example: ROXTEC system

For waveguide
- Sealing module ROX90
- Filling piece (clip washer)
A75
E70

e.g. ALFORM waveguide A75

Joint sealed with elastic


sealing compound

Fig. 2-14:

RF/160 CI

Wall feed-through for waveguides and cables

2-11

Checking the System Setup

2.7

Commissioning Instructions

Grounding the antenna feeder line


Key word 2-9

Grounding the antenna feeder line

Grounding points:

at antenna end of waveguide


at vertical/horizontal transition
in front of entry into building
in front of entry into operating room

Antenna
feeder line
(waveguide)
Building
Grounding points

Operating room

Lightning protection
grounding points

Radio unit

ALFORM - Grounding

FLEXWELL - Grounding

Intermediate
piece

Sealing compound

Grounding cable

Tighten screws alternately and evenly


until the strap is under tension and the
intermediate piece is tightly pressed
onto the waveguide.
Fig. 2-15:

2-12

Sealing tape

The sheath cuts and grounding


cables must be sealed with a
sealing tape.

Grounding the antenna feeder line (waveguide)

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

2.8

Checking the System Setup

Waveguide labelling
Key word 2-10

Waveguide labelling

Waveguide type
e.g. A75 or E70

Antenna feeder line no.


Type

Length

Ant. no.

Direction

Pol.

to

Polarization
e.g. H or V

Far end

Fig. 2-16:

Marking the antenna feeder line (waveguide)

Attach the adhesive labels to the antenna feeder line at a distance of approx. 10 to 15 cm behind the
connector fitting.
In case of waveguides, the label should be attached to the broad side.

RF/160 CI

2-13

Checking the System Setup

Commissioning Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

2-14

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Waveguide and Antenna Measurements

3 Waveguide and Antenna Measurements


3.1

Reflection measurement at the waveguide

3.1.1 Design and calibration of the test setup


Key word 3-1

Reflection measurement

Reflection measurements are normally performed using the following measuring units and accessories:
Spectrum analyzer
e.g type 8593E (up to 22 GHz)
from HP
Tracking generator
type 85645A (up to 26.5 GHz)
from HP
Printer/plotter
e.g. type 7440A
from HP and
Test coupler with accessories depending on RF frequency
from Spinner (sweep box)
Optionally, this measurement can also be performed using a "Site Master from Anritsu (see chapter 5
"Measuring Units and Accessories").
The spectrum analyzer and tracking generator are connected to form the test setup depicted below:

Fig. 3-1:

Test setup for reflection measurement (calibration)

The connections between the spectrum analyzer and tracking generator are set up using coaxial cables:

Spectrum analyzer
Front side: 1ST LO OUTPUT
Rear side: LO SWP OUTPUT
Rear side: 10 MHz REF IN/OUT
Rear side: BLANKING OUTPUT

to
<=====>
<=====>
<=====>
<=====>

Tracking generator
Front side: LO INPUT
Rear side: SWEEP + TUNE IN
Rear side: 10 MHz IN
Rear side: BLANK IN

In this test setup, the tracking generator is controlled by the spectrum analyzer, i.e. all settings necessary
for cabibration and measurement must be entered only at the spectrum analyzer. At the tracking
generator, only the type of spectrum analyzer used (e.g. HP 8562A) must be adjusted or selected.
(=> Buttons: "RESET" / "CONFIG" / "ENTER" / "MENU Down" => Display: "CONFIG #1" & "HOST
SELECT"; press the "ENTER" button and scroll Up "^" or Down "v" until the correct type appears in the
display. Then press "ENTER" again to save this setting.)
Settings at the spectrum analyzer:
Frequency range : e.g. for DRS 155/7500: Start: 7.1 GHz / Stop: 7.75 GHz
Amplitude
: 5 dB/Div
Reference level
: 0 dB
Sweep mode
: Single sweep

RF/160 CI

3-1

Waveguide and Antenna Measurements

Commissioning Instructions

Calibration of the test setup:


Screw a short-circuit plate to the output of the test coupler and save the measuring curve to
channel B of the spectrum analyzer (TRACE B / CLEAR WRITE B).
Then remove the short-circuit plate and connect the coupler output to the waveguide.
=> Setting at spectrum analyzer:
in "MATH" menu: "A - B --> A"
TRACE A / CLEAR WRITE A

3.1.2 Description of reflection measurement


The test coupler of the calibrated test setup is connected to the equipment end of the waveguide to be
measured (the antenna being used as "Termination" at the other end). The measurement is now
executed by starting a "single sweep" at the spectrum analyzer over the calibrated frequency range (e.g.
7.1 to 7.75 GHz).
If the reflection measured over the whole frequency range is 25 dB, the required return loss of the
antenna system including the waveguide has been achieved and the graphical test result can be printed
out with the adjusted measuring parameters on the corresponding commissioning record sheet using a
plotter.
If, however, the required reflection is not reached, the measurement must be repeated only for the
waveguide (without antenna system). For this purpose, the waveguide is terminated by an absorber and
not by the antenna (absorber reflection: 40 dB).
The reflection measured over the whole frequency range should be 28 dB for the waveguide.
With diversity operation, the same measurement must also be performed for the second antenna system.
Test setup:

Antenna

Spectrum analyzer
HP-IB
IEEE

Waveguide

Connection
LO output (Spectr.) to
LO input (Track.)
Test coupler

Plotter
Tracking generator

Reference branch
(Absorber)

Flexible RFcables

Fig. 3-2:

3-2

Reflection measurement at the waveguide

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

3.2

Waveguide and Antenna Measurements

Polarization discrimination (XPD) measurement


Key word 3-2

Polarization discrimination

On all radio hops operated in the XPIC mode, operation in both polarization planes (vertical and
horizontal) is provided via one antenna.
This antenna is connected via an orthomode transducer (OMT).
Note:
The described measurement is normally performed after antenna alignment and during
commissioning (see Note in section 4.7.4) if an unmodulated RF signal is made available
by the radio transmitter!
The following devices are necessary for measuring the polarization discrimination: a spectrum analyzer
and an adapter composed of 1 (2) waveguide transition(s) and one flexible RF coaxial cable for
connecting the cross-polar path of the OMT.
The spectrum analyzer is connected - if possible - via the adapter to the occupied branch of the OMT
(waveguide disconnected) [1.] or directly to the Rx branching network (adapter with 2 waveguide
transitions between OMT and waveguide). In the far end, the transmitter is connected to the antenna via
the waveguide and OMT (of the polarization plane connected).
The Tx frequency is adjusted at the spectrum analyzer and the level measured (in dBm / set marker) is
recorded.
Then the spectrum analyzer is connected via an adapter to the cross-polar output of the polarization
plane [2.]. The Tx signal amplitude of the MARCONI / RFS UHP antenna measured by means of the
spectrum analyzer must be at least 30 dB lower than before. The polarization discrimination is measured
in both stations.
Attention: Ensure that the modulation and ATPC have been switched off before you execute
this measurement!
See sections 4.7.1 "Deactivating the ATPC function and 4.7.2 "Deactivating modulation!

Test setup:

Note:

RF/160 CI

Fig. 3-3:
Polarization discrimination measurement
This measurement can also be performed at the equipment end of the waveguide
if the antenna platform does not permit a direct measurement at the OMT or if such a
measurement would be very complex.

3-3

Waveguide and Antenna Measurements

Commissioning Instructions

This page has been left blank for editional reasons.

3-4

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4 Commissioning
4.1

Steps to be executed before system start-up

Before switching on the operating voltage, please verify the following items:
1. The rack must have been secured to the wall or ceiling and properly grounded as described in the
installation instructions.
2. All modules must have been mounted in the appropriate card slots and secured in position so that
their interconnection is ensured via the backplane.
3. All cables must have been connected to the ports specified on the connector bushings and secured
with screws so that they cannot be pulled out inadvertently. The same applies to all coaxial cables (IF
cables).
4. The coded "address connector" (see section 2.1 Rack configuration) has been connected to X77
(MST-ADR) of the connecting panel (included in the delivery scope).
5. The supply voltage has been routed via the rack circuit breaker to the corresponding power supply
units accommodated in the rack and connected to these.
6. The feeder line (waveguide) has been routed up to the antenna, secured in position and connected to
the RF interface (RF filter) of the system as described in the Installation Manual.
7. The RF interfaces of the transmitters and receivers have been connected via semi-rigid cables to the
associated RFfilter interfaces of the Tx and Rx branching network chain.
8. The coaxial cables or fiber-optic cables for the baseband input (STM-1) have been connected to the
input socket () of the CMI (electr.) or optical interface module (SPI STM-1).
9. The coaxial cable or fiber-optic cable for the baseband output (STM-1) has been connected to the
output socket () of the CMI (electr.) or optical interface module (SPI STM-1).
10. Only in diversity operation: The coaxial sockets X2 and X24 (of the main receiver) as well as X22 and
X23 (of the diversity receiver) located on the front side have been interconnected by means of coaxial
cables (short cable bridges).
11. A valid address has been adjusted on the SISA0-N module mounted in the OHAU subrack (0 ... 254
=> default setting: 1). The definite SISA address is normally defined by the customer and adjusted by
means of DIP switch S1 before commissioning. See section 4.2 below for how to change the default
setting.
12. The Service PC has been connected to the front socket of the SISA0-N module mounted in the
OHAU subrack.
Before starting up the operating voltage, verify or make the necessary hardware settings (see sections
4.2, 4.3 and 4.4).

4.2

Adjusting the SISA address


Key word 4-1

Adjusting the SISA address

The SISA address can be adjusted only via the hardware (DIP switch S1). Adjusting this address by
means of the Service PC (MSP) is not possible. If the SISA address defined by the customer or network
operator is available, this address should be adjusted before commissioning.
If the definite SISA address has not yet been defined, commissioning is performed with the default
address which can then be changed at a later date.

Note:

For safety reasons, the power supply should always be switched off before you insert or
extract any modules (see section 1.2 Operating voltage)!

For adjusting the SISA address, the SISA0-N module must be extracted from the OHAU subrack.
1. For safety reasons, switch off the power supply of the OHAU subrack
(de-energize at fuse panel; not absolutely necessary for the SISA0-N module).
2. Remove the screws on the front panel of the SISA0-N module.
3. Extract the SISA0-N module from the subrack and adjust the SISA address by
means of DIP switch S1.
RF/160 CI

4-1

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Permissible range of addresses: 0 to 254

SISA
address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
:
:
253
254

DIP switch S1

Binary value
Analog value

Important:

1
OF
ON
OF
ON
OF
ON
OF
ON
OF

2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF

3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF

4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON

5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

:
:

:
:

:
:

:
:

:
:

:
:

:
:

:
:

ON
OF

OFF
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

20
1

21
2

22
4

23
8

24
16

25
32

26
64

27
128

SISA address 255 has been reserved for the software download of the SISA0-N module
software and cannot be used as a normal SISA address!

Position of DIP switch S1 on the SISA0-N module (not labelled):

1
B 32
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
X
1
6

Service LED
Neuron
8

ON

ON

S1

X14
X
1
4

Service PC
port

X16

UP module
Reset button
Reset LED
Service LED

Fig. 4-1:

4-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

SISA0-N module layout

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

4.3

Commissioning

Interface configuration on the QTN2 module


Key word 4-2

Interface configuration on the QTN2 module

Changing from a G.703 to a V.11 interface on the QTN2 module requires a hardware setting which is
performed by changing the service connector from X200 to X201 or vice versa. To do this, the QTN2
module must be extracted from the OHAU subrack.

Note:
Setting:

For safety reasons, the power supply should always be switched off before you insert or
extract any modules (see section 1.2 Operating voltage)!
Service connector on X200
Service connector on X201

=>
=>

2 x 64 kbit/s interfaces to G.703


1 x V.11 interface

Default setting: 2 x 64 kbit/s to G.703 (service connector on X200) !


(V.11 interface only required for special applications !)

4.4

Configuring 2 Mbit/s interfaces on RFCOH and SOH Access modules

The configuration of the 2 Mbit/s interfaces also involves hardware settings (straps) and cannot be
executed by means of the Service PC (MSP).
The interfaces of the 2 Mbit/s service channel can be switched over between 120 (balanced) and 75
(unbalanced).

4.4.1 Configuring the 2 Mbit/s interface of the RFCOH Access module


Key word 4-3

Configuring the 2 Mbit/s interface of the RFCOH Access module

The RFCOH module can be supplied in two versions which provide the following channels:
Version 1:
4 x 64 kbit/s service channels to ITU-T G.703, codirectional, 1+1 protected.
1 x 2 Mbit/s auxiliary channel to ITU-T G.703, coaxial or balanced, 1+1 protected or unprotected.
Version 2:
8 x 64 kbit/s service channels to ITU-T G.703, codirectional, 1+1 protected.
1 x 2 Mbit/s auxiliary channel to ITU-T G.703, coaxial or balanced, 1+1 protected or unprotected.
One 2 Mbit/s interface can be used per RFCOH module. The required impedance (120 or 75 ) is
adjusted by means of jumpers on the RFCOH Access module:
1. For safety reasons, switch off the OHAU subrack power supply (de-energize at the fuse panel;
not absolutely necessary for RFCOH Access modules).
2. Remove the screws on the front side of the RFCOH Access module.
3. Extract the RFCOH Access module from the subrack and adjust the required
impedance by means of the jumpers described below.

Note:

RF/160 CI

For safety reasons, the power supply should always be switched off before you insert or
extract any modules (see section 1.2 Operating voltage)!

4-3

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Adjusting the 2 Mbit/s interface to 120 (balanced):


Straps on X302:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b closed
Straps on X301:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b open
Straps on X303:
Pins 1 a-b , 3 a-b , 5 a-b & 7 a-b closed
Pins 2 a-b , 4 a-b , 6 a-b & 8 a-b open
Straps on X300:
Pins 1 a-b , 3 a-b , 5 a-b & 7 a-b closed
Pins 2 a-b , 4 a-b , 6 a-b & 8 a-b open

All straps (a-b) inserted !


No strap (a-b) inserted !
Straps (a-b) inserted !
Straps (a-b) not inserted !
Straps (a-b) inserted !
Straps (a-b) not inserted !

Adjusting the 2 Mbit/s interface to 75 (unbalanced):


Straps on X302:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b open
Straps on X301:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b closed
Straps on X303:
Pins 1 a-b, 3 a-b, 5 a-b & 7 a-b open
Pins 2 a-b, 4 a-b, 6 a-b & 8 a-b closed
Straps on X300:
Pins 1 a-b, 3 a-b, 5 a-b & 7 a-b open
Pins 2 a-b, 4 a-b, 6 a-b & 8 a-b closed

No straps (a-b) inserted !


All straps (a-b) inserted !
Straps (a-b) not inserted !
Straps (a-b) inserted !
Straps (a-b) not inserted !
Straps (a-b) inserted !

Position of straps on the RFCOH Access module (not marked):

Fig. 4-2:

4-4

RFCOH Access module layout

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.4.2 Configuring the 2 Mbit/s interface of the SOH Access module


Key word 4-4

Configuring the 2 Mbit/s interface of the SOH Access module

On the SOH Access module, a distinction is made between the East and West direction. The required
impedance (120 or 75 ) can be separately adjusted for both directions by means of straps:
1. For safety reasons, switch off the OHAU subrack power supply (de-energize at fuse panel;
not absolutely necessary for RFCOH Access modules).
2. Remove the screws on the front side of the RFCOH Access module.
3. Extract the SOH Access module from the subrack and adjust the required impedance by means
of the straps described below.

Note:

For safety reasons, the power supply should always be switched off before you insert or
extract any modules (see section 1.2 Operating voltage)!

Adjusting the 2 Mbit/s interfaces to 120 (balanced) East direction:


Straps on X104:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b closed
All straps (a-b) inserted !
Straps on X102:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b open
No strap (a-b) inserted !
Straps on X101:
Pins 1 a-b , 3 a-b , 5 a-b & 7 a-b closed Straps (a-b) inserted !
Pins 2 a-b , 4 a-b , 6 a-b & 8 a-b open
Straps (a-b) not inserted !
Straps on X100:
Pins 1 a-b , 3 a-b , 5 a-b & 7 a-b closed Straps (a-b) inserted !
Pins 2 a-b , 4 a-b , 6 a-b & 8 a-b open
Straps (a-b) not inserted !
Adjusting the 2 Mbit/s interfaces to 120 (balanced) West direction:
Straps on X405:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b closed
All straps (a-b) inserted !
Straps on X404:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b open
No strap (a-b) inserted !
Straps on X403:
Pins 1 a-b , 3 a-b , 5 a-b & 7 a-b closed Straps (a-b) inserted !
Pins 2 a-b , 4 a-b , 6 a-b & 8 a-b open
Straps (a-b) not inserted !
Straps on X401:
Pins 1 a-b , 3 a-b , 5 a-b & 7 a-b closed Straps (a-b) inserted !
Pins 2 a-b , 4 a-b , 6 a-b & 8 a-b open
Straps (a-b) not inserted !
Adjusting the 2 Mbit/s interfaces to 75 (unbalanced) East direction:
Straps on X104:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b open
No strap (a-b) inserted !
Straps on X102:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b closed
All straps (a-b) inserted !
Straps on X101:
Pins 1 a-b , 3 a-b , 5 a-b & 7 a-b open
Straps (a-b) not inserted !
Pins 2 a-b , 4 a-b , 6 a-b & 8 a-b closed Straps (a-b) inserted !
Straps on X100:
Pins 1 a-b , 3 a-b , 5 a-b & 7 a-b open
Straps (a-b) not inserted !
Pins 2 a-b , 4 a-b , 6 a-b & 8 a-b closed Straps (a-b) inserted !
Adjusting the 2 Mbit/s interfaces to 75 (unbalanced) West direction:
Straps on X405:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b open
No strap (a-b) inserted !
Straps on X404:
Pins 1 a-b to 8 a-b closed
All straps (a-b) inserted !
Straps on X403:
Pins 1 a-b , 3 a-b , 5 a-b & 7 a-b open
Straps (a-b) not inserted !
Pins 2 a-b , 4 a-b , 6 a-b & 8 a-b closed Straps (a-b) inserted !
Straps on X401:
Pins 1 a-b , 3 a-b , 5 a-b & 7 a-b open
Straps (a-b) not inserted !
Pins 2 a-b , 4 a-b , 6 a-b & 8 a-b closed Straps (a-b) inserted !

RF/160 CI

4-5

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Position of straps on the SOH Access module (not marked):

Fig. 4-3:

4.5

SOH Access module layout

System startup and commissioning process

After verification of all items listed in section 4.1 above and execution of all hardware settings required,
the system can be started up by means of the automatic circuit breaker of the rack.
After startup, check the LEDs on the front panels of the modules:

Green LEDs (BAT) display normal operation of the modules => supply voltage switched on (ok),
operational status: ON (Operation).

Red LEDs (IIII) display a fault or failure of the modules => must not light up!
Exception: Loss of input signal (LOS) (STM-1 baseband signal) => red LED lit on SPI STM-1 (IIII)
and loss of input signal (RF input signal from the antenna) => red LED on the
receiver and demodulator (IIII) => antennas not yet aligned!

All systems are completely tested and preconfigured in the factory, so that microwave radio systems are
normally ready for operation after being switched on. Should any faults be detected, these must be
eliminated before starting the commissioning process decribed below. For instructions on how to
proceed, please refer to the Operator Manual, Chapter: "What is when", "Trouble-shooting".
As soon as the microwave radio system interacts with the far end without any trouble, you can start the
commissioning process. All commissioning steps to be performed are described in the following sections.

4-6

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

4.6

Commissioning

Service PC (LMT/MSP)
Key word 4-5

Service PC

For system configuration, a laptop is required which must be loaded with the SISA basic software
(version 2.16 or higher) and the DRS 155 E application software (version 1.21 or higher) for SDH
microwave radio, XQI and SISA-V.
All MSP windows of the DRS 155 E application software depicted in this Commissioning Instruction
refer to Version 1.21.
The SISA0-N module converts the internal system bus (LON bus) to a Q interface (QD2) and provides a
F-interface for connecting a Service PC. One SISA0-N module is required for each microwave radio
terminal or microwave radio regenerator station.
The PC is connected to the F-interface (RS 232) of the SISA module (SISA0-N) available in the OHAU
subrack using an appropriate connecting cable (Sub-D 9-pin, female <--> Sub-D 9-pin, male).
This interface is adjusted to 9600 baud/s, 8 data bits and even parity.
For more detailed information on the SISA structure, please refer to the Modular Service PC Manual.
Then the SISA network and SISA network manager are activated.
Further menus can be called up via the DRS 155 E module.
Key word 4-6

SISA network manager

Perform the following steps at the Service PC to activate the DRS 155 E application menus required for
system commissioning:
1. Start up the network driver by double-clicking the SISA Network icon ( Netdrv.lnk ).

Netdrv.lnk

2. Start up the network manager by double-clicking the Network Manager icon ( Netman.lnk ).

Netman.lnk

The follow window (SISA MSP ) is displayed.

Click the Continue button.

RF/160 CI

4-7

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

The SISA Network Manager mask appears:

In the SISA Network Manager mask, the microwave radio system (DRS 155 E) connected
is displayed at the SISA address adjusted.
3. Start up the DRS 155 E application by double-clicking the DRS 155 E button in the SISA Network
Manager:
The following mask appears:

Ensure that Manufacturer- specific is displayed in the Application box and that the
Configuration option is check-marked in the Initiate requests section!
4. Then click the Execute button.

4-8

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

The logic view of the functional model of a microwave radio system appears:

Active functional groups are displayed as buttons.


Faulty functional groups (modules) are displayed as red buttons.
If the "SISA0" functional group should be displayed as a red button, there is a system-internal
deviation between the actual and nominal equipment. In this case, call up the actual equipment list
via the
"Management" / Nominal/Actual Equipment"
menu and check as to which modules are displayed as missing (red). If these modules are
physically available and correctly connected in the system ( check this), you must re-initialize
the corresponding table by resetting the SISA0 module via the
"Management" / "Reset"
menu item. The SISA0 alarm (red marking of SISA0 functional group) should now disappear.
In the course of the commissioning process, the various modules of the microwave radio system
accessible from the Service PC via the HW view must be configured.

RF/160 CI

4-9

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

5. Double-click the HW View in the menu displayed. Then select the Modules option from the sub-menu.
The hardware view (module level) of the microwave radio system connected appears:

This view shows the possible maximum equipment of the microwave radio system with modules:
RFU OP / OP modem
16 operating channels with modem
2
protection channels with modem
RFU PR / PR modem

OHAU
4
service channel units

RPS-C
4
protection central modules

RPS-H
1
hot standby protection module
Here all active modules are displayed as buttons which can be clicked to open further menu windows with
all menu items required for further commissioning steps. Faulty modules are displayed in red
color.
As described in the following chapters, the Configuration window displays the most important menu
required for the individual modules.

Note:

Configuration data not supported by the unit are dimmed or suppressed completely!
These data are displayed for information purposes only and cannot be modified by the
operator (e.g. oscillator frequency of transmitter and receiver)!
Configuration boxes which are depending on a certain equipment with modules or an
active function or operating mode can be changed only if the corresponding
prerequisites are fulfilled!

The procedure described in the following for modifying settings is applicable to all configuration windows:
1.) Enabling the modification mode:
a)

Choose Process

b)

Click the  toolbar button (= Modify).

and Modify

(upper menu bar in the configuration window) . . . or . . .

2.) Executing the modification:


a)
b)

Click the corresponding box ( = Active / = Not active) . . . or . . .


Click the arrow button (>) and open the selection window . . . or . . .

c)

Make a direct entry in the Parameters box via the keyboard.

3.) Saving modifications:

4.)

a)

Choose Process

b)

Click the toolbar button (= Adopt / save).

Choose File

and Adopt

and Exit

(upper menu bar in the configuration window) . . . or . . .

(top menu bar in all windows) . . . or . . .

click the box in the upper right corner to close this window.
4-10

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

4.7

Commissioning

Aligning the antennas

4.7.1 Disabling the ATPC function


Key word 4-7

Disabling the ATPC function

The transmitter (Tx) configuration window depicted below can be activated by selecting the corresponding
module in the HW view:
RFU OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active RF unit.

Transmitter

= Button in the "DRS 155(1) RFU OPx MB window

Management
Configuration

Then the parameters can be modified by executing the following steps:


Process

and

Modify

. . . or using the  toolbar button (= Entry).


In the ATPC section, click the Enable configuration box. The check-mark () disappears (= empty
configuration box):
ATPC :
Enable ATPC enabled

Enable

ATPC disabled

The transmit level must be activated (TX RF output Power on) and set to its Nominal value (= max.
Tx level: = 30.5 dBm with 64QAM systems and 30.0 dBm with 128QAM systems;
Exception: 13 GHz: max. Tx level = 28.0 dBm) max. level = nominal value. In this window, please check
the Band position and Sideband settings in the Band Selection section. They must comply with the channel
and frequency tables (see section 12 Frequency Setting in the Operating Instructions of the Operator Manual
- Register 4)!
RF/160 CI

4-11

Commissioning

Important:

Commissioning Instructions

Before closing the configuration window and for enabling the modified parameters, all

modifications must be saved!

To do this, click
Process
Adopt
. . . or choose the toolbar button (= Adopt).

4.7.2 Disabling the modulation


Key word 4-8

Sending an unmodulated IF carrier

The modulator configuration window depicted below can be activated by selecting the corresponding
module in the HW view:
Modem OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active Modem Unit

Mod 155/140

= Button in the "DRS 155(1) Modem OPx MB window

Management
Configuration

For activating the modification mode, click


Process
Modify
. . . or choose the  toolbar button (= Modify).
In the Carrier input box, enter "Test signal" and save this entry to the Modulator module by clicking
Process
Adopt
. . . or the toolbar button (= Adopt).
Definition of the carrier setting:
Test signal :
The modulator supplies the transmitter with an unmodulated IF signal.
The latter can be used to measure intermodulation and XPD values.
modulated :
The IF signal is 64 or 128 MLQAM modulated (depending on the modulator
type used).

4-12

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.7.3 Antenna alignment


Key word 4-9

Antenna alignment

After disabling the ATPC function in both transmitters of a radio link so that the antennas are supplied
with a constant (maximum) Tx level and after the system modules have reached their operating
temperature (after approx. 20 minutes), you can start antenna alignment.
In both stations, align the antennas so that a maximum Rx level is obtained. Please note that the
directed Tx lobe of a parabolic antenna has one main maximum and several side maxima.
The AGC voltage at connector X5 (REC) of the main receiver is proportional to the RF receive level and
is used as measuring parameter for aligning the antenna to the maximum Rx level for both the main and
diversity receiver (display tolerance: 2dB in the range from 30dBm to 75dBm at ambient
temperatures of +10C to +45C).
To measure the AGC voltage, connect a multimeter (voltmeter) to recording connector X5 (Sub-D
connector, 15-pin, male) as follows:

Pin 1 (GND / -) and pin 2 (+)


Pin 1 (GND / -) and pin 3 (+)

Important:

AGC voltage of the main receiver.


AGC voltage of the diversity receiver.

The deviation of the measured receive level from the calculated value (see radio hop
calculation) must not exceed 3dB!

After having obtained the optimum (= maximum) receive level in both stations, the antennas must be
secured again in position. Please note the torques indicated in section 2.3 Antenna supports.

Attention:

When securing the antennas in position, please ensure that the achieved receive
level is not reduced!

T yp i c a l AGC c u r ve
5

AGC voltage [V]

4
3.3

3
2.6
2

1.9
1.3

1
0.7
0
-90

-80

-70

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

Re c e i v e l e v e l [ d Bm]
Fig. 4-4:

RF/160 CI

AGC voltage versus receive level

4-13

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

4.7.4 Restoring the operational status

Caution:

In systems using both polarization planes of the antenna (XPIC), always measure
the cross-polarization discrimination before switching on the ATPC!
For more details, please refer to section 3.2.

After termination of the antenna alignment process, set the modified parameters
of the transmitter
ATPC and transmit level

and of the modulator


carrier

again to their initial values and save these to the transmitter (Tx) or modulator module.
The steps to be performed at the Service PC are described in sections 4.7.1 and 4.7.2 above.
With the ATPC function enabled, the transmit power is controlled by the far-end receiver.
In dense networks or on links with difficult propagation conditions, the ATPC function must be enabled in
order to avoid interferences. For more detailed information, please refer to the radio hop planning
documents.
Adjusting the transmit level (Maximum level) in normal operation: => Nominal value

Enabling the modulation function: Carrier => modulated

Do not forget to save (Adopt) your entries using the toolbar button !
4-14

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

4.8

Commissioning

Adjusting the radio hop ID


Key word 4-10

Radio hop and polarization ID

The following window displaying the functional units of the active modem can be activated by clicking the
corresponding module in the HW view:
Modem OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active modem unit

The "Modem OP x module overview shows a physical presentation of the Modem Unit subrack with all its
modules. Faulty modules are displayed in red color.
The subrack of the Modem Unit can be equipped with modules for transmitting up to two data streams.
The equipment with modules depends on the requested number of data streams and the type of
protection switching.
Please observe the following instructions for all further commissioning steps:

Important:
Note:

RF/160 CI

When configuring the operating mode, all modules involved in a radio link must be
identically adjusted, i.e. the configuration of the associated far end must be taken
into consideration!

To make permanent changes of the configuration settings described below, do not forget
to save (Adopt) your entries using the Process menu/ Adopt button or toolbar button!

4-15

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

The following configuration window of the DPU / RPS STM-1 ( Click Radio hop) is activated by clicking
the corresponding functional unit in the HW view of the Modem Unit:
DPU / RPS STM-1
Management
Configuration

Setting options in the Radio hop mask (register):


Radio hop ID for transmitter and receiver:
Input: 0 to 15 (analog)
The radio hop ID of both the transmitter and receiver of a link must be identical, i.e. the identifier
of the transmitter in station A must correspond with the identifier of the receiver in station B
and vice versa.

The radio hop IDs of the transmitter and receiver of the same Modem Unit (Radio hop
register) are normally different!

4-16

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

4.9

Commissioning

Checking and recording of important configuration parameters

Since all systems are preconfigured in the factory to meet the customers requirements, a configuration of
the individual modules is normally no longer necessary in the scope of on-site commissioning (exception:
service channel settings see section 4.11).

4.9.1 Operating mode


Key word 4-11

Operating mode

The following operating modes are defined or can be configured by the corresponding equipment with
modules:
XPIC operation / with or without ATPC / Modulation: 64 MLQAM or 128 MLQAM
N + 0, N + 1 or N + 2 mode or 1 + 1 hot standby mode
Diversity mode see section 4.10.
An operating mode is activated or deactivated via the following modules:
Key word 4-12

Overhead Access Unit

a) The following window displaying the functional units of the OHAU is activated by clicking the
corresponding module in the HW view:
OHAU x

x = No. (1 to 4) of associated active Overhead Access Unit.

The "OHAU x module overview shows a physical presentation of the Overhead Access Unit subrack with
all its modules. Faulty modules are displayed in red color.
The SISA0-N module converts the internal system bus (LON bus) to a Q interface (QD2) and provides a
F-interface for connecting a Service PC. One SISA0-N module is required for each microwave radio
station or microwave radio regenerator station.

RF/160 CI

4-17

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Key word 4-13

Configuring SISA0-N

The following configuration window of the SISA0-N module is activated by clicking the corresponding
functional unit in the HW view of the OHAU x:
SISA0-N
Management
Configuration

For activating the modification mode, click


Process
Modify
. . . or choose the  toolbar button (= Entry).
From the Terminal input box, select the correct protection type from the following setting options
displayed:
none

No protection switching configuration (1 + 0)

Equipment protection
HSB (1 + 1 hot standby configuration)
Line protection (1xDPU, 2x radio) without occasional traffic
Line protection switching without occasional traffic of the protection channel.
Line protection n+m without occasional traffic
Line protection switching without occasional traffic of the protection channel.
Line protection n+m with occasional traffic
Line protection switching with occasional traffic of the protection channel.
Save your entries to the SISA0-N module by clicking
Process
Adopt
. . . or choosing the toolbar button (= Adopt).

Important:To activate a modified setting of the current SISA0-N configuration, a RESET


must be performed via the Management

Reset menu items of the logic

"DRS155(1) - . . . view!

4-18

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Key word 4-14

Configuring the transmitter

b) The following configuration window of the transmitter (Tx) is activated by clicking the corresponding
module in the HW view:
RFU OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active RF unit

Transmitter
Management
Configuration

Using the Process

/ Modify menu, you can activate () or deactivate () the XPIC and ATPC

mode for the transmitter.


The activation of the XPIC dependence mode in the ATPC box is possible only with the XPIC option
check-marked in the General section and is used to take the ATPC-XPIC control into consideration when
adjusting the Tx power as a function of the degree of interference of the XPIC transmitter.
This setting prevents additional interferences in the XPIC mode due to strongly differing transmit levels of
the two XPIC transmitters.

RF/160 CI

4-19

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Key word 4-15

Configuring the main receiver

c) The following configuration window of the main receiver (Rx) is activated by clicking the corresponding
module in the HW view:
RFU OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active RF unit

Main Receiver
Management
Configuration

Using the Process

/ Modify menu, you can activate () or deactivate () the XPIC and ATPC

mode for the main receiver.


Key word 4-16

Master / Slave setting

Master/slave setting in the "General" section of the transmitter and receiver:


Master: The LO (DRVCO) of the transmitter or receiver operates in the XPIC mode as clock
source (Master) for synchronizing the cross-polarly connected Tx or Rx.
Slave:
In the XPIC mode, the LO (DRVCO) of the transmitter or receiver is synchronized by the
cross-polarly connected transmitter or receiver (Master).
In the normal mode (without XPIC), both the transmitters and receivers always operate as
Masters!
In the XPIC mode, the 1st polarization is set to Master, the 2nd polarization to Slave (Master
always on left side). Control via coaxial cable LO TX TX or RX RX !
In the Slave mode, the synchronization input of the oscillator is monitored by the Tx or Rx slave! In this
window, please check the Band position and Sideband settings in the Band Selection section. They
must comply with the channel and frequency tables (see Chapter 12, Frequency Setting in the
Operating Instructions of the Operator Manual - Register 6)!
4-20

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Key word 4-17

Configuring the modulator

d) The window displaying the functional units of the active modem (see section 4.8) is activated by
clicking the module in the HW view:
Modem OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active Modem Unit

Then click the functional unit in the HW view of the Modem Unit
Mod 155/140
Management
Configuration
. . . to activate the modulator configuration window:

Using the Process

/ Modify menu, you can activate () or deactivate () the XPIC mode of the

modulator.
Setting: Carrier modulated and Data signal from see Operating Instructions!
Key word 4-18

Configuring the demodulator

e) The window displaying the functional units of the active modem (see section 4.8) is activated by
clicking the module in the HW view:
Modem OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active Modem Unit

Then click the functional unit in the HW view of the Modem Unit
Demod 155/140
Management
Configuration
. . . to activate the demodulator configuration window:

Using the Process

/ Modify menu, you can activate () or deactivate () the XPIC mode for the

demodulator.

Important: The configuration of the far-end modulator must be taken into account!
In this window, also verify the "Group Delay Equalizer setting (see Operating Instructions) !
RF/160 CI

4-21

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Key word 4-19

Configuring the DPU / RPS STM-1

f) The window displaying the functional units of the active modem (see section 4.8) is activated by clicking
the corresponding module in the HW view:
Modem OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active Modem Unit

Then click the functional unit in the HW view of the Modem Unit
DPU / RPS STM-1
Management
Configuration
. . . to activate the DPU / RPS STM-1 configuration window ( choose General):

In the General register, the Process

Modify menu items permit the XPIC mode for the Data

Processing / Radio Protection Switching Unit (DPU / RPS STM-1) to be activated () or deactivated
() and the Redundancy and Modulation mode to be selected.

ensure trouble-free operation, the different operating modes or combinations of these


Important:To
must be carefully adjusted for all modules involved in functional links. To activate a
modified setting of the current "DPU / RPS - General configuration, a RESET
must be performed via the Management

Reset menu items of the "DPU /

RPS . . . window"!
The Data Processing / Radio Protection Switching Unit (DPU / RPS STM-1) represents the central
module of the Modem Unit. It executes all SDH processing and protection switching functions. Both the
downstream and upstream direction are processed by a common DPU / RPS STM-1 module.
For this reason, the verification of the correct configuration of this module as a function of the selected
protection switching type is very important in all configuration windows (registers).
List of configuration windows (registers) not yet described:
Loopback
Line protection
Equipment protection
SDH processing
Service channels
4-22

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Key word 4-20

Loopback

The following configuration window appears by clicking the Loopback register:

This configuration mask is used only for testing purposes during commissioning!
Loopbacks depend on the redundancy setting in the General register!
A loopback option is not available for the following protection types:

Equipment protection and


1+1 line protection without occasional traffic

The duration of an active loopback can be adjusted in the Timeout loopback box to 5 minutes,
15 minutes, 1 hour, 4 hours and max. 24 hours!

Important: Ensure that no loops are active during normal operation!

RF/160 CI

4-23

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Key word 4-21

Line protection

When clicking the Line protection register, the following configuration window appears . . .
. . . for the operating channel (OP):

. . . and for the protection channel (PR):

This configuration window is available only if Line protection has been selected as Redundancy setting
in the General register!
Checking the settings and displays in the window appearing for the operating channel:
Automatic:
Box must be check-marked (active) if a protection channel is available.
(deactivated Automatic = Protection switching not active).
Frequency diversity: Frequency diversity with two RF channels (read only / = active)
Setting:
Displays the switch position: Operating channel or protection channel 1 or 2
active.
Note: Automatic option deactivated Manual switchover possible.
All other configuration settings depend on the operator's requirements and network situation. If no such
specifications are made available, the default configuration data will be maintained (factory setting).
Modifications are possible via the Process

4-24

/ Modify menu item. Do not forget to save your entries !

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Key word 4-22

Equipment protection

When clicking on the Equipment protection register, the following configuration window appears:

This configuration window is available only if Equipment protection has been selected as Redundancy
setting in the General register!
Checking the transmitter (Tx) and receiver (Rx) settings:
Transmitter and receiver mode:
Select Automatic! (Operational status with protection
channel available)
Set far end to active !

Transmitter far end active:


Checking the displays:

Transmitter and receiver settings: Displays switch position: OP or PR active.


Note: Automatic deactivated Manal switchover
possible.
Select OP (operating channel ) or PR (protection channel)!
Switch type:

Select "PIN for PIN diode switch or "Relay for RF relay.

All other configuration settings depend on the operator's requirements and network situation. If no such
specifications are made available, the default configuration data will be maintained (factory setting).
Modifications are possible via the Process

RF/160 CI

/ Modify menu item. Do not forget to save your entries!

4-25

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Key word 4-23

SDH processing

When clicking on the SDH processing register, the following configuration window appears:

All configuration settings in the SDH processing register depend on the operator's requirements and
network situation. If no such specifications are made available, the default configuration data will be
maintained (factory setting).
Modifications are possible via the Process

4-26

/ Modify menu item. Do not forget to save your entries!

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Key word 4-24

Additional channels

When clicking on the Service channels register, the following configuration window appears:

All configuration settings in the Service channels register depend on the operator's requirements and
network situation. If no such specifications are made available, the default configuration data will be
maintained (factory setting).
The transmission of additional channels (service channels) activated and configured on the modules of
the service channel unit (OHAU) (see section 4.11) is ensured only if these have also been activated, i.e.
enabled in this window (DPU/RPS OPx Con / Additional channels).
Modifications are possible via the Process

menu

/ Modify menu item and selection of the

corresponding box.

or
Additional channel not active
Additional channel active

Do not forget to save your entries !


channels (service channels) may be activated only in operating channel 1
Important: Additional
and 2 (OP1 and OP2)!
Exception: a) In 1+1 configurations active in operating and protection channel
(OP and PR)
b) Without service channel protection active only in operating channel 1
(OP1)!
This means:
The protection channel (PR) for the STM-1 signal is not automatically used as
protection channel for service channels!
In n+m configurations ( n>1 ), the service channels ( 1+1 protected) are transmitted in
OP1 and OP2!

RF/160 CI

4-27

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

4.9.2 Oscillator frequency of transmitter and receiver


Key word 4-25

Tx / Rx oscillator frequency

The Tx oscillator configuration window depicted below is activated by clicking the corresponding module
in the HW view:
RFU OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active RF unit

TX Oscillator
Management
Configuration

This mask permits the DRVCO frequency permanently adjusted to be requested.


The value displayed can be used only for verification purposes and for being recorded in the
commissioning protocol!
Dimmed display: No modification possible (only display function)!

Attention:

In this configuration window, the oscillator frequency cannot be modified, since it


depends on the hardware available (oscillator, RF filter)!
For changing the frequency or channel, please refer to the Operator Manual and
Online Help of the Service PC.

Regarding the Rx oscillator frequency, the same applies as to the Tx frequency (see above):
RX Oscillator
Management
Configuration
Mask identical to that of the Tx oscillator (see above).
The value displayed can be used only for verification purposes and for being recorded in the
commissioning protocol!
Dimmed display: No modification possible (only display function)!

4-28

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.9.3 Configuring the reference level of the main receiver


Key word 4-26

Reference level

The configuration window of the main receiver depicted below is activated by clicking on the
corresponding module in the HW view:
RFU OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active RF unit

Main Receiver
Management
Configuration

The parameters can be modified by executing the following steps:


Process

and

Modify

. . . or using the  toolbar button (= Entry).


The control level (reference level in the receiver) required for controlling the Tx power can be set to
the following values:
-30 dBm
-40 dBm
-45 dBm
-50 dBm
Setting in normal operation: -50 dBm (factory setting).
Note:
If you want to maintain any modified values, do not forget to save (Adopt) them using

RF/160 CI

the toolbar button.


4-29

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

4.10 Diversity operation


4.10.1 Configuring the diversity receiver
Key word 4-27

Configuring the diversity receiver

The configuration window of the diversity receiver depicted below is activated by clicking on the
corresponding module in the HW view:
RFU OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active RF unit

Div. Receiver

= Diversity receiver

Management
Configuration

The parameters can be modified by executing the following steps:


Process

and

. . . or using the

Modify

 toolbar button (= Modify).

Adjusting the operating mode in the IF Amplifier box:


normal:
The time constant of the IF amplifier control is small and can thus spontaneously
react to fast level fluctuations.
sweep:

4-30

The time constant of the IF amplifier control function is high and does not react to
fast level fluctuations occurring in the sweep mode adjusted for measurements.
Thus, the measuring signal is not falsified.
Setting in normal operation:
normal
RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Further configuration parameters of the diversity receiver:


Key word 4-28

Adjusting the modulation of RXD

Display of the modulation mode in the Combiner section (dimmed = only display):
The distortion-controlled IF combiner evaluates the distortions occurring in the spectrum.
The following modulation modes can be displayed:
64 QAM
or
128 QAM
Display depends on type of modulator used!
IF output level display in the Combiner section (dimmed = only display):
For measurements, the combiner can be set to a fixed attenuation value.
Display in normal operation:
Controlled
Adjusting the operating mode in the Combiner section (dimmed = only display):
Normal:
The combiner evaluates the spectrum and adds up the two Rx signals.
Before being added, the lower signal is reduced again by 2 dB per 1 dB
difference.
Max. ratio:

The combiner adds up both signals, the stronger one (max. C/N) being preferred
(power control).
Setting in normal operation:

Normal

Adjusting the test mode in the Combiner section:


Normal operation:
Both signals are added up to a common IF signal.
Input X23 fixed:

Only the IF signal of input X23 is applied to the demodulator (DM).

Input X24 fixed:

Only the IF signal of input X24 is applied to the demodulator (DM).

Setting in normal operation:

Note:

RF/160 CI

Normal operation

If you want to maintain any modified values, do not forget to save (Adopt) them using
the toolbar button!

4-31

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

4.10.2 Length compensation


Key word 4-29

Length compensation = Delay compensation with space diversity

The configuration window of the diversity receiver (Div. RX / RXD) depicted below is activated by clicking
the corresponding module in the HW view:
RFU OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active RF unit

Div. Receiver

= Diversity receiver (RXD)

Management
Configuration

For activating the modification mode,


click

Process
Modify
. . . or choose the  toolbar button (= Entry).

In the Combiner section, make the following settings


under Length compensation :
Path :
Main path
( = Default setting)
Length compensation : 255
( = Default setting)
In the Length compensation input box, select the following options:
Compensation on
Length compensation activated
Save this setting to the Diversity receiver (Div. RX / RXD) by clicking
Process
Adopt
. . . or the toolbar button (Adopt).
Then activate the automatic sweep function:
Auto-run
Automatic sweep function active
and
Frequency = 5 Hz
Sweep frequency (options: 0.5 / 1 / 2 / 3 and 5 Hz)
4-32

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

In order to compensate the delay time difference between the diversity antenna and main antenna
caused by the different waveguide lengths, an additional coaxial cable is provided in the shorter path at
the IF level, i.e. between the IF control amplifier output and the combiner input. The combiner can
compensate an attenuation of the additional IF cable of up to 10 dB. The compensation cable can have a
maximum length of 30 m. Before the measurement required for defining the cable length is performed
using the Service PC and a spectrum analyzer, the following IF connections must be set up at the
receiver (cable jumpers):
Main receiver

X2 (IF ) ----- X24 (IF )

Cable L1

Diversity receiver

X22 (IF ) ----- X23 (IF )

Cable L2

For the measurement, these IF cables must have the same length!
L1

X2

X24

RF
X1

RX

IF

Receiver

Combiner

X25

IF to
DM

RF
X21

RXD

IF

X22

X23

L2

Fig. 4-5:

Length compensation in diversity operation

An undisturbed modulated Rx signal must be available at the Main (X1) and Diversity (X21) RF inputs.
The signal levels received at the two inputs must be nearly identical.
Set up a connection between the spectrum analyzer input and diversity receiver output X25 (IF )
using a coaxial cable.
At the spectrum analyzer, adjust the following values (recommendation):
Center frequency
: 140 MHz
Span
:
40 MHz
Res. BW
:
1 MHz
Video BW
:
1 kHz
Compensation process:
Via the Service PC configuration menu (see page 4-32), the combiner is switched to an operating mode
which permits delay time differences between the main path and diversity path to be displayed in the
combiner output spectrum in the form of narrowband notches. Using the depth, direction and velocity of
these notches, the system can determine the delay time difference with a relatively high precision.
By varying the phase relation between the two input signals, the notch position within the spectrum can
be modified. This variation can be performed continuously at a velocity adjustable via the configuration
menu or in single steps.
RF/160 CI

4-33

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions
Compensation process using the spectrum analyzer:

A [dB]

IF signal

-10

-15

Notch
<<<Notch direction >>>

-20

-25

-30

-35

-40

-45
-20

-15

-10

-5

+5

+10

+15

+20

F/F [MHz]

Fig. 4-6:

Notch displayed at the spectrum analyzer

The combiner output spectrum now changes with regard to its shape and level.
In the Auto-run mode, the combiner output spectrum is watched until one or several notches can be seen
moving through the band.
Comparison of different cases for determining the compensation path:
Case 1: Path RX < RXD (waveguide length to main receiver is shorter)
The notch in the IF spectum moves from left to right.

Signal path X2 ---- X24 is shorter than signal path X22 ---- X23.

Setting at the Service PC: Path = Main path (RXD configuration window).
The "Compensation active" option must have been deactivated before (see page 4-40) .

The length of the IF cable in signal path X2 ---- X24 must be increased.

Case 2: Path RXD < RX (waveguide length to diversity receiver is shorter)


The notch in the IF spectrum moves from right to left.

Signal path X2 ---- X24 is longer than diversity signal path X22 ---- X23.
Exchange the IF connections:
X2 (IF ) ----- X23 (IF )
X22 (IF ) ----- X24 (IF )
The notch now moves from left to right.

4-34

Setting at the Service PC: Path = Diversity (RXD configuration window).


The "Compensation active" option must have been deactivated before (see page 4-40).

The IF cable length in the X22---- X24 signal path must be increased.

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Determining the compensation cable length (calculation of the exact compensation length):
Activate again the Compensation active and Auto-run settings at the Service PC (see page 4-32). Then
watch the spectrum until a notch has moved all the way through the useful frequency spectrum.
The Auto-run mode must be stopped as soon as one of the following conditions occurs in the frequency
spectrum:
Condition 1: There is only one clearly visible notch which moves from left to right into the useful
frequency band. The length difference is less than 10 m.
0
-10

Power (dBm)

-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
1.200E+08

1.300E+08

1.400E+08

1.500E+08

1.600E+08

Frequency (Hz)
Delta: 24.5 dB RL: 00.0 dB - Attenuation: 10 dB - BW: 1000000 Hz - Video: 1000 Hz

Fig. 4-7:

Compensation with one notch using the spectrum analyzer

Condition 2: The spectrum shows two or three notches within the useful frequency band.
The length difference is higher than 10 m.
0
-10

Power (dBm)

-20
-30
-40
-50

-60
-70
1.200E+08

1.300E+08

1.400E+08

1.500E+08

1.600E+08

Frequency (Hz)
Delta: 05.5 dB RL: 00.0 dB - Attenuation: 10 dB - BW: 1000000 Hz - Video: 10000 Hz

Fig. 4-8:

RF/160 CI

Compensation with two notches using the spectrum analyzer

4-35

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

To condition 1 (single notch) :


In this case, the length difference is less than 10 m. The compensation cable length required can be
determined using the single-step method described below.
Alternatively, a cable of a defined length can be temporarily inserted in the IF path of the X23 combiner
input. Thus, the overall length difference is increased to obtain a double notch in the spectrum which
permits the resulting length difference to be determined relatively easily as described for condition 2.
Finally, the additional cable must only be removed and its length must simply be substracted by taking the
original cable into account (approx. 10 m).
Single-step method:
The notch position (frequency) within the spectrum is recorded by means of a marker. Then the notch is
moved through the spectrum step by step by activing the Single step option in the Configuration window
several times (as opposed to all other configuration settings, this entry does not have to be confirmed)
until it has moved by at least 20 MHz or at least 20 single steps have been performed.
After setting another marker to the new notch frequency, the delta marker function of the spectrum
analyzer is used to determine the difference f between the two notch frequencies.
Based on the number of single steps (N) and the frequency difference f , the delay time difference
can be calculated as follows:

N
7.8125 ns
f [MHz]

For a coaxial cable ( 75 , 02Y(ST)CY 0.45/2.0, Id. no.: AN00024795, 6L.4943.082.00-001 ), a delay time
of approx. 3.9 ns/m and an attenuation of 20dB/100m at 140 MHz can be assumed.
This results in the following compensation cable length:

l=

N
=
2.003 m
3.9 ns/m f [MHz]

l=

4-36

Note:

N
2.003 m
f [MHz]

By activating the manual phase shift of the combiner in the Single step mode
( => disable Auto-run first), the phase shifter in the combiner is shifted by 2.8125 per
step, so that this frequency offset in the IF spectrum can be calculated as delay time
difference per step (N)!

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Example (for condition 1) :


The two diagrams show the notch positions before and after execution of N = 20 single steps.
The frequency difference is f = 149.8 MHz 140.6 MHz = 9.2 MHz.
The compensation cable length can be calculated as follows:

l=

N
20
2.003 m =
2.003 m = 4.35 m
f [MHz]
9.2

-10

Power (dBm)

-20

-30
-40

149.8 MHz

-50
-60

-70
1.200E+08

1.300E+08

1.400E+08

1.500E+08

1.600E+08

Frequency (Hz)
Delta: 30.3 dB RL: 00.0 dB - Attenuation: 10 dB - BW: 1000000 Hz - Video: 10000 Hz

Fig. 4-9:

Notch shown by the spectrum analyzer before execution of the single steps

0
-10

Power (dBm)

-20
-30
-40
-50

140.6 MHz N =20

-60
-70
-80
1.200E+08

1.300E+08

1.400E+08

1.500E+08

1.600E+08

Frequency (Hz)
Delta: 19.8 dB RL: 00.0 dB - Attenuation: 10 dB - BW: 1000000 Hz - Video: 10000 Hz

Fig. 4-10:

RF/160 CI

Notch shown by the spectrum analyzer after execution of 20 single steps

4-37

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

To condition 2 (multiple notches):


The difference in length between the main and diverity path is so high that two or three notches occur in
1
the band. In this case, the delay time difference can be calculated directly from the frequency offset f
of neighboring notches using the following equation:

1000
ns
f [MHz]

For a coaxial cable ( 75 , 02Y(ST)CY 0.45/2.0, Id. no.: AN00024795, 6L.4943.082.00-001), a delay time
of approx. 3.9 ns/m and an attenuation of 20dB/100m at 140 MHz can be assumed.
This results in the following compensation cable length:

l=

1000
=
m
3.9 ns/m 3.9 f [MHz]

l=

256.41
m
f [MHz]

Example:
0
-10

Power (dBm)

-20
-30

128 MHz

-40

151.2 MHz

-50

f=23.2 MHz
-60
-70
1.200E+08

1.300E+08

1.400E+08

1.500E+08

1.600E+08

Frequency (Hz)
Delta: 05.5 dB RL: 00.0 dB - Attenuation: 10 dB - BW: 1000000 Hz - Video: 10000 Hz

Fig. 4-11:

Length compens. example with two notches using the spectrum analyzer

The frequency offset of the two notches is f = 23.2 MHz. In this example, this results in a compensation
length of:

l=

256.41
256.41
m=
= 11.05 m
f [MHz]
23.2

For this measurement, the "Span" setting at the spectrum analyzer must be selected in such a way that
f can be read as precisely as possible ( Use marker, if available)!

4-38

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Fine adjustment :
Insert a compensation cable with the calculated length plus a spare length of approx. 1 m into the
electrically shorter signal path ( X2/X22 --- X24 ).
After activation of the Auto-run mode, a notch considerably flatter and faster must now move through the
spectrum from right to left. Should this notch still move from left to right, the inserted cable is too short.
The compensation cable is then shortened step by step by about 40 cm checking the notch direction after
each step. The cable length is correct if the notch direction just starts to change (from left to right) or if
there is no more visible notch movement within the spectrum.
Using the Delay compensation setting (range of values: 0 255 ), a fine adjustment can now be
performed. By reducing the preadjusted value of 255 (corresponds to minimum delay), the delay time of
the compensation path can be additionally increased by up to 2 ns (see page 4-40 ). For changing this
value, the Compensation active setting must first be deactivated.
The value must be selected so that the condition described below is nearly achieved.
With an exact delay compensation, a clearly visible flat fading effect of up to 30 dB occurs during a sweep
process. Due to unbalances in the channel branching networks, there might still be ripples in the
spectrum, but there must no longer be a notch moving through it.
The diagram depicted below shows four different times of a sweep process for the described condition.

Fig. 4-12:

RF/160 CI

Sweep charact. at the spectr. analyzer with an exact length compensation

4-39

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Terminating the length compensation process:


After the successful execution of length compensation and insertion of the calculated compensation cable
length in the corresponding Rx path (main or diversity), disable the Length compensation function . . .
. . . in the Diversity Receiver (Div. RX / RXD) configuration window:

In the Combiner input section, enter the following values:


In the Path box, select the Rx path with cable length compensation:
Main:
The waveguide to the main antenna is shorter than that to the diversity antenna.
The signal is delayed in the IF path of the main receiver before the two signals are
combined.
Diversity: The waveguide of the diversity antenna is shorter than that of the main antenna.
The signal is delayed in the IF path of the diversity receiver before the two IF signals
are combined.
Finally, the Delay compensation box can be used to compensate small residual delay times:
Fine adjustment of the length compensation (range of values: 255 . . . 0 corresponds to 0 . . . 2ns).
Disable the Compensation active function in the Length compensation configuration section:

and

Auto-run
Compensation on

automatic sweep function disabled


length compensation disabled

Then save this setting to the Diversity receiver (Div. RX / RXD) by clicking
Process
Adopt
. . . or the toolbar button (Adopt).
Afterwards the combiner output spectrum must assume again its initial characteristic without a notch
(see Fig. 4-12).

4-40

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.11 Configuring service channels


Key word 4-30

Service channels (OHAU)

The following window displaying the OHAU functional units is activated by clicking the corresponding
module in the HW view:
OHAU x

x = No. (1 to 4) of associated active service channel unit

The "OHAU x module overview shows a physical presentation of the subrack of the Overhead Access
Unit (Service Channel Unit) with all its modules.
The OHAU subrack is dimensioned so that it can process all service and auxiliary channels of a Modem
Unit (operating and protection channel) with 1+1 protection; this applies to both terminal and regenerator
station configurations. In addition, it accommodates the TMN interface and up to two service telephone
sets (EOWs).
The minimum equipment includes the OHAU Power Supply, SOH Access Module and SISA0-N module.
All other modules can be provided as options. The activation and configuration of the required service
channels is carried out in the SOH Access and optionally in the RFCOH Access, SOH Ext. (extension)
and EOW functional units.

Important:

In addition to the activation of service channels in the above-mentioned functional units,


the activation must also be carried out in the DPU module, Service channels register!
(See section 4.9.1 Operating mode -> for DPU/RPS STM-1 see page 4-27).

All configuration settings in the SOH Access, RFCOH Access (West/East), SOH Ext. and EOW modules
depend on the operator's requirements, network situation and system setup. If no such specifications are
made available, the default configuration data will be maintained (factory setting).

Attention:

If both directions (East and West) are switched, the service channels must
be configured in both the RFCOH Access (West) and RFCOH Access (East) direction
(regenerator station) !
Definition for terminal station: West => radio side and East => line side!

The SOH Access module multiplexes up to 4 x 64 kbit/s service channels (codirectional to G.703) and
one 2 Mbit/s auxiliary channel into the SOH of the DPU/RPS STM-1 module connected. Optionally, the
RFCOH Access module multiplexes up to 8 x 64 kbit/s service channels (codirectional to G.703) and one
2 Mbit/s auxiliary channel into the RFCOH of the DPU/RPS STM-1 module connected. Two SOH and two
RFCOH signals can be processed and used to read out and overwrite the service and auxiliary channels
with 1+1 protection.

RF/160 CI

4-41

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

4.11.1 Configuring service channels in the SOH Access Module


The SOH Access configuration window (service channel configuration) depicted below is activated by
clicking the corresponding functional unit in the HW view of the OHAU:
SOH Access
Management
Configuration

Key word 4-31

Activating continuous data monitoring

Setting options in the General mask (register):


Check data continuously:

Modify the parameters via the Process

Continuous data monitoring function active


Continuous data monitoring function not active

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to save them!

All other parameters are displayed with their current configuration.


Dimmed display: No modification possible (only display function) !

4-42

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Setting options in the DSC West or DSC East mask (register):

Key word 4-32

DSC 4x64 kbit/s (West / East)

Activating the SOH with 4x64 kbit/s

Transmission of 4 service channels in the SOH

DSC1 . . . DSC4:
Activate up to 4 x 64 kbit/s digital service channels, as required (1 to 4).
Key word 4-33

Defining the use of DSC1 in the SOH for a QTN2 or an external signal

DSC1 interface (service channel interface):


external
An external 64 kbit/s signal can be applied to DSC1.
QTN2
The 64 kbit/s signal of the Q module (QTN2) is transmitted via DSC1.
Channel protection switching (protection switching variants for DSC1...DSC4):
1+0
No protection switching.
RX 1+0 Unidirectional protection switching of the transmitter in asymmetrical operation.
TX 1+0 Unidirectional protection switching of the receiver in asymmetrical operation.
1+1
Hot standby: Switchover from operating channel (OP) to protection channel (PR).
Transmit direction / receive direction:
Adjusting the alarm to be generated in case of a service channel failure:
Setting in normal operation: Unchanged adoption of default setting.
Modify the parameters via the Process

RF/160 CI

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to save them!

4-43

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Setting options in the WSC West or WSC East masks (registers):

Key word 4-34

WSC (West / East):

Activating the 2048 kbit/s WSC in the SOH

Transmission of a 2 Mbit/s service channel in the SOH

none
No 2048 kbit/s service channel has been selected (WSC deactivated in the SOH).
OP
Transmission of the 2048 kbit/s service channel in the operating channel (WSC activated in the
SOH).
OP + PR
Transmission of the 2048 kbit/s service channel in the operating and protection channel
(WSC activated in the SOH).

Key word 4-35

Defining the protection of the 2048 kbit/s WSC in the SOH

Channel protection switching (protection switching variants for the 2048 kbit/s WSC):
1+0
No protection switching.
RX 1+0 Unidirectional protection switching of the transmitter in asymmetrical operation.
TX 1+0 Unidirectional protection switching of the receiver in asymmetrical operation.
1+1
Hot standby: Switchover from operating channel (OP) to protection channel (PR).
Transmit direction / receive direction:
Adjusting the alarm to be generated in case of a 2 Mbit/s service channel failure:
Setting in normal operation: Unchanged adoption of default setting.
Modify the parameters via the Process

4-44

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to save them!

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Setting options in the E1 West and E1 East masks (registers):

Key word 4-36

Transmitting a 64 kbit/s service channel in the E1 byte of the SOH

E1 1x64 kbit/s (West / East) Transmisssion of a 64 kbit/s service channel in the E1 byte of the SOH

E1 equipped
E1 equipped

Use of SOH byte E1 enabled


Use of SOH byte E1 not enabled

Key word 4-37

Defining the use of SOH byte E1 for transmit. an EOW#1 or ext. signal

E1 interface (service channel interface):


external
An external 64 kbit/s signal can be transmitted via SOH byte E1.
EOW#1
The 64 kbit/s signal of the EOW#1 module is transmitted via SOH byte E1.
Channel protection switching (protection switching variants for SOH byte E1):
1+0
No protection switching.
RX 1+0 Unidirectional protection switching of the transmitter in asymmetrical operation.
TX 1+0 Unidirectional protection switching of the receiver in asymmetrical operation.
1+1
Hot standby: Switchover from operating channel (OP) to protection channel (PR).
Transmit direction / receive direction:
Adjusting the alarm to be generated in case of a service channel failure:
Setting in normal operation: Unchanged adoption of default setting.
Modify the parameters via the Process

RF/160 CI

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to same them!


4-45

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Setting options in the F1 West or F1 East masks (registers):

Key word 4-38

Transmitting a 64 kbit/s service channel in the F1 byte of the SOH

F1 1x64 kbit/s (West / East) Transmission of a 64 kbit/s service channel in SOH byte F1

F1 equipped
F1 equipped

Use of SOH byte F1 enabled


Use of SOH byte F1 not enabled

Key word 4-39

Defining the use of SOH byte F1 byte for transm. an EOW#2 or ext. signal

F1 interface (service channel interface):


external
An external 64 kbit/s signal can be transmitted via SOH byte F1.
EOW#2
The 64 kbit/s signal of the EOW#2 module is transmitted via SOH byte F1.
Channel protection switching (protection switching variants for SOH byte F1):
1+0
No protection switching.
RX 1+0 Unidirectional protection switching of the transmitter in asymmetrical operation.
TX 1+0 Unidirectional protection switching of the receiver in asymmetrical operation.
1+1
Hot standby: Switchover from operating channel (OP) to protection channel (PR).
Transmit direction / receive direction:
Adjusting the alarm to be generated in case of a service channel failure:
Setting in normal operation: Unchanged adoption of default setting.
Modify the parameters via the Process

4-46

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to save them!

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.11.2 Configuring service channels in the SOH Extension (Ext.) module


The SOH Extension configuration window (service channel configuration) depicted below is activated by
clicking the corresponding functional unit in the HW view of the OHAU:
SOH Ext.
Management
Configuration

Setting options in the DCC West or DCC East masks (registers):


Key word 4-40

DCC (West / East) :


Channel:
None r
DCCR
DCCM

Activating the DCCR//DCCM in the SOH

Transmission of ECC channels in the SOH

No ECC channel selected!


Internal access to bytes D1-D3 in the RSOH
Internal access to bytes D4-D12 in the MSOH
Key word 4-41

Bit rate: 3 x 64 kbit/s = 192 kbit/s


Bit rate: 9 x 64 kbit/s = 576 kbit/s

Defining protection switching of ECC channels in the SOH

Channel protection switching (protection switching variants for ECC channels in the SOH):
1+0
No protection switching!
RX 1+0 Unidirectional protection switching of the transmitter in asymmetrical operation.
TX 1+0 Unidirectional protection switching of the receiver in asymmetrical operation.
1+1
Hot standby: Protection switching of operating channel (OP) to protection channel (PR) !
Transmit direction / receive direction:
Setting alarm signalling in case of a failure of ECC channels.
Setting in normal operation: Unchanged takeover of default setting
Modify the parameters via the Process

RF/160 CI

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to save them!

4-47

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Setting options in the E2 West or E2 East masks (registers):

Key word 4-42

E2 (West/East):
E2:
none
PR
OP
OP + PR

Activating E2 1x64kbit/s in the SOH

Transmission of one 64 kbit/s service channel in the SOH

No 64 kbit/s channel selected (E2 disabled in SOH).


External access only to service channel PR (E2 enabled in SOH).
External access only to service channel OP (E2 enabled in SOH).
External separate access to service channel OP and PR (2 + 0) (E2 enabled in SOH).
Interfaces:

X45
X46

East = Line side


West = Microwave radio side

Transmit direction / receive direction:


Adjusting the alarm to be generated in case of a 64 kbit/s service channel failure:
Setting in normal operation: Unchanged adoption of default setting.
Modify the parameters via the Process

4-48

Modify

menu items and do not forget to save them!

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.11.3 Configuring service channels in the RFCOH Access module


The RFCOH Access configuration window (service channel configuration) depicted below is activated by
clicking the corresponding functional unit in the HW view of the OHAU:
RFCOH Access

(West) / (East) Configure both, if required!

Management
Configuration

Parameters displayed in the General mask (register):


All parameters displayed in this mask indicate the current configuration.
Dimmed display: No modification possible (only display function)!
Key word 4-43

Mode:

Displaying 4/8x64 kbit/s service channels transmitted in the RFCOH

4x64 kbit/s
RFCOH module version 1 or 2
In addition to the WSC, the RFCOH module can transmit 4x64 kbit/s service channels
codirectionally in compliance with ITU-T G.703 (120 ).
8x64 kbit/s
Only with RFCOH module version 2
In addition to the WSC, the RFCOH module can transmit 8x64 kbit/s service channels
codirectionally in compliance with ITU-T G.703 (120 ).
Key word 4-44

Displaying the WSC 2048kbit/s interface of RFCOH

WSC interface:
balanced
The 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 120 .
coaxial
The 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 75 .

Attention:
RF/160 CI

The WSC interface is adjusted by means of the 2 Mbit/s interface straps on


X300, X301, X302 and X303 of the RFCOH module (see section 4.4).
4-49

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Setting options in the DSC 1 . . . 4 mask (register):

Key word 4-45

DSC1 . . . 4

Activating RFCOH with 4x64 kbit/s

Transmission of 4 service channels in the RFCOH

DSC1 . . . DSC4:
Activate up to 4x64 kbit/s digital service channels (1 to 4) according to requirements.
Key word 4-46

Defin. the use of DSC1 in RFCOH for transm. an EOW, QTN or ext. signal

DSC1 interface (service channel interface):


external
An external 64 kbit/s signal can be transmitted via DSC1.
QTN2
The 64 kbit/s signal of the Q module (QTN2) is transmitted via DSC1.
EOW1
The 64 kbit/s signal of the EOW module #1 is transmitted via DSC1.
EOW2
The 64 kbit/s signal of the EOW module #2 is transmitted via DSC1.
Channel protection switching (protection switching variants for DSC1...DSC4):
1+0

RX 1+0
TX 1+0
1+1

No protection switching.
Unidirectional protection switching of the transmitter in asymmetrical operation.
Unidirectional protection switching of the receiver in asymmetrical operation.
Hot standby: Switchover from operating channel (OP) to protection channel (PR).

Transmit direction / receive direction:


Adjusting the alarm to be generated in case of a service channel failure:
Setting in normal operation: Unchanged adoption of default setting.
Modify the parameters via the Process

4-50

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to save them!

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Setting options in the DSC 5 ... 8 mask (register):

Key word 4-47

DSC5 . . . 8

Activating the RFCOH with 8x64 kbit/s

Transmission of 4 further service channels in the RFCOH

DSC5 . . . DSC8:
Activate up to 4x64 kbit/s digital service channels (5 to 8) according to requirements.

Attention:

Only configurable for RFCOH module version 2!

Key word 4-48

Defining protection switching of RFCOH 8x64kbit/s

Channel protection switching (protection switching variants for DSC5...DSC8):


1+0

RX 1+0
TX 1+0
1+1

No protection switching.
Unidirectional protection switching of the transmitter in asymmetrical operation.
Unidirectional protection switching of the receiver in asymmetrical operation.
Hot standby: Switchover from operating channel (OP) to protection channel (PR).

Transmit direction / receive direction:


Adjusting the alarm to be generated in case of a service channel failure.
Setting in normal operation: Unchanged adoption of default setting.
Modify the parameters via the Process

RF/160 CI

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to save them!

4-51

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Setting options in the WSC mask (register):

Key word 4-49

WSC:

Activating 2048 kbit/s WSC in the RFCOH

Transmission of a 2 Mbit/s service channel in the RFCOH


none
No 2048 kbit/s service channel selected (WSC disabled in RFCOH).
OP
Transmission of the 2048 kbit/s service channel in the operating channel (WSC enabled in
RFCOH).
OP + PR
Transmission of the 2048 kbit/s service channel in the operating and protection channel
(WSC enabled in RFCOH).
Key word 4-50

Defining protection switching of 2048kbit/s WSC in RFCOH

Channel protection switching (protection switching variants for 2048 kbit/s WSC):
1+0

RX 1+0
TX 1+0
1+1

No protection switching.
Unidirectional protection switching of the transmitter in asymmetrical operation.
Unidirectional protection switching of the receiver in asymmetrical operation.
Hot standby: Switchover from operating channel (OP) to protection channel (PR)!

Transmit direction / receive direction:


Adjusting the alarm to be generated in case of a failure of the 2 Mbit/s service channel.
Setting in normal operation: Unchanged adoption of default setting.
Modify the parameters via the Process

4-52

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to save them!

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.11.4 Configuring service channels in the EOW module


Key word 4-51

Activating 2/6-wire PSTN connections to the EOW

The EOW module configuration window (service channel configuration) depicted below is activated by
clicking the corresponding functional unit in the HW view of the OHAU:
EOW #x

(EOW #1) / (EOW #2) Configure both, if required !

Management
Configuration

Parameters displayed in the Equipment section:


This section displays the current equipment/version of the EOW module.
Dimmed display: No modification possible (depending on hardware) !
The PSTN2 (2-wire) and PSTN6 (6-wire = 4-wire plus E&M signalling wires) subscriber interface
modules are optional modules => PSTN2 or PSTN6!

PSTN2
PSTN6
Branching

PSTN2
6-wire subscriber interface available
or
PSTN6
Service channel branch/analog EOW available or Branching
2-wire subscriber interface available

or

not available.
not available.
not available.

Setting options in the General section:


East-West transmission enabled: EOW transmission (1x64kbit/s) enabled.

Analog interface:

Connection to local phone:

RF/160 CI

EOW transmission disabled.

EOW transmission of external interface enabled.


EOW transmission of external interface disabled.

EOW transmission of integrated telephone enabled.


EOW transmission of integrated telephone disabled.
4-53

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Clock synchronization:
West
Clock recovery for EOW from West signal.
East
Clock recovery for EOW from East signal.
Internal crystal
Own (internal) clock generator for EOW (quartz oscillator).
Preferred setting in normal operation: West or East.
Connection (transmission) West / East:
none
No EOW transmission.
SOH Access
EOW transmission in the SOH.
RFCOH Access
EOW transmission in the RFCOH.
External digital channel (only East)
Transmission of an external digital 64 kbit/s (service) channel in the East direction.
Interfaces:

X34
X37

Transmission in EOW#1 module


bertragung in EOW#2 module

Setting options in the PSTN2 and PSTN6 boxes:


Setting and configuration of the 2-wire or 6-wire EOW interface:
Setting in normal operation: Unchanged adoption of default setting.
Setting options in the Branching section:
Adjustment of the clock synchronization of the analog service channel (internal telephone).
Setting in normal operation: Unchanged adoption of default setting.
Modify the parameters via the Process

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to save them!

Programming the station number:

Important:

The station number must be programmed if the free-line signal is audible. The 1st and
3rd station digit must not be "0". A station number previously programmed will be
deleted upon entry of the new number.

To program the station number, proceed as follows:


1. Pick up the handset (off-hook).
=>
Free-line signal comes on.
=>
Wait until special tone sequence comes on.
2. Dial "*".
3. Dial first station digit.
=>
Digits 1 to 9; special tone sequence mutes.
4. Dial second station digit.
=>
Digits 0 to 9.
5. Dial third station digit.
=>
Digits 1 to 9; busy signal.
6. Put down handset (on-hook).
=>
Number entered is stored.
For testing purposes, pick up the handset and dial your own (already programmed) station no.. You
will hear the busy tone immediately!
When dialling the number of other busy subscribers or numbers not programmed, you will hear the
busy tone after a delay of 2 seconds.

Note:

4-54

For a detailed description on how to operate the EOW module and telephone set, please
refer to the User Manual RF/160-OM, register Operating Instructions RF/160-OI,
Chapter 16, Annex 1 !!

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.12 Configuring the QTN2 module


Key word 4-52

Configuring QD2/SISA-K

The QTN2 module configuration window (interface configuration) depicted below is activated by clicking
the corresponding functional unit in the HW view of the OHAU:
QTN2
Management
Configuration

Setting options in the General section:


Operating mode:
Bus mode, headend
Bus mode, regenerator/terminal station
Automatic ring, ring start
Automatic ring, ring member
SISA-K-controlled ring, Master West
SISA-K-controlled ring, Master East
SISA-K-controlled ring, ring Slave
Setting depends on SISA configuration!
Interface configuration:
Standard ("A" for interface West, "B" for interface East)
Reversed ("A" for interface East, "B" for interface West)

Setting depends on SISA configuration!

QTN2 bus interface (LOS detection with V.11 interface configuration):


Parts of V.11
QTN2 bus interface V.11 enabled.

Parts of V.11

V.11 disabled => No V.11 bus interface available in the network.

Must be enabled if at least one partial link of the SISA ring is set to V.11!

RF/160 CI

4-55

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Active interface:
"A

"A
"B
"B

QTN2 signal switched in radio direction ("A enabled)


QTN2 signal not switched in radio direction ("A disabled)
QTN2 signal switched in line direction ("B enabled)
QTN2 signal not switched in line direction ("B disabled)

Setting depends on SISA configuration (enabling of "A or "B , "A + "B)!


Setting options in the Interface A section:
Operating mode:
RFCOH (DSC1)
QTN2 signal transmission in the RFCOH
SOH (DSC1)
QTN2 signal transmission in the SOH
Setting depends on service channel configuration!
Setting options in the Interface B section:
Operating mode:
External contradirectional
External codirectional

RFCOH (DSC1)

SOH (DSC1)

External QTN2 signal transmission (line side)


External QTN2 signal transmission (line side)
QTN2 signal transmission in the RFCOH
QTN2 signal transmission in the SOH

Setting depends on service channel configuration!


Modify the parameters via the Process

4-56

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to save them!

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.13 ECC Gateway configuration


Key word 4-53

Configuring the ECC Gateway module

The configuration window of the ECC Gateway module (interface configuration) can be called up via the
following menu items:
ECC Gateway
Management
Configuration
ECC
The following window appears:

Setting options in the "General" section:

LAN Alarm Display on.


LAN Alarm Display off.
Telnet access on.
Telnet access off.

Setting options in the "West" or East" sections:

RF/160 CI

ECC Alarm Display on.


ECC Alarm Display off.

4-57

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

The following configuration window of the ECC Gateway module appears by clicking the corresponding
functional unit in the HW view of the OHAU:
ECC Gateway
Management
Configuration
Addresses

Setting options in the "Operating mode" section:


Q3p-SISA-V
Q3I-SISA-V
QD2-SISA-V
IP-SISA-V
QD2-via-SISA-V
IP-via-SISA-V
All further user data settings of the ECC Gateway module are defined by the network operator in
accordance with the network requirements. If there are no specifications supplied by the operator, the
default configuration data will remain unchanged (=> factory setting).
Modify the parameters via the Process

4-58

/ Modify menu items and do not forget to save them!

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.14 Measuring values displayed by the Service PC


4.14.1 Tx measuring values
Key word 4-54

MSP measuring values of the transmitter

The DRS 155(1) TX OP window with all active (button) and not active transmitters (Tx) is called up by clicking the TX
button in the logic view (functional model, see page 4-9).

Select the desired active OP transmitter by clicking the corresponding button:


TX OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active transmitter

Then choose Performance


Measuring Values / -Thresholds
. . . to activate the Measuring Values/Thresholds window of the transmitter (Tx):

RF/160 CI

4-59

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

4.14.2 Rx measuring values


Key word 4-55

MSP measuring values of the receiver

The DRS 155(1) RX OP window with all active (button) and not active receivers (Rx) is called up by clicking the RX
button in the logic view (= functional model, see page 4-9).

Select the desired active OP receiver by clicking the corresponding button:


RX OP x

Then choose

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated receiver

Performance
Measuring Values / Thresholds

to activate the Measuring Values/Thresholds window of the receiver (Rx):

4-60

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.15 Alignment of systems with protection switching configuration


Key word 4-56

Alignment

In order to permit bit-error-free switchover (hitless), the system must be aligned. In the scope of this
alignment, the different delay times of all channels are compensated, so that the switch always receives
synchronous data and can switch over from an operating channel to the protection channel without loss of
sync. Protection channel PR1 is always used as reference channel for delay time calculations.
The alignment can be performed for the overall system (initial commissioning) or for individual channels
(replacement of the DPU of an OP/selective alignment).
The special features of a hot standby system without OT (occasional traffic) function are described in
section 4.14.5.

4.15.1 Alignment using the Service PC


Two different display modes, i.e. a graphical and a tabular display mode are available (configuration
example: 3+2):
The Alignment windows (DRS 155(1) - Alignment) below can be called up from the HW view as follows:
Alignment
only if
required

. . . or . . .
Display

Alignmennt

Change of display mode

Graphical

Display
Tabular

(Default display mode: "Graphical" )

("Graphical" display mode)


("Tabular" display mode)
The following rules are applicable to both display modes:
Blue = Tx-side and Rx-side protection switching connection
Green = Active transmission (OP or PR)
Red = Faulty transmission
White = Input box
RF/160 CI

4-61

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Explication of MSP display modes:


Graphical display:
The graphical display shows the individual transmission links sorted according to operating and protection
channels. The Tx side (far end) is displayed on the left, the Rx side with the local port on the right side.
Depending on the system expansion, two N to 1 multiplexers (RPS-C, Radio Protection Switching) can be
used to switch the operating channels to one protection channels. This is indicated by the vertical
connecting lines and colors. A mark at the crossing point shows the multiplexer switching status.
If a channel is available, the alarm data are displayed in the first column. Otherwise, the background
remains dark grey.
Tabular display
The tabular display of the alignment mask gives a compact overview of the channels and their statuses.
The colors of the individual table cells are sorted according to columns and assigned according to the
following scheme:
Channel

red
Channel failed/disturbed and protection switching failed/disturbed
green a) Channel OK or
b) Channel failed/disturbed, but protection switching OK

Measuring value

red
Channel not aligned
green a) Channel aligned and protection switched or
b) Channel aligned and Tx-side protection switching prepared

PR1/PR2 status
red
Channel failed/disturbed
green Channel aligned and protection switched
blue
Channel aligned and Tx-side protection switching prepared
Meaning of alarms
INT-A
INT-B
Align
RPS-AIS

General alarm "Module defective" of the associated DPU module.


General alarm "Module faulty" of the associated DPU module.
Test switchover was not error-free. Channel is not correctly aligned.
The associated DPU receives AIS in the protection switching block

calling up the window for the first time, errors might be displayed. (Since the
Attention: When
system has not yet been aligned, there are probably alignment errors). The alignment
must be performed using STM-1 signals without AIS. Otherwise the alignment process
will be interrupted. Make sure that none of the channels transmits or receives AIS. Also
ensure that none of the channels is blocked before you are starting the alignment
process. This setting can be overwritten by a selective alignment (see section 4.14.4).

4-62

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.15.2 Overall alignment


Key word 4-57

Overall alignment

During the initial commissioning process, start up the overall alignment process by clicking the following
menu items in the Alignment window:
Settings
Align all
The following security request appears:

Choose Yes to start the alignment. A status dialog displayed for the whole duration of the alignment
process informs you on which OP is checked with which PR:

Note:

If the alignment is interrupted, for example, because of a missing input signal or wrong
cabling, the corresponding fault report is displayed in the status dialog window. In this
case, you must eliminate the fault and re-start the alignment process. This must be
repeated until - after the successful execution of the complete process - the message "All
measuring values lie in the permissible range" is displayed in the status window!

After the successful termination of the alignment process, the following message appears:

Choose the Ok button to return to the Alignment window.

RF/160 CI

4-63

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

By selecting the Details option, you can request the delay times between the PR1 reference channel and
the other channels:

The alignment values of all channels should lie within the permissible range and display no alarms!
Alignment window after a successful alignment:

the successfully terminated alignment must be tested in order to check the


Important:Now
memorized alignment values and correct them, if necessary ( Fine alignment)!
See section 4.14.3 "Checking alignment values".

4-64

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.15.3 Checking alignment values


Key word 4-58

Checking alignment values

A test is necessary to check the alignment values. This test can be started via the following menu items in
the Alignment window:
Settings
Test all
The following security request appears:

Choose Yes to start testing the alignment values. A status dialog displayed for the whole duration of the
testing process informs you on which OP is being checked with which PR.

After the successful termination of the alignment


test, the follow message is displayed:

By choosing the Details option, you can


request the delay times between the PR1/PR2
reference channel and the other channels.
These delay times can possibly deviate from
those displayed during the alignment.
Choose the Ok button to return to the
Alignment window.

All channels are aligned!


Alignment terminated!
Choose the Ok or Close details button!
RF/160 CI

4-65

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

4.15.4 Selective alignment


Key word 4-59

Selective alignment

By double-clicking the desired channel ( OP x ) in the Alignment window, the following mask appears:

This channel can now be checked or aligned using the selected protection channel (PR 1 or PR 2). The
system protection switching test or system alignment is started by choosing the following option:
All channels
Using the "Enhanced priority" option, you can overwrite the blocked configuration of the selected
channel(s):
Enhanced priority
Choose the Ok button to start the selective alignment.
The determined delay value displayed in the Alignment window can be changed by double-clicking it!

Double click

the successfully terminated alignment must be tested in order to check the


Important: Now
memorized alignment values and correct them, if necessary ( Fine alignment)!
4-66

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

Without alignment, the default delay value is 700 in case of N+M systems!
Selective, manual modification of delay values:

Double click

Double click
By double-clicking the delay section, the following window
appears and enables you to manually enter a delay value:
In this window, you can directly enter the
delay time value.
Range of values: 0 to 1023
Choose the Ok button to save the
new value entered.

To return to the Alignment window, choose the Ok or Cancel button.


After any modification, the new value must be tested to check the stored alignment
Important:value(s)
and to correct it (them), if necessary. ( Fine alignment)!
See section 4.14.3 "Checking alignment values".

RF/160 CI

4-67

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Checking the alignment value or entered value by switching over manually to protection channel PR1
(n+1 configuration) or to both protection channels PR1 and PR2 (in n+2 system configurations):
A manual switchover is activated by double-clicking on the white surface of the corresponding integration
area!

Double click

Double click

OP - Manual switchover of an operating channel

PR - Manual switchover of a protection channel

Choose the Ok button to execute the switchover command.


Choose the Cancel button to return to the Alignment window (without switchover).
For more detailed information on manual protection switching, please refer to section 4.4.9 of the
Operating Instructions, "DPU/RPS STM-1 manual protection switching" (DPU configuration)!

4-68

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.15.5 Alignment with hot standby or 1+1 configurations without occasional traffic
Key word 4-60

Alignment with hot standby or 1+1 configurations

In a "Hot standby" or "1+1 without occasional traffic" configuration there is only one DPU. The alignment
memory of this DPU is divided up into 2 parts to create two virtual DPUs (OP1 and PR1).
Alignment window for a hot standby or 1+1 system configuration:

The default value is 350.


The configuration and alignment processes are identical with those of an N+M system.

4.15.6 Alignment errors


Key word 4-61

Alignment errors

If a channel could not be aligned, an error will be displayed. By clicking on 'Details', the errored channels
will display a "Couldn't be aligned" message instead of the calculated delay value.
A faulty configuration in the far end (i.e. N+0) can lead to a system failure. In this case, check the
protection switching configuration of the far end and ensure that N+M protection switching, hot standby or
1+1 without occasional traffic option has been selected.
The alignment process is interrupted if at least one of the DPUs detects an AIS on the receive side. In this
case, an information box will be displayed.

RF/160 CI

4-69

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

4.16 Configuring and testing 1 + 1 HSB protection switching systems


Key word 4-62

Protection switching

4.16.1 Hardware switchover


Automatic switchover must be enabled in both the transmitter and receiver before the test can be
started:
Click the TX or RX button in the logic view (functional model, see page 4-9) to call up the DRS 155(1) TX (RX)
OP window with all active (button) and not active transmitters (Tx) or receivers (Rx).
See figures in sections 4.13.1 and 4.13.2.
Select the desired active OP transmitter by clicking the corresponding button:
TX (RX) OP x

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active transmitter or receiver

Then choose Management


Configuration
to activate the DRS 155(1) RX OP x - KON window displaying the active receiver,
or the DRS 155(1) TX OP x - KON window displaying the active transmitter:

In these configuration windows (RX and TX), the automatic switchover function must be enabled as
follows:
In the Automatic switchover box, select ON ...
. . . and save this setting to the transmitter and receiver by means of the toolbar button !
The settings for the transmitter and receiver are executed in the same way.

Note:

The automatic switchover function must be enabled (Automatic switchover ON)


for both the transmitter (Tx) and receiver (Rx)!

Setting with protection switching configuration in normal operation!


Trigger an automatic switchover to the protection channel by interrupting the IF link between the
Modem Unit and the selected transmitter, => To do this pull out the coaxial cable at X2 ( IF) of the
transmitter!
Activate the DRS 155(1) TX OP x - KON configuration window (see above) to verify that the switchover
process has been executed!
Automatic switchover to the protection channel must take place within 1 second!
In the DRS 155(1) TX OP x - KON configuration window, the display of the Active transmitter box
must change from A to B (= protection channel)!
Choose Process

/ Update to request the current switching status.

Important: Verify that the service channels have also been correctly protection-switched!
4-70

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.16.2 Software switchover


a) Tx-side switchover
Key word 4-63

Tx-side switchover

Click the TX button in the logic view (functional model, see page 4-9) to activate the DRS 155(1)TX OP
window displaying all active (button) and not active transmitters (see section 4.13.1).
Then select the desired active OP transmitter by clicking the corresponding button:
TX OP x
Choose

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated active transmitter


Management
Configuration

to activate the DRS 155(1) TX OP x - KON window displaying the active transmitter:

To be able to switch over the transmitter at the Service PC, the Automatic switchover function must first
be disabled:
In the Automatic switchover box, select OFF ...
. . . and save this setting to the transmitter by means of the toolbar button !
Then enter "B (protection channel) in the Active transmitter box ...
... and save this entry to the transmitter by means of the toolbar button.
Automatic switchover to the protection channel must take place within 1 second!

Important: Verify that the service channels have also been correctly protection-switched.
Re-enable the Automatic switchover function on termination of this test and before
Attention: closing
the configuration window!

RF/160 CI

4-71

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

b) Rx-side switchover
Key word 4-64

Rx-side switchover

The Rx switchover is performed in analogy to the Tx switchover:


Click the RX button in the logic view (functional model, see page 4-9) to activate the DRS 155(1)RX OP
window displaying all active (button) and not active receivers (see section 4.13.2).
Then select the desired active OP receiver by clicking the corresponding button:
RX OP x
Then choose

x = No. (1 to 16) of associated receiver


Management
Configuration

to activate the DRS 155(1) RX OP x - KON window displaying the active receiver:

To be able to switch over the receiver at the Service PC, the Automatic switchover function must first
be disabled:
In the Automatic switchover box, select OFF ...
. . . and save this setting to the receiver by means of the toolbar button !
Then enter "B (protection channel) in the Active receiver box ...
... and save this entry to the receiver by means of the toolbar button!
Automatic switchover to the protection channel must take place within 1 second!

Important: Verify that the service channels have also been correctly protection-switched!
Re-enable the Automatic switchover function on termination of this test and before
Attention: closing
the configuration window!

4-72

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.17 Terminating the commissioning process


4.17.1 Recording configuration parameters
Key word 4-65

Recording configuration parameters

A commissioning record has to be worked out at the end of the commissioning process. This record must
also include the complete configuration parameters of the microwave radio system.
Open the DRS 155(1) - Address MSP window (functional model, see page 4-9)
or System - Hardware View window (module level, see page 4-10) by selecting the corresponding menu
item in the upper main menu:
File
Print
The following window appears:

To save the complete system configuration to a certain text file, choose the File option in the Message
window.
In the Save As window (see below), enter a filename and select the drive (=> a:\) and directory:

The complete system configuration is saved to the specified text file.


The system creates a Filename.txt file which can be read and processed by means of any text editor.
In addition to the configuration data, this text file also includes the nameplate data of all modules, MSP
measuring values, system configuration and equipment with modules as well as the alarm information of
the complete microwave radio system.

Note:

When using a text file as part of the commissioning protocol, this file must be edited, i.e.
data not relevant and empty boxes must be deleted.
For generating a formatted record printout, we recommend to use Microsoft WORD or
OFFICE (Arial, size 9).

We recommend to additionally save the complete configuration parameters to a floppy disk. In case of
subsequent configuration modifications, the initial (commissioning) status can then be easily restored.

RF/160 CI

4-73

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

Key word 4-66

Saving the configuration parameters to disk

In the window displayed below is activated by selecting the following menu items in the upper main menu
(of the DRS 155(1) - Address MSP window):
File
NE File

To save the complete system configuration to a certain text file, select the Backup (all) option. Then
choose the OK button.
In the Save As window, enter a filename and select the drive (=> a:\) and directory:

The complete system configuration is saved to the specified text file.


The system creates a Filename.dev file which can be returned by the Service PC via the File and
File NE menu items to the microwave radio system.
with the complete configuration data backup of a system should be returned only to
Attention: Athefilesource
system and should not be used to configure other systems!

4-74

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Commissioning

4.17.2 Recording system data


Key word 4-67

Recording system data

For recording module nos. as well as the software and hardware versions of all modules, activate the
following MSP menu items in the functional model of the system (logic view):
HW view

= Menu item in the title bar of the logic view

Modules

= Submenu of "HW view"

Management

= Menu item in the title bar - Module/hardware view

System data

= Submenu of "Management

The following window appears and displays all nameplate data:

This table gives an overview of the nameplate data of all modules of a complete system.
By selecting the File / Save menu items in the title bar of this window, the contents of this table will be
saved to a "Filename.csv file after selection of a storage medium and entry of a filename.
The contents of this file (= Nameplate data of all modules) can be subsequently transferred or read into
an Excel-based protocol by mouse-click.

RF/160 CI

4-75

Commissioning

Commissioning Instructions

This page has been left blank for editional reasons.

4-76

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

Required Measuring Units and Accessories

5 Required Measuring Units and Accessories


5.1

Systems without optical interfaces


Key word 5-1

Measuring units without optical ports

Measuring units required for commissioning MARCONI microwave radio systems with CMI
interface
Item

Designation

Type

Ordering no.

Supplier

Qty

1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

PDH / SDH analyzer


PDH capacity tester
SDH overhead/pointer adapter
Interfaces HP-IB + RS232
Transport bag

37717C
USA
A1U
A3D
15910B

37717C
USA
A1U
A3D
15910B

HP
HP
HP
HP
HP

1
1
1
1
1

2.
2.1
2.2
2.3

20 GHz spectrum analyzer


50/75 adapter / DC block
Transport bag
75 transformer

8592L
Opt. 711
Opt. 042
11694A

8592L
Opt. 711
Opt. 042
11694A

HP
HP
HP
HP

1
1
1
1

3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6

Power meter
AC adapter
Power sensor -30 to +20dBm
Power sensor -70 to -20dBm
Sensor cable 5m (option)
Transport bag
Attenuator kit 3/6/10/20 dB

IFR
IFR
IFR
IFR
IFR
IFR
Weinschel

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5

Digital Communications Analyzer 50 bit/s to 2048 kbit/s


PFA-35
PFA-35
Mains cable European/UK conn.
K490 / K492
Printer cable
K1500
V.24 adapter cable
K1512
V.11 adapter cable
K1505
Adapter cable for external clock
K1513

4535/60
K490 / K492
K1500
K1512
K1505
K1513

WWG
WWG
WWG
WWG
WWG
WWG

1
1
1
1
1
1

5.
5.1
5.2

Multimeter
Adapter cable set
Transport bag

F73
TL20
C90

F73
TL20
C90

Fluke
Fluke
Fluke

1
1
1

6.
6.1

Printer - serial with transport box


Printer paper

JPR-7822
51630C

4513/HW.00
51630C

WWG
HP

1
3

7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5

Notebook PC Pent. 133/16 MB


RAM, add. 16 MByte
4 GByte hard disk
WINDOWS 98
Transport bag
SISA Service PC software (MSP)

Toshiba
Toshiba
Toshiba
Toshiba
Toshiba
MARCONI

1
1
1
1
1
1

8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4

X - t recorder
Transport bag
Set of pencils (red)
Set of pencils (blue)
Recorder paper

Goerz
Goerz
Goerz
Goerz
Goerz

1
1
5
5
10

RF/160 CI

6970 + Opt. 001

56970-002G
54441-017B
56910-900L
6910
56920-900J
6920
06950-086M
54112-159S
Model 54/0-40GHz 54-3/ -6/ -10/ -20

16MB

Basic system & DRS 155E application


SE110-02

881241200
195750000
195536074
195536075
195697000

5-1

Required Measuring Units and Accessories

Item

Designation

Commissioning Instructions

Type

9.
Antenna anal. Master 18GHz
S818A
N(m) to N(f)
9.1 Test port cable 1.5m / 18GHz
9.2 Waveguide - coaxial adapter UBR40 3.3 - 4.9GHz
9.3 Waveguide - coaxial adapter UBR70 5.85 - 8.2GHz
9.4 Waveguide - coaxial adapter UBR84 7.05 - 10GHz
9.5 Waveguide - coaxial adapter UBR120 10 - 15GHz
9.6 Waveguide calibration kit UBR40
3.3 - 4.9GHz
9.7 Waveguide calibration kit UBR70
5.85 - 8.2GHz
9.8 Waveguide calibration kit UBR84
7.05 - 10GHz
10 - 15GHz
9.9 Waveguide calibration kit UBR120
SM760-213
9.10 Transport bag
* Selection depending on frequency range(s) used.

Ordering no.

Supplier

Qty

S818A
15NNF50-1.B
35UM40N
35UM70N
35UM84N
35UM120N
23/24/26UM40
23/24/26UM70
23/24/26UM84
23/24/26UM120
SM760-213

Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu

1
1
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1

The measuring units listed above are proposals for the various measuring units required for
commissioning.
These measuring units and accessories can also be replaced by equivalent units from other
manufacturers.

5-2

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

5.2

Required Measuring Units and Accessories

Systems with optical interfaces


Key word 5-2

Measuring units with optical ports

Measuring units required for commissioning MARCONI microwave radio systems with optical
interfaces
Item

Designation

Type

Ordering no.

Supplier

Qty

1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

PDH / SDH analyzer


PDH capacity tester
SDH overhead/pointer adapter
Opt. interface 1310nm STM0-4
Interfaces HP-IB + RS232
Transport bag

37717C
USA
A1U
131
A3D
15910B

37717C
USA
A1U
131
A3D
15910B

HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP

1
1
1
1
1
1

2.
2.1
2.2
2.3

20 GHz spectrum analyzer


50/75 adapter / DC block
Transport bag
75 transformer

8592L
Opt. 711
Opt. 042
11694A

8592L
Opt. 711
Opt. 042
11694A

HP
HP
HP
HP

1
1
1
1

3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6

Power meter
AC adapter
Power sensor -30 to +20dBm
Power sensor -70 to -20dBm
Sensor cable 5m (option)
Transport bag
Attenuator kit 3/6/10/20 dB

IFR
IFR
IFR
IFR
IFR
IFR
Weinschel

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5

Digital communications analyzer 50 bit/s to 2048 kbit/s


PFA-35
PFA-35
Mains cable European/UK conn.
K490 / K492
Printer cable
K1500
V.24 adapter cable
K1512
V.11 adapter cable
K1505
Adapter cable of external clock
K1513

4535/60
K490 / K492
K1500
K1512
K1505
K1513

WWG
WWG
WWG
WWG
WWG
WWG

1
1
1
1
1
1

5.
5.1
5.2

Multimeter
Adapter cable set
Transport bag

F73
TL20
C90

F73
TL20
C90

Fluke
Fluke
Fluke

1
1
1

6.
6.1

Printer - serial with transport box


Printer paper

JPR-7822
51630C

4513/HW.00
51630C

WWG
HP

1
3

7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5

Notebook PC Pent. 133/16 MB


RAM, add. 16 MByte
4 GByte hard disk
WINDOWS 98
Transport bag
SISA Service PC software (MSP)

8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4

X - t recorder
Transport bag
Set of pencils (red)
Set of pencils (blue)
Recorder paper

RF/160 CI

6970 + Opt. 001

56970-002G
54441-017B
56910-900L
6910
56920-900J
6920
06950-086M
54112-159S
Modell 54/0-40GHz 54-3/ -6/ -10/ -20

Toshiba
Toshiba
Toshiba
Toshiba
Toshiba
Basic system and DRS 155E application MARCONI
16MB

SE110-02

881241200
195750000
195536074
195536075
195697000

Goerz
Goerz
Goerz
Goerz
Goerz

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
10

5-3

Required Measuring Units and Accessories

Item
9.
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
10.
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4

Designation
Antenna Anal. Master 18GHz
Test port cable 1.5m / 18GHz
Waveguide-coaxial adapter UBR40
Waveguide-coaxial adapter UBR70
Waveguide-coaxial adapter UBR84
Waveguide-coaxial adapter UBR120
Waveguide calibration kit UBR40
Waveguide calibration kit UBR70
Waveguide calibration kit UBR84
Waveguide calibration kit UBR120
Transport bag
Optical attenuator 1260-1600nm
DIN 47256 adapter
Opt. cable (FO) DIN 2m
Rechargeable battery
Quick-charging unit

Commissioning Instructions

Type

Ordering no.

Supplier

Qty

S818A
N(m) to N(f)
3.3 - 4.9GHz
5.85 - 8.2GHz
7.05 - 10GHz
10 - 15GHz
3.3 - 4.9GHz
5.85 - 8.2GHz
7.05 - 10GHz
10 - 15GHz
SM760-213

S818A
15NNF50-1.5B
35UM40N
35UM70N
35UM84N
35UM120N
23/24/26UM40
23/24/26UM70
23/24/26UM84
23/24/26UM120
SM760-213

Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu
Anritsu

1
1
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1

OLA-15

2239/01
2060/00.50
K3100
2229/90.02
2237/90.03

WWG
WWG
WWG
WWG
WWG

1
2
2
2
1

2229/20
2060/00.50
K3100
2229/90.02
2237/90.03
2090/13

WWG
WWG
WWG
WWG
WWG
WWG

1
2
2
2
1
1

K3100

OLP-15A
11.
Optical level meter
11.1 DIN 47256 adapter
11.2 Opt. cable (FO) DIN 2m
K3100
11.3 Rechargeable battery
11.4 Quick-charging unit
MK-1
11.5 Transport bag for OLA & OLP
* Selection depending on frequency range(s) used.

The measuring units listed above are proposals for the various measuring units required for
commissioning.
These measuring units and accessories can also be replaced by equivalent units from other
manufacturers.

5-4

RF/160 CI

Commissioning Instructions

After-Sales Service

6 After-Sales Service
Key word 6-1

Service

Digital microwave radio systems from Marconi Communications GmbH are maintenance-free.
If not otherwise agreed upon by contract, equipment repairs are limited to the replacement of complete
modules.
As far as there are no other contractual regulations, please send defective modules to the following
address:

Marconi Communications GmbH


Central Europe Repair Management
Robert-Bosch-Str.10
01454 Radeberg
Germany
Repair Management
(during normal service hours)

Tel.:

+ 49 3528 / 456 - 267 or 583


Fax:

+49 3528 / 456 534

Front Line Support (FLS)


Call nos.:
(24h/7D)

Tel.: 08000 / 6272664


Fax:

RF/160 CI

0800 / 1812275

6-1

After-Sales Service

Commissioning Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

6-2

RF/160 CI

MDRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E


SDH Long-Haul
Microwave Radio Systems

Operating Instructions

(RF/160 OI)
Edition 01.2003

Marconi Communications GmbH


D-71520 Backnang
Telefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212
http://www.marconi.com
Copyright 2003 by Marconi Communications GmbH
(hierin bezeichnet als Marconi)
nderungen vorbehalten Gedruckt in Deutschland
Marconi, Marconi Communications, das Marconi Logo,
Skyband, MDRS, MDMS und ServiceOn Access sind
eingetragene Markenzeichen
von Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows ist ein eingetragenes Markenzeichen der
Microsoft Corporation, Redmond.
Marconi Communications GmbH
D-71520 Backnang
Telephone +49 (7191) 13-0 Telefax +49 (7191) 13-3212
http://www.marconi.com
Copyright 2003 by Marconi Communications GmbH
(herein referred to as Marconi)
Specifications subject to change Printed in Germany
Marconi, Marconi Communications, the Marconi logo,
Skyband, MDRS, MDMS and ServiceOn Access are
trademarks of
Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation,
Redmond.

Operating Instructions

Contents

Contents
1 Safety Instructions ........................................................................1-1
1.1

Application ............................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.2

Protection class.................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.3

Operating voltage ................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.4

Rack installation ................................................................................................................... 1-2

1.5

Rack grounding .................................................................................................................... 1-2

1.6

ESD protection...................................................................................................................... 1-3

1.7

Laser safety........................................................................................................................... 1-4

1.8

RF interfaces......................................................................................................................... 1-6

2 Rack Configuration .......................................................................2-1


2.1

Channel positions ................................................................................................................ 2-6

2.2

Modem Unit addresses ........................................................................................................ 2-9

2.3

RPSC addresses................................................................................................................. 2-10

2.4

LON and CAN system bus................................................................................................. 2-11

2.5

STM-1 Section Overhead (SOH)........................................................................................ 2-13

3 Starting the Service PC.................................................................3-1


4 Configuration.................................................................................4-1
4.1
General settings ................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1
Protection switching mode / Redundancy....................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2
XPIC ................................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.3
ATPC............................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.4
STM-1 processing ........................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.5
Protection switching ........................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.6
Auxiliary channels ........................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2

Transmitter (Tx) .................................................................................................................... 4-3

4.3

Tx oscillator .......................................................................................................................... 4-7

4.4

Main receiver (Rx)................................................................................................................. 4-8

4.5

Rx oscillator ........................................................................................................................ 4-12

4.6
Diversity receiver (RxD)..................................................................................................... 4-13
4.6.1
Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations ......................................... 4-16
4.7
Modem Unit (MU) ................................................................................................................ 4-17
4.7.1
SPI STM-1 - Electrical................................................................................................... 4-18
4.7.2
SPI STM-1 - Optical ...................................................................................................... 4-19
4.7.3
RPSI STM-1 .................................................................................................................. 4-20
4.7.4
Modem Unit Power Supply............................................................................................ 4-21
4.7.5
Modulator ...................................................................................................................... 4-22
4.7.6
Demodulator.................................................................................................................. 4-24
4.7.7
Controller module.......................................................................................................... 4-27
4.7.8
DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit ....................................................................... 4-28
4.7.9
DPU/RPS STM-1 manual protection switching............................................................. 4-43
4.7.9.1 Line protection (n+1/2)............................................................................................... 4-43
4.7.9.2 Equipment protection (1+1 HSB)............................................................................... 4-47
4.8
RPSC + RPSH modules...................................................................................................... 4-49
4.8.1
RPSC module................................................................................................................ 4-49
4.8.2
RPSH module................................................................................................................ 4-50
4.9

Overhead Access Unit (OHAU) ......................................................................................... 4-51

RF/160 OI

Contents

Operating Instructions

4.9.1
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 4-51
4.9.2
Service channels and connection options..................................................................... 4-52
4.9.3
OHAU power supply...................................................................................................... 4-55
4.9.4
RFCOH Access Module ................................................................................................ 4-56
4.9.4.1 RFCOH wayside interface 75 ................................................................................ 4-63
4.9.4.2 RFCOH wayside interface 120 .............................................................................. 4-64
4.9.5
EOW module ................................................................................................................. 4-65
4.9.6
QTN module .................................................................................................................. 4-68
4.9.7
ECC Gateway module................................................................................................... 4-72
4.9.8
ECC Gateway module - addresses............................................................................... 4-74
4.9.8.1 Q3p-SISA-V operating mode..................................................................................... 4-75
4.9.8.2 Q3I-SISA-V operating mode...................................................................................... 4-79
4.9.8.3 QD2-SISA-V operating mode .................................................................................... 4-81
4.9.8.4 IP-SISA-V operating mode ........................................................................................ 4-83
4.9.8.5 QD2-via-SISA-V and IP-via-SISA-V operating modes .............................................. 4-85
4.9.9
ECC Gateway Module - IP Routing .............................................................................. 4-87
4.9.10 SOH Access Module ..................................................................................................... 4-88
4.9.10.1 SOH wayside interface 75 ................................................................................... 4-106
4.9.10.2 SOH wayside interface 120 ................................................................................. 4-107
4.9.11 SOH Extension Module............................................................................................... 4-108
4.9.12 SISA-0/N ..................................................................................................................... 4-114
4.9.13 SISA-K/R ..................................................................................................................... 4-115
4.9.14 XQI .............................................................................................................................. 4-122

5 Alignment.......................................................................................5-1
5.1

Introduction........................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2

Display................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.3

Overall alignment ................................................................................................................. 5-3

5.4

Checking alignment data..................................................................................................... 5-4

5.5

Selective alignment .............................................................................................................. 5-5

5.6

Hot Standby or 1+1 without occasional traffic .................................................................. 5-6

5.7

Alignment errors................................................................................................................... 5-7

6 Alarms............................................................................................6-1
6.1

Standard module alarms ..................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2

Transmitter (Tx) .................................................................................................................... 6-3

6.3

TX/RX oscillator .................................................................................................................... 6-4

6.4

Main receiver......................................................................................................................... 6-5

6.5

Diversity receiver.................................................................................................................. 6-6

6.6
Modem Unit ........................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.6.1
SPI STM-1 - Electrical..................................................................................................... 6-7
6.6.2
SPI STM-1 - Optical ........................................................................................................ 6-8
6.6.3
RPSI STM-1 .................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.6.4
Modem Unit power supply............................................................................................. 6-10
6.6.5
Modulator ...................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.6.6
Demodulator.................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.6.7
Controller module.......................................................................................................... 6-14
6.6.8
DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit ....................................................................... 6-15
6.7
RPSC + RPSH modules...................................................................................................... 6-19
6.7.1
RPSC module................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.7.2
RPSH module................................................................................................................ 6-20
6.8
Overhead Access Unit (OHAU) ......................................................................................... 6-21
6.8.1
OHAU power supply...................................................................................................... 6-21
6.8.2
RFCOH Access Module ................................................................................................ 6-22
II

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions
6.8.3
6.8.4
6.8.5
6.8.6
6.8.7
6.8.8
6.8.9
6.8.10
6.9

Contents

EOW module ................................................................................................................. 6-30


QTN module .................................................................................................................. 6-31
ECC Gateway module................................................................................................... 6-32
SOH Access Module ..................................................................................................... 6-33
SOH Extension.............................................................................................................. 6-43
SISA-0/N ....................................................................................................................... 6-45
SISA-K/R ....................................................................................................................... 6-46
XQI ................................................................................................................................ 6-47

Alignment / OP/PR channel failure ................................................................................... 6-48

7 Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters .......7-1


7.1

Overview of performance counters available.................................................................... 7-1

7.2

Transmitter............................................................................................................................ 7-2

7.3

Main receiver......................................................................................................................... 7-4

7.4

Diversity receiver.................................................................................................................. 7-6

7.5
Modem Unit ........................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5.1
SPI STM-1 - Electrical..................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5.2
SPI STM-1 - Optical ...................................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.3
RPSI STM-1 .................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.5.4
Modem Unit power supply............................................................................................. 7-16
7.5.5
Modulator ...................................................................................................................... 7-17
7.5.6
Demodulator.................................................................................................................. 7-18
7.5.7
Controller module.......................................................................................................... 7-19
7.5.8
DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit ....................................................................... 7-20
7.6

RPSC + RPSH module........................................................................................................ 7-33

7.7
OHAU Overhead Access Unit............................................................................................ 7-34
7.7.1
OHAU power supply...................................................................................................... 7-34
7.7.2
RFCOH Access Module ................................................................................................ 7-35
7.7.3
EOW module ................................................................................................................. 7-36
7.7.4
QTN module .................................................................................................................. 7-37
7.7.5
SOH Access Module ..................................................................................................... 7-38
7.7.6
SOH Extension module................................................................................................. 7-39
7.7.7
SISA-0/N module .......................................................................................................... 7-40
7.7.8
SISA-K/R ....................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.7.9
XQI ................................................................................................................................ 7-42

8 Software, Equipment and Configuration Management...............8-1


8.1

Required operator software ................................................................................................ 8-1

8.2

Software download to system modules............................................................................. 8-1

8.3

OSI parameter file transfer to the ECC Gateway Module ................................................. 8-1

8.4

OSI parameter upload from the ECC Gateway module .................................................... 8-2

8.5

Saving and loading equipment configuration data........................................................... 8-2

8.6

Creating a system data table............................................................................................... 8-3

8.7

Adjusting the system time................................................................................................... 8-3

9 What is when? Troubleshooting .................................................9-1


9.1

RF Unit................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.2

Modem Unit ........................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.3

RPS ........................................................................................................................................ 9-6

9.4
OHA Unit................................................................................................................................ 9-6
9.4.1
OHAU power supply........................................................................................................ 9-6
9.4.2
RFCOH Access Module .................................................................................................. 9-7
9.4.3
SOH Access Module ....................................................................................................... 9-9
RF/160 OI

III

Contents

Operating Instructions

9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6

SOH Extension Module................................................................................................. 9-13


SISA0/N......................................................................................................................... 9-15
EOW and QTN .............................................................................................................. 9-16

10 Subracks and Modules ...............................................................10-1


10.1

Transmitter (Tx) .................................................................................................................. 10-1

10.2

Main and diversity receiver (Rx / RxD) ............................................................................. 10-2

10.3

RPS-C .................................................................................................................................. 10-3

10.4

RPS-H .................................................................................................................................. 10-4

10.5

Modem Unit ......................................................................................................................... 10-5

10.6 OHAU subrack .................................................................................................................... 10-6


10.6.1 OHAU subrack (depicted with QD2 interface module) ................................................ 10-6
10.6.2 OHAU subrack (depicted with ECC Gateway module) ................................................. 10-7

11 Channel Patterns.........................................................................11-1
11.1

Channel patterns of the 4 GHz RF band .......................................................................... 11-1

11.2

Channel patterns of the 5 GHz RF band .......................................................................... 11-7

11.3

Channel patterns of the L6 RF band................................................................................. 11-9

11.4

Channel patters of the U6 RF band ................................................................................ 11-11

11.5

Channel patterns of the 7 GHz RF band ........................................................................ 11-12

11.6

Channel patterns of the 8 GHz RF band ........................................................................ 11-15

11.7

Channel patterns of the 13 GHz RF band ...................................................................... 11-18

12 Frequency Setting .......................................................................12-1


12.1

Frequency setting in the 3.6 GHz RF band ...................................................................... 12-1

12.2

Frequency setting in the 3.9 GHz RF band ...................................................................... 12-2

12.3

Frequency setting in the 4.7 GHz RF band ...................................................................... 12-4

12.4

Frequency setting in the 6.2 GHz RF band ...................................................................... 12-5

12.5

Frequency setting in the 6.8 GHz RF band ...................................................................... 12-6

12.6

Frequency setting in the 7 GHz RF band ......................................................................... 12-7

12.7

Frequency setting in the 8 GHz RF band ......................................................................... 12-8

12.8

Frequency setting in the 13 GHz RF band ....................................................................... 12-9

13 Connectors ..................................................................................13-1
13.1

Connectors of the transmitter (Tx) ................................................................................... 13-2

13.2

Connectors of the main and diversity receiver (Rx and RxD) ....................................... 13-4

13.3 Connectors of the Modem Unit ......................................................................................... 13-7


13.3.1 Connectors of the SPI El. and SPI Opt. module ......................................................... 13-14
13.4 Connectors of the Overhead Access Unit ..................................................................... 13-15
13.4.1 Connectors of SISA- 0/N and Q modules ................................................................... 13-38
13.5

Connectors of RPS-C and RPS-H modules ................................................................... 13-39

14 Ordering Information ..................................................................14-1


14.1

CE compliance.................................................................................................................... 14-1

14.2

Ordering information ......................................................................................................... 14-1

15 After-Sales Service......................................................................15-1
16 Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module .......................16-1
IV

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Contents

17 Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model......................17-1


17.1

QD2 view ............................................................................................................................. 17-1

17.2

Functional groups supported ........................................................................................... 17-2

17.3

Assignment of instances to microwave radio channels ................................................ 17-2

17.4 SISA0 functional group...................................................................................................... 17-3


17.4.1 Application functions ..................................................................................................... 17-3
17.4.2 Alarm information .......................................................................................................... 17-3
17.5 RTF-1 functional group...................................................................................................... 17-4
17.5.1 Application functions ..................................................................................................... 17-4
17.5.2 Alarm information .......................................................................................................... 17-4
17.5.3 Configuration ................................................................................................................. 17-5
17.5.4 Performance measuring points ..................................................................................... 17-5
17.5.5 User data....................................................................................................................... 17-5
17.6 RTFE-1 functional group ................................................................................................... 17-6
17.6.1 Application functions ..................................................................................................... 17-6
17.6.2 Alarm information .......................................................................................................... 17-6
17.6.3 Configuration ................................................................................................................. 17-7
17.6.4 Performance measuring points ..................................................................................... 17-7
17.6.5 User data....................................................................................................................... 17-7
17.7 RRTF-1 functional group ................................................................................................... 17-8
17.7.1 Application functions ..................................................................................................... 17-8
17.7.2 Alarm information .......................................................................................................... 17-8
17.7.3 Configuration ................................................................................................................. 17-9
17.7.4 Performance measuring points ..................................................................................... 17-9
17.7.5 User data....................................................................................................................... 17-9
17.8 RX functional group ......................................................................................................... 17-10
17.8.1 Application functions ................................................................................................... 17-10
17.8.2 Alarm information ........................................................................................................ 17-10
17.8.3 Configuration ............................................................................................................... 17-11
17.8.4 Measuring values ........................................................................................................ 17-11
17.9 RX functional group for hot standby configurations.................................................... 17-12
17.9.1 Application functions ................................................................................................... 17-12
17.9.2 Alarm information ........................................................................................................ 17-12
17.9.3 Configuration ............................................................................................................... 17-13
17.9.4 Measuring values ........................................................................................................ 17-13
17.10 TX functional group ......................................................................................................... 17-14
17.10.1
Application functions................................................................................................ 17-14
17.10.2
Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-14
17.10.3
Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-15
17.10.4
Measuring values .................................................................................................... 17-33
17.11 TX functional group for equipment protection (hot standby)...................................... 17-33
17.11.1
Application functions................................................................................................ 17-33
17.11.2
Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-33
17.11.3
Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-33
17.11.4
Measuring values .................................................................................................... 17-33
17.12 PSU functional group....................................................................................................... 17-33
17.12.1
Application functions................................................................................................ 17-33
17.12.2
Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-33
17.12.3
Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-33
17.12.4
Performance measuring points................................................................................ 17-33
17.13 SCU functional group ...................................................................................................... 17-33
17.13.1
Mapping service channels onto SCU instances and channels ............................... 17-33
17.13.2
Application functions................................................................................................ 17-33
17.13.3
Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-33
RF/160 OI

Contents

Operating Instructions

17.13.4

Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-33

17.14 ME functional group......................................................................................................... 17-33


17.14.1
Application functions................................................................................................ 17-33
17.14.2
General .................................................................................................................... 17-33

18 Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC..............................18-33


18.1

General .............................................................................................................................. 18-33

18.2

Functioning of a CCDP system....................................................................................... 18-33

18.3

Behaviour in case of radio hop failures......................................................................... 18-33

18.4 Behaviour in case of equipment failures ....................................................................... 18-33


18.4.1 Tx-side failure.............................................................................................................. 18-33
18.4.2 Rx-side failure ............................................................................................................. 18-33
18.4.3 Failure of the ATPC control channel ........................................................................... 18-33

VI

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Figures

Figures
Fig. 1-1:

DC port Sub-D , 3-pin, male ............................................................................................. 1-1

Fig. 1-2:

Rack installation ............................................................................................................... 1-2

Fig. 1-3:

Protective grounding point.............................................................................................. 1-2

Fig. 1-4:

Bracelet contacts.............................................................................................................. 1-3

Fig. 1-5:

Laser warning label .......................................................................................................... 1-4

Fig. 1-6:

Optical interface module SPI ........................................................................................... 1-5

Fig. 1-7:

RF interfaces ..................................................................................................................... 1-6

Fig. 2-1:

Card slots in the system rack.......................................................................................... 2-1

Fig. 2-2:

Channel positions for n+0................................................................................................ 2-6

Fig. 2-3:

Channel positions for n+0 with XPIC.............................................................................. 2-6

Fig. 2-4:

Channel positions for n+1................................................................................................ 2-7

Fig. 2-5:

Channel positions for n+1 with XPIC.............................................................................. 2-7

Fig. 2-6:

Channel positions - type A for n+2 with XPIC ............................................................... 2-8

Fig. 2-7:

Channel positions - type B for n+2 with XPIC ............................................................... 2-8

Fig. 2-8:

LON bus 6+2 XPIC .......................................................................................................... 2-11

Fig. 2-9:

LON bus 14+2 XPIC ........................................................................................................ 2-11

Fig. 2-10: CAN bus 6+2 XPIC .......................................................................................................... 2-12


Fig. 2-11: CAN bus 14+2 XPIC ........................................................................................................ 2-12
Fig. 2-12: SOH .................................................................................................................................. 2-13
Fig. 2-13: Utilization of media-specific SOH bytes....................................................................... 2-14
Fig. 4-1:

DPU/RPS STM-1 front panel .......................................................................................... 4-43

Fig. 4-2:

Locking of PR1................................................................................................................ 4-45

Fig. 4-3:

Switching from OP1 to PR2 ........................................................................................... 4-46

Fig. 4-4:

Switching Tx1 to the antenna ........................................................................................ 4-47

Fig. 4-5:

Switching Tx2 to the antenna ........................................................................................ 4-48

Fig. 4-6:

Service channels in the OHAU ...................................................................................... 4-51

Fig. 4-7:

RFCOH wayside interface 75 ..................................................................................... 4-63

Fig. 4-8:

RFCOH wayside interface 120 ................................................................................... 4-64

Fig. 4-9:

SOH Access Module Interface 75 ............................................................................ 4-106

Fig. 4-10: SOH Access Module Interface 120 .......................................................................... 4-107


Fig. 10-1: Transmitter (Tx) ............................................................................................................ 10-33
Fig. 10-2: Main and diversity receiver (Rx/RxD) ......................................................................... 10-33
Fig. 10-3: RPS-C............................................................................................................................. 10-33
Fig. 10-4: RPS-H............................................................................................................................. 10-33
Fig. 10-5: MU subrack.................................................................................................................... 10-33
Fig. 10-6: OHAU subrack (depicted with QD2 interface module) ............................................. 10-33
Fig. 10-7: OHAU subrack (depicted with ECC Gateway module) ............................................. 10-33
Fig. 11-1: ITU-R F.382 ..................................................................................................................... 11-33
Fig. 11-2: ITU-R F.382 China .......................................................................................................... 11-33
RF/160 OI

VII

Figures

Operating Instructions

Fig. 11-3: ITU-R F.382 (OIRT) ......................................................................................................... 11-33


Fig. 11-4: ITU-R F.497 sim. Russia ................................................................................................ 11-33
Fig. 11-5: ITU-R F.635 A1................................................................................................................ 11-33
Fig. 11-6: ITU-R F.635 A1 5a sim. .................................................................................................. 11-33
Fig. 11-7: ITU-R F.1099 A1.............................................................................................................. 11-33
Fig. 11-8: ITU-R F.1099 A1 3 sim. .................................................................................................. 11-33
Fig. 11-9: ITU-R F.497 Russia ........................................................................................................ 11-33
Fig. 11-10: ITU-R F.383 ................................................................................................................... 11-33
Fig. 11-11: ITU-R F.384 ................................................................................................................... 11-33
Fig. 11-12: ITU-R F. 385 A1 + alt. ................................................................................................... 11-33
Fig. 11-13: ITU-R F.385 A3.............................................................................................................. 11-33
Fig. 11-14: ITU-R F.385 A4.............................................................................................................. 11-33
Fig. 11-15: ITU-R F.386 A1.............................................................................................................. 11-33
Fig. 11-16: ITU-R F.386 A3 sim. ..................................................................................................... 11-33
Fig. 11-17: ITU-R F.386 A4.............................................................................................................. 11-33
Fig. 11-18: ITU-R F.497 ................................................................................................................... 11-33
Fig. 13-1: OHAU block diagram.................................................................................................... 13-33
Fig. 17-1: QD2 view of a microwave radio terminal (left) or regenerator station (right)......... 17-33
Fig. 17-2: MDRS 155 E-2+0(left) and 1+1conf. with occasional traffic (right) .......................... 17-33
Fig. 18-1: Block diagram of a CCDP system ............................................................................... 18-33
Fig. 18-2: Equipment failure on the transmit side (V) ................................................................ 18-33
Fig. 18-3: Equipment failure on the receive side (V) .................................................................. 18-33

VIII

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Key Words

Key words
Key word 2-1 : Setting Modem Unit addresses .............................................................................. 2-9
Key word 2-2: Setting RPSC addresses......................................................................................... 2-10
Key word 4-1: Activating the Tx XPIC .............................................................................................. 4-4
Key word 4-2: Adjusting the Tx power............................................................................................. 4-4
Key word 4-3: Activating the ATPC Tx............................................................................................ 4-4
Key word 4-4: Adjusting the Tx ATPC holding time........................................................................ 4-5
Key word 4-5: RF band position - Tx................................................................................................ 4-6
Key word 4-6: Requesting the Tx oscillator frequency .................................................................. 4-7
Key word 4-7: Activating the Rx XPIC.............................................................................................. 4-9
Key word 4-8: Activating the Rx ATPC ............................................................................................ 4-9
Key word 4-9:

Adjusting the Rx ATPC reference level ............................................................. 4-10

Key word 4-10 : Adjusting the Rx ATPC holding time ................................................................. 4-10
Key word 4-11: RF band position - Rx.......................................................................................... 4-11
Key word 4-12: Requesting the Rx oscillator frequency ............................................................ 4-12
Key word 4-13: Adjusting the RxD modulation ........................................................................... 4-14
Key word 4-14: Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations .......................... 4-16
Key word 4-15: Activating the MD XPIC ....................................................................................... 4-22
Key word 4-16: Unmodulated IF carrier........................................................................................ 4-22
Key word 4-17: Activating the DM XPIC ....................................................................................... 4-24
Key word 4-18: Adjusting the DM group delay equalizer ........................................................... 4-24
Key word 4-19: Defining the OP and PR channel no. ................................................................. 4-28
Key word 4-20: BB/IF Loopback.................................................................................................... 4-30
Key word 4-21: Switching thresholds........................................................................................... 4-32
Key word 4-22: Protection switching............................................................................................ 4-32
Key word 4-23: HSB equipment protection.................................................................................. 4-34
Key word 4-24: Radio hop identifier ............................................................................................. 4-37
Key word 4-25: SOH processing ................................................................................................... 4-38
Key word 4-26: Activating the service channel ........................................................................... 4-40
Key word 4-27: Manual protection switching .............................................................................. 4-43
Key word 4-28: Selecting RFCOH with 4x64 k............................................................................. 4-57
Key word 4-29: DSC1 assignment in the RFCOH: EOW, QTN or External ............................... 4-57
Key word 4-30: Defining the RFCOH 4x64 k protection switching option................................ 4-58
Key word 4-31: Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 4x64 k................................................. 4-58
Key word 4-32: Selecting RFCOH with 8x64 k............................................................................. 4-59
Key word 4-33: Defining protection switching options for RFCOH 8x64 k .............................. 4-59
Key word 4-34: Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 8x64 k................................................. 4-60
Key word 4-35: Activating the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH ......................................................... 4-61
Key word 4-36: Defining the 2048 k WSC protection switching option in the RFCOH............ 4-61
Key word 4-37: Selecting the alarm display of the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH........................ 4-62
RF/160 OI

IX

Key Words

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-38: Setting RFCOH wayside interface 75 ............................................................. 4-63


Key word 4-39: Setting RFCOH wayside interface 120 ........................................................... 4-64
Key word 4-40: Selecting 2/6-wire PSTN inteface of the EOW................................................... 4-65
Key word 4-41: Transmitting or blocking the EOW..................................................................... 4-66
Key word 4-42: Defining the clock source of the EOW............................................................... 4-66
Key word 4-43: Defining the level of the PSTN port.................................................................... 4-67
Key word 4-44: Selecting the clock source for EOW branching ............................................... 4-67
Key word 4-45: Configuring QD2/SISA-K ..................................................................................... 4-68
Key word 4-46: Selecting the 64-k transmission channel for the Q-signal .............................. 4-71
Key word 4-47: Configuring the ECC Gateway Module .............................................................. 4-72
Key word 4-48: Selecting the 2048 k WSC interface in the SOH ............................................... 4-89
Key word 4-49: DPU STM-1 address............................................................................................. 4-89
Key word 4-50: Selecting 4x64k service channels West in the SOH......................................... 4-90
Key word 4-51: Selecting RPS options for 4x64 k West in the SOH ......................................... 4-90
Key word 4-52: Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k West in the SOH ................................. 4-91
Key word 4-53: Selecting 4x64k service channels East in the SOH.......................................... 4-92
Key word 4-54: Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k East in the SOH .................................. 4-93
Key word 4-55: Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH ................................ 4-94
Key word 4-56: Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH ........................ 4-95
Key word 4-57: Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH ................................. 4-96
Key word 4-58: Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH ......................... 4-97
Key word 4-59: Occupying 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH ..................................... 4-98
Key word 4-60: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH............ 4-98
Key word 4-61: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH.... 4-99
Key word 4-62: Occupying 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH .................................... 4-100
Key word 4-63: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH........... 4-100
Key word 4-64: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH... 4-101
Key word 4-65: Occupying 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH................................... 4-102
Key word 4-66: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH.......... 4-102
Key word 4-67: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH.. 4-103
Key word 4-68: Occupying 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH..................................... 4-104
Key word 4-69: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH........... 4-104
Key word 4-70: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH... 4-105
Key word 4-71: Setting SOH wayside interface 75 ................................................................ 4-106
Key word 4-72: Setting SOH wayside interface 120 .............................................................. 4-107
Key word 4-73: Occupying 64-k service channel D1 West in the SOH ................................... 4-108
Key word 4-74: Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel West in the SOH .............. 4-109
Key word 4-75: Selecting the alarm display for DCC service channel West in the SOH ...... 4-109
Key word 4-76: Occupying the DCC service channel East in the SOH................................... 4-110
Key word 4-77: Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel East in the SOH ............... 4-111
Key word 4-78: Occupying 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH ................................... 4-112
X

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Key Words

Key word 4-79: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH.......... 4-112
Key word 4-80: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH.. 4-112
Key word 4-81: Occupying 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH .................................... 4-113
Key word 4-82: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH........... 4-113
Key word 4-83: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k serv. channel E2 West in the SOH...... 4-113
Key word 13-1: Rx/RxD recorder port......................................................................................... 13-33

Note:
Some of the systems depicted in this document include options which do not belong to the normal
delivery scope and have to be explicitly ordered.
Modifications of technical contents and characteristics reserved.

RF/160-B

XI

Key Words

Operating Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

XII

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Abbreviations

Abbreviations
A

B
C

F
H
I

ACDP
ADR
AIS
ATDE
ATN
ATPC
AU-AIS
BAT
BB
BER
CALL
CAN
CBN
CCDP
CL
CP
CR
CRC
DCC
DCCM
DCCR
DFM
DIPL
DIV
DK
DM
DPU
DRS
DSC
DTMF
DTN
EA PS
EA RU
EA Rx
EA Tx
ECC
EMC
EMI
EOW
ESD
EXATN
EXT SET
FD
FEC
FP
HF
HSB
IF
IM
INT-A
INT-B
LA Rx
LA Tx
LA/EA Rx
LA-Tx-BIT
LMT

RF/160 OI

Adjacent-Channel-Dual-Polarized
Address
Alarm Indication Signal
Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer
Analog Terminal Network
Automatic Transmit Power Control
Administrative Unit AIS
Battery Input (DC)
Baseband
Bit Error Ratio
Call
Controller Area Network
Channel Branching Network
Co-Channel Dual-Polarized
Clock
Connection Panel
Clock Reference
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Data Communication Channel
DCC of the MSOH
DCC of the RSOH
Dispersive Fading Margin
Diplexer
Diversity
Service Channel
Demodulator
Data Processing Unit
Digital Microwave Radio System
Digital Service Channel
Dual Tone Multiple Frequency
Digital Terminal Network
Equipment Alarm PS
Equipment Alarm RU
Equipment Alarm Rx
Equipment Alarm Tx
Embedded Control Channels
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Electromagnetic Interference
Engineer Orderwire
Electrostatic Discharge
Extension Analog Termination Network
Extended Handset
Frequency Diversity
Forward Error Correction
Fuse Panel
High Frequency
Hot Standby
Intermediate Frequency
Interface Module
Internal Trouble of the module - Major alarm
Internal Trouble of the module - Minor alarm
Line Alarm Rx
Line Alarm Tx
Line and Equipment Alarm Rx
Line Alarm - Tx Bit
Local Maintenance Terminal
XIII

Abbreviations

Q
R

XIV

LOF
LON
LOP
LOS
LSS
MAINS
MAP
MD
MLQAM
MS-AIS
MSOH
MSP
MST
MU
NC
NE
NFD
NO
O&M
OH
OHA
OOF
OP
OSC
OT
PCB
PDH
PI
POWER
PR
PS
PSTN
PSU
QAM
QMP
RBER
RC
RDI
REI
RF
RFCOH
ROW
RPS
RPSC
RPSI
RRR
RRTF
RRTR
RSL
RSOH
RST
RTF
RTFE
RTTF
RU
Rx
RxD
SAW
SCU

Operating Instructions

Loss Of Frame
Local Operator Network
Loss Of Pointer
Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Sequence Synchronization
Mains Power
Mapping Function
Modulator
Multilevel Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Multiplex Section AIS
Multiplex Section Overhead
Multiplex Section Protection
Multiplex Section Termination
Modem Unit
Normally Closed
Network Element
Net Filter Discrimination
Normally Open
Operation and Maintenance
Overhead
Overhead Access
Out Of Frame
Operating Channel
Oscillator
Occasional Traffic
Printed Circuit Board
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
Physical Interface
Power
Protection Channel
Power Supply
Public Subscriber Terminal Network
Protection Switching Unit
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Performance Measuring Point
Residual Bit Error Ratio
Remote Control
Remote Defect Indication
Remote Error Indication
Radio Frequency
Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
Regenerator Order Wire
Radio Protection Switching
Radio Protection Switching Central Unit
Radio Protection Switching Interface
Radio Relay Regenerator
Radio Regenerator Transport Function
Radio Relay Terminal
Receiver Signal Level
Regenerator Section Overhead
Regenerator Section Termination
Regenerator Transport Function
Regenerator Transport Function Electrical
Radio Terminal Transport Function
Radio Unit
Receiver
Diversity Receiver
Surface Acoustic Wave
Service Channel Unit
RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

U
W
X

SD
SDH
SNCP
SNMP
SOA
SOH
SOHA
SOL
SPB
SPI
SPI EL
SPI OPT
STM
T3
TIM
TMN
TSE
TTF
Tx
USER
WAY
XIF
XPD
XPE
XPI
XPIC

RF/160 OI

Abbreviations

Space Diversity
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Sub-Network Connection Protection
Simple Network Management Protocol
ServiceOn Access
Section Overhead
Section Overhead Access
Start Of Life value
Synchronous Port Block
Synchronous Port Interface
Synchronous Port Interface - Electrical
Synchronous Port Interface - Optical
Synchronous Transport Module
Clock Input 2048 k
Trace Identifier Mismatch
Telecommunication Management Network
Test Sequence Error
Terminal Transport Function
Transmitter
User Port
Wayside Traffic
Cross-Polarization Improvement Factor
Cross-Polarization Decoupling
Cross-Polarization Equalizer
Cross-Polarization Interference
Cross-Polarization Interference Canceller

XV

Abbreviations

Operating Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

XVI

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Safety Instructions

1 Safety Instructions
1.1

Application

These microwave radio systems are designed to meet environment class 3.2 as defined in ETS 300 019.
This class specifies system applications in partly temperature-controlled rooms (-5 C to +45 C, max.
95% relative humidity). The systems may be used only under the conditions and for the purpose for which
they have been developed. For more detailed information, please refer to the Technical characteristics
indicated in the Operator Manual.
Installation and Service works may be executed only by technically trained and experienced staff knowing
the hazards that can occur and the measures to be taken for minimizing any danger for themselves and
third parties.
Please note all warnings and instructions contained in this Manual.
Only service staff should be granted access to the active system.
Do not use any installation materials (screws, nuts etc.) different from those supplied with the
equipment or recommended by the manufacturer.
Use appropriate safety devices while you are working on top of or near the mast.
The system may be installed and operated only in locations with restricted access.

1.2

Protection class

The DRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E system meets protection class IEC IP 20.

1.3

Operating voltage

The Tx, Rx, MU PS and OHAU PS modules of the microwave radio system can be operated in the
voltage range from 19 V to 75 V DC. The voltage input is floating, i.e. either the positive pole (standard)
or the negative pole can be grounded. The standard cables used for setting up the connection to the
power box (distributor) are dimensioned for the voltage ranges of 48 V and 60 V.
Thicker cable cross-sections are required for 24 V.
Before switching on the power supply, please check that the operating voltage and supply voltage
are identical and that the polarity is correct (Fig. 1-1).

BAT 19...75V DC

Fig. 1-1:

DC port Sub-D , 3-pin, male

Ensure that the power supply has been switched off before you plug in or pull out any module
connecting cables. This applies to both control and operating voltage cables of the Modem Unit,
OHAU as well as Tx and Rx modules. The following modules may be inserted in or extracted from the
subrack only with the power supply switched off:
Modulator
=
Mod/MD
(in Modem Unit)
Demodulator
=
Demod/DM (in Modem Unit)
SOH Access
(in OHAU)
Power Supply
=
PS
(in OHAU & Modem Unit)
For safety reasons, we always recommend to switch off the corresponding power supply unit at the
fuse panel before you extract or insert a module !!
The automatic circuit breakers must be located in the feeder line of the ungrounded pole.
With the standard fuse sockets of Power Box II, the system may be operated only using
batteries with the positive pole grounded.

RF/160 OI

1-1

Safety Instructions

1.4

Operating Instructions

Rack installation

The system racks (ETSI or 19) must be protected from tipping over by screwing the clips (Fig. 1-2) to the
wall or ceiling using appropriate securing material. For more detailed information, please refer to the
Installation Manual.

Fig. 1-2: Rack installation

1.5

Rack grounding

The racks must be grounded at the protective grounding point located in the top section of the rear rack
upright (Fig. 1-3) using a protective conductor (16 mm). The individual modules are grounded via the
metal rails of the subracks and rack. For further instructions, please refer to the Installation Manual.

M8

Fig. 1-3: Protective grounding point

1-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

1.6

Safety Instructions

ESD protection

The system rack is equipped with two grounding points (Fig. 1-4) with a 10 mm snap fastener for
connecting a grounding bracelet. By grounding the wrist, it is possible to avoid electrostatic discharges
that could destroy sensitive electronic components when touching the modules.

E arth
B on di ng
P oi nt

E arth
B on di ng
P oi nt

10 mm

E arth
B onding
P oint

Fig. 1-4: Bracelet contacts

RF/160 OI

1-3

Safety Instructions

1.7

Operating Instructions

Laser safety

The Modem Unit can be optionally equipped with two optical modules (SPI) (Fig. 1-6).
The laser used meets LASER CLASS 1 (Fig. 1-5) as defined by EN 60825-1.

Fig. 1-5: Laser warning label


The laser complies with ITU-T G.957 and features the following characteristics:

Wavelength
Output power
Pulse duration
Beam divergence

S-1.1
1310 nm
-8...-15 dBm
6.43 ns
approx. 23

L-1.1
1310 nm
0...-5 dBm
6.43 ns
approx. 23

The module is automatically deactivated by an ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) circuit as soon as the
optical input signal fails (e.g. in case of a cable break). In case of a loss of signal of the SPI, the laser is
alternately activated for 2 seconds and deactivated for 70 seconds. Besides this automatic testing routine,
it is also possible to switch on the laser manually for 2 seconds or 90 seconds. After expiry of the
corresponding period, the system returns to the previous testing cycle.

Maintenance and repair works must be executed by qualified service personnel.

The laser source emits invisible laser radiation. Laser beams may lead to irreparable eye injuries.
Never look into the laser source or onto the connector surface of FO cables connected, not even with
optical instruments.

CAUTION!

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.

1-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Safety Instructions

Earth
Bon di ng
Poi nt

E arth
B on di ng
P oi nt

BOSCH

RPSC

SPI

STM-1

Fig. 1-6: Optical interface module SPI

RF/160 OI

1-5

Safety Instructions

1.8

Operating Instructions

RF interfaces

When opening the RF interfaces (waveguides or semi-rigid cables) while the transmitters are active,
microwave radiation is emitted which may lead to health hazards.
In addition, this can lead to RF interferences in neighbouring units.
Do not look into open waveguide connections and do not stand in front of transmit antennas.

Warnung :

Nicht die Hohlleiterverbindungen ffnen bevor die Sender


ausgeschaltet sind. Mikrowellenstrahlung kann
gesundheitsschdlich sein, besonders fr die Augen.
Ebenso knnen Gertestrungen verursacht werden.

Warning :

Do not open waveguide joints without


switching off the transmitter. Stray RF power
is harmful to the body (particulary to the eyes)
and can also cause RF interference.

Fig. 1-7: RF interfaces

The SMA connectors of the coaxial cables between the Tx modules, Rx modules and channel
branching networks may only be tightened with a torque of approx. 60 Ncm. A higher torque would
slacken the SMA connectors at the RF filters when opening the joint. This would lead to a change of
the filter characteristic.

1-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Rack Configuration

2 Rack Configuration
The card slots for the individual modules are numbered in the system racks 0, 1...4.
The modules to be mounted in these card slots are preconfigured in the factory to the customer-specific
requirements.
On site, the modules must be installed in the corresponding card slots in accordance with the
configuration lists included in the delivery scope to ensure that all functions adjusted are correctly fulfilled.

000

001 - 004
005 - 008
100
101
111

102
112

103
113

104
114

200
220 222 212 213 214 215
2 2 207 208 209 210
2 0
1 1 202 203 204 205

216
211
206

300
301
311

302
312

303
313

304
314

305
010

400
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1
2
0

414
4
0
1
4
0
2

500

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

4
1
2
4
1
3

514
5
0
1
5
0
2

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

5
1
2
5
1
3

Fig. 2-1: Card slots in the system rack

RF/160 OI

2-1

Rack Configuration

Rack 1...4
Card slot
001...004
005...008
100
101...104
111...114
200
220
221
222
201
202
203
204

205

206
207
208
209

210

211
212
213
214

215

216

2-2

Operating Instructions

Ident no.

Designation

Filter type

Manufact. no.

ETSI rack
ETSI adaption set
Rx cabinet
Rx / RxD
Oscillator
Branching cabinet
Cover branching
Flexible coaxial cable
Flexible coaxial cable, div.
RF connecting unit
RF filter Tx
RF filter Tx
Termination
RF filter Tx
Termination
Waveguide
RF filter Tx
Termination
Waveguide
Termination
Waveguide
RF filter Rx
RF filter Rx
Termination
RF filter Rx
Termination
Waveguide
RF filter Rx
Termination
Waveguide
Termination
Waveguide
RF filter RxD
RF filter RxD
Termination
RF filter RxD
Termination
Waveguide
RF filter RxD
Termination
Waveguide
Termination
Waveguide

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Rack 1...4
Card slot
300
301...302
311...314
305
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414

500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511

RF/160 OI

Rack Configuration

Ident no.

Designation

Filter type

Manufact. no.

Tx cabinet
Tx
Oscillator
Rack fan
Subrack modem unit
Cover RPSI
RPSI
SPI electrical interface
SPI optical interface
Modem unit power supply
Modulator
DPU/RPS STM-1
Controller module
Demodulator
Demodulator
DPU/RPS STM-1
Modulator
Modem unit power supply
Cover RPSI
RPSI
SPI electrical interface
SPI optical interface
Cover RPSC
RPSC
RPSH
Subrack modem unit
Cover RPSI
RPSI
SPI electrical interface
SPI optical interface
Modem unit power supply
Modulator
DPU/RPS STM-1
Controller module
Demodulator
Demodulator
DPU/RPS STM-1
Modulator
Modem unit power supply

2-3

Rack Configuration

Rack 0
Card slot
512

Operating Instructions

Ident no.

514

012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021

2-4

Filter
type

Manufact. no.

Filter
type

Manufact. no.

Cover RPSI
RPSI
SPI electrical interface
SPI optical interface
Cover RPSC
RPSC
RPSH

513

Rack 0
Card slot
000
010
011

Designation

Ident no.

Designation
ETSI rack infrastucture
Subrack OHA unit
Cover CP OHAU
Handset OHAU
OHAU power supply
Cover RFCOH access mod.
RFCOH Access Module
Cover RFCOH access mod.
RFCOH Access Module
Cover Q-interface module
QD2 interface module
Cover EOW module
EOW module
Cover EOW module
EOW module
SOH Access Module
Cover SOH ext. module
SOH extension module
Cover SISA
SISA-0/N
Cover CP OHAU
Handset OHAU

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Rack Configuration

Rack 1...4

Filter frequencies
Example:
MHz

MHz

MHz

MHz RxD

207 f1

7498 MHz 207 f2

7554 MHz

MHz

MHz Rx

202 f1

7652 MHz 202 f2

7708 MHz

MHz

MHz Tx

Altitude:.....

[m] above sea level

f1

f1

f2

Type A

f1

f1

f2

Type B

With 64 MLQAM, two adjacent RF channels (e.g. ch. 1 and ch. 2) can be tuned in an RF diplexer.
With 128 MLQAM, two RF channels separated by another channel (e.g. ch. 1 and ch. 3) can be tuned in
an RF diplexer.
If - with 128 MLQAM - two adjacent channels (e.g. 1 and 2) are used, two separate RF filters must be
provided.
With 64 MLQAM, the position of each Tx filter and its far-end Rx filter in the channel branching network is
freely selectable.
With 128 MLQAM, the position of each Tx filter and its far-end Rx filter in the channel branching network
is not freely selectable. The arrangement of Rx filters in the Rx section must be reversed compared to the
arrangement of Tx filters in the Tx section.

RF/160 OI

2-5

Rack Configuration

2.1

Operating Instructions

Channel positions

OP1

OP2

OP3

OP4

OP5

OP6

OP7

OP8

OP1

OP2

OP5

OP6

OP3

OP4

OP7

OP8

Fig. 2-2: Channel positions for n+0

OP1

OP3

OP5

OP7

OP9 OP11 OP13 OP15

OP2

OP4

OP6

OP8

OP10 OP12 OP14 OP16

OP1

OP2

OP9

OP10

OP3

OP4

OP11

OP12

OP5

OP6

OP13

OP14

OP7

OP8

OP15

OP16

Fig. 2-3: Channel positions for n+0 with XPIC

2-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Rack Configuration

OP1

PR1

OP2

OP3

OP4

OP5

OP6

OP7

RPSC

OP1

PR1

OP4

OP5

OP2

OP3

OP6

OP7

Fig. 2-4: Channel positions for n+1

OP1

OP2

OP4

OP6

OP8 OP10 OP12 OP14

PR1

OP3

OP5

OP7

OP9

OP11 OP13

RPSC #1

OP1

PR1

OP8

OP9

OP2

OP3

OP10

OP12

OP13

OP6

OP7

OP14

OP11

RPSC #2

OP4

OP5

Fig. 2-5: Channel positions for n+1 with XPIC

RF/160 OI

2-7

Rack Configuration

OP1

OP2

OP3

Operating Instructions

OP5

OP7

OP9 OP11 OP13

PR1

PR2

OP7

PR1

OP8

OP2

RPSC #2

OP3

OP6

OP8

OP10 OP12 OP14

RPSC #3

RPSC #1

OP1

OP4

PR2

OP9

OP10

OP13

OP14

RPSC #4

OP11

OP4

OP12

OP5

OP6

Fig. 2-6: Channel positions - type A for n+2 with XPIC

PR1

OP1

OP3

OP5

OP7

OP9 OP11 OP13

PR2

OP2

RPSC #1

PR1

PR2

OP2

OP6

OP8

OP10 OP12 OP14

RPSC #3

OP7

OP8

OP3

RPSC #2

OP1

OP4

OP4

OP9

OP10

OP13

OP14

RPSC #4

OP11

OP12

OP5

OP6

Fig. 2-7: Channel positions - type B for n+2 with XPIC

2-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

2.2

Rack Configuration

Modem Unit addresses


Key word 2-1 : Setting Modem Unit addresses

Each modem unit (MU) in a n+m configuration must have its own address. The definition of OP1...16 or
PR1/2 will be determined by these addresses which are adjustable at Sub-D address connector X77 in
each MU. Bits A0...A5 define the address of the left part of the MU, while bits B0...B5 define the address
of the right part of the MU. Bits A5/B5 define the direction.

A5/B5

0
1

A4/B4

A3/B3

A2/B2

A1/B1

A0/B0

HEX

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
12
12

Channel
OP1
OP2
OP3
OP4
OP5
OP6
OP7
OP8
OP9
OP10
OP11
OP12
OP13
OP14
OP15
OP16
PR1
PR2
West
East

After making new settings or modifying addresses at the address connector, all modules
connected must be reset to ensure a secure adoption of the new addresses.

RF/160 OI

2-9

Rack Configuration

2.3

Operating Instructions

RPSC addresses
Key word 2-2:

Setting RPSC addresses

In n+1and n+2 system configurations, each RPSC must have a separate address, which can be selected
by means of switch S1 on the rear side of the RPSC. In configurations with more than 7+1 channels, two
to four RPSCs are arranged in a cascade.

ADR
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

2-10

PR1
PR2
PR1
PR2
PR1
PR2
PR1
PR2

West
West
West
West
East
East
East
East

Cascade
Cascade

Cascade
Cascade

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

2.4

Rack Configuration

LON and CAN system bus

RPSC

OHAU

MU

MU

RPSC

MU

MU

Fig. 2-8:

LON bus 6+2 XPIC

RPSC

OHAU

MU

RPSC

MU

RPSC

MU

RPSC

MU

MU

Fig. 2-9:

RF/160 OI

MU

MU

MU

LON bus 14+2 XPIC

2-11

Rack Configuration

Operating Instructions

RPSC

MU

MU

RPSC

MU

MU

Fig. 2-10:

CAN bus 6+2 XPIC

RPSC

MU

RPSC

MU

RPSC

Fig. 2-11:

2-12

MU

RPSC

MU

MU

MU

MU

MU

CAN bus 14+2 XPIC

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

2.5

Rack Configuration

STM-1 Section Overhead (SOH)

RSOH

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

J0

B1

RF1

RF2

E1

F1

D1

RF3

RF4

D2

D3

Pointer

B2

MSOH

B2

B2

K1

K2

D4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

S1

M1

E2

Standardized bytes
A1, A2
B1, B2
J0
D1 - D3
D4 - D12
E1
E2
F1
K1, K2
S1
M1

Synchronization (A1: 11110110; A2: 00101000)


Performance
Regenerator Section Trace (Path ID)
Data Communication Channel (DCCR)
Data Communication Channel (DCCM)
Regenerator EOW (64 kbit/s)
Multiplex EOW (64 kbit/s or V.11)
Data Channel (64 kbit/s)
Bytes for Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)
Timing Marker
Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MS-REI)

Media-specific bytes
RF1
RF2
RF3
RF4

4-bit line ID, LA Tx bit, ATPC bit,


1-bit HSB control or Tx level,
1-bit polarization ID
1 parity bit, 7-bit line error pulses
8-bit protection control RPS
8-bit B2 value transmission

Optional service channels


(freely configurable bytes with B2 correction in the MSOH)
2112 kbit/s wayside channel
(2048 kbit/s to ITU-T G.703)
288 kbit/s service channel
(4x64 kbit/s, codirectional, to ITU-T G.703)

Fig. 2-12:

RF/160 OI

SOH

2-13

Rack Configuration

Operating Instructions

Media-specific byte RF1


1

Line ID

Line ID

Line ID

Line ID

LA TX bit

ATPC

HSB control
or TX level

Polarization ID

Media-specific byte RF2


1

Line error
pulse

Line error
pulse

Line error
pulse

Line error
pulse

Line error
pulse

Line error
pulse

Line error
pulse

Parity bit

Media-specific byte RF3


1

Protection
control RPS

Protection
control RPS

Protection
control RPS

Protection
control RPS

Protection
control RPS

Protection
control RPS

Protection
control RPS

Protection
control RPS

Media-specific byte RF4


1

B2 value
transmission

B2 value
transmission

B2 value
transmission

B2 value
transmission

B2 value
transmission

B2 value
transmission

B2 value
transmission

B2 value
transmission

Fig. 2-13:

2-14

Utilization of media-specific SOH bytes

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Starting the Service PC

3 Starting the Service PC


The present manual describes the system configurations based on the application software for the
Service PC:
DRS 155 E

Version : 1.21

Application Software (MSP)


Id. no.: AN00235704
Drawing no.: 65.7206.400.00-002
(contains Application Software (MSP) German and English Version).
Service PC (LMT/MSP)
The PC should meet the following minimum requirements:
Pentium
RAM
Windows

133 MHz
>16 MB
95/98

For system configuration, a laptop loaded with the SISA basic software (version 2.16) and application
software DRS 155 E for SDH microwave radio systems is required.
The PC is connected via a cable (Sub-D 9-pin, female, UNC --- Sub-D 9-pin, male, M3, 1:1) to the
F-interface (RS 232) of the SISA module mounted in the OHAU subrack.
This interface is adjusted to 9600 Baud/s, 8 data bits and even parity.
For more detailed information on the SISA structure, please refer to the User Manual for the
Modular Service PC.
The SISA network driver and SISA network manager are now activated.
Access to the User application is possible via the DRS 155 E button.

RF/160 OI

3-1

Starting the Service PC

3-2

Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4 Configuration
By selecting
HW view
Modules
the 'Rack configuration' view is activated and can be used to access the individual modules.
For identifying the modules, it is possible to activate the ID or Wink function via the following menu
options:
Mode
Wink
The LEDs on modules or module groups selected start to blink.

Any modification of the following system configurations are only activated after a system or
module reset.

SISA0N:
DPU General:
DPU General:

RF/160 OI

Redundancy
XPIC
Redundancy

4-1

Configuration

4.1

Operating Instructions

General settings

4.1.1 Protection switching mode / Redundancy


The operating mode used must be identical in all DPUs of a microwave radio terminal (see section
Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden.).
For mapping the system into the QD2 information model, the SISA-0/N module must be appropriately
configured for each terminal (see section Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden.).

4.1.2 XPIC
For XPIC operation, the following configuration settings must be made on all modules involved
(Master: left MU half; Slave: right MU half):
Module
DPU

Option
Master/Slave

XPIC

Modulator
Demodulator
Main Receiver

Master/Slave
Master/Slave
Master/Slave
Master
Slave
Master/Slave
Master
Slave

XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
RX oscillator
RX oscillator
XPIC
TX oscillator
TX oscillator

Transmitter

Remarks
active After each modification, the DPU must
be reset.
active
active
active Only for alarm signalling
Master Only for alarm signalling
Slave
active Only for alarm signalling
Master Only for alarm signalling
Slave

XPIC operation is not possible in the 1+1 hot standby and 1+1 line protection mode with only one
DPU/RPS STM-1.
For more details on co-channel operation with XPIC, see chapter 18.

4.1.3 ATPC
All setting options for ATPC are located on the Transmitter and Main Receiver modules.

4.1.4 STM-1 processing


The complete STM-1 processing can be configured in the DPU module.

4.1.5 Protection switching


All protection switching settings and monitoring functions are implemented in the DPU module.

4.1.6 Auxiliary channels


For using auxiliary channels transmitted in the SOH, the following settings must be made:
1. In the DPU, to which the corresponding OHAU is connected, access to the desired auxiliary channel
must be activated (see section 4.7.8)
2. In the SOH or SOH Extension module, the corresponding auxiliary channel must be activated and its
interface and protection switching options must be configured.
Auxiliary channels in the RFCOH have to be configured only in the RFCOH Access Module.
Section 4.9.1 gives a detailed overview of service channel options available.

4-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

4.2

Configuration

Transmitter (Tx)

By selecting the module in the HW view

RF unit
Transmitter
Management
Configuration
the following Tx configuration window appears:

The parameters can then be modified by means of the following steps:


Process
Modify

RF/160 OI

4-3

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-1:

Activating the Tx XPIC

General
XPIC
This option is activated in XPIC operation. In the Slave mode, the synchronization
input of the oscillator is monitored by the Tx Slave.
Tx oscillator
Master
In XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the transmitter operates as clock source (Master) for
synchronizing the cross-polarly connected transmitter.
In normal operation (without XPIC), the transmitters always operate as Master.
Slave
In XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the transmitter is synchronized by the cross-polarly
connected transmitter (Master).
This setting is only used to enable or disable the XPIC sychronization alarm
of the oscillator module.
Key word 4-2:

Adjusting the Tx power

Tx RF output
Power on
The Tx output power can be switched on or off.
Maximum level
The following Tx power values can be adjusted:
Nominal value
Nominal value - 3 dB
Nominal value - 6 dB
Nominal value - 9 dB
Nominal value +1.5 dB (ATPC enabled)

The overdrive mode is only active with the ATPC


function enabled.

Setting in normal operation: Nominal value.


Key word 4-3:

4-4

Activating the ATPC Tx

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

ATPC
Enable
The transmit power is controlled by the ATPC circuit of the far-end receiver.
In order to avoid interferences in densely meshed networks or on links with difficult propagation
conditions, the ATPC function must be active. More detailed data are obtained in the scope of radio hop
planning.
The maximum ATPC range is 20 dB / 19.5 dB / 16 dB. The minimum Tx power of +10.5 dBm (3 to 8 GHz)
/ +12 dBm (13 GHz) is not undershot.
Setting in normal operation: Active
Actual state
This option displays the status of ATPC control and of the control channel in the return direction.
ATPC deactivated via configuration
The ATPC is deactivated for operation with constant Tx power.
Control loop switched off, error timer running
The transmission channel for ATPC control information (Rx Tx) is interrupted and the error
timer is running. The Tx output power is set to the maximum value until the service channel has
been re-established or the timer has expired.
Control loop switched off, error timer expired
The transmission channel for ATPC control information (Rx Tx) is interrupted and the error
timer has expired. The Tx output power is set to a user-defined value until the service channel
has been re-established.
Control active
The Tx power is controlled by the far-end receiver (Rx).
Key word 4-4: Adjusting the Tx ATPC holding time

Error processing
XPIC dependence
When this option is active, XPIC operation is taken into account in case of ATPC errors. The
output power of the cross-polar transmitter is controlled synchronously up to the expiry of the
error timer.
Error timer
In case of interruptions of ATPC control information transmission, an error timer is started. The Tx output
power is set to its maximum value until transmission has been re-established or the timer has expired.
The timer can be set to the following values:
8 s ...68 min
Recommended setting : 4 min. (default value)

RF/160 OI

4-5

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Tx level after error timer has expired


The following values can be adjusted:
Minimum value
Nominal value - 14.5 dB
Nominal value - 9.5 dB
Nominal value - 4.5 dB
Nominal value

Recommended setting:

Minimum value

Key word 4-5:

RF band position - Tx

Band selection
Band position
The RF modules can be used for LB and UB operation.
Lower sideband
The RF channel frequency lies below the oscillator frequency (-140 MHz).
Upper sideband
The RF channel frequency lies above the oscillator frequency (+140 MHz).
Subband
The selected RF bands are divided up into four subbands each. The channel frequency depends on
the selected subband and the band position in the RF mixer.
Also see chapter 12 Frequency Setting .
Lower subband 1
Lower subband 2
Lower subband 3
Lower subband 4
Upper subband 1
Upper subband 2
Upper subband 3
Upper subband 4

4-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

4.3

Configuration

Tx oscillator
Key word 4-6:

Requesting the Tx oscillator frequency

By selecting the module in the HW view,


RF unit
Tx oscillator
Management
Configuration
the following Tx oscillator configuration window appears:

This mask displays the nominal oscillator frequency.

RF/160 OI

4-7

Configuration

4.4

Operating Instructions

Main receiver (Rx)

By selecting the module in the HW view,


RF unit
Main receiver
Management
Configuration
the following Rx configuration window appears:

The parameters can then be modified by means of the following steps:


Process
Modify

4-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-7:

Activating the Rx XPIC

General
XPIC active
This option is activated in XPIC operation. In the Slave mode, the synchronization input of the
oscillator is monitored by the Rx Slave.
Rx oscillator
Master
In XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the receiver operates as clock source (Master) for
synchronizing the cross-polarly connected receiver.
In normal operation (without XPIC), the receiver operates as Master.
Slave
In XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the receiver is synchronized by the cross-polarly
connected receiver (Master).
This setting is used only to enable or disable the XPIC synchronization alarm of the oscillator
module.
IF amplifier
Operating mode
Normal
Due to the low control time constant, the amplifier can react to rapid level fluctuations.
Setting in normal operation: Normal
Sweep
The control time constant of the IF amplifier is increased. Thus, rapid level fluctuations are not
compensated during a sweep measurement in order not to falsify the test result.
Key word 4-8:

Activating the Rx ATPC

ATPC
Manual TX power control (MTPC)
The ATPC is deactivated. The power of the far-end transmitter can be adjusted manually in the
"Manual Tx level" box.
Setting in normal operation: inactive
Overdrive mode permitted
Tx power control depends on the BER of the receive signal. At a BER of approx. 1E-6, the
reachable maximum Tx power is increased by 1.5 dB in the overdrive mode (this must
also be enabled in the far-end transmitter).
In this mode, the backoff factor required to achieve the specified residual bit error ratio
(RBER) is reduced. The resulting degradation, however, is neglible compared with the BER of
1E-6 occurring on the radio hop. This permits the radio hop link to be maintained even in case
of deep fading events.
Activation starts at PRx < -68 dBm for 64 MLQAM and at PRx < -66 dBm for 128 MLQAM.
The overdrive mode is only active, if the ATPC function has been enabled.

RF/160 OI

4-9

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-9:

Adjusting the Rx ATPC reference level

Control level
The nominal receive level can be adjusted to the following values:
-30 dBm
-40 dBm
-45 dBm
-50 dBm
Actual state
This option displays the status of ATPC control and that of the control channel in the return direction.
ATPC deactivated via configuration
The ATPC is deactivated for operation with constant Tx power.
Control loop switched off, error timer expired
The ATPC controlled transmission channel is interrupted and the error timer has expired.
The far-end Tx output power is set to a user defined value until the transmission channel has
been re-established.
Control loop active, Rx level control
The far-end Tx power is controlled by the receive level.
Control loop active, BER control
The far-end Tx power is controlled by the receive level and BER.
Control loop active, error timer running
The ATPC-controlled transmission channel is interrupted and the error timer is running.
The far-end Tx power is still controlled by the receive level.
Error handling
Key word 4-10 :

Adjusting the Rx ATPC holding time

Error timer
The following values can be adjusted as holding time for Tx power control in case of
interruptions of the radio hop.
8 s ...68 min
Recommended setting: 4 min. (default setting)
The holding time adjusted should not be too short, in order to avoid that the system becomes
unstable in case of difficult propagation conditions.
Tx level after error timer has expired / Manual Tx level
- The following values can be adjusted:
Minimum value
Nominal value - 14.5 dB
Nominal value - 9.5 dB
Nominal value - 4.5 dB
Nominal value

Setting in normal operation: Nominal value


The maximum ATPC range is 20 dB (3 to 8 GHz, 64MLQAM) / 19.5 dB (3 to 8 GHz, 128MLQAM) / 16 dB
(13 GHz). The minimum Tx power of +10.5 dBm (3-8 GHz) / +12 dBm (13 GHz) cannot be undershot.

4-10

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration
Key word 4-11:

RF band position - Rx

Frequency band selection


Band position
The RF modules can be used for LB and UB operation.
Lower sideband
The channel frequencies lie below the oscillator frequency (-140 MHz).
Upper sideband
The channel frequencies lie above the oscillator frequency (+140 MHz).
Subband
The selected RF bands are divided up into four subbands each. The channel frequency depends on
the selected subband and the band position in the RF mixer.
Also see chapter 12 Frequency Setting .
Lower subband 1
Lower subband 2
Lower subband 3
Lower subband 4
Upper subband 1
Upper subband 2
Upper subband 3
Upper subband 4

RF/160 OI

4-11

Configuration

4.5

Operating Instructions

Rx oscillator
Key word 4-12:

Requesting the Rx oscillator frequency

By selecting the module in the HW view,


RF unit
Rx oscillator
Management
Configuration
the following Rx oscillator configuration window appears:

This mask shows the nominal oscillator frequency.

4-12

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

4.6

Configuration

Diversity receiver (RxD)

RF unit
Div. receiver
Management
Configuration

The parameters can then be modified by means of the following steps:


Process
Modify

RF/160 OI

4-13

Configuration

Operating Instructions

IF amplifier
Operating mode
Normal
Due to the small control time constant, the amplifier can react to rapid level fluctuations.
Setting in normal operation: Normal
Sweep
The control time constant of the IF amplifier is high. Thus, rapid level fluctuations during sweep
measurements are not compensated in order not to falsify the test results.

Key word 4-13:

Adjusting the RxD modulation

Combiner
Modulation scheme (read-only access)
The distortion-controlled IF combiner evaluates the distortions occurring in the IF spectrum.
The following modulation modes can be adjusted:
64 QAM
128 QAM
IF output level (read-only access)
Two modes are possible:
controlled
uncontrolled

Normal operation
Only for length compensation

Length compensation
Path
Main
The waveguide of the main path (main antenna) is shorter than the one of the diversity path.
The length compensation cable is inserted in signal path X2 X23.
Diversity
The waveguide of the diversity path (diversity antenna) is shorter than the one of the main
path.
The length compensation cable is inserted in signal path X22 X23.
Delay compensation
This setting permits electronic fine tuning within a range of approx. 2.5 ns.
0...255
Corresponds to an approximate delay change of 2.5 ... 0 ns referred to the combiner input X23.

4-14

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Operating mode
Power and distortion control (normal)
The combiner evaluates the spectrum and adds up the two receive signals.
Before being added, the lower signal is suppressed by 2 dB per 1 dB difference.
Max. ratio
The combiner adds up the two signals, the stronger signal (max. C/N) being preferred.
Signal distortions caused by selective fading are not taken into account.
Before being added, the lower signal is suppressed by 2 dB per 1 dB difference.
Normal operation: Power and distortion control (normal)
Test mode
Normal operation
Both IF input signals are added up.
Input X24 permanently through-connected
Only the signal available at input X24 is passed through to the output.
Input X23 permanently through-connected
Only the signal available at input X23 is passed through to the output.
Setting in normal operation: Normal

Length compensation
Compensation ON
The mode required for executing and testing the length compensation function is activated.
The signals available at the combiner inputs are shifted with respect to each other using a
programmable phase shifter. Delay time differences between the main and diversity signal
paths caused by different waveguide lengths lead to notches moving through the output
spectrum. Using an IF spectrum analyzer connected to the combiner output, the delay time
difference between the main and diversity signal paths can be determined and the length
compensation can be performed and tested.
Auto-run
The phase shifter is periodically triggered with the adjustable frequency.
A notch occurring is moving through the spectrum.
This option does not have to be acknowledged after selection!
Single step
The phase of the phase shifter is shifted by approx. 3 degrees per step. The notch moves
through the IF spectrum in single steps.
This option does not have to be acknowledged after selection!
Frequency
Selectable frequency which is used to trigger the phase shifter in the auto-run mode.
0.5...5 Hz

RF/160 OI

4-15

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.6.1 Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations


Key word 4-14:

Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations

The delay time compensation in space diversity configurations is described in section 4.10.2 of the
Commissioning Instructions RF/160-CI included in this Operator Manual.

4-16

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

4.7

Configuration

Modem Unit (MU)

Modem OPx/PRx

This command opens the MU configuration window:

RF/160 OI

4-17

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical


Electrical STM-1 interface
No configuration necessary.

4-18

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.7.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical


Optical STM-1 interface

OPT
Management
Configuration

Control mode
ALC
Automatic Laser Control.
The power of the laser diode is controlled automatically.
Operating mode
Only active if the module does not receive a valid input signal ("LOS" module alarm).
ALC restart
Test
The laser power is switched on for 2 seconds.
Manual
The laser power is switched on for 90 seconds.

RF/160 OI

4-19

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.3 RPSI STM-1


No configuration necessary.

4-20

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.7.4 Modem Unit Power Supply


No configuration necessary.

RF/160 OI

4-21

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.5 Modulator

MD 155/140...
Management
Configuration
64MLQAM:

128MLQAM:

Key word 4-15:

Activating the MD XPIC

Operating mode
XPIC
For synchronization in XPIC operation.
Data signal from
Own DPU
Normal setting.
Opposite DPU
Setting for the right MD for 1+1 HSB and 1+1 Line Diversity with only one DPU STM-1 (A002).

Key word 4-16:

Carrier

Unmodulated IF carrier

(only for 64 MLQAM)

Test signal
The MD supplies the transmitter with an unmodulated IF signal (140 MHz).
The latter can be used for intermodulation and XPD measurements.

4-22

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Modulated
The IF output signal is 64 MLQAM modulated.
Setting in normal operation: modulated.
Mode

(only for 128 MLQAM)

Normal
The IF output signal is 128MLQAM modulated.
Test signal
Test signal with two sub-carriers 11 MHz from the IF center frequency (140 MHz) for antenna
alignment.

RF/160 OI

4-23

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.6 Demodulator

DM 155/140...
Management
Configuration
64MLQAM:

128MLQAM:

Key word 4-17:

Activating the DM XPIC

Mode
XPIC
For synchronization in XPIC operation.

Key word 4-18:

Adjusting the DM group delay equalizer

Group delay equalizer (only for 64 MLQAM)


The group delay equalizer in the demodulator compensates distortions caused by the connection of RF
filters with a direct adjacent channel spacing. Direct adjacent channel filters are the channels routed at a
spacing of +/- 40 MHz to the channel considered.
An important parameter is the number of direct adjacent channel filters "passed" above and below the
channel to be adjusted in the Tx and Rx branching network.
The mutual influence between two direct adjacent channels in a diplexer is half as high as with the same
channel combination with individual filters or combinations of individual filters and diplexers.
Two direct adjacent channels arranged within a diplexer identify "one complete passage" only after the
Tx-side and Rx-side diplexer have been passed. Diplexers are always arranged in identical pairs both on
the Tx and Rx side.

4-24

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Example for determining the adjacent channel filters passed


Arrangement with a combination of individual filters and diplexer filters
(Schematic arrangement for demonstration purposes only; selection of appropriate attenuation values in
the factory => Reverse order of channel diplexers on the Tx and Rx side).

1a

TX

RX

4a

2a TX

RX 5a

4a TX

RX

5a TX

RX 2a

3a TX

RX

1a

3a

Channel 2a passes direct adjacent channel filter 1a (1x) (pair of diplexers!)


(corresponds to line 6 of the table below).

Channel 1a passes direct adjacent channel filter 2a (1x) (pair of diplexers!)


(corresponds to line 4 of the table below).

Channel 4a passes direct adjacent channel filter 5a (1x) (pair of diplexers!)


(corresponds to line 4 of the table below).

Channel 5a passes direct adjacent channel filter 4a (1x) (pair of diplexers!)


(corresponds to line 6 of the table below).

Channel 3a passes direct adjacent channel filters 4a (2x) and 2a (2x)


(corresponds to line 3 of the table below).

Since the compensation takes place at IF level, a distinction of different cases is necessary depending on
the position of the RF oscillator with respect to the RF channel (downstream combination in reverse or
identical position).

RF/160 OI

4-25

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Number of direct adjacent channel


filters f passed

No.

fRF
fRF-LO
f
*)

f > fRF

Setting of group delay equalizer in


the DM module depending on band
position of channel to be adjusted
fRF *)

f < fRF

fRF-LO < fRF

fRF-LO > fRF

(overlaying)

(underlaying)

[1]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[3]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[5]

[4]

Frequency of the RF channel to be adjusted


RF oscillator frequency of the RF channel (see read-only configuration value in the oscillator
module)
Frequency of direct adjacent channel(s)
The band position corresponds to the band position configuration in the Tx or Rx module; also
see Chapter 12 of the Operating Instructions: "Frequency Setting".

Possible settings in the "Delay equalizer" listbox of the demodulator 64 MLQAM module:
[1]

No adjacent channel filters;

[2]

1 adjacent channel filter above the center frequency;

[3]

1 adjacent channel filter below the center frequency;

[4]

2 adjacent channel filters above the center frequency;

[5]

2 adjacent channel filters below the center frequency.

4-26

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.7.7 Controller module

Controller
Management
Configuration

Backplane
Version
Displays the backplane version.

RF/160 OI

4-27

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit


DPU/RPS STM-1
Management
Configuration

General

Key word 4-19:

Defining the OP and PR channel no.

Direction
Indicates the direction selected by means of the address connector in the MU.
A radio terminal station always operates in the West mode.
In a radio repeater station (two terminals connected back to back), one NE operates in the West
mode and one in the East mode.
East
West

4-28

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Slot position
Indicates the card slot position of the DPU in the MU subrack.
Left
Right
Channel
Indicates the channel no. selected using the address connector.
OP1...OP16
Operating channel 1 ... 16
PR1...PR2
Protection channel 1 ... 2
XPIC
Enables the XPIC mode in the DPU. Each modification requires a reset.
Redundancy
Adjustment of the protection switching mode of the microwave radio system.
Each modification requires a reset.
None
No protection switching option; N+0 configuration.
Equipment protection
Hot standby (HSB) protection with one DPU STM-1 A002.
1+1 line protection without occasional traffic (OT)
1+1 line protection with only one DPU STM-1 A002.
Occasional traffic (OT) and XPIC operation are not possible.
This operating mode is not available for all DPU software versions.
n+m line protection
N+M line protection mode. With DPU STM-1 A001 and RPSI / RPSC.
Modulation mode
The correct setting of the modulation mode is absolutely necessary for systems operating in the
n+m line protection mode.
64 QAM
Setting for equipment units equipped with a 64QAM demodulator (65.7205.155.00,
Id. no. 061292).
128 QAM
Setting for equipment units equipped with a 128QAM demodulator (65.7205.610.00,
Id. no. 094840).
Not defined
Modulation mode not defined.

RF/160 OI

4-29

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Loopback

Key word 4-20:

BB/IF Loopback

Line side
Radio direction
The IF signal is switched back to the IF interface with RSOH processing.
Line direction
The BB signal is switched back to the BB interface without RSOH processing.
Radio side
Radio direction
The IF signal is switched back to the IF interface without RSOH processing.
Line direction
The BB signal is switched back to the BB interface with RSOH processing.
Loopback timeout
The loopback is disconnected automatically after the adjusted period and the system returns again to
normal operation.
5 min
15 min
1h
4h
24 h

4-30

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Line protection
OP:

PR:

Enable QA0 threshold


Activation of the QA0 criterion for protection switching purposes.
The QA0 criterion is a threshold activated in case of an interruption of the data channel.
It prepares switchover by a Tx-side synchronization of the operating and protection channel.
QA0 is generated by early warning pulses (Early Warning Pulse) of the DM FEC.
Enable QA1 threshold
Activation of the QA1 criterion for protection switching purposes.
The QA1 criterion is a threshold activated in case of a strong degradation of the transmission
quality of the channel. It prepares switchover by a Tx-side synchronization of the operating and
protection channel.
QA1 is generated by early warning pulses (Early Warning Pulse) of the DM FEC.

RF/160 OI

4-31

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Enable QA2 threshold


Activation of the QA2 criterion for protection switching purposes.
The QA2 criterion is a threshold activated in case of a slight degradation of the transmission
quality of the channel. It prepares switchover by a Tx-side synchronization of the operating and
protection channel.
QA1 is generated by early warning pulses (Early Warning Pulse) of the DM FEC.
1

Enable LWI criterion


Activation of the LWI criterion for protection switching purposes.
The LWI criterion is the sum of early warning pulses (correction pulses) of the DM FEC of
each DM included in a transmission link covering several radio hops. It prepares switchover by
a Tx-side synchronization of the operating and protection channel.
Q0 threshold value
Q1 threshold value
Q2 threshold value
Adjustable Bit Error Ratio (BER) for the Qx thresholds, with Q0 > Q1 > Q2. Values between
-12
-3
10 and 10 are adjustable. The respective threshold is taken into consideration only if the
associated QA criterion has been enabled.
Recommanded setting:

64 QAM
-11
Q2=10
-8
Q1=10
-4
Q0=10
Enable LWI criterion

128 QAM
-12
Q2=10
-8
Q1=10
-4
Q0=10
1
Enable LWI criterion

Alarm threshold value


Number of protection switchovers to enable the "number of protection switchovers exceeded
threshold" alarm.

Key word 4-21:

Switching thresholds

Operating channel
Automatic
The system switches over automatically in case of a failure.
If this option is check-marked, the automatically selected channel is displayed in the "Setting"
box.
If this option is not check-marked, forced switchover is possible using the "Setting" option.
Key word 4-22:

Protection switching

Frequency diversity (read-only access)


The signal of the OP is transmitted in parallel via a second RF channel (PR). On the Rx side, an
internally controlled switch selects the better one of the two signals.
Setting
If Automatic is ON, only the channel used is displayed.
If Automatic is OFF, forced switchover is possible.

4-32

In case of 128 QAM systems with OT option, it is recommended not to enable the LWI criterion in
order to avoid unnecessary interruptions of the channel used for transmitting occasional traffic. This
applies to DPU software versions up to V106/221100.
RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

OP
No protection switching active.
PR1
The OP channel is protected by the PR1 channel.
PR2
The OP channel is protected by the PR2 channel.
PR1 or PR2
The OP channel is protected by the PR1 or PR2 channel. Only for forced switchover; no
display.
Precedence
This mode increases the priority of this channel for protection switching.
Priority Low=15. Priority High=0.
In case of manual switchover (Automatic option not active) the following applies:
If the Precedence" option is check-marked, i.e. active, a manual switching request is always
executed, irrespective of the status of the selected protection channel (forced switchover).
If the "Precedence" option is not active, the system permits switchover only if the selected
channel is not faulty. After switchover, the system will automatically switch back as soon as a
fault is detected on the manually selected channel (unforced switchover).
Priority
Adjustable channel priority. High=0. Low=15.
0...15
Protection channel
Occasional traffic
The system can transmit low-priority traffic via an additional SPI module in the protection
channel. In case of failures, the OP channel is protected by the PR channel and occasional
traffic is interrupted.
none
No occasional traffic.
If none of the OP channels is faulty in the 'n+m line protection mode' of an 1+1 configuration,
the data of operating channel OP1 are parallelly transmitted in PR1 (active frequency diversity).
loose
The transmission of low-priority data is interrupted as soon as an OP channel is detected to be
faulty.
fixed
Permanent transmission of low-priority data signals. Protection switchover is not possible.

RF/160 OI

4-33

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Equipment protection

Key word 4-23:

HSB equipment protection

Receiver
Mode
Automatic
Protection switchover takes place automatically as soon as an error is detected on the receive
side.
Locked
No automatic protection switching. The setting is frozen.
Manual switchover
The receive side can be switched over using the corresponding setting.
Setting
In the 'Automatic' or 'Locked' mode: Display of the active Rx path (OP or PR)
In the 'Manual switchover' mode: Display and setting of the active Rx path
PR
Used to display and select the PR protection channel.
OP
Used to display and select the OP operating channel.

4-34

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Priority control
Definition of priority control in the "Locked" and "Manual switchover" modes.
Arbitrary setting in the "Automatic" mode.
equal
Manual switchover and automatic switchover are equal in priority.
The last switching state will be maintained.
automatic
Automatic switchover has priority.
Switchover takes place even in the "Locked" mode or in case of a fault.
manual
Manual switchover has priority.
Manual switchover to a faulty channel is possible.
RF switch equipped
An RF switch is available for the Rx side. Otherwise a 10 dB coupler is used.
Diversity switch equipped
An RF switch is available for the Rx side with space diversity operation. Otherwise a 10 dB
coupler is used.
Baseband diversity
Baseband diversity has been selected for the receive side.

RF/160 OI

4-35

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Transmitter
Mode
Automatic
Protection switchover will be executed automatically as soon as an error is detected on the
transmit side.
Locked
No automatic protection switching. The setting is frozen.
Manual switchover
The transmit side can be switched over in the "Setting" box.
Setting
In the "Automatic" or "Locked" mode: Display of the active Tx path (OP or PR)
In the "Manual switchover" mode: Display and setting of the active Tx path (OP or PR)
PR
Used to display and select the PR protection channel.
OP
Used to display and select the OP operating channel.
Priority control
Definition of priority control in the "Locked" and "Manual switchover" modes. Arbitrary setting in the
"Automatic" mode.
equal
Manual and automatic switching are equal in priority.
The last switching state will be maintained.
automatic
Automatic switching has priority.
Switchover takes place even in the "Locked" mode and in case of a fault.
manual
Manual switching has priority.
Manual switchover to a faulty channel is possible.
RF switch equipped
An RF switch is used for the Tx side.
Switch type
PIN
A PIN diode switch is used.
Relais
An RF relay is used.
Far-end station active
Permits a forced switchover on the Tx side if the OP and PR Rx paths in the far end are disturbed
simultaneously.

4-36

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Radio hop

Key word 4-24:

Radio hop identifier

Transmitter
Radio hop identifier
Configurable radio hop identifier inserted in the transmit direction.
0....15
Receiver
Radio hop identifier
Radio hop identifier expected from the receive direction.
If the radio hop identifier received differs from the one expected, AIS will be inserted.
0....15

RF/160 OI

4-37

Configuration

Operating Instructions

SOH processing

Key word 4-25:

SOH processing

General
Line to radio
Invert B1
The B1 byte will be inverted for tests in the radio direction.
This setting is not relevant if automatic protection switching has been activated in the far-end
DPU and/or a manual switchover has taken place.
Insert AIS in case of J0-TIM
If the expected and received path trace identifier signals differ from each other
(Trace Identifier Mismatch), AIS will be inserted.
Insert AIS in case of SES (B1)
If the SES threshold (ITU-T G.826 ~ BER = 2E-5) is exceeded, AIS will be inserted.
Radio to line
Invert B1
For testing purposes, the B1 byte is inverted in the line direction.
Insert AIS in case of J0-TIM
If the expected and received path trace identifier signals differ from each other
(Trace Identifier Mismatch), AIS will be inserted.
Insert AIS in case of SES (B1)
If the SES threshold (ITU-T G.826 ~ BER = 2E-5) is exceeded, AIS will be inserted.

4-38

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

J0/C1
Line to radio
Processing
none
The J0/C1 byte is not evaluated. No processing.
Process J0
The J0 Path Trace Identifier of the signal from the line direction is monitored and
compared with the expected string.
In the radio direction, the J0 Path Trace string to be sent is inserted.
The J0 Path Trace strings can be adjusted under the "User data" menu item of the DPU
module.
Process C1
The C1 byte of the signal from the line direction is monitored and compared with the byte
expected.
In the radio direction, the C1 byte to be sent is inserted.
C1 value transmitted
Defines the C1 byte transmitted in the radio direction.
0...255
C1 value received (read only)
Displays the C1 byte received from the line side.
0...255
Radio to line
Processing
none
The J0/C1 byte is not evaluated. No processing.
Process J0
The J0 Path Trace Identifier of the signal from the radio direction is monitored and
compared with the expected string.
In the line direction, the J0 Path Trace string to be sent is inserted.
The J0 Path Trace strings can be adjusted under the "User data" menu item of the DPU
module.
Process C1
The C1 byte of the signal from the radio direction is monitored and compared with the
expected byte.
In the line direction, the C1 byte to be sent is inserted.
C1 value transmitted
Defines the C1 byte transmitted in the radio direction.
0...255
C1 value received (read only)
Displays the C1 byte received from the line side.
0...255
RF/160 OI

4-39

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Service channels

Key word 4-26:

Activating the service channel

The SOH Access Module processes the two bytes E1 and F1 in addition to 4x64k in the RSOH. If
additional bytes shall be used (e.g. E2), the SOH extension module is necessary.
Normal operation: The service channels are not selected.
Enable (line to radio)
The bytes to be processed can be selected. Otherwise the bytes will be through-connected.
E1
The E1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.
Default setting: E1 transmits EOW#1.
F1
The F1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.
Normal operation: F1 transmits EOW#2.
E2
The E2 byte (64kbit/s) in the MSOH can be accessed via the SOH extension module.
DSC
The four digital service channels (4x64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.
Normal operation: The first DSC is used for QTN data transmission.
4-40

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

WSC
The wayside channel (2048 kbit/s) in the SOH can be used.
DCCR
The Data Communication Channel (Bytes D1 to D3) in the RSOH can be used with the
SOH Extension module.
DCCM
The Data Communication Channel (Bytes D4 to D12) in the MSOH can be used with the
SOH Extension module.

Enable (radio to line)


The bytes to be processed can be selected. All other bytes are through-connected.
E1
The E1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.
Normal operation: E1 transmits EOW#1.
F1
The F1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.
Normal operation: F1 transmits EOW#2.
E2
The E2 byte (64kbit/s) in the MSOH can be used with the SOH Extension module.
DSC
The four digital service channels (4x64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used.
Normal operation: The first DSC is used for QTN data transmission.
WSC
The wayside channel (2048 kbit/s) in the SOH can be used.
DCCR
The Data Communication Channel (Bytes D1 to D3) in the RSOH can be used with the
SOH Extension module.
DCCM
The Data Communication Channel (Bytes D4 to D12) in the MSOH can be used with the
SOH Extension module.

The PR protection channel for the STM-1 signal does not automatically represent the protection
channel for service channels.
In n+m (n>1) configurations, the service channels (1+1 protected) are transmitted in OP1 and
OP2.

RF/160 OI

4-41

Configuration

Operating Instructions

DPU
Management
User Data
N+0:

N+M / HSB:

In this mask, the strings for the J0 Path Trace Identifier (15 bytes + 1 byte CRC) expected and to be sent
can be modified. However, these are only effective if J0 processing has been enabled (see Configuration
of DPU SOH processing). Received strings are displayed.

4-42

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.7.9 DPU/RPS STM-1 manual protection switching


4.7.9.1 Line protection (n+1/2)
Using the MAN switch on the front panel of the DPU/RPS, manual switchover is possible.
Key word 4-27:

Manual protection switching

DPU
RPS
H11 Fault
TX side

TX

RX

H1 Fault
Channel OP

H2
Channel OP

OP
PR1
PR2

H3 Fault
Channel PR1
H5 Fault
Channel PR2
H7 Synchron
Status
H9 Indication
TX or RX side
S1 Switch

H12 Fault
RX side

H4
Channel PR1
H6
Channel PR2
H8 Switching
Indication

SYN
TX

SWITCH
LOCK

H10 Channel
Locking

MAN

Fig. 4-1:

RF/160 OI

DPU/RPS STM-1 front panel

4-43

Configuration

Operating Instructions

LED displays
Tx alarm
Indicates a general alarm on the Tx side of the DPU/RPS (e.g. no BB input at SPI).
Rx alarm
Indicates an alarm on the Rx side of the DPU/RPS (e.g. no RF input signal.)
OP alarm
This LED lights up if the Q0 threshold is exceeded and flashes (see remark) if Q2 or Q1
is exceeded (Rx side).
QA2 (1E-8...1E-12), QA1 (1E-8...1E-4), QA0 (>1E-4)
PR1 alarm
This LED lights up if the QA0 threshold is exceeded and flashes (see remark) if QA2 or QA1 is
exceeded (Rx side).
QA2 (1E-8...1E-12), QA1 (1E-8...1E-4), QA0 (>1E-4)
PR2 alarm
This LED lights up if the QA0 threshold is exceeded and flashes (see remark) if QA2 or QA1 is
exceeded (Rx side).
QA2 (1E-8...1E-12), QA1 (1E-8...1E-4), QA0 (>1E-4)
NOTE:
Fast flashing (50%)
Slow flashing (10%)
Very short pulse

QA1 has been exceeded.


QA2 has been exceeded.
Protection channel information is not available
(only with line protection).

OP
Displays data traffic in the OP channel (Tx or Rx side).
PR1
Displays data traffic in the PR1 channel (Tx or Rx side).
PR2
Displays data traffic in the PR2 channel (Tx or Rx side).
SYN
Displays the optimum bit synchronization between OP and PR1/PR2 for bit-error-free
switchover.
If this LED is OFF, one data channel is faulty.
Switch
Displays the start of a manual switchover.
Lock
Displays a channel lock (OP, PR) at the associated DPU/RPS.
Automatic protection switching in case of a failure is no longer possible.
Tx
Displays the side currently in operation.
LED is ON:
Displays the operational status of the Tx side of the OP or PR.
LED is OFF:
Displays the operational status of the Rx side of the OP or PR.
The STM-1 traffic can be transmitted, for example, on the Tx side via the OP channel and on
the Rx side via the PR channel, or vice versa.

4-44

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Using the MAN switch


By pressing the MAN switch for a short time, the action (yellow Tx, LOCK or SWITCH LED) is switched
on or off.
By pressing it longer, it switches between the actions (Tx, LOCK or SWITCH).

OP
PR switchover
Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to switch over between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs.
When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, the manual switching process to one of the PRs can be executed.
PR
OP switchover
After a manual switchover, press the MAN switch once for a longer period until the LOCK LED starts to
flash, i.e. the system switches back to the OP and is locked.
The system selects the PR1 or PR2 protection channel by itself.

Switchover to a selected PR
If a selected PR shall be used for data transmission, the other PR has to be locked in the associated
DPU/RPS (PR1 or PR2).

TX

RX
OP
PR1
PR2

SYN
TX

SWITCH
LOCK

PR1

Fig. 4-2:

RF/160 OI

Locking of PR1

4-45

Configuration

Operating Instructions

After locking the selected PR at the associated DPU/RPS, switchover is necessary from the OP channel
to the PR channel.
Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to change between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs.
When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, manual switchover to the unlocked PR is executed.

TX

RX
OP
PR1
PR2

SYN
TX

SWITCH
LOCK

OP1

Fig. 4-3:

Switching from OP1 to PR2

In case of systems with a n+1/2 configuration, manual switchover can be performed only on the Rx
side. Rx switchover is executed from the far-end Tx side. In 1+1 HSB configurations, independent
switchover of the Tx and Rx side is possible.

4-46

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.7.9.2 Equipment protection (1+1 HSB)


Switching Tx1 (OP) to the antenna
When the LOCK LED is lit, press the MAN switch once for a longer period to disable the LOCK mode.
Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to change between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs.
When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, manual TX switchover to the OP is executed.

TX

RX
OP
PR1
PR2

SYN
TX

Fig. 4-4:

RF/160 OI

SWITCH
LOCK

Switching Tx1 to the antenna

4-47

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Switching Tx2 (PR) to the antenna


When the LOCK LED is lit, press the MAN switch once for a longer period to disable the LOCK mode.
Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to change between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs.
When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, manual TX switchover to the OP is executed.

TX

RX
OP
PR1
PR2

SYN
TX

Fig. 4-5:

4-48

SWITCH
LOCK

Switching Tx2 to the antenna

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

4.8

Configuration

RPSC + RPSH modules

4.8.1 RPSC module

RPS-C
Management
Configuration

The RPSC is required in n+1/+2 configurations.


State
Displays the CAN bus operating mode of an RPSC.
Transit
CAN bus in a cascade (8+1...14+2).
End
CAN bus termination for this RPSC.

RF/160 OI

4-49

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.8.2 RPSH module

RPS-H
Management
Configuration

The RPSH is required in 1+1 HSB configurations.


Relay position
Indicates the active Tx/Rx path in a HSB configuration.
Tx1
Tx1 is active (OP).
Tx2
Tx2 is active (PR).
Rx1
Rx1 is active (OP) if an RF switch is available.
Rx2
Rx2 is active (PR) if an RF switch is available.

4-50

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI

DSC 4x64 kbit/s


1+1

DSC 4x64 kbit/s


1+1

WSC 1x2048 kbit/s


1+1

DSC 1x64 kbit/s


1+0

75
120

75
120

PSTN
2w/6w

64 kbit/s
1+1 East

PSTN
2w/6w

64 kbit/s
1+1 East

WSC
1x2048
kbit/s
1+1

East

WSC2/1

A Bus
Converter

RFCOH
Module

QD2
Module

ECC/
64kbit/s

MUX

DSC5

DSC6

DSC7

EOW branch

Handset
0.3-3.4 kHz

Analog Interf.
0.3-344 kHz

Remote
Handset
0.3-3.4 kHz

Logic

64 kbit/s
1+1 North

Handset
0.3-3.4 kHz
Analog Interf.
0.3-344 kHz

Remote
Handset
0.3-3.4 kHz

Logic

64 kbit/s
1+1 North

DSC5

DSC6

DSC7

DSC8
EOW branch

DSC2

DSC3

DSC8

EOW
Array

DSC1

EOW
Array

DSC1

DSC2

DSC3

DSC4
EOW Module 2

East

75
120

75
120

DSC4
EOW Module 1

WSC2/2

WSC2/1

DSC
4x64
kbit/s
1+1

75
120

75
120

SISA K

HDLCController

Prozessor

ECC Gateway Module,


alternatively to QD2 Module

WSC2/2

West

RFCOH
Module

SOH Ext.
Module

WSC2/2

West

WSC2/1

DSC4

DSC4

75
120

DSC3

DSC3

75
120

DSC2

Assignment acc. to QD2 Module

WSC2/2

WSC2/1

E2

DCCR/D1

WEST

DCC R/
DCC M

EAST

DCC R/
DCC M

OHAIC

WSC 1x2048 kbit/s


1+1

F1
E1
DSC1

OHAIC

DSC2

OHAIC

DSC1

E1

F1

DSC
2x64
kbit/s
1+1

DSC 4x64 kbit/s


1+1

DSC 4x64 kbit/s


1+1

WSC 1x2048 kbit/s


1+1

QSC 1x64 kbit/s


1+1

Q Interface
RS485

Q Interface
RS485

Q Interface
RS485

F- Interface
RS232

LAN- Interface
10BaseT

Q Interface
RS485

4.9

DSC 4x64 kbit/s


1+1

DSC 2x64 kbit/s


1+1

SOHA
Module

Operating Instructions
Configuration

Overhead Access Unit (OHAU)

4.9.1 Overview

Fig. 4-6: Service channels in the OHAU

4-51

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.2 Service channels and connection options


The following table gives an overview of the service channels and connection options available in the
system. Internal ports are wired directly via the backplane of the OHA Unit.
Operating mode

E1

64 kbit/s

synchronous

external G.703
EOW#1 internal = = = =

F1

64 kbit/s

synchron

external G.703
EOW#2 internal = = = =

DSC1

64 kbit/s

plesiochronous external G.703


QTN2 internal = = = =

DSC2-4

64 kbit/s

plesiochronous external G.703 = = = =

WSC

1x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s

plesiochronous external G.703


plesiochronous

= = = = - - - - =

1x64 kbit/s
2x64 kbit/s

synchronous
synchronous

external V.11

= = = = - - - - =

DCCR

192 kbit/s

synchronous

ECC Gateway = = = =
internal

DCCM

576 kbit/s

synchronous

ECC Gateway = = = =
internal

64 kbit/s

plesiochronous external G.703


EOW#1 internal
EOW#2 internal = = = =
QTN2 internal

64 kbit/s

plesiochronous external G.703

= = = =

DSC5-8
64 kbit/s
(optional)

plesiochronous external G.703

= = = =

WSC

plesiochronous external G.703


plesiochronous

= = = = - - - - =

SOH Extension E2

RFCOH Access DSC1

DSC2-4

1x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s

2+0

SOH Access

RX1+0

Ports

TX1+0

Transmission capacity

1+1

Service
channel

1+0

Module

Table 1 : Overview of service channels and ports

4-52

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Protection types for service channels


Only in microwave radio 1+1 equipment protection and 1+1 line protection configurations without OT (with
one DPU/RPS STM-1), service channels are also protected by the radio protection configuration.
Depending on the type of protection switching configuration, service channels can be protected by
configuring the associated modules as defined in Table 2 below. This service channel protection
switching process is not hitless.
Meaning of the different configuration options:
1+0:
The service channel is not protected.
1+1:
The service channel is protected.
TX1+0:
The service channel is not protected on the Tx side and protected on the Rx side.
RX1+0:
The service channel is not protected on the Rx side and protected on the Tx side.
2+0:
SC-OP and SC-PR transmit two independent unprotected service channel signals.
The protection channel (PR) for the STM-1 signal is not automatically used as protection channel for
service channels. In n+m (n>1) configurations, the service channels are transmitted in OP1 (SC-OP)
and OP2 (SC-PR).

RX1+0

1+1

2+0

1+0

TX1+0

RX1+0

1+1

2+0

1+0

2+0

SOH Ext.
Module

TX1+0

RFCOH Access
Module

1+0

n+0, n > 1

1+1 line protection w


OT

n+m line protection

1+1 line protection w/o


A001 OT

A002

SOH Access
Module

Microwave Radio
Mode
1+0

Version of
DPU

Service channel operating modes

1+1 line protection w/o


OT

1+1 equipment
protection

Table 2: Protection options for service channels

The microwave radio protection switching configuration protects the service channels in such a way that
a 1+0 SOH configuration corresponds to a 1+1 configuration.
3
This RFCOH configuration is theoretically possible. However, it makes no sense since there is only one
RF channel.
RF/160 OI

4-53

Configuration

Operating Instructions

OHAU

This command opens the OHAU configuration window.

Note:
With the exception of the "RFCOH Access (East)", all modules of the OHAU are accessed in the network
element WEST.
When operated as repeater station, the network element EAST has its own OHAU display via which the
"RFCOH Access (East)" module and the "SISA-0/N" module assigned to the NE EAST can be accessed.

4-54

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.3 OHAU power supply


No configuration possible.

RF/160 OI

4-55

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.4 RFCOH Access Module

RFCOH access
Management
Configuration

The PR protection channel for the STM-1 signal is not always the protection channel for the
service channels. In n+m (n>1) configurations, the service channels (1+1 protected) are transmitted
in OP1 and OP2.
General
Mode
4x64 kbit/s
Indicates the selected service channels. In addition to the 2048 kbit/s WSC, the RFCOH module
also transmits four codirectional 64 kbit/s service channels in compliance with ITU-T G.703
(120 ).
8x64 kbit/s
Indicates the selected service channels. In addition to the 2048 kbit/s WSC, the RFCOH module
also transmits eight codirectional 64 kbit/s service channels in compliance with ITU-T G.703
(120 ).
WSC interface
Balanced
Indicates the selected interface. The interface of the 2048 kbit/s service channel has an
impedance of 120 at the Sub-D connector.
Coaxial
Indicates the selected interface. The interface of the 2048 kbit/s service channel has an
impedance of 75 at connector 1.6/5.6.
4-56

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-28:

Selecting RFCOH with 4x64 k

DSC 1....4
DSC1...DSC4
Activation of four digital 64 kbit/s service channels.
Key word 4-29:

DSC1 assignment in the RFCOH: EOW, QTN or External

DSC1 interface
The digital service channel in the RFCOH can be internally switched to other modules or interfaces.
External
An external 64 kbit/s signal can be applied to DSC1.
QTN2
DSC1 is used to transmit the 64 kbit/s signal of the Q-module.
EOW1
DSC1 is used to transmit the 64 kbit/s signal of EOW module #1.
EOW2
DSC1 is used to transmit the 64 kbit/s signal of EOW module #2.

RF/160 OI

4-57

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-30:

Defining the RFCOH 4x64 k protection switching option

Channel redundancy switching


Selectable protection switching options for DSC1...DSC4:
1+0
No protection of service channel signals.
Rx 1+0
The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
Tx 1+0
The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
1+1
The service channels are protected.

Key word 4-31:

Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 4x64 k

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Send LA Tx in case of LOS
The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-58

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-32:

Selecting RFCOH with 8x64 k

DSC 5...8
DSC5...DSC8
Activation of the four additional digital 64 kbit/s service channels.
Key word 4-33:

Defining protection switching options for RFCOH 8x64 k

Channel redundancy switching


Selectable protection switching options for DSC5...DSC8.
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
Tx 1+0
The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
1+1
The service channels are protected.

RF/160 OI

4-59

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-34:

Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 8x64 k

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Send LA Tx in case of LOS
The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-60

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-35:

Activating the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH

WSC
None
Selection of no 2048 kbit/s service channel.
OP
Transmission in the operating channel. 1+0 or 1+1.
OP+PR
Independent transmission in the operating and protection channel.
Key word 4-36:

Defining the 2048 k WSC protection switching option in the RFCOH

Channel redundancy switching


Selectable protection switching options for the 2048 kbit/s WSC.
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
Tx 1+0
The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
1+1
The service channel is protected.

RF/160 OI

4-61

Configuration

Operating Instructions
Key word 4-37:

Selecting the alarm display of the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Send LA Tx in case of LOS
The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-62

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.4.1 RFCOH wayside interface 75


Key word 4-38:

Setting RFCOH wayside interface 75

Jumper positions on the RFCOH module for the 75 operating mode.

X100
X300

X100
X303

X100
X301

X100
X302

Fig. 4-7:

RF/160 OI

RFCOH wayside interface 75

4-63

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.4.2 RFCOH wayside interface 120


Key word 4-39:

Setting RFCOH wayside interface 120

Jumper positions on the RFCOH module for the 120 operating mode.

X100
X300

X100
X303

X100
X301

X100
X302

Fig. 4-8:

4-64

RFCOH wayside interface 120

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.5 EOW module


For detailed information on how to operate the service unit, please refer to the Operator Manual for the
DE-2 Service Unit, Ident. no. AN00035433, and to the annex, chapter 16, of these Operating Instructions.
EOW#1
Management
Configuration

Key word 4-40:

Selecting 2/6-wire PSTN inteface of the EOW

Equipment
PSTN2
Indicates whether the 2-wire PSTN port to the PABX is available/not available.
PSTN6
Indicates whether the 6-wire PSTN port (E&M) to the PABX is available/not available.
Branching
Indicates whether the EOW branching module for a third direction is available/not available.

RF/160 OI

4-65

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-41:

Transmitting or blocking the EOW

General
Analog interface
Selection of the external analog interface.
Connection to local phone
Internal analog connection enabled.
Key word 4-42:

Defining the clock source of the EOW

Clock synchronization
West
The signal coming from the West direction is used for synchronization purposes.
East
The signal coming from the East direction is used for synchronization purposes.
Internal crystal
The internal crystal is used for synchronization purposes.
Connection
Western
SOH Access
The EOW is connected to the SOH.
RFCOH Access
The EOW is connected to the RFCOH.
None
No transmission.
Eastern
SOH Access
The EOW is connected to the SOH.
RFCOH Access
The EOW is connected to the RFCOH.
External digital channel
The EOW is connected to the interface for an external digital service channel.
None
No transmission.
Northern
active
The North interface is active.
inactive
The North interface is inactive.

4-66

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-43:

Defining the level of the PSTN port

PSTN2
Level
Level settings for the interface to the PABX.
Rx
Tx

-7...-13 dBm
0...-6 dBm

Amplification (busy tone identification)


Selectable amplification to the PABX.
10 / 20 dB

Key word 4-44:

Selecting the clock source for EOW branching

Branching
The EOW branching module provides a branch in a third direction.
Clock synchronization
Selectable clock sources for the analog port.
Internal
The own crystal is used for synchronization purposes.
North
The signal coming from North is used as synchronization clock source.

RF/160 OI

4-67

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.6 QTN module

QTN2
Management
Configuration

Key word 4-45:

Configuring QD2/SISA-K

General
NOTE:
For detailed information on the individual operating modes, please refer to the "SISA-DCN", document no.
62.1013.600.05-A001, and to "SISA in microwave radio", Ident. no. AN 00042537.
Operating mode
Bus service, head station
This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 bus.
Bus service relay/terminal station
This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 bus.
Automatic ring, ring start
This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a single SISA-K/R.
Automatic ring, ring member
This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a single SISA-K/R.

4-68

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

SISA-K-controlled ring, master West


This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a triple SISA-K/R
ring router.
SISA-K-controlled ring, master East
This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a triple SISA-K/R
ring router.
SISA-K-controlled ring slave
This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a triple SISAK/R ring router.

Within a configuration, all QTN modules must be set to an operating mode which can be selected from an
appropriate group (bus, automatic ring, SISA-K controlled ring).
In bus or automatic ring configurations, one QTN must be adjusted as head station or ring start.
All other QTNs of the configuration must be adjusted as relay/terminal station or ring members.
In SISA-K-controlled configurations, one Master West and one Master East is required at the site where
SISA-K is used as ring router. The other QTNs must be adjusted as ring slaves.
Depending on the QTN mode adjusted, the following settings should be performed:
1)

QTN mode
Bus service, head station
Automatic ring, ring start
SISA-K-controlled ring, master West
SISA-K-controlled ring, master East

SISA-K/R setting
A set to Microwave radio interface
D set to Local interface

2)

QTN mode
Bus service, relay/terminal station
Automatic ring, ring member
SISA-K-controlled ring, slave

SISA-K/R setting
A set to Local interface
D set to Microwave radio interface

Also see 4.6.8 SISA-K/R.

RF/160 OI

4-69

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Interface configuration
Defines the routing of QTN logic interfaces East and West to the physical interfaces A and B.
The physical interface A is the internal interface to an SOH channel in the RF link.
The physical interface B may either be a 64 kbit/s interface to G.703 / V.11 on the connecting panel or an
internal link to an SOH channel in the baseband.
In the Bus service Relay/Terminal station, Automatic ring, Ring member or SISA-K controlled ring,
Slave modes, set QTN to:
Standard (West << A , B >> East)
Select this option if the physical interface A
-points to any interface of the bus-controlled QTN (bus configuration);
-points to the East interface of the ring-controlled QTN (automatic ring configuration);
-points to the Master West (SISA-K-controlled ring).
Reverse (West << B , A >> East)
Select this option if the physical interface B
-points to any interface of the bus-controlled QTN (bus configuration);
-points to the East interface of the ring-controlled QTN (automatic ring configuration);
-points to the Master West (SISA-K-controlled ring).
In the Bus service, head station mode, set QTN to:
Standard (West << A , B >> East)
Select this option if both logic interfaces West and East are active (system supports two
bus branches).
Select this option if only the logic interface East is active and shall be routed via the physical
interface B.
Reverse (West << B , A >> East)
Select this option if only the logic interface East is active and shall be routed via the physical
interface A.

Parts of V.11
Select this option, if at least one section of the configuration uses V.11 interfaces of the QTN.
All QTNs or equivalent components (SSTK-1 or SISA-K3/T modules) included in the
configuration should be set to the same value (all ON or all OFF).
Active interface
Selection of the active interface.
A
B

4-70

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-46:

Selecting the 64-k transmission channel for the Q-signal

Interface A
Operating mode
Defines the data channel to be used for Q transmission to the radio side.
RFCOH (DSC1)
The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the RFCOH.
SOH (DSC1)
The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the SOH.
Normal operation: Transmission in DSC1.
Interface B
Operating mode
Defines the data channel to be used for Q transmission to the line side.
External contradirectional
The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in an external contradirectional 64 kbit/s DSC.
External codirectional
The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in an external codirectional 64 kbit/s DSC.
RFCOH (DSC1)
The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the RFCOH.
SOH (DSC1)
The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the SOH.
Normal operation: Transmission in DSC1.

RF/160 OI

4-71

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.7 ECC Gateway module


ECC Gateway
Management
Configuration
ECC

Key word 4-47:

Configuring the ECC Gateway Module

General
NOTE:
For more detailed information on the different operating modes, please refer to the documents "SISADCN", Doc. no.: 62.1013.600.05-A001 and "SISA in microwave radio technology", Ident no. AN00042537.
Indication LAN alarm ON
If this box is check-marked, a "No LAN connection" alarm is displayed.
West
Indication ECC alarm ON
If this box is check-marked, the "ECC transmission disturbed" alarm is activated on the West or
East side.

4-72

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Operating mode
Defines the data channel to be used for transmitting the Q-channel.
DCC
The Q-channel in transmitted in the DCC (DCCR or DCCM).
64k-RFCOH (DSC1)
The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the RFCOH.
64k-SOH (DSC1)
The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the SOH.
Setting DCC
Utilization of transmission channels (display)
OP
Operating channel OP
PR
Protection channel PR
Selection DCC
Utilization of service channels (display)
DCCR
Utilization of the DCC in the RSOH (D1-D3) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.
DCCM
Utilization of the DCC in the MSOH (D4-D12) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.

RF/160 OI

4-73

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.8 ECC Gateway module - addresses


ECC Gateway
Management
Configuration
Adresses
Operating mode
Q3P-SISA-V
The local NE is connected to the SOA via the LAN interface. Remote NEs are
connected to the local NE via the ECC and can therefore also be controlled by the
SOA. For this purpose, the OSI protocol stack is used (SISA-O).
Q3I-SISA-V
The local NE is connected via the LAN interface to the SOA and can be controlled by
the latter. For this purpose, the TCP/IP protocol stack is used (SISA-I).
QD2-SISA-V
The NE includes a SISA-V used for communication with further NEs. These NEs are
connected to SISA-V via the ECC. The NE itself acts as a QD2 Slave, i.e. it is
connected to a RS485 bus.
IP-SISA-V
The NE includes a SISA-V used for communication with further NEs. These NEs are
connected to SISA-V via the ECC. The NE itself is directly connected to the SOA via
the LAN interface. For this purpose, the TCP/IP protocol stack is used (SISA-I).
QD2 via SISA-V
The NE is connected via the ECC to a NE with SISA-V operated in the QD2-SISA-V
mode. This operating mode is provided for cases where other SISA transport paths to
a remote NE do not exist. Up to 29 NEs can be connected via SISA-V. The NEs are
identified by their SISA node number. Using the SISA-V Gateway address, the NE is
selected to which the remote NE shall set up a connection.
IP-via-SISA-V
The NE is connected via the ECC to an NE with SISA-V operated in the IP-SISA-V
mode. This operating mode is provided for cases where other SISA transport paths to
a remote NE do not exist. Up to 29 NEs can be connected via SISA-V. The NEs are
identified by their SISA node number. Using the SISA-V Gateway address, the NE is
selected to which the remote NE shall set up a connection.

4-74

SOA
SISA-O

LAN

Local NE
Q3p-SISA-V

ECC

Remote NE
Q3p-SISA-V

SOA
SISA-O

LAN

Local NE
Q3p-SISA-V

RS485

Local NE
QD2-SISA-V

SOA
SISA-I

LAN

Local NE
Q3I-SISA-V

SOA
SISA-I

LAN

Local NE
IP-SISA-V

ECC

Remote NE
IP-via-SISA-V

ECC

Remote NE
QD2-via-SISA-V

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.8.1 Q3p-SISA-V operating mode

Internet addresses
An Internet address of a network management system is required for the Q3p interface. When using a
second, i.e. redundant computer, the Internet address of the latter must also be communicated to the NE.
The Internet address is 32 bits long and is composed of four 8-bit sections separated by dots. Each 8-bit
section represents 256 numbers (0 to 255).
SOA
Internet address of a network management computer.
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
red. SOA
Internet address of a redundant network management computer.
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

RF/160 OI

4-75

Configuration

Operating Instructions

TCP/IP connection to network element


It is possible to log on to a network element via TCP. For this purpose the NE is assigned an Internet
address composed of the IP address, the IP subnet mask as well as the IP address of a default router.
IP address
Unambiguous IP address of the network element within a network (Internet/Intranet)
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Subnet mask
Mask for part of the IP address
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Default Gateway
IP address of the default router
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
TSAP IDs
The Transport Service Access Point Identification (TSAP ID) is part of the transport address for the OSI
layer 4 (transport layer).
The transport layer offers protected, transparent data transmission between terminals. It also offers endto-end error monitoring, sequentialization of data and flux control.
The TSAP ID is 16 bits long and is composed of two 8-bit section separated by a dot. Each 8-bit section
represents 256 numbers (0 to 255). On address assignment, please note that the same address must not
be used several times.
QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V)
SISA node no.
SISA node no. of the NE for the QD2 Master.
0...254
NE connect. no. (SOA)
Access no. of the NE for SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master.
0...254
NE connect. no. (red. SOA)
Access no. of the NE for the redundant SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master.
0...254

4-76

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Layer-3 addresses
The Layer-3 address (OSI-L3 address) is required for setting up a transmission link between the SOA and
NE, for the remote logon from one NE to another and for OSI routing. The OSI-L3 address is also referred
to as NSAP (Network Service Access Point).
In most cases of application, the OSI-L3 address of the NE is generated automatically from the NE
manufacturing no. (automatic mode). In this case, further settings in the "Layer-3 addresses" dialog are
not necessary.
If the NE shall be operated in third-party networks, it may be necessary to adjust an OSI-L3 address
manually (manual mode). In order to avoid malfunctions, both the addressing scheme and the individual
addresses must be provided and carefully administered by the network operator. OSI Layer-3 addresses
should comply with the ISO 8348/Add.2 standard.
Mode
automatic
Automatic address assignment adjusted.
manual
Manual address assignment adjusted.
Routing level
A Routing Domain is divided up into individual areas.
An End System (ES) can only transmit or receive messages. The SOA can be an ES. The network
elements are Intermediate Systems (IS) which are also appropriate to pass on messages (routing
function).
A Level-1 router can route only within its own area. If a Level-1 router receives a message determined for
another area, this message is passed on to the nearest Level-2 router. If there is no Level-2 router in the
own area, the message is discarded.
A Level-2 router does not only know the IS and ES of its own area but als the Level-2 routers located in
the other areas. If a message is determined for another area, it is passed on by the Level-2 router of the
source area to the Level-2 router of the destination area (if necessary via several Level-2 routers).
An area can also include several Level-2 routers. Level-2 routing between Level-2 routers is possible only
if the corresponding Level-2 routers are directly interconnected (i.e. no via Level-1 routers).
IS type
Level 1
Level-1 router
Level 2
Level-2 router

RF/160 OI

4-77

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Structure of the OSI Layer-3 address


The OSI Layer-3 address is composed of three parts, i.e. the Area address, System ID and NSAP
selector.
The Area address is used to address the sub-network to which the NE belongs.
In the example below, addresses of the "ANSI NSAP address format" are used (AFI 39, IDI=ISO
DCC=840F [USA], DFI=80).
Area address: 39000080000000000000000000
The second part of the address (System ID) represents an unambiguous System Identifier which is
unique in the entire Routing Domain.
Example: 96F100120000
In the hexadecimal format, this address corresponds to Internet address "150.248.0.18".
The third part of the address is the NSAP selector. It selects the transport layer as Layer-3 user. It is
always 01.
On activation of the "manual" Layer-3 addressing mode, the automatic address assignment is excluded
from the manufacturing number. In this case, a remote logon from the Operator Terminal is usually no
longer possible (only local logon).
Length NSAP
4...20
Length Sys ID
1...8
NSAP NE
NSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format
NSAP NE (add.)
NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format
NSAP SOA
NSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format
NSAP SOA (red.)
NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format

4-78

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.8.2 Q3I-SISA-V operating mode

Internet addresses
For the TCP/IP interface, the Internet address of a network management computer is required. If a
redundant computer is available, its address must also be known to the NE.
The Internet address has a length of 32 bits and is composed of four 8-bit sections separated by dots.
Each 8-bit section represents 256 numbers (0 to 255).
SOA
Internet address of a network mangement computer
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Red. SOA
Internet address of a redundant network management computer
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

RF/160 OI

4-79

Configuration

Operating Instructions

TCP/IP connection to the network element


IP address
Unambiguous IP address of the NE in a network (Internet/Intranet)
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Subnet mask
Mask for part of the IP address
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Default Gateway
IP address of the default router
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
TSAP IDs
QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V)
SISA node no.
SISA node no. of the NE for the QD2 Master
0...254
NE access no. (SOA)
Access no. of the NE for SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master
0...254
NE access no. (red. SOA)
Access no. of the NE for the redundant SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master
0...254
Layer-3 addresses
Mode
Automatic
Automatic address assignment adjusted.
Manual
Manual address assignment adjusted.
IS type
Level 1
Level-1 router
Level 2
Level-2 router
Length NSAP
4...20
Length Sys ID
1...8
NSAP NE
NSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format
NSAP NE (add.)
NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format
NSAP SOA
NSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format
NSAP SOA (Red.)
NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format

4-80

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.8.3 QD2-SISA-V operating mode

TCP/IP connection to network element


IP address
Unambiguous IP address of the NE within a network (Internet/Intranet)
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Subnet mask
Mask for part of the IP address
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Default Gateway
IP address of the default router
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

RF/160 OI

4-81

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Operating mode
The SISA node no. for VMP01 corresponds to the SISA node no. of the Master in the Q3P via OSI, Q3P
via TCP/IP and QD2 via SISA-V modes. However, it can also differ from it due to this setting possibility.
SISA node no. for VMP01
1...30
Layer-3 addresses
Mode
Automatic
Automatic address assignment adjusted.
Manual
Manual address assignment adjusted.
IS type
Level 1
Level-1 router
Level 2
Level-2 router
Length NSAP
4...20
Length Sys ID
1...8
NSAP NE
NSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format
NSAP NE (add.)
NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format
NSAP SOA
NSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format
NSAP SOA (Red.)
NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format

4-82

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.8.4 IP-SISA-V operating mode

TCP/IP connection to the network element


IP address
Unambiguous IP address of the NE in a network (Internet/Intranet)
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Subnet mask
Mask for part of the IP address
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Default Gateway
IP address of the default router
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Internet addresses
For the TCP/IP interface, the Internet address of a network management computer is required. If a
redundant computer is available, its address must also be known to the NE.
The Internet address has a length of 32 bits and is composed of four 8-bit sections separated by dots.
Each 8-bit section represents 256 numbers (0 to 255).

RF/160 OI

4-83

Configuration

Operating Instructions
SOA
Internet address of a network mangement computer
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Red. SOA
Internet address of a redundant network management computer
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

TSAP IDs
The Transport Service Access Point Identification (TSAP ID) is part of the transport address for the OSI
layer 4 (transport layer).
The transport layer offers protected, transparent data transmission between terminals. It also offers endto-end error monitoring, sequentialization of data and flux control.
The TSAP ID is 16 bits long and is composed of two 8-bit section separated by a dot. Each 8-bit section
represents 256 numbers (0 to 255). On address assignment, please note that the same address must not
be used several times.
QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V)
NE access no. (SOA)
Access no. of the NE for SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master
0...254
NE access no. (red. SOA)
Access no. of the NE for the redundant SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master
0...254
Operating mode
The SISA node no. for VMP01 corresponds to the SISA node no. of the Master in the Q3P SISA-V, Q3I
SISA-V, QD2 via SISA-V and IP via SISA-V modes. However, it can also differ from it due to this setting
possibility.
SISA node no. for VMP01
1...30
Layer-3 addresses
Mode
Automatic
Automatic address assignment adjusted.
Manual
Manual address assignment adjusted.
IS type
Level 1
Level-1 router
Level 2
Level-2 router
Length NSAP
4...20
Length Sys ID
1...8
NSAP NE
NSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format
NSAP NE (add.)
NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format
NSAP SOA
NSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format
NSAP SOA (Red.)
NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format
4-84

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.8.5 QD2-via-SISA-V and IP-via-SISA-V operating modes

TCP/IP connection to the network element


IP address
Unambiguous IP address of the NE in a network (Internet/Intranet)
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Subnet mask
Mask for part of the IP address
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Default Gateway
IP address of the default router
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

RF/160 OI

4-85

Configuration

Operating Instructions

SISA-V Gateway address


The SISA-V Gateway address is used to set up the control connection to remote NEs. The remote NE
communicates with the Gateway NE via the ECC. The address used is the OSI address (see RID or
nameplate of subrack).
SISA-V Gateway address
SISA-V Gateway address in hexadecimal format.
TSAP IDs
QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V)
SISA node no.
SISA node no. of the NE for the QD2 Agent or SISA-V.
0...254
Layer-3 addresses
Mode
Automatic
Automatic address assignment adjusted
Manual
Manual address assignment adjusted
IS type
Level 1
Level-1 router
Level 2
Level-2 router
Length of NSAP
4...20
Length of Sys ID
1...8
NSAP NE
NSAP of the NE displayed in hexadecimal form
NSAP NE (add.)
NSAP of the additional NE displayed in hexadecimal form
NSAP SOA
NSAP of SOA displayed in hexadecimal form
NSAP SOA (red.)
NSAP of redundant SOA displayed in hexadecimal form

4-86

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.9 ECC Gateway Module - IP Routing


ECC Gateway
Administration
Configuration
IP routing
IP routing table
An IP router is used to interconnect several IP sub-networks. The transfer of an IP packet based on the IP
destination address is referred to as IP routing. The router fulfills the task of passing on an incoming IP
packet within a compound of several networks in an optimum way. For this purpose, it receives a table
containing all data relevant for passing on IP packets received. This table is referred to as Routing Table.
Position
Position of routing entry in the table. Up to ten entries are possible. If the table is empty, it
contains no entries.
Destination
IP address of the route destination.
The network destination can be a sub-network or a computer (host). If the destination is a subnetwork, this column displays the sub-network ID of the destination sub-network. If the network
destination is a computer, this column displays the IP address of the destination computer.
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Gateway
IP address of the Gateway located on the way to the route destination.
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Netmask
Mask for part of the IP address of the route destination. The sub-netmask is used to determine
the sub-network in which a host is located.
0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255
Active
If this box is check-marked, the associated route is active (indicated in the routing table),
otherwise it is inactive (contained in the MDB only).
To add a route
Click any line in the table to add a route. Then choose the 'Add' button. A window appears and
requests you to enter the IP addresses of the route to be added. If the line is highlighted, the
new route is added above the corresponding line, otherwise it will be added below it.
To delete a route
Select the route to be deleted by clicking it in the table. Then choose the 'Delete' button. The
highlighted line disappears and all entries below it will move up by one position.
To edit a route
Select the route to be edited by clicking it in the table. Then choose the 'Edit' button. A window
appears and requests you to enter the IP addresses of the route to be modified.

RF/160 OI

4-87

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.10 SOH Access Module

SOH access
Management
Configuration

General
Check data continuously
The data are continuously updated.
SOH extension equipped
Indicates whether the SOH extension module is available/not available. The SOH extension
module provides access to additional bytes (E2, DCCR and DCCM) in the SOH.

4-88

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-48:

Selecting the 2048 k WSC interface in the SOH

WSC West interface


Balanced
Indicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 120
at a Sub-D connector.
Coaxial
Indicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 75
at a 1.6/5.6 connector.
WSC East interface
Balanced
Indicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 120
at the Sub-D connector.
Coaxial
Indicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 75
at the 1.6/5.6 connector.
Backplane version
Indicates the installed backplane version.
A01...A16
Key word 4-49:

DPU STM-1 address

DPU address
Indicates the addresses of the DPUs whose radio channel is used to transmit the respective
2048 kbit/s service channel.
0 = no DPU connected
1...16=DPU OP1...OP16, 17=DPU PR1, 18=DPU PR2
OP East
1...18
PR East
1...18
OP West
1...18
PR West
1...18

RF/160 OI

4-89

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-50:

Selecting 4x64k service channels West in the SOH

DSC West
DSC1...DSC4
Activation of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4.
DSC1 interface
external
Access to an external 64 kbit/s service channel.
QTN
The QTN signal is transmitted in the DSC1.
Key word 4-51:

Selecting RPS options for 4x64 k West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching


Selectable protection switching options:
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
Tx 1+0
The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
1+1
The service channels are protected.
4-90

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration
Key word 4-52:

Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k West in the SOH

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Send LA Tx in case of LOS
The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-91

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-53:

Selecting 4x64k service channels East in the SOH

DSC East
DSC1...DSC4
Activation of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4.
DSC1 interface
external
Access to an external 64 kbit/s service channel.
QTN2
The QTN signal is transmitted in DSC1.
Channel redundancy switching
Selectable protection switching options:
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
Tx 1+0
The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
1+1
The service channels are protected.

4-92

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration
Key word 4-54:

Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k East in the SOH

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Send LA Tx in case of LOS
The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-93

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-55:

Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH

WSC West
WSC
None
No WSC selected.
OP
Transmission in the operating channel. 1+0 or 1+1.
OP+PR
Independent transmission in operating and protection channel. Both channels are unprotected.
Channel redundancy switching
Selectable protection switching options:
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The Rx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).
Tx 1+0
The Tx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).
1+1
The service channel is protected.

4-94

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-56:

Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Send LA Tx in case of LOS
The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-95

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-57:

Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH

WSC East
WSC
None
No WSC selected.
OP
Transmission in the operating channel. 1+0 or 1+1.
OP+PR
Independent transmission in operating and protection channel. Both channels are unprotected.
Channel redundancy switching
Selectable protection switching options:
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The Rx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).
Tx 1+0
The Tx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).
1+1
The service channel is protected.
4-96

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-58:

Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Send LA Tx in case of LOS
The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-97

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-59:

Occupying 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH

E1 West
E1 equipped
The E1 byte is used.
E1 interface
EOW#1
The E1 byte is used for a EOW module #1.
external
The E1 byte is used for an external service channel.
Key word 4-60:

Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching


Selectable protection switching options:
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).
Tx 1+0
The service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission).
1+1
The service channels are protected.

4-98

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-61:

Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-99

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-62:

Occupying 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH

E1 East
E1 equipped
The E1 byte is used.
E1 interface
EOW#1
The E1 byte is used for EOW module #1.
external
The E1 byte is used for an external service channel.
Key word 4-63:

Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching


Selectable protection switching options:
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
Tx 1+0
The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
1+1
The service channels are protected.
4-100

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-64:

Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-101

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-65:

Occupying 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH

F1 West
F1 equipped
The F1 byte is used.
E1 interface
EOW#2
The F1 byte is used for EOW module #2.
external
The F1 byte is used for an external service channel.
Key word 4-66:

Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching


Selectable protection switching options:
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
Tx 1+0
The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
1+1
The service channels are protected.
4-102

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-67:

Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-103

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-68:

Occupying 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH

F1 East
F1 equipped
The F1 byte is used.
E1 interface
EOW#2
The F1 byte is used for EOW module #2.
external
The F1 byte is used for an external service channel.
Key word 4-69:

Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching


Selectable protection switching options:
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
Tx 1+0
The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
1+1
The service channels are protected.

4-104

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-70:

Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-105

Configuration

4.9.10.1

Operating Instructions

SOH wayside interface 75


Key word 4-71:

Setting SOH wayside interface 75

Jumper positions on the SOH Access Module for adjusting the 75 operating mode.

X100
X100

X100
X401

X100
X101

X100
X403

X100
X102

X100
X404

X100
X104

X100
X405

Fig. 4-9:

4-106

SOH Access Module Interface 75

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

4.9.10.2

Configuration

SOH wayside interface 120


Key word 4-72:

Setting SOH wayside interface 120

Jumper positions on the SOH Access Module for adjusting the 120 operating mode.

8
X100
X401

X100
X101

X100
X403

X100
X102

X100
X404

X100
X104

X100
X405

Fig. 4-10:

RF/160 OI

X100
X100

SOH Access Module Interface 120

4-107

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.11 SOH Extension Module

SOH extension
Management
Configuration

Key word 4-73:

Occupying 64-k service channel D1 West in the SOH

D1 West
Channel
Only internal service channels.
DCCR
Use of the DCC in the RSOH (D1 to D3) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.
Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU.
DCCM
Use of the DCC in the MSOH (D4 to D12) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.
Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU.
None
No service channel selected.

4-108

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-74:

Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching


Selectable protection switching options:
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The service channels on the Rx side are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
Tx 1+0
The service channels on the Tx side are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
1+1
The service channels are protected.

Key word 4-75:

RF/160 OI

Selecting the alarm display for DCC service channel West in the SOH

4-109

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-76:

Occupying the DCC service channel East in the SOH

D1 East
Channel
Only internal service channels.
DCCR
Use of the DCC in the RSOH (D1 to D3) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.
Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU.
DCCM
Use of the DCC in the MSOH (D4 to D12) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.
Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU.
None
No service channel selected.

4-110

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Channel redundancy switching


Selectable protection switching options:
1+0
No protection of the service channel signal.
Rx 1+0
The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
Tx 1+0
The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal
transmission).
1+1
The service channels are protected.

Key word 4-77:

RF/160 OI

Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel East in the SOH

4-111

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-78:

Occupying 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH

E2 West
Key word 4-79:

Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH

E2
The E2 service channel is available at the external interface (V.11).
none
No service channel E2 selected.
PR
Transmission in the protection channel.
OP
Transmission in the operating channel.
OP+PR
Transmission in the operating and protection channel.

Key word 4-80:

Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-112

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-81:

Occupying 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH

E2 East

Key word 4-82:

Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH

E2
The E2 service channel is available at the external interface (V.11).
none
No service channel E2 selected.
PR
Transmissin in the protection channel.
OP
Transmission in the operating channel.
OP+PR
Transmission in the operating and protection channel.
Key word 4-83:

Selecting the alarm display for 64-k serv. channel E2 West in the SOH

Tx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.
Rx direction
Send AIS in case of LOS
The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected.
Send AIS if AIS is received
The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-113

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.12 SISA-0/N
SISA0-N
Management
Configuration

Terminal
Redundancy
Determines the protection switching mode of the system. This setting is decisive for the correct
mapping of the QD2 information model onto functional groups.
Modifications become active only after a SISA-0/N reset.
In the regenerator mode (two terminals mounted back to back) with one OHAU, the operating mode
must be adjusted both in the WEST terminal and EAST terminal.
none
No protection selected; operating mode N+0.
Equipment protection
Equipment protection (1+1 HSB) with one DPU STM-1 A002.
Line protection (1xDPU, 2x radio w/o occasional traffic)
1+1 line protection switching with only one DPU STM-1 A002.
Occasional traffic (OT) and XPIC operation are not possible.
Line protection (n+m w/o occasional traffic)
Line protection switching without occasional traffic;
with RPSC/RPSI.
Line protection (n+m with occasional traffic)
Line protection switching with occasional traffic;
with RPSC/RPSI.

4-114

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.13 SISA-K/R

SISA-0

Display

RF/160 OI

4-115

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Settings
Configuration
NOTE:
For detailed information on the configuration, please refer to the "SISA in microwave radio" Operator
Manual, Ident. no. AN 00042537.

Config
OSI 3 address
This is the address of the SISA bus. If the address is 0, SISA-K/R does not respond to calls
from the higher-order master element.
0...30
W/E Switch Address
This value specifies the switchover address for the polling process. The selected value defines
the network address up which the SISA-KR bus master is polling. Address n+1 and higher
addresses are then polled by bus master East. Value 0 indicates that all network elements
connected are polled by bus master East, while value 30 indicates that all elements are polled by
bus master West.
0...30

4-116

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Port A
Protocol Primary (Master)
Mode OSI 1
RS 485
V.11/Y
V.11/X.24
G.703
G.703-RF
G.703-G.703
G.703-V.11
V.11-G.703
V.11-V.11
Bit Rate
The following transmission rates can be selected:
1.2 kbit/s
2.4 kbit/s
4.8 kbit/s
9.6 kbit/s
19.2 kbit/s
64 kbit/s
Operat. Mode
Bus
Point/Point
Ring
Doubling
Router
Two way
Interface
LCN
DCN
Timeout Primary
Standard
Extended

RF/160 OI

4-117

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Delay Primary
3...5 ms
1...3 ms
Priority Cycle
On
Off

Poll Cycle
Standard
Optimized
UI Interval
1s
2.5 s
5s
7.5 s

4-118

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Port D
Protocol Secondary (Slave)
Mode OSI 1
RS 485
V.11/Y
V.11/X.24
G.703
G.703-RF
G.703-G.703
G.703-V.11
V.11-G.703
V.11-V.11
Bit Rate
The following transmission rates can be selected.
1.2 kbit/s
2.4 kbit/s
4.8 kbit/s
9.6 kbit/s
19.2 kbit/s
64 kbit/s
Operat. Mode
Bus
Point/Point
Ring
Doubling
Interface
LCN
DCN

RF/160 OI

4-119

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Port F
Protocol Secondary (Slave)
Mode OSI 1
RS232
Bit Rate
9600
19.2 k
Operat. Mode
Point/Point
Parity
Unkown
None
Even
Odd
Byte Distance
Unkown
5 ms
10 ms
15 ms
20 ms

4-120

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Selection for Port A / Port D:


When used together with the QTN module, two port characteristics are relevant:
Microwave radio interface for SISA-K/R interface points to QTN:
Mode OSI 1:
Bit rate:
Operating mode:
Interface:
Timeout Primary:

G.703-RF (even if V.11 interface of QTN is used)


64 kbit/s
Bus (bus or automatic ring configurations)
Ring (SISA-K-controlled rings)
DCN
Standard (configurations up to 8 stations)
Extended (configurations with more than 8 stations)

Local interface for SISA-K/R connected to the local QD2int (pseudo) bus:
Mode OSI 1:
Bit rate:
Operating mode:
Interface:
Timeout Primary:

RS485
64 kbit/s
Bus
LCN
Standard (available only at port A)

Depending on the QTN operating mode, the following settings should be implemented:
1a) QTN
Bus service, head station
Automatic ring, ring start
SISA-K-controlled ring, master West
SISA-K-controlled ring, master East
1b) SISA-K/R
A set to Microwave radio interface
D set to Local interface
2a) QTN
Bus service, relay/terminal station
Automatic ring, ring member
SISA-K-controlled ring, slave
2b) SISA-K/R
A set to Local interface
D set to Microwave radio interface

RF/160 OI

4-121

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.14 XQI
The XQI application permits station alarms to be passed on to the TMN system.
For this purpose, the SISA-0/N module provides eight alarm contacts at connector X117 of an OHAU.
These correspond to ME1 channels 1 to 8 in the XQI. These alarm inputs are floating inputs for relay
contacts (NO or NC), door contacts etc..
ME1 channels 9 to 32 are not supported.

ME
These eight inputs are configurable in ME-1.

4-122

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

ME1

Administration
Configuration

Each of the eight inputs can be selected separately.


If a normally open contact (NO) (alarm with contact open) is to be monitored, the alarm polarity must be
Active high.
If a normally closed contact (NC) (alarm with contact closed) is to be monitored, the alarm polarity must
be Active Low.

RF/160 OI

4-123

Configuration

Operating Instructions

This page hasbeen left blankfor editorial reasons.

4-124

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alignment

5 Alignment
5.1

Introduction

To permit hitless protection switching, the system must be aligned. The alignment process compensates
the different delays of all channels. Thus, the switch itself receives synchronous data and can switch over
from one side to the other without any loss of sync. The reference used for calculating the delay is always
PR1. The present chapter describes how to align the entire system and how individual channels can be
re-aligned. The alignment of a hot standby system will be described at the end of the chapter.
Important:
When opening the window for the first time, errors may be displayed (since the system has not yet
been aligned, there will probably be alignment errors). The alignment must be performed using STM-1
signals without AIS. Otherwise this process will be interrupted. Ensure that no channel is injecting or
receiving an AIS signal. Also ensure that the channels are not blocked. For the alignment process, the
"Automatic" setting option for protection switching must be active for all operating channels. Protection
channels must be sent to "Occasional traffic (OT) - loose" or "No occasional traffic (OT)".
After an alignment or test process, the protection switching configuration of the system must be
checked, because operating channels might be set to "Automatic off".

5.2

Display

Two different display modes are available, i.e. a graphical and a tabular display. Using the "Display"
menu item, it is possible to switch over between these two display modes.

Both displays are subject to the following rules:

blue = transmit-side and receive-side protection switching link

green = active transmission (OP or PR)

red = faulty transmission

white = input box

RF/160 OI

5-1

Alignment

Operating Instructions

Graphical display
The graphical display shows the individual transmission links sorted according to operating and protection
channels. The transmit side (far end) is depicted on the left, the receive side with the local port on the
right side.
Depending on the system expansion, two N to 1 multiplexers (RPS-C, Radio Protection Switching) can be
used to switch the operating channels to one protection channels. This is indicated by the vertical
connecting lines and colors. A mark at the crossing point shows the multiplexer switching status.
If a channel is available, the alarm data are displayed in the first column. Otherwise, the background
remains dark grey.
Tabular display
The tabular display of the ali